Verner's law in Italy, an essay in the history of the Indo-European sibilants

PA

Digitized by Microsoft®

Digitized by Microsoft®

This book was digitized by Microsoft Corporation in

cooperation with Corneii University Libraries, 2007.

You may use and print this copy in iimited quantity

for your personai purposes, but may not distribute or

provide access to it (or modified or partiai versions of it)

for revenue-generating or other commerciai purposes.

Digitized by Microsoft®

VERNER'S LAW IN ITALY

Digitized by Microsoft®

Digitized by Microsoft®

VEENEK'S LAW IN ITALY

AN ESSAY

IN THE HISTORY OP

THE INDO-EUEOPEAN SIBILANTS

R. SEYMOUR CONWAY, B.A.

FOUNDATION SCHOLAK OF GONVILLE AND CAIUS COLLEGE, CAMBRIDQE,

WADDINGTON CLASSICAL SCHOLAB IN THE UNIVEESITY OF CAMBKIDGE,

EXHIBITIONEB IN LATIN IN THE UNIVEESITY OF LONDON,

WITH A

DIALECT MAP OF ITALY

EFHEAWOOD, B.A., F.R.G.S.

LONDON
TRUBNER AND CO., LUDGATE HILL

Digitized i^Siprosoft®
®

/l-339/f

COhNELL^N

\J% dHf\i\ % /

ffismftrilige:

PRINTED BY C. J. CLAY, M.A. ANE SONS,
AT THE DNIVEBSIXY PRESS.

Digitized by Microsoft®

PBAECEPTOEIBUS MEIS
ET INTEB EOS POTISSIMUM

GULIELMO GEORGIO RUSHBROOKE

LITEEAEUM HUMANIOEUM AC LINGUAE SANSCEITICAE

AD SCHOLAM OIVITATIS LONDINENSIS

EBVEEENDO DOCTOEI

HUNC QUEMCUNQUE FASCIGULUM

D. D. D.

Digitized by Microsoft®

Pj^ Cornell University
BB Library

r^^^

The original of tliis book is in
tlie Cornell University Library.

There are no known copyright restrictions in
the United States on the use of the text.

http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924021622943

■^ Digitized by Microsoft®

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE

Prefatory Note viii

Introduction. (First principles : scope of the Essay : title :

results hitherto accepted : results of the Essay.) §§ 1 — 5 . 1

I. The Phonetic relation op S and B. (Nature of the
change oi Sto B: its physiological and historical causes :
note on s and ch in Old Church Slavonic : s before nasals
and other consonants in Latin.) §§ 6 — 13 ... 7

II. S between vowels in Umbrian. (Chronology of the Iguvine
tables : accent in Oscan and Umbrian : discussion of the
Umbrian evidence : eso- or esso- in Italic?) §§14 — 27 . 18

III. S BETWEEN vowels IN OscAN. (Extent of the Oscan evi-

dence : its discussion : tt or ss in Oscan and pro-ethnic
Italic ? Note on Bartholomae's theory.) §§ 28—30 . 37

IV. Rhotacism in the Minor Italic Dialects. (Enumeration :

Picentine : Marruoinian : Sabine : Pelignian : Marsian :
Volscian: Faliscan: classification: Mr Heawood's map.)
§§ 31—39 . . . . 45

V. S between vowels in Latin.

A. Introductory Considerations. (Aspect of the ques-
tion : special characteristics of the change : borrowing :
date of rhotacism in Latin : the change of the Latin accent :
list of words : elimination of irrelevant examples.) §§ 40
—52 . . . . . 55

B. Evidence as to the causes op the change op S to

B. §§ 53—60 74

C. Evidence as to the change op accent. § 61 . . 83

Appendix.

A. The subsequent history op S between vowels in
Latin and Romance. §§ 62 — 66 . . . . 86

B. Final S in Aryan. §§ 67—74 . 94

C. Final S and B in Umbrian. §§ 75 — 77 . 107

D. The development op the Latin perfect. § 78 . 110

Index op Words cited D'g'feed /3y M/crosoft® 113

NOTE.

In the course of the following essay I have striven to be accurate in
acknowledging its obligations to my numerous teachers. In some places
however I may have unconsciously reproduced what I have heard or read,
— a mistake almost inevitable to those whose information is derived partly
from lectures and partly from books, — or in others equally unconsciously
I may be reproducing what I have not heard or read but what has been
already suggested, and accepted or refuted long ago. And further than
this, some of the principles on which my small superstructure is based
I may have regarded, perhaps prematurely, as the common property of
scholars and needing no formal acknowledgment. This is especially the
case with borrowings from the Orundriss der Vergleichenden Grammaiik.
To this references are generally given in specific points, but no number
of references could in the least express my sense of the debt which all
students of language owe to its distinguished author, Dr Karl Brugmann.
And I am anxious, in view of the one or two points in which I have ven-
tured to diifer from his authority, to acknowledge beforehand my share
in the stimulating influence his teaching has everywhere exerted on the
study of linguistic science.

In all that concerns Latin I owe very much to Dr Roby's lists of
parallel forms which have been constantly before me. The evidence in
Umbrian, Oscan and the Minor Dialects could hardly have been found
except in Biicheler's Umhrioa and Zv^taieflf's two handbooks, the Sylloge
Inscriptiomimi Oscarum, and the Iriscriptiones Italiae Mediae Dialeeticae.
Osthoff's Oeschickte des Perfects is of course indispensable, however much
one may differ from his conclusions.

The essay was written in March last as a dissertation for the Lan-
guage Section of the Classical Tripos, Part II, 1887, and has since been
thoroughly revised and enlarged by the Appendices. The last of these is
of course only printed as a suggestion.

(JONVILLE AND CaIUS COLLEGE,

CAMBKiriQE, September, 1887.

Digitized by Microsoft®

VEKNER'S LAW IN ITALY.

INTRODUCTION.

1. The attempt made in the following essay to reduce to
rule a series of phenomena hitherto neglected or First princi-
unnoticed is one which, by this time, hardly needs -P'^*-
an apology even in England. It is now generally admitted
that the modern view of phonetic change is fully justified by
its results. The more or less a priori considerations by which
its supporters at first sought to defend it were of a kind whose
convincing power varies greatly with different minds and even
with the same mind at different times; but the mass of evi-
dence they have since accumulated is surely sufficient to
establish at least this principle, that sound-change, so far as
we know it historically, whatever possibilities we may reserve
for it in the abstract, happens only in accordance with certain
definite sequences which we call Phonetic Laws ; — to establish
it, that is, as far as any doctrine can be by purely inductive
evidence, a basis, however, which has proved sufficient for the
whole fabric of Natural Science. And we may perhaps notice
that the power of prediction, which is popularly regarded
as the crucial test of all scientific theories, may be said in a
sense to have been exercised successfully on behalf of the new
principles of the Science of Language. Fresh instances occur
every day of stray words that have at length been brought
home to their correlatives in other languages after having for
long resisted identification through some difficult change of
form or meaning, simp^f/ifficajuffiBc/w&ftfeave been led to expect,
C. 1

2 INTRODUCTION. § 2.

that is, we have predicted, that the form which the original
sound would take in that language was the one which after-
wards has been recognised in this particular word. Conversely,
when we know precisely what origin or origins a particular
group of sounds existing in any word can have in the language
to which it belongs, and precisely what their correlatives are
in kindred languages, our field of search for cognates is im-
mensely narrowed, and if they have survived, always provided
our phonetic generalisations are correctly made, they are sure
to be sooner or later discovered.

2. The endeavour therefore to arrive at further generali-
Scope of tlie satioDS of this kind, whether in any particular
^^'"^V- instance it succeed or fail, may be fairly regarded

as a legitimate method of work, and single explanations and
inferences, which while strictly in accordance with the rules
of sound-change that we have already recognised, might never-
theless, if advanced for their own sake, be considered over
fanciful or unduly emphasised, may perhaps claim a more
generous indulgence if they help in any way to throw light
on the possibility of such a result. And in this case, whether
the general rule is finally accepted in the form in which it
presents itself in this essay is a matter of small importance ;
I shall be more than content if I succeed in achievincr two
things; if I can render any clearer the probability that there
is some rule to be discovered, and any easier for more ex-
perienced hands the task of determining its final form. It is
in view of the first of these objects that I have endeavoured
to rearrange under a new method of grouping many classes of
facts already well known ; as for example in dealing with the
Latin changes, most of the words I have discussed will be
found somewhere in the collections of Roby, Corssen, Bruo--
mann, Stolz, or Mommsen' ; for the Romance languages I have
depended entirely on Diez's Grammatik der Romanischeii
Sprachen, except for Italian. My second and more important
object was to collect new evidence on the question where it

1 Boby's Latin Grammar, Vol. i. Corssen, Aussprache des Lat. Brugmann,
Grundriss. Stolz, Lat. Grammatik. Mommsen, Vnteritalischen Dialeltcn.
Digitized by Microsoft®

INTRODUCTION. § 3. 3

had not been sought before, — not at least with any approach
to exhaustiveness, — namely, in the various Italic dialects,
especially of course in Umbrian and Oscan. This I have en-
deavoured to carry out as thoroughly as possible, that is in such
a way as to give with equal fullness what evidence there is on
both sides, against, as well as in favour of the conclusions which
commend themselves to me.

3. The title ' Vomer's Law in Italy ' suggests the origin of
the enquiry undertaken in what follows. The appa-
rent irregularities of the change of s to r in the
Teutonic languages were explained by Verner as due to differ-
ence of accent in the different words ; the Latin accent we know
to have prevailingly the same exspiratory character as the
Teutonic ; and an attempt to apply Vomer's method of expla-
nation to the Latin irregularities led me to the conclusion that
the exceptions to the rule were governed by a new set of special
conditions closely analogous to those which determine the
change of s to r in Sanskrit. My impression that in Latin it
was largely governed by accent was strengthened by the paral-
lelism of one or two of the Umbrian forms, and this naturally
demanded a detailed investigation '. The Appendix on the
history of s in Aryan and Romance is really a necessary piece
of evidence only separated for convenience. The change of s to
r at the end of words in later Umbrian is discussed in the

^ In speaking of tlie title I may perhaps deprecate an objection 'that
Verner'sljaw does not hold in the Italic languages for the other spirants (/)
and therefore presuma,bly not for the sibilants.' If no positive evidence were to
be had on one side or the other this a priori argument might be allowed some
weight, but it can hardly count for much as balanced against such evidence.
Besides it is clearly unscientific to demand that any particular phonetic cause
shall have exactly the same apparent effect in all the languages in which it has
any effect at all: it is, e.g. no evidence against the Joss of original cr between
vowels at some period in the history of the Greek spoken in Attica, that in
Laooniau every a whether original or hysterogen equally fell away; yet Attic
and Laconian in other respects are obviously far more closely related than
Italic and Teutonic. And, after all, in the still confused state of our knowledge
of the history of the aspirates in Italic (v. Br. Gds. § 389 Anm. which appears
to be a mere slip) it would need considerable boldness to assert that something
analogous to Verner's Law had never been in operation at some period of their
development. Digitized by Microsoft®

1—2

4 INTRODUCTION. § 4.

same place, as the essay is primarily concerned only with
Medial Rhotacism in Italic.

4. Before concluding this introduction by a statement of
Results hither- tte ' laws ' I shall endeavour to justify in the follow-
to accepted. ^Qg chapters, it will be convenient to review our
present state of knowledge on the subject.

The rule for Latin that s became r between two vowels has
a fairly large number of exceptions ; the only
methods of explaining them hitherto, so far as I
know, have been to treat them as borrowed words, to suppose
s reduced from an original ss, or to assume that the word first
came into use after the rhotacism had ceased. These of course
must still hold good wherever they can be proved, and the last
may be our only resource, provisionally, where we can detect
no other variation in the phonetic history of the sound, but we
are not committing any inconsistency in rejecting it if a more
probable cause suggests itself. Moreover there are a certain
number of words for which these assumptions are not merely
baseless, but almost impossible, as ndser, which Stolz^ mentions
with one or two others, while in the Grundriss^ they are passed
over in silence. But a glance at the list of such words given
on p. 74 below will shew that they are too numerous to be
neglected. In Umbrian again Breal notices asa as
the only exception to rhotacism between two vowels ;
Brugmann' following him, treats it either as a borrowing from
another dialect or as a 'graphische Altertlimlichkeit,' while even
Biicheler's* encyclopaedic observation has only detected three
other exceptions, the termination -asius, and the pronouns eso-
and pis-i. In reality, besides these examples, excluding words
in which there is any reason to suppose the loss of a consonant
before the s or an original ss, there are over a score of words in
the Iguvine Tables which shew s between vowels, aad several
well-known names of places in Umbria itself, one of which,
Pisaurum, is noticed by Roby, Vol. i. p. 60. In Oscan again
when it is written in Latin characters as in the Tabula Bantina,

1 Lilt. Gram. § 60. i. = § 569 Anm. 3.

3 ibid. •• Vnilrica, p. 184.

Digitized by Microsoft®

INTRODUCTION. § 5. 5

z is used not merely to denote the sound of the Oscan T, i.e. ts,
but as a variant of s between vowels — presumably to denote a
voiced s. s also occurs between vowels on the same inscriptions,
and so far as I know no one has suggested any reason for the
variation except the carelessness of the (much-enduring) stone-
mason. With regard to the changes in Aryan and Romance,
reasons for doubting the explanations hitherto suggested aie
given at the end of this essay. Finally the history of medial s
before nasals in Latin can hardly be considered settled'.

5. The conclusions I shall endeavour to justify are as
follows :

A. Medial s between vowels

Results of

1. Following an unaccented syllable ^ ^^"^'

u.. became voiced (z) in (i) pro-ethnic^ Italic, as
in *regezent, *foidezos,

and (ii) in Latin after the first change of
accent, as in *suez6rem;

j8. i. and further became r in Latin Umbrian and
other rhotacising dialects, as in Umbr.
benurent, tdderor, Lat. regerent, so-
roris,

ii. while it was kept in. Oscan and other non-
rhotacising dialects, as in Osc. angetuzet,
egmazum.

2. Following an accented syllable

a. was kept in all dialects, as in Umbr. ose
('anno'), Osc. eisuc-en, A6sernim, Lat.
nasus, miser, quaeso;

/8. except in Latin and Faliscan v^here it be-
came r even when following an accented
syllable, if it was (i) followed by i or u.

its use

1 Stolz, L. G. § 60. 2. Br. Grds. § 570.
A term of this sort is sa i?L«cb 'S^^^^ thaijittle apology need be made for

6 INTRODUCTION. § 5.

and (ii) preceded by i or u or a long vowel

or diphthong, as in niris, quaerit, Furius,

niirus (gen. niirus), dirinait.

There is scarcely enough evidence to determine whether

this qualification extended to Umbriau and the other rhotacising^

dialects.

B. Medial s before nasals

1. which was kept in Oscan and Umbrian (Br. Grds. § 570),

2. in Latin,

a. when following an unaccented syllable was lost with-
out compensation (Br. l.c-), as in Gatmna,

/3. when following an accented syllable

i. arising before and (?) after the period of
rhotacism, was lost with compensatory
lengthening of the preceding vowel, as
in ahenus, primus, dumus (?),

ii. arising during the period of rhotacism be-
came r, as in carmen, v^rna, diiirnus.

I may add here two corollaries as to the date of the change
The Latin of the Latin accent, which, if correct, are a good
accent. ^jgg^j more important than the mere explanation

of the changes of s. They are discussed pp. 64 — 68 infr.

1. The Latin accent had become bound by quan-

tity, i.e. it could not go further back than a
long penult or antepenult, before rhotacism
began, that is before 450 B.C. {v.p. 61 infr.).

2. But it did not become bound by the number

of syllables, i.e. restricted to the last three
even when the penult and antepenult were
both short, until after rhotacism had ceased,
that is after 350 B.C.

There is further independent evidence as well as that of
rhotacism that proper names did not yield to these changes till
considerably later than the rest of the language.
Digitized by Microsoft®

I. The Phonetic relation of s and r ; and the history of s
before consonants in Latin.

6. Before proceeding to discuss the history of s in Italic it
is necessary to say a word or two on the phonetic aspect of its
change to r, which seems to have been unduly neglected. It is
usually stated, clearly as a generalisation from the (apparent)
historical evidence in various languages, that s (the breathed
dental sibilant) becomes r through the intermediate stage of n
(the voiced sibilant), and it is often implied that the change
happens only and always by this method. Even Erugmann
appears to assume this in discussing the Teutonic rhotacism*.
But phonetically there is surely no more reason why the voiced
z should pass to the voiced r than the breathed s to the
breathed r (rh). It may be said that the breathed r did not
exist in the particular languages in wbich s became r; whether
this could be proved or not, it is scarcely an answer to the
difficulty. We are still left to ask why it did not, if s would
naturally have giveu rise to it under the same conditions as
those under which z became the voiced r. The following quo-
tations give us sufficient data to explain the change, and they
say nothing whatever of ;? as a necessary intermediate stage.

(i) '8 owes its sibilance to the breath being directed on to

the teeth not by the tip itself but by the blade of „ ^ ,.

•' '^ ... Quotations

the tongue The normal position for s is on the fromPho-

gums a little further back than for th, the tongue "^ ****' ^'' "'

being somewhat shortened.' Sweet, Handbook of Phonetics,

p. 39.

Digitized by Microsoft®
1 Grds. § 581.

8 VERNER'S law in ITALY. § 6.

(ii) 'The characteristic feature of r is that the friction
passage is formed as imjch as possible by the tip
alone. Hence the tip generally points upwards,
and there is a tendency to make the outer front of the tongue
concave, so as to prevent any front modification. The tongue
being thus shortened, there is also a tendency to form the con-
sonant further back than is the case with the other point
consonants. The medium position for r is just outside the arch
and it cannot be formed at all in the interdental position.'
Ih. p. 37.

(iii) ' sh is very similar to s but has more of the point
element which is the result of its approximation to
rh, sh is in fact s arrested on its way to rh [and
similarly the voiced zh is z arrested on its way to r]. This is
done by retracting the tongue somewhat from the s position
and pointing it more upwards, which brings the tip more into
play.... The normal position for sh is naturally between that of
s and rh, near the arch.' lb. p. 40,

(iv) ' The above account of the mechanism of s and sh...\s
The change of transposed '...by some phoneticians, 'chiefly on the
8 ^ sh under ground of the frequent development of sh in lan-
mjiuence of y. gy^gg q^^^ qJ g followed by y. But the point of the
tongue is clearly directed upwards in the change from s to sh.
Theories of the historical development of sounds cannot be
allowed to override facts that can be demonstrated by observa-
tion, and the change of s into sh under the influence of y may
be easily explained as the result of simple retraction of the s
towards the y position.' Ih. note, pp. 40, 41.

(v) ' The position of s giving sibilation to vocalised breath
Change of s produces z which differs in no wise from the oral
to r. action of s.'

' r as pronounced in England differs from z merely in the
narrowing and retraction of the point of the tongue. In Scot-
land, in Spain, and on the continent generally, r receives a
stronger vibration of the whole forepart of the tongue.' M. Bell,
Principles of Speech, pp. .53, 54 (quoted by Roby, Vol. I. p. 401).
Digitized by Microsoft®

PHONETIC CONDITIONS OF THE CHANGE. § 7. 9

The following rough lines then may be taken as indicating
the three positions of the tongue under the palatal arch.

7. It is clear therefore that the change from s to r, whether
both are breathed or both are voiced, is that of a p]^onet^ccon-
continuous retraction elevation and pointing of the ditions of the
tip and fore-part of the tongue, and that ^ is no " ""^*'
nearer r than s is to rA\ What then would be likely to cause
this movement ? Either (1) a mere carelessness of articulation
by which the tongue was allowed to slip back slightly from the
more or less protruded s position, and at the same time the hinder
half allowed to fall slightly so that the front became relatively
raised, or (2) the proximity of any sound which required a more
backward position of the tongue than that for s, and hence a
modification of the s either in consequence of or in preparation

^ In passing it is as well to note tliat the peculiar 'narrowing ' of the Eng.
lish z by which the tongue is gathered together more closely towards its centre
is (i) not found iu the continental z as in Fr. rose, and (ii) does not afieet the
general issue one way or the other. Its only effect is to make the hiss or the
vibration rather stronger, especially as (iii) it does not appear to have any
essential connexion with thS'SSJiS^l ^iMifiM^ than the breathed.

10 VERNER'S law in ITALY. § 8.

for the pronunciation of such a sound. These two purely
a priori phonetic conditions correspond very well to what we
find actually happening.

8. The first happens (a) when s sinks to r in consequence
Historical of lo^s of a stress-accent. The syllable containing
conditions of {^ jg qq longer articulated with so much care and
I'^'itro/ distinctness; it is more open to corruption both
accent. £j.q^ ij;g ^j-al and acoustic character than if it were

felt by speakers and hearers to be the most important syllable
in the word. Consequently if there is any tendency in the
language to draw back the s position to the r position, it will
have free play. Or again if there is no such tendency, but the
s happens to be in a position where a voiced sound would be
easier to produce, it sinks forthwith to z, so to speak nemine
contradicente. So that the same cause produces or rather
allows the change of s to ^ and the changes of s to rh, z to r,
but the former is not by any means the necessary intermediate
stage: s may sink to rh in consequence of a rhotacising ten-
dency, and then rh may become a voiced r in consequence of
vocal surroundings; this is quite as simple as to suppose the
order s > z > r, which however in Teutonic at least appears to
have been the historical course of the change. In the languages
we are dealing with, namely the Italic, r and rh cannot (with
any certainty at least) be distinguished, so that we do not always
know which of them was the final stage in the progress'. But
in Sanskrit we can distinguish them since the breathed r under
certain conditions experienced a further weakening to h, and
this arises from an original s quite as regularly as does the
voiced r".

^ Final rhotaoism would seem to be a special case due to loss of accent. In
Umbriau tbe frequent omission of tbe r in this position would seem to indicate
that, as in Sanskrit, under certain conditions (which the confused state of the
transmission on this point has greatly obscured) it was the breathed sound
(v. App. C). In the earliest period of Elean rhotacism (Cauer.^ 253, 258) it has
been noticed that p appears only before ju. and f , « remaining before vowels,
breathed consonants and a pause.

' Cf. App. B, and the following section.

Digitized by Microsoft®

HISTORICAL CONDITIONS OF THE CHANGE. § 9. 11

9. Again the same careless articulation may be caused
(0) by the adjacency of some other sound which
absorbs the greater part of the emphasis of the soundswkLh
syllable, as for example a long vowel or diph- "("sort em-
thong before the s, or which (<y) necessarily curtails
the full s-articulation. A clear example of the first is the
history of the Latin (original) ss after a long vowel which has
become voiced between vowels in many of the Romance lan-
guages, e.g. Ital. Juso, Fr. fusible from Lat. fussus^ (contrast
It. misso from missus, presso, Fr. empressement from pressus)
where the sibilant has yielded to the tendency to vocalise
sounds occurring between vowels because there was not enough
of the stress-accent on the syllable left to prevent it, after the
enunciation of the u. So in Latin, as we shall see later on, s
after an accented syllable yields to the influence of a following
i or M under the same circumstances.

The second cause of the weakened articulation, its curtail-
ment by an adjacent sound, varies considerably in .,
its effect in different languages. In most, I think, the articula-
of the Indo-European group the medial combina- ""'"•' ^"
tions sk, st, sp are among the most stable at least so far as
regards the preservation of the s or some equivalent sound
(e.g. Skt. stQi), sp{h), but cch) and where the s is kept here but
lost in other consonantal combinations it must be due to the
fact that the breathed character of the k, t,p favours the normal
prolongation of the breathed sibilant. But before other conso-
nants while in pro-ethnic Teutonic s or ^ was kept
equally before all except I so long as it followed an
accented syllable^ in other languages, at least in modem Eng-
lish it appears to be fully kept only before explo- M.oa.eTn Eng-
sives and spirants, {descry and disgust, Desdemona '^*^-
and destiny, Lisbon and lisping, asphodel and isthrmis, seem to
shew exactly the same length of the sibilant in pronxinciation^)

1 For evidence in favour of these statements, explanation of exceptions, etc.
V. Appendix A and Osthofl Perf. Exc. vi.

2 Br. Grds. § 582.

^ If there is any difference the s seems to be longer before c, t, p than before
g^d,b. Digitized by Microsoft®

12 VEBNER'S law in ITALY. § 10.

and half lost before nasals (contrast pris'ner, bus'ness, prismatic
with any of the words just given). I think it will be felt that
these [pris'ner, etc.) are a good deal nearer the sound in skinner,
brimming than lisping is to skipping, buzzed to budding. We
may conjecture that the sibilant in these positions would have
been completely lost by this time if it were not being constantly
Latin and restored by the influence of the written language.
Sanskrit. Jq Latin and Sanskrit however, the hiss appears
to be abridged before all consonants except breathed explosives
and spirants. Contrast Skt. nldas and Lat. nidus with Eng.
nest : Lat. pono (for posno), Skt. nolo nama with Goth, asneis,
A. S. esne^.

The difference is clearly connected with the method of
dividing the syllables prevailing in the language^ The German
habit (attested by the terms ' open ' and ' close ') of beginning
every syllable with a consonant and therefore dividing as-neis
contrasts with the prospective assimilation usual in Latin.

10. The second cause suggested above (§ 7) for the retrac-
tion of the tongue which changes s to sh and
S. Assimilating -., /7\ 7 i -i ••

influence of lurther to r [a), z to zh and r, is the proximity

neighbouring ^f some sound which required a more backward
sounds. . . ^

position of the tongue. Instances abound. But

before discussing any of them an important distinction must be
cited, namely that between Prospective and Retrospective
Assimilation. In some, perhaps most, languages the former
predominates, in others, e.g. Sanskrit' the latter. And accord-
ing to this we shall expect to find the ' alterant ' sounds after
or before the s in any one language. Thus in Sanskrit we find
the change determined by the preceding sound*: in Latin on
the contrary we shall expect to find it determined by those that
follow. The class of sounds that exert this backward influence
are obvious both phonetically and historically. The Sanskrit

1 Given by Br. Grds. § 582.

2 So Osthoff Perf., p. 19.

' e.g. the past participles in dha, the change of n to «, etc.

* For my present purpose it is enough to point out that Brugmanu agrees
with Whitney and other Sanskritists that the change from s-* r is only regular
after i and u. v. App. B.

Digitized by Microsoft®

INFLUENCE OF THE HIGH VOWELS. | 10. 13

guttural k and cerebral (' inverted ') r convert the dental to the
cerebral sibilant, s to s. So do the two high vowels i and
u, which necessitate the raising of the main body of
the tongue towards the front and back of the palate
respectively and consequently a slight withdrawal of
its tip from the extended s position. Anyone who will
take the trouble to pronounce m-s-u or l-s-i^ continuously but
prolonging each sound so as to be conscious of the change of
position to produce the next, will feel that his tongue is pushed
forward to pronounce the s and pulled back again for the i
or u. Further if the change towards the u or i position is be-
gun before the hiss is stopped by removing the blade of the
tongue from the gums, the s passes into sh, and if the backward
movement is continued till the tongue reaches the i or u position
without the complete removal of the tip we get r (h). Under cer-
tain further conditions the s in Sanskrit further passes to r.
In Latin a following i or u appears only to exercise this in-
fluence when either an i or u precedes the s so that the
blade of the tongue is already in the position to which it will
have to return after having formed the s, or the articulation of
the s itself is weakened, as we have just seen, by a preceding
long vowel or diphthong.

NOTE.

With much diffidence I venture to suggest that the influence of i and v,
(the former sometimes disguised in ^) is the true phonetic cause of the
variations which Brugmann finds so difficult in the change of s to ch be-
tween vowels in Old Church Slavonic, so that nosu ('nose'), rosa ( = Lat.
ros) would be as regular as the Latin nasns and rosa. A large number of
the cases of the changes of s to ch Brugmann already is forced to explain
by analogical influence, and it is not hard to account in this way for all the
examples he gives not following an (original Slavonic) i or u. Cf. especially
iecM=Skt. tesv,, Gr. rois, iSs^=Skt. tdsdm, Gr. ra-mv. This would also
explain the initial change of s to oh in some words, as due to the final u of
the nominative and other cases, and the i of still other cases, of the article
tu {to-mi, tomu, tend, ti, ty, techu, timu, temi), and of many cases of definite
adjectives like novui. v. Oriindriss, § 585. 2, Anm. 2, 4, 5, 6, 588. 2, Anm.
2, 3, 4. It is especially to be noticed that k and r convert s to ch =Eng. sh
(§ 588. 1) just as in Sanskrit.

' By a and i are meant tMg,gSftWgS Si?;croso^'^'^^^ vowels, which in Modern
English we should write oo ee.

14 VEENER'S law in ITALY. § 11.

B. Changes of s before nasals in Italic.

11. This is the most convenient place to add what little
there is to be said as to the changes of s before consonants,
especially before nasals, in Italic. In Oscan and Umbrian it is
clearly retained before the latter, Osc. posmom, etc., Umbr.
ahesnes, etc. In Latin the rule appears to be that given above,
§ 5 B, namely that during the period of rhotacism s following
an accented syllable and preceding m or n became r, a change
strictly parallel to its loss in the same circumstances in a non-
rhotacising period, as has been pointed out already. The one

difficulty of course is. How did the words with s in
the words this position arise in the rhotacising period, if all
under discus- those containing it had already lost it ? The an-

swer is, by borrowing from another dialect. The
legitimacy of this assumption in general will be more conve-
niently discussed' when we are dealing specifically with the
Latin changes; here it is enough to point out that the very
small though, as I think, fairly certain number of examples
that come under consideration on this point, speaks strongly for
their being borrowed. And in the most important of them,
carvien ' a verse,' despite the recent suggestion that the r is
original, so that it would be the same word as carmen ' a wool-
comb'; the very fact of its juxtaposition with another word of
diametrically opposite meaning^ {active instead of passive)
seems to indicate that it was certainly not coined by the same
people. The advantage of discussing them here is that they
shew clearly that the change of s to r can take place inde-
pendently of any vocalising influence. ?i and 7n in Latin were
certainly more breathed than voiced sounds (e.g. sumpsi and
the Ital. difeso with breathed s from ns). The following seem
to be examples of the change to r before n and m.

' V. infr. §§ 43-4, p. 59 foil.

'■ Baehrens points out that the meaning ' division ' is a=: old as the meaning

' metrical stanza.' Without further entering on the discussion, it may be

observed that the words shewing CAS {castrare, etc., Skt. i-ns-tram) shew the

former meaning quite as well as those with CAR (Osc. eanicis ' partis ').
Digitized by Microsoft®

8 BEFORE NASALS IN LATIN. § 11. 1.5

carmen diurnus Privernum 1 urna ?
Examples, gernien ? hornus vernus ? ager Falernus ?

verna veternus ? hodiernus ?

Carmen has been already discussed. Germen may of course
simply have been formed from gero after the rhotacism. For
diurnus no word has survived which could supply the same
sort of analogy as veteris may have for veterrMs, though in this
last instance too the close proximity of meaning of the two
words suggests that the second may have been a borrowing.
Hornus is surely much better derived with Bticheler from the
common Italic word *os osis 'a year' (Umbr. ose, ustite, Pelign.
uiis, T. B. 4. osii), originally ho-os-nus, than from ver veris, for
* ho-vernus, because if even this derivation is to account for the
r it must have been first formed after the rhotacism had begun,
and therefore (v. infr. § 47, p. 65) after the first change of the
Latin accent so that it would have been pronounced *hov^rnus,
and it is surely improbable that the contraction should have
taken place in a word thus accented. It would stand on the
same level of improbability with ' dixti from dixisti, dixet from
dixisnet.' Further it seems more probable that the pronominal
ho- should have been in use at the earlier than the later stage
of the language. Lastly the meaning is more naturally 'this
year's' than 'this spring's' especially as applied to wine. If
then Biicheler's derivation be correct, the word is most pro-
bably borrowed since the word os appears to occur nowhere
else in Latin, so that all the external evidence points in the
same direction as that derived from the form of the word. For
verna no other likely derivation has been suggested as far as
I know except the one given by Stolz' connecting it with VE8
' to dwell ' {vesta, Skt. vas) which is rendered very probable by
the parallel of famulus, Osc. famel and Osc. faamat (Zv.
S.LO. 14. 1)' dwells '^

The remaining examples are less certain. Privernum a

1 Lat. Gr. § 60. 2.

2 The name Verna (quoted in Mommsen's Sabine Glossary, U. I. D. from
Fest, p. 370) applied to the Eomans in the Liturgy of the Capitoline Sabines, if
it is connected with this word which seems doubtful, must have been Latinised
in the same way as l/infiTOCi^/fi^JgiBy ^erhehfM- ^3.

16 VERNER'S law in ITALY. § 12.

town in Volscian' territory may well contain an s-stem whether
or not it is connected with ver {*ves-7-). vernus may simply
be for *ves-nus and if so would have helped the substitution
of veris for *vesris. Urna Varro connects with urceus but
Vanicek may be right in tracing it rather to uro ustwm, but
of course even so it may equally well have been formed after
the rhotacism. If Falernus (in Campania) is connected with
the name which occurs in two other places in Italy, Falerii in
S. Etruria and Falerio in Umbria, the r is derived from s
(Falisci) and must be regarded as the form of the name given
to the district by the Campanians when adopted by Volscian or
Latin colonists. Hodiernus is a doubtful word altogether, but
may belong here.

12. We have now to consider the examples of (1) the
genuine Latin words which regularly dropped s be-
fore n and m, and (2) (?) the borrowed words which
may have done so after the period of rhotacism. They are
well known already and need only be discussed in view of the
question which of them belong to the latter category.

(1) pono ahenus (Umbr. ahesnes) deguno are clearly old
words. Perhaps dimico may rank with them, but very little
can be inferred from the changes of such prefixes as dis- which
are especially liable to analogical influence.

(2) viden satin cet. seem clearly modern. So may be
cdnus (Pelign. casnar). We have then one or two words in
Festus, casniena caesna (Varro) cosmittere (?) dusmus, which may
perfectly well be dialectic forms in use among the soldiery
{caesna of course would not be the Umbrian form but it mio-ht
be Oscan) or may have been completely introduced into Latin
from the same source. Triresmus for triretsmus, pesna petna for
petsna naturally are irrelevant. The most important word is
cosmis on the Duenos Inscription. This is later than the
change of s to r as all the eight commentators agree in taking
pacari as an infinitive', and Pauli assigns it at the latest to the
middle of the 5th century A.u.C, i.e. 300 B.C. The same com-
mentator says the Latin of tlie inscription is 'so rein dass es

' For the question of Volscian rhotacism, v. infr. § 37, p. 50.
Toitcsia seems certainly a wrong reading, v. Pauli ad \oc., Alt. Ital. Slud. i.
Digitized by Microsoft®

S BEFORE VOICED EXPLOSIVES. § 13. 17

geradezu mustergilltig ist,' and takes cosmis = Lat. comis as do
Blicheler, Jordan, OsthofF, and Eing. (Dressel comes, Br^al
joins cosmisu.) But Jordan sees in the s a dialectic variation
which he traces also in noisi (= nisi) and einom ; the former is
allowed as possible by all commentators except Br6al and Pauli
who however seems right in explaining nois vois as old forms
for nobis vohis (on the strength of a gloss of Festus, nis — nobis).
But all other commentators take einom as equivalent to the
Oscan form einom for which Pauli would substitute ' ei nom'=
i nunc. This seems hardly so likely. But in any case it is
quite clear that cosmis must be of Oscan or Umbrian origin
whether it had or had not been fully adopted into Latin at the
time of the inscription. Dismota occurs in the S. C. de Bac-
canalibus but it may be only an etymological spelling.

It is possible that the same chronological relation holds be-
tween nidus didere cet. and Ardea ardeo (the latter g before voiced
is generally considered a secondary derivative of explosives,
aridus) and digero and mergus. OsthofF (Per/, p. 35) leaves it
as an altogether doubtful question why the r appears in mergus
and not in sido. In such a common word it must be confessed
that the 'borrowing' hypothesis seems very harsh, and the
solution of the difficulty may well be that the z was kept in old
Latin before gutturals, though lost with compensation before
dentals to which it would be more easily assimilated. C£ Skt.
majjati but sedus.

13. We may now proceed to the main subject of the essay,

the history of s between vowels in the various dia- ^ , , ,

lects of Italy. These are best arranged in the order following sec-

of least complexity, beginning with Umbrian and ""**■

concluding with. Latin and Faliscan. That is to say, we shall

deal first with the rhotacising and then with the non-rhotacising

dialects, except that the Latin phenomena are postponed to the

end on account of their comparative complexity. The results

of the enquiry on the question of dialect-distribution are given

in a table at the end of the section on ' Minor Dialects ' (infr.

§ 39, p. 53) and have been further illustrated by a map of

Italy which I owe to the great kindness and ability of my friend

Mr E. Heawood of Gonville and Caius College.
Digitized by Microsoft®

II, S between vowels in Umbrian.

14. The question that meets us at the threshold of our
. Q enquiry, What was the system of accentuation that

can and Urn- prevailed in the Italic dialects ? has a very ready
brian. answer. Happily there is little to be said on the

point, but that little may fairly be regarded as certain.

In § 683 of the Grundriss Brugmann decides in favour of the
view that the original Italic accent on the first syllable of all
independent words was still retained in the separate historical
development of Oscan and Umbrian. This conclusion he bases
on the " weitverbreitete Vocalausstossung in den Schlusssilben
wie in umbr. pihaz = ' piatus,' osk. tuvtiks ' publicus.' " There
seems no reason for doubting his decision, and further evidence
of the same sort could be collected with the greatest ease from
almost every page of the Inscriptions, e.g. the suppression of a
short vowel in the second syllable as in Osc. uupsens from the
stem opes-. The conclusions as to rhotacism based on this
view, if they are correct, will supply an important proof of a
different kind. But the modern forms of geographical names
are decisive in its favour, e.g. Pesaro {Pisaurum), Fdlleri
(Fdlerii), etc.

15. It is necessary to preface the discussion of the Umbrian
Chronology of f°''™s with a very brief statement of what has been
the Tabulae and may be inferred as to the relative date of the

seven Iguvine tables from their general appearance

and contents.

Br^al {Les Tables Enguhines, p. 308) speaks as follows:

' Je classerais quant k la copie...les tables de cette fa9on. Les

plus anciennes me paraissent Stre III et IV.... Puis viendrait

II b. L'inscription iia a ^t^ selon toute apparence srrav^e arorfes
Digitized by Microsoft® ^^ & ^

CHRONOLOGY OF THE IGUVINE TABLES." § 15. 19

II b, car le graveur a serr^ son dcriture pour faire tenir toute la
tcxte sur une seule c6t^ de la table. Cette inscription ira est
contemporaine de i: toutes deux sont termindes exactement
par la mSme formule, ^manant de la m^me autorit^. La pre-
miere partie de v, dent les desinences graramaticales appartien-
nent a un dtat de la langue plus recent, est probablement parmi
les inscriptions en caractferes ^trusques celle qui a 4t6 graves en
dernier. Enfin vi, vii et I'inscription Claverniur peuvent ^tre
consid^rdes comme ayant 4t4 copides k une epoque ou les
caract^res ^trusques conimen9aient de sortir de I'usage.' The
evidence on the question generally may then be briefly sum-
marised as follows :

Table i is clearly a copy, abridged from a more ancient in^
scription, at a time when final s had become r. The engraver
has made one slip into the modem spelling, adiper arves (1. 28).

II a was copied at the same time as I and contains two
quite distinct parts though they were engraved at the same
time.

Of II b Br^al leaves us uncertain whether he considers it a!
copy or an original. The spelling seems consistent throughout
so that there is not the same reason for thinking it a copy as
there is in the case of

III and IV, where inconsistencies such as Pupdike Pupdi^e,
Jkiivina liuvina can scarcely be otherwise explained.

V a (i.e. the part in the Etruscan alphabet) ' may be con-
temporary with one of its two decrees which were not made at
the same date.' The second of them however in point of date,
whichever it is, need not necessarily be a copy any more than
the other. There is nothing to shew that either of them is not
a first-hand record of the decree it contains. They shew the
same stage of phonetic development as is represented by the
copyist of VI, VII. Hence it follows, since the Claverniur in-
scription, V b, is copied in Latin characters from more ancient
documents in Etruscan on to the back of v a, that the originals
of V b, VI, VII were older than V a.

VI and VII, though clearly copies (e.g. as being in Latin
characters but describing the same system of ritual as that
in i) may nevertheless be fairly appealed to as evidence of the

Digitized by Microsoft® 2 — 2

20 verner's law m italt. § 16.

later stage of the language, because in process of copying the
text appears to have been modernised with very fair con-
sistency. For example siirur is substituted in vi and vil for
the isont of l, il cet. (Unfortunately there is no place where
the word is wanted in V a.) Now as to this there are only two
possible hypotheses :

1. that it occurred in the original (whether this was an
inscription or a manuscript, i.e. the decree confirming the ritual
re-enacted later) which must have been therefore a good deal
later (e.g. as shewing final rhotacism) than the date of Tabb.
I — IV, or

2. more probably that vi, VII are copies of ancient docu-
ments modernised in language as well as in alphabet, and
modernised so far as to substitute new for archaic words. This
second supposition is rendered probable by the relation already
described between vi, vii and I.

These brief notes will enable us to determine more pre-
cisely the bearing of the XJmbrian evidence.

16. In this and the following chapters then we are to ex-
^ , amine the evidence for and against the theory ' that

the evidence s between vowels remains in all Italic dialects (ex-
cept Latin) at the end of the accented, i.e. the first,
syllable of the word, but that elsewhere (1) in XJmbrian and
other rhotacising dialects it became r, while (2) in Oscan and
other non-rhotacising dialects it merely sank to the voiced
sound, z.' There follow lists of all words in XJmbrian —

1. with an originally single s between vowels at the end
of the first syllable {at least twenty-eight examples) ;

2. with s (probably) representing ss or consonant -F s be-
tween vowels at the end of the first syllable and elsewhere ;

3. with s between vowels not after the first syllable, of
doubtful origin {one example) ;

4. with r representing an original s between vowels not
after the first syllable {seven examples) ;

5. with r between vowels after the first syllable {seven

examples ofx derived from, s).

^ ■' •' Digitized by Microsoft®

S BETWEEN VOWELS IN UMBRIAN. § 17.

21

It will be seen that the lists nos. 1 and 4 will contain the
evidence in favour of my theory, nos. 3 and 5 the (apparent)
evidence against it. No. 2 is added for convenience. Where
any words require more than a bare mention, they are discussed
at the end of the list in which they first occur. The references
cite the Table and line (on the original) of the passage quoted,
in the usual way.

17. The following words in TJmbrian shew .9 between
vowels at the end of the first syllable. None are included in
which s occurs also as g or s, as for example tasez = tagez, or
those in which it is the initial letter of the second half of a
compound as in prosesetu. This list alone is surely enough to
suggest the inadequacy of the treatment which the question has
so far received (cf. § 4 supr.),

dsa dse dsam cet. passim

dso VI b. 50

dsiane la. 26 rusem-eYii&. 9, 24

seso VI b. 51

sviseve ll b. 13

svesu lb. 46, viib. 1

6se via. 26 «?«aie ib.
(cf. us tit e II a. 16)

vdsus IV 22

eso- isunt esum-ek pa.«isin),

also esuf ' ipse '
esunu esone passim, once

eeaona via. 18
nesimei va. 9 (?)

pisest VI b. 53 pisher Vl b. Words in Urn-

41 pist V a. 3, via. 7 tetween vowels

at end of first
syllable.

46

13

pesetom 1 freq. in VI (e.g. ooserclomi via,. 13 Doubtful.

a. 27)

Fiso Fisiu cet. passim
Fisuvi Fisovie Fisuvina

passim
Koisis I. U. M.i 5
Vesttne iv 3, cf. Vednicates

Caesena Cic. ad Fam. 16. 27

Pisaurum

H. Misus (mod. Misa)

R. Aesis Livy 5. 35

% Sudsa (mentioned by Pliny)

Rusellde (Etruria)

I i.e. Imcriptiones Umbiacne.Miimf&,,ax^fi^y Bueheler at the end of his
edition of the Tables.

ooserclomi via. 13
vasirilom 1 vi a. 12

Voisinier I. TJ. M. 1
Kdselate ii b. 6, v b.
Miiseiate ll b. 5
Tesenaces I a. 10
Tisenocir vi a. 20

Modern. B. Pisatello
R. Plusa
R. Uso

Proper names
in Inscrip-
tions.

Names of
places in Urn-
bria from
North to
South.

22 veener's law in italy. § 18.

18. Some of these words call for further comment.

dsa. Brugmann's two suggested explanations are surely
both impossible. It cannot be ' an archaism ' because it
occurs in the later as often as in the earliest tables
while, as has been pointed out (§ 15), archaisms are
, generally modernised in vi and VII. And it is equally
impossible that it can be a borrowing from another dia-
lect in view of its constant use in the cultus of the
ancient Umbrian confederacy. There is no trace of any
other word which it might have displaced from its signi-
fication ; and all historical considerations protest against
the supposition that any Italic tribe should have needed
to borrow a word to describe the central feature of their
domestic and civil institutions. The difficulty of the
Latin word ara may as well be mentioned here. The r
seems clearly due to the influence of ar&e and its de-
rivatives aridus ardeo. The connexion of the words is
obvious ; cf Volscian bim asif= hovem arens ' hovem in
ara sacrificans^,' and the fact that this was popularly
felt is, curiously enough, attested by Varro^ 'ara ab
area sive ab ardore ad quern ut sit, fit ara.'

aso VI b. 50. ' erihont aso destre onsefertu' which Biicheler
renders 'idem arsum in dextro umero ferto' (p. 89) taking
aso (for asom) as meaning ' to be burnt ' and therefore
as a supine of the verb as- (quoted above from Volsc.)
for assum, but I know of no justification for supposing
a supine in -ssum from a root ending in s. The form
would have been astum like ustum gestum aseriatum
and all the rest. We must therefore fall back on
Biicheler's alternative suggestion both here and in the
Marrucinian inscription (Zv. I. M. 6) and take asum
(feret) as an infinitive of purpose, which is perfectly con-
sistent with its accusative form after a verb of motion,
the form being parallel to aferumfagiom Osc. ezmi, etc.,
and therefore containing only the s of the root. The

1 So Biicheler, and this is clearly the best intern. , v. Zv. ad loc I I M n
' = L. L. 5. 38. ■ ■ ■

Digitized by Microsoft®

5 BETWEEN VOWELS IN UMBRIAN. § 18, 23

Latin assum with ss cannot belong to a root with a long
vowel. Osth. Perf. p. 545.

asiane i a. 26. Biich. p. 73 ' dictum ab aso videtur ustrinum.'

eso- isunt cet. The discussion of these pronominal forms
(with the variants issoo Vll b. 3 essu vi a. 44 ehesu
VII b. 54) will be found infr. § 26, p. 32 seq. along with
those in r, ere erek cet.

esunu esone ' sacred ' or as a noun ' sacrum,' spelt once eesona
via. 18 which might be regarded as an attempt to ex-
press the accent on the syllable though it may indicate
genuine length of the vowel. The word has only a
single s in all the Tables : cf further Volsc. esaristrom,
Marsian (Zv. 37) esos, Marrucin. (Zv. 6) aisos, Osc. aisusis,
though these in themselves would not be conclusive as
in at least the Volscian and Marrucinian inscriptions
double letters were not used.

nesimei 'next.' For the (probably complete) loss of the
original guttural (?) (Eng. nigh) cf Lat. maior Osc.
maimas = Lat. maodm-ae. If its sound had been really
felt it would, one would think, have remained as x
(fratreyi).

These cannot be regarded as examples
of ' recomposition ' of a final s because
final s had become r at the date at which
these forms occur, v. supr. § 15, p. 18,
cf infr. § 25, p. 30.

rwsem-e VII a. 9, 24. Biich. p. 106 wishes to translate 'in
terram ' but ' cum rure tamen rusem equidem componere
non ausim,' with natural but in view of the other ex-
amples surely unnecessary hesitation. I need hardly
point out the forced character of his alternative explana-
tion ' let him pour a libation on to the thorn-bush.' The
word would be very difficult to justify in-point of forma-
tion or (cf sepse) phonetics, even granting the appro-
priateness of the meaning suggested, which is at least
not obvious. Digitized by Microsoft®

pisest VI b. 53.
pisher vib. 41.
pisi V a 3, VI a 7,

24 verner's law in italy. § 19.

Seso Vrb. 51 = ' sibi,' cf. the Lat. sese, the absence of v in the
second syllable being probably at least in Italy proethnic,
as perhaps also in

svesu = ' suo ' I b. 46, vii b. 1.

sviseve lib. 13 Btlch. p. 145 'in a basin'; its reduplicated
form vouches for the singleness of the s.

ose via. 26 ' anni,' maie=' annua' lb. 46. Of the single s
in this word there is no doubt. A nom. uus occurs in
the Corfinian inscription and it is identical in origin with
the name of the Etruscan sun-god usil, Auselius aurum
aurora cet.

vasus IV 22 (abl. plur.) corresponds exactly with the Latin
vasis (abl. plur.) except in declension which shews it is
not borrowed from the Latin. It is a consonantal stem
and perhaps explains the Latin doublet vas vasum.

pesetom with the meaning of ' peccatum ' or ' vitiatum '
Doubtful s occurs only in vi where in other words we often
or d. have s alternating with s which Bucheler supposes

the true spelling in this word. But we have always s,
and it might be plausibly connected with pessum pes-
simus cet. with an original dental [eirecrov iriirTm). If so
however there is nothing to shew that the s is not
double.

oosercloni, v. infr. § 21.

vasirslom Via. 12 Bucheler connects with vacare, 'an open
space,' but at first sight it seems at least equally com-
parable with vastus. The s of the -slom is of course for
s from -clom.

19. The evidence from proper names may seem at first

sight less reliable because we are less able to trace

7opernames. ^j^^^^ cognates, but On the other hand, in this case,

the form which they shew is in one respect more likely to be

original, because they are unlikely to contain ss (which appears

to be almost always of secondary origin) unless indeed they are

obviously derived from some past participle.

Digitized by Microsoft®

S BETWEEN VOWELS IH UMBEIAN. § 19. 25

Fiso Fisiu, cet. have generally been regarded as forms of this
kind, as the past participle of fido and corresponding in
sense to Juppiter Fidius. But the difference in form is
obvious. Are there other examples of deities whose
only name was originally a past participle ? Appellatives
which are only used in addition to some other more
substantive title are clearly distinct. We have Fiisu..
in an Oscan inscription, which may be a borrowed name,
but if not points to a single s, and Fisanius in another
(Zv. 0. 83) in a batch of inscriptions which regularly
shew doubled letters. We have once Fissiu (via. 43)
which may of course be the real spelling, though no
stress can be laid upon its single occurrence in this form
in VI and vii, cf infr. § 27, p. 34 seq.

Fisuvi etc. are probably connected with Fisus as Marruvium
with Marsi.

Vesune iv 3, Bilch. p. 162 compares Vesta. This and the
similar name Vesullia occur fairly often in Oscan in-
scriptions. It occurs also in Marsian (Zv. no. 39, cf.
§ 36, p. 49 infr.). Here the s is certainly single. Bilch.
(1. c.) calls attention to the Vesinicates an Umbrian
tribe.

Kaselate lib. 6, vb. 13
Museiate ii b. 5
Tesenaces (veres) la. 10

All that is to be said about
these names is that they appear
to be certainly Umbrian. The
last is the epithet of one of the gates of Iguvium, prob-
ably derived from a neighbouring place, and the other
two are the names of tribes included in the ceremonial
(lib. 6). The Kaselates are directed to provide so much
corn for the officers of the league (vb. 13), and it is
highly improbable that this was anything but a volun-
tary act on their part, nor would aliens be likely to join
except under compulsion.

Pisaurum. The modern form Pesaro has been ^^^^j^^ gf
already noticed, as evidence of the persistence of places in Um-
the old &rst-sy\lab\e mfftt^t by Microsoft®

26 vernee's law in italy. § 20.

R. Misus (mod. Misa). This is marked in Smith's Ancient
Atlas but I have been unable to find any reference for
it. De Vit's Onomasticon which I have used where
possible has only reached 10.

Suasa I hardly count as it is so probably connected with
Lat. suasum, cf Sentinum, and therefore had origin-
ally ss.

Rusellae Bticheler cites (p. 106) as a name in Etruria clearly
of Italic origin'.

The modern names may reproduce real Umbrian forms.
The dialectic form of the name of a place seems generally to be
the one that has survived.

20. A reference to the list of words on p. 21 will shew that
Bid i and u asiane pisi nesimei Koisis Voisinier and Aesis are
'cfimmin Um- *^® '^'^^^ words which oppose the application to Um-
hrian? brian of the further conditions under which s be-

came r in Latin. No stress whatever can be laid on the i in
the unaccented position of pisi and nesimei ; asiane would be
kept by asom asa, Koisis and Voisinier may be Sabine names
(c£ Buch. ad loc.) and if Aesis is connected with Aesernia the
e may possibly be nearer the original vowel. So that we have
really no evidence on the question.

21. The following words appear to have s = ss between
vowels :

ise I b. 8. covortuso vi b. 64.

S fvOTTh SS

^ ■ sese III 2, 3, iv 3 sesust vi a. 6, 8. henuso vi b. 64.

frosetum VI a. 28.
ise covortuso henuso are future perfects like Lat. turhassitur,

1 In complete ignorance of Etruscan I have not thought it worth while to
add other such names though there are several with intervocal s after the first
syllable, e.g. Pisa.

Digitized by Microsoft®

S BETWEEN .VOWELS IN UMBRIAN. § 22. 27

etc. the aorist conjunctive forms parallel to (the probably
indicative forms) amassem, etc.^

sese sesust, participle and future of sigmatic perfect from
sedeo.

frosetom from a past participle of the stem fraud-.

ooserclom via. 13 seems in point of meaning g^^^^pgy
equally well derived from au-serclom (cf au-
gurium) but Bticheler supposes in this and in

osatu V b. 22 oseto I. U. M. 2 a loss of p, considering them
the phonetic representatives of *dbserclnm and *opseto,
comparing the Oscan upsannam, Pelignian npsaseter.
But sepse vi b. 13 shews a p retained in a similar posi-
tion and it is possible that osatu may not be connected
with op- ; ci. frosetom (? audeo, to set about a thing). If
the derivation suggested for ooserclom be correct it is
another example of the s kept by accent.

puse pusei pusi in vi and vil (for puee of Tables i — v) as in
Oscan probably contains a dental or nasal.

22. There is only one exception to the rule that s between
vowels not at the end of the first syllable became r, s between
the termination -asius, in the words vmveUnot

' after the first

kurslasiu II a. 17 syllable.

plenasier urnasierYa,. 2, 15
sestentasiaru III 2 and
*eikvasia, the origin of eikvasates III 24 and
eikvase{n)se va. 4, 16.

It is equally an exception to rule in Latin where it occurs
only in proper names, which are generally regarded as intro-
duced (mostly from Sabine sources) after the period of rhotacism
had ceased. It is very common in Oscan, fluusasiais vere-
hasiui purasiai (Zv. O. 9) medikei degetasiui (Cipp. Ab.
no. 56) which Biicheler explains as 'numerarii.' Also perhaps
in diasis (no. 74) the name of a measure of capacity, which
Biicheler takes as 'bessis,' but the use of the as to denote

1 So ^^^^'Bm?f^itr. 8. 274.

28. verner's law in italy. § 23.

capacity seems doubtful and -is is the regular ending of mascu-
line -io- stems in Oscan, so that it may well be simply derived
from the numeral, like triarius, etc. It will be noticed that
except eikvasia all the words in Umbrian denote measurement
and these are just the class of words which we find most fre-
quently borrowed. A strong confirmation of this view is the
word ezariaf (Btlch. ' escas ') IV 28 not denoting measurement,
which may very plausibly be regarded as shewing the genuine
Umbrian form of the suffix, as in Latin. Stolz considers -dsius
and -drills as distinct in origin and -drius may of course in some
cases arise independently, but since in some, e.g. nefdsius, we
know it did not, there seems no reason for denying the con-
nexion so long as it can be phonetically justified, as in the way
I have attempted. The fact that ezariaf occais on the same
document as sestentasiaru surely indicates that one of them is
borrowed. Mommsen' calls it 'a Sabine ending.' BrdaP, com-
paring the frequent Oscan endings of names, -asia (Taurasia)
-usium (Canusium, Ve^iusia), supposed the loss of an original n
as in Lat. formosus, etc. This is possible but perhaps un-
necessary. Aequasius and Equasius occur as gentile names on
Roman inscriptions ^

Apparent exceptions are ander vacose VI b. 47 {=anter
vacaze in lb. 8) ponisiater vib. 50 (cf. puni^ate lb. 15) and
the name of the R. Aprusa in Umbria, Plin. S. 20, with which
De Vit compares Gens Aprusia, also spelt Aprucia, which indi-
cates that here also s was originally a guttural.

The names Intercisa, Petra Pertusa are clearly Roman and
of course have original ss.

23. The examples of r between vowels not after the first
syllable representing original s are as follows. It

voweis'repre- '^'^^^ ^® ^^^'^ ^^^^ t^^J correspond exactly with z in
senting on- Oscan (infr. § 29, p. 38).

ginal a not

after the first 1. Gen. plur. fem. hapinaru la. 34 and

syllable. n

•^ generally.

' U. I. D. Sabine glossary, s. v. Lehasius Vespasia.
^ Also Corssen, who derived them from -ntia.

3 De Vit gives the reference ' Mommsen 6769 ' but this does not appear to
denote any volume in the University Library.

Digitized by Microsoft®

S BETWEEN VOWELS IN UMBEIAN. § 24. 29

2. In verbal forms :

staheren ib. 19 furent va. 22 by ' Systemschwang'

henurent Va. 26 procanurent via. 1-5

prusikurenty a,. 27 a??i6re/z47'e?i^ vib. 56

pepurkurent vb. 5 dersicurent vib. 63

eiscurent vb. 10 Perhaps /e/w re iia. 4.

3. Final s before a postposition (before the period of
final rhotacism) :

funtlere lb. 24 ererek iii 32, etc.

tuvere iia. 33 erarunt iv 1, etc.

fesnere nb. 11.

4. In -es- stems tuderor pass, in vi and vii tuderato vi a. 9
Tutere I. U. M. 7. Perhaps kateramu (catena) I b. 20 and
atero Vila. 11, 27.

The name Cameria in TJmbria as well as Camerinum in
Latium is probably to be connected with Cameses a mythical
king of Italy mentioned with Janus in Macr. Sat. I. 7. 19.
Ameria is doubtful. Nuceria (Osc. Novkrinom) has an ori-
ginal r.

24. I add for convenience all words in which r occurs be-
tween vowels at the end of the first syllable. List of words
Where they have any obvious cognate with ori- f*"* ^ ^^' ,

_ •' _ •' ° _ tween vowels

ginal r it is added in a bracket. B. indicates that after the first
this is done with Biicheler's authority. *^

herus berua passim (Lat. veru B., cf ' vemo'; 'henuso').

(1) erar, erahunt pron. pass.
erietu li a. 6 (arietem B.).

(2) eroim) gen. pi. pron. VI b. 62.

(3) eru erom v a. 27, vii b. 2 ' esse.'

erus pass, 'quod dis datur peractis sacris' (Umbr.
herio B.).

(4) ewron^ VI b. 63 nom. pi. 'iidem.'
ferest, etc. pass. (Lat./ero B.).

ferime ill 17 ' gestatorium ' (Lat. fero B.).
ferine pass. C^Mf^WflMPferio al.).

30 verner's law in italy. § 25.

furu I b. 42 (Lat. forum B.).

heris heries cet. pass, (also in Osc. herentas, etc. B.).

Jcaru Y a. 25 (Osc. Jcaro B.).

(5) Icuraia V a. 5, kuratu V a. 25.

maronato I. U. M. 2 (Lat. Maro, Mercurius Marunus

B.).
naratu naraklum pass. (Lat. narrare B.).
«erMS VI b. 62 (Osc. ner, ai/^p B.).
nirum lib. 16 {yr)piov B.).
orer Via. 37, itrw ib. 14 pron. (Lat. olle B.).
per-acm ii a. 10, peretom vi a. 27, alia (Lat. per- B.).
pure passim, ' igne,' and vepuratu II a. 42 {irvp B.).

(6) pure V a. 5, 25, nom. pi. rel. = qui.

pora VI b. 65, Vila. l = qud {=po-ora as Osc. pollad
Cipp. Ab. 8 = po-ollad, poizad (Tab. Bant.) = po-
eizad^ B.).

seritu, etc. pass. (Lat. servare B.).

(7) surwr sururont pass, in vi and VII.
iwru/ib. 1 (Lat. taurus B.).

mro Via. 30 (Lat. vir, Osc. vereiai B.).

wres pass. (Lat.yb7'es B.).

Kureties ib. 4, Eureiate lib. 3, Goredier vib. 45 (Sab.

.K'Mres).
i\rer I. U. M. 1 (N'ero B.).
Peraznane ii b. 7 (probably per-).
Farie I. U. M. 2 (Lat. Varius B.).
R. i\^ar in Umbria, the town Narnia, not Nasnia.

25. The onlj'' words in which r in this position represents
an original s are those marked with numerals, namely huraia,
the two nominative plurals euront and pure, the genitive plural
erom, and the pronoun ere, pronominal adverb su?'?ir and the
infinitive erom. Except the first three which do not present
any great difficulty, these are just such exceptions as best ex-
emplify the rule. To deal with them in detail : —

Jcuraia only occurs in the latest of all the tables V a (cf.
supr. § 15, p. 19), and it belongs to just the same

Digitized%^iri%hM>

S BETWEEN A'OWELS IN UMBRIAN. § 25. 31

class of official words as kuestretie uhtretie {kuestr- uhtr-)
dequrier all of which would be most naturally borrowed
from Latin, as occurring most constantly in the official
formulae of the Eoman administration. It is extremely
improbable that the process of narrowing which has been
carried so far in the signification of auctor, quaestor
should have gone on independently in two separate
dialects, especially in the case of qvaestor where the
change of meaning connotes a series of constitutional
changes in the republic.

euront nom. pi. masc. which only occurs in VI b. 63 side by
side with earn (vib. 16, 24) eo {=eof via. 20) eaf (viia.
52) (c£ also iepru (ii a. 32) iepi (iii 21) eu ii a. 2, ii b. 9)
is the only form in this case which occurs from any pro-
noun in the Tables except puri pure (v a. b) and ^orse
(vi and vii). The masculine form corresponding to the
neuter eu would clearly be *eus which in the later stage
of Umbrian would be eur. We might suppose that
-{h)ont was simply added to this, but we have the forms
erarunt in IV 1 before final rhotacism had begun (no
example occurring in III, IV though final s is frequent)
andpm va. 3, pisher \ih. 41 after it had set in, which
shew that as a rule these affixes were regarded as in-
separable. The r therefore may be merely due to the
engraver under the influence of the uncompounded form
*eur as well as of *eruront the nom. pi. properly cor-
responding to the ablative eriront VI b. 48. But we
might regard it as an analogy form in real use with no
great stretch of probability ; it would be an example of
' recomposition,' and arbitrary, as such forms are, by the
side of pisi pisher, though we have no such example of
the simple pis surviving (except in the compound sopir)
as we have of eu eaf cet.

pure V a. 25 similarly is either a mis- writing for *pu-rse (as
arveitio for *arsveitu, tertu for *terstu, armor for *arsmor)
and in 5 similarly mis- written for *pude — a scarcely pro-
bable coincidenc@«^f<^fe'c4^''<^^y an analogy form for

32 vernee's law in itily. § 26.

*pusi under the influence of *pur (Osc. pus Cipp. Ab. 8).
Corresponding uncompounded forms we have in nom.
sing, poe poi VI a. 5 etc. and they must be contained in
the nom. plur. masc. porse vi a. 15 (for *por-de or
*pos-de^). Some explanation by analogy of this sort is
clearly required since it occurs in the same inscription
(v a) as the form pisi ; that the difference between these
two is purely phonetic, credat Judaeus.

26. In the Umbrian pronoun or pronouns corresponding to

the Latin is ea id, besides forms derived from the

eso and ere. g^gj^^g ^_ g^^^j g^{^g_ g^^-^^. .^^g appear to have double

forms with s and r almost throughout. The forms are given
in full by Biicheler, Umhrica, p. 192-3.

Nom. sing. M. ere, erele ? esuf (ioT *es-unt-s)

F. eru-k eso

N. edek e-rse esum-eJc esom(-e)

Dative, common to both, esmei esme esmi-k
Genitive, Masc. er (?) ever irer ererek

Fem. erar, eraront
Ablative, Masc. eru{-ku) esu{-ku) essu iso isunt

Fern, erdk erahunt esa

Neut. issoc esu

Abl. PI. eriront esir isir esis{-co)

erereront (!).

The genitive plural erom (from the stem i-) may either be
due to the analogy of the genitive plural of feminine nouns, or
be explained as the other forms in r.

In ere eso- may we not see an example of a doublet due to sen-
tence accent in pro-ethnic Italic, eso-, accented, as a deictic pro-
noun, sinking to *ezo-, unaccented, when it was merely anaphoric,
which became ere in Umbrian and eizo- (ei in Latin characters
= {. (h) in the Oscan alphabet) in Oscan? There are many
illustrations of this kind of differentiation in pronouns, Eng.

1 This -de appears to have spread by analogy from the neuter forms, the d
originally being the final of the relative. Perhaps also from the old form of the
ablative in -d, which was lost except before this suffix {pu-e = qtio is not ablative
but instrumental). Cf. Thurneysen's explanation of Lat. idem.
Digitized by Microsoft®

S BETWEEN VOWELS IN UMBRIAN. § 26. 83

that (deictic) thst (conjunction and relative) : them and 'em, or
indeed the neuter form of the demonstrative that appropriated
to the deictic meaning, the less emphatic masculine the being
used for the article. In German der 'that,' der 'the' (to say-
nothing of der ' who ') are only distinguished (except in one or
two of the oblique cases) by the emphasis with which they are
pronounced, and on p. 439, § 583 ad fin. of the Grundriss Brug-
niann refers to an exactly parallel alternation of s and r, in this
very pronoun (amongst others) in Teutonic due to exactly the
same cause. The weakening of the vowel from a full e to the
half sound variously written e, i, ei (h) would be produced by
the same loss of accent. The distinction of meaning is pre-
served regularly in Umbrian', but in Oscan, as in Latin is, the
anaphoric pronoun is occasionally used as a demonstrative ad-
jective (T. B. 7 eizeic zicelei, 11 eizac egmad, 24 eizazunc egma-
zum, the only three examples) but regularly (eleven examples
in Tab. Bant.) as a pronoun ' he, she, it,' while the s form, as we
should expect, only occurs in the proper deictic sense (eisucen
zicelud T. B. 16), since if it were used in an unemphatic posi-
tion the s would sink in Oscan, as it had in pro-ethnic Italic, to
the voiced sound, whereas the use of the s form in the emphatic
position would not exercise any such positive influence to con-
vert the z to s". The influence of the anaphoric form is no
doubt responsible for the i in isunt issoc etc. This last word
brings us to the only difficulty of this view, if difficulty it can
be called, the ss in issoc and esso each of which occurs once in
the Tables. But before discussing these forms we may notice
another certain example of sentence- accent, the infinitive
erom in Umbrian, ezom in Oscan and the forms
eram era cet. in Latin'. This coincidence in irregu-
larity clearly points to a common cause, the fact that the verb
'to be ' was as a rule pronounced, if not altogether as an en-
clitic, at least without a sufficiently strong inde-
pendent accent to preserve the original s. Suritr

' The compound eri-hont contains the anaphoric pronoun just as in Latin
idem. Should we' suppose an accent on the affix, erihont ?
2 Cf. c. I. supr. §§ 8—9.
" Umbr. furent, Lat. /"'■gfLfgld'WA^Jjf.gsb^^g here, v. iiifr. § 56, p. 77.

c. 3

34! VKRNKR's I^VW- IX ITALY. § 27.

again, which BUcheler connects probably enough with sveso,
comparing the Latin sirempse, is on the same accentual footing
in the sentence as igitur, the first i of which is now generally
derived from the a of agitur corrupted by loss of accent. This
completes the number of words in Umbrian iii which r repre-
sents original s between vowels at the end of the first syllable.
The question of the as however is important and is best dis-
cussed before we leave the Umbrian forms behind us.

27. It has been generally assumed that these two forms

sufficiently accounted for the s between vowels in
issoc esso. ~ . . . •

the remaining forms where it was written singly,
as proving that the ss was the original form in Umbrian, and
therefore also in pro-ethnic Italic, since the pronoun seems to
occur in almost all dialects. I think however it will be admitted,
after a glance at the evidence briefly discussed in what follows,
that though this assumption might have been maintained so
long as it seemed necessary from a phonetic point of view, yet
if it had to stand or fall simply on the general evidence in
support of the ss, it could not be defended with any sort of
confidence.

Issoc occurs once in vil b. 3, sve neip j)ortust issoc pusei
suhra screhto est 'si nee portarit ita uti supra scriptura est'
(Biicheler), and esso once in vi a. 43, in the formula ' tiom esso
hue peracri pihaclu {tertiu) — (subocau suboco) ' in the following
line in the same formula occurring with a single s'. But in VI
and VII the pronoun occurs elsewhere thirty-nine times, always
with a single s. In the same line as issoc occurs appei else-
where always spelt with a single p. In vi and VI [ we have
ennom as well as (more frequently except in Vll b) enom, but
the Oscan and Latin forms of the word (e.g. on the Tabula
Bantina, where double letters are consistently^ written where-

1 It might be suggested that the double ss in these two words was connected
with the fact that they were slightly 'out of system.' Issoc =' ita' and essu
might very well be so translated in the formula. So that the traditional spelling
held in the pronoun but gave way to the attempt at greater phonetic accuracy
in the derivative adverb.

2 E.g. mallom (perh. containing tlje suffix -no-) meddtr. nudicatinom (1. 16),
medicatud (1. 24) as Buch. has pointed out are quite regular, the double letter
being lightened in polysyllables.

Digitized by Microsoft®

SS IN THE IGUVINE TABLES. § 27. 35

ever pronounced but only a single n in einom) seem to prove
that a single n was original. A still more certain example of
double letters etymologically unjustified is avvei vi a. 3 which is
the only other example besides essu in vi, appei perhaps = ad-
que (cf. e? re) but Bucheler compares eVe^ which would place it
on the same level as avvei : in any case the double letter is only
written once. Where it is not justifiable, the reason for it
appears to be an attempt to express the accent on a short
syllable; at least I can conceive of no other cause for avvei
ennom, and it would seem at least a possible explanation espe-
cially in the case of s\ Again, apart from the difficulty of
explaining the ss etymologically, it is hard to see how it ca"ii
have arisen in pro-ethnic Italic ; I do not know of any words
in which it is supposed to be Indo-European, and the change of
tt to ss does not seem to have taken place in Oscan^ and there-
fore not before the separation of the common stock. And
further it seems improbable that any language should have
possessed two such pronouns as *esso- and *ezo- of such closely
neighbouring form and meaning but of difi'erent origin, yet this
is the only alternative view of the relation of the Italic originals
of the actual forms we find in Latin, Umbrian and Oscan.
Finally the evidence of the Oscan inscriptions is strongly in
favour of the single s. We have no example at all of a double
ss in the pronoun though it is of fairly frequent occurrence, and
essuf (which is not certainly connected, and occurs in Umbrian
in II and IV, there of course with a single s) only once and on
the same inscription as esidu, which is one otherwise carelessly
engraved. The only Oscan inscriptions bearing on the point
are as follows" :

Z. 0. 17 is the one just mentioned where we have essuf side
by side with esidu {leiguss [LJufrikanuss also occur). This
shews either

^ Cf. seffei, for *se/ei = ' sibi' in Pelign. (Zv. I. I. M. D. no. 33) and bassim
(=|8affi>') C. I. L. 1181.

2 T. infr. § 30 p. 39 seq.

' I do not think I have omitted any in whioli the pronoun occurs except
those in which no letters arq]^jft^^^^.5j/i^(,^Ji^(esr.. profated).

3—2

36 VERN Ell's LAW IN ITALY. § 27.

1. If the engraver is trustworthy that the two words are
distinct and that the pronoun has only a single s ;

or, 2, as seems more probable, that the writing is too
careless to prove either. We have uunated with a single t but
on other inscriptions (e.g. no. 63) wherever any letters are
doubled we have tt in these perfect forms.

18. This shews esidu. .'.prufaited.

63. eisak eituvad with double letters written elsewhere.

143. 6o-OT= id; the inscriptions in Greek alphabet have
double letters.

In the Tabula Bantina besides the forms with z we have the
form quoted above eisucen, and here double letters are used
with great consistency.

This view of issoc essu and essuf is not essential to the
explanation of ere and eizo- as due to loss of accent, since it
seems at least possible that even ss should be reduced to a single
z by the same influence.

Digitized by Microsoft®

III. S between vowels in Oscan.

28. We have Oscan inscriptions from Areao/Oscan.

1. Samnium, including the Frentani.

2. Campania.

3. To the North.

a. In Volscian territory, one name at Tarracina in
Latin alphabet but with the Oscan mode of nomenclature.

/3. Doubtful missiles at Asculum in Picenum.

7. Doubtful inscription in Aequicolan territory (Z. 0, 1)
which Mommsen thinks spurious.

4 To the South

a. NoHh Lucania.

;8. Bruttii.

7. Messana.

No inference therefore can be drawn from s or r between
vowels in geographical names south of the northern boundary of
Samnium and Campania.

The direct evidence in Oscan as to the influence of accent
is confined to the inscriptions written in the Latin Extent of the
alphabet, since the local character does not dis- olcanimerlv-
tinguish the voiced and breathed s, using x {z) timu.
only to express the compound ts. The Latin z represents both
this and the voiced s. Of course there is a good deal of indirect
evidence illustrating the forms in other dialects, most of which
has been already discussed in dealing with the Umbrian forms :
one point, the question oT tt or ss in Oscan and pro-ethnic Italic,

38 verner's law in italy. § 29.

will be best discussed in connexion with the other Oscan phe-
nomena.

29. 1. s occurs between vowels, representing the breathed
B between sound, at the end of the first syllable in the follow-

vowels at the . i ■ /-\

end of the first mg words in Uscan.
syllable.

eisucen T. B. 16 osii T. B. 4 Caisidis (Z. O. 159)

em/T. B. 19, 21 pieisum T. B. 6 Aesernim (Z. 0. 166)

nesmwm T. B. 17, 26 praesentid'Y.'B.2\ (coin in Latin letters)

eisucen, v. supr. § 26.

esuf, § 27.

nesimum, § 18.

osii appears to be a complete word. The stone is not broken
off directly before it, but leaves a clear space as thougji
before a new word. Perhaps amosio {'annuo ' Fest.
Mtill. p. 26) should be referred to Oscan sources.

pieisum, a dis.syllable, pi- = qu-.

praesentid, contrast ezom.

Caisidis, an Oscan name as is shewn by its form OV. C OV.
though in Latin letters.

aserum T. B. 1. 24, has probably lost a nasal before the s.
If the s is for ss (ad-s-) it is due to the analogy of the
longer forms of the verb in which the single s would be
regular by Biicheler's law (cited § 27, p. 34, supr. note).

2. z occurs between vowels after an unaccented syllable
in the following words

angetuzet T. B. 19 censazet T. B. 20

eizazitiic egmazum T. B. 24 ezom T. B, 11 (cf. § 26, p. 3-3, supr.)

and the pronoun eizo- (cf. § 26, p. 33 sup.) and its compound
poizad {ligud) T. B. 20. Cf pollad on the Cipp. Abell. and
Umbr. pora.

s occurs between vowels after an unaccented syllable only in

the last line of the Tabula Bantina, in tacusini of which

only T,..IM are on (he stonc^tlic intermediate letters
Digitized by Microsoft®

tt AND SS IN OSCAN. § 30. 39

being Biicheler's conjecture, which would not be affected
by the substitution of z for s.

30. The question whether I.-Eu. d+t, t + t cet. had be-
come SS in pro-ethnic Italic is one of some import- tt o,, gg ;„
ance and bears directly on the Latin change of s to Oscan.
r, but it is most conveniently discussed in this chapter as most
of the evidence comes from Oscan'. To begin with however we
have the forms adgretus futus gnitus given by Festus which
shew t where classical Latin has ss, or s after a long vowel (Ost.
Perf. Exc. VI.). These Brugmann explains {Gds. § 501) as
contractions like cette for cedite, mattus for maditus. This view
seems at least somewhat arbitrary. If it were possible to regard
the forms as archaic or dialectic it would be much more natural
to do so. Further no example is quoted of ss in Oscan, only
Pelign. oisa (v. infr.), but on the contrary ulttiuf from the
Gippus Abellanus which Brugmann and Osthoff explain in the
same way as adgretus etc., though, as Bartholomae points out,
there is no analogy for such a form as *utitio. The evidence
seems to shew that tt was regular in Oscan.

1. We have the double ttiu the 3rd pers. pi. of the perfect,
Osc. teremnattens, Pel. coisattens. Into the Evidencefor
difHcult question or rather riddle of the origin of **'
these forms it is needless to enter here. We may hold with
Osthoff that they are all derived from the analogy of the per-
fect of the root sta- ; or compare the Latin forms in ss (amas-
sem) with Bartholomae, or with others the Celtic t perfect
(flsruhirt), but we are bound to keep in view the fact that the tt
is regular on all inscriptions which shew any double letters.

' This section was written with the body of the Essay in March last (1887)
before the publication of Bartholomae's article on the question in Bezs. Beitrdye
XII. The issue there raised is rather broader, and in deference to his authority
I have added a note at the end of the chapter dealing directly with the theory
he maintains. It is however of equal concern to both of us to shew that I.-Eu.
t + t, d + t cet. =Osc. tt, not ss as in Latin. I have therefore left this section as
it was first written, only noticing where Bartholomae gives evidence that had
escaped me or questions any I had accepted. As we worked independently,
there is no need to point out more exactly how far our investigations coincided
or diverged. Digitized by Microsoft^

40 verner's law in italy. § 30.

There is no doubt about the form whatever there may be about
its explanation.

2. iiUtiuf occurs several times quite clearly on the Cipp.
Ab.

3. punttram (ib.) contrasts with the Latin tonstrix etc.,
and perhaps shews the same stem as Skt. panth- path- {=pnth-).
But in this word and in alttram Bartholomae considers the
tt a purely Oscan extension of an original t.

4. The following names (if they are not genuine Oscan,
what are they ?) :

Siuttiis Zv. 0. 62.

Tittius Zv. O. 108.

Bla... Zv. 0. Ill which is taken as the beginning of the

Roman name BlaMius.
KoTTft etc. Zv. O. 147 — 152 ; contrast Latin Cossus.
SraTTiTjis Zv. O. 160.

5. Bartholomae gives also

a. [ajittium C. Ab. 53, cf. aeteis T. B. 12 and Gr. alaa.
/3. patt... Zv. 0. 4 which Bartholomae reads as * pattens,

considering it a sigmatic aori.st from the root pat-.

He traces the participle in viu pat[tust] Zv. 0. 73.
y. angetuzet T. B. " = ingesse^-int," which however for

the present at least seems doubtful.

6. The two Latin words fidtilis (in meaning clearly con-
^ ,.,. ... nected with /»)2(io but contrasting with the genuine

futtths rutdiis . . . . .

mitto (jutta Latin fusilis) and rutiliis (rutilare) which looks
gu m I eia. -^^^^ ^ connexion of RJJDH^ {rufus ruber epv6po<;)
seem easily explained as borrowings. Their limited sigaitica-
tion points the same way, v. infr. § 44, p 61. So does the
combination P. Rutiliics Rufus', the last word being certainly
Oscan by the side of Lat. ruber, ruttilo- or rather ruttlo- and
rutlci- {-om etc.) would be the regular forms of the two stems in
Oscan like meddix and medicd{-tud) by Blicheler's law^ The

1 So Stolz, though he does not explain the t.

■^ Cic. Br. 2V).

^ Cf. p. oi u. supv.

Digitized by Microsoft®

tt AND SS IN OSCAN. § 30. 41

Eomans in borrowing the word took the easier form and still
further lightened it by the anaptyctic vowel'. Futtilis would
be a regular adjective in -Hi- formed from the stem of the past
participle like fusilis fissilis missilis rasilis sutilis and many
more given by Roby, to be distinguished from those like utilis
agilis habilis nuhilis fragilis facilis formed from the verbal
stem. Further the words mitto gutta (guttur) littera (which
seems certainly the right spelling) are quite simply explained
as Oscan on this hypothesis, mitto is a frequentative (i.e. a
nominal from the past participle) from the root seen in 0. H. G.
midan; gutta a past participle, and littera, probably *littra in
Oscan, a noun from the root or stem lit- with the common in-
strumental suffix -tra-, Vike punt-tram^.

Against this there is simply no evidence in Oscan. The
only possible example of s or ss derived from tt is Fisanius
Z. 0. 83, one of a batch of inscriptions in which double letters
are regular, and Fiisu . . in Z. 0. 38 (v. supr. § 19, p. 25). Of course
these names might be very easily borrowed. Elisuist in Z. 0.
11, as the form shews, contains a stem lis found also in liisd..
In no other Oscan inscription is there any example of s or ss
derived from tt. In Pelignian (Z. D. 12) we have
the phrase casnar oisa aetate, the second word of '' '^""'"'
which is generally taken as a past participle of utor in a pas-
sive sense, 'having ended his life' or 'having enjoyed (great)
age ' (? aetate), the former of which is scarcely the sort of senti-
ment we expect on the tomb of a man who further describes
himself as Des forte faber ('dives, fortunae faber').

' Bartholomae supposes rutilus derived from Etruscan, but there is of course
no evidence for this beyond the phonetic possibility he maintains.

^ Ost. Perf. p. 557 gives the four words just mentioned together with littus
litus, glutus gluttire, mutus muttire, iuca hucca, Jupiter Juppiter, stupa stuppa,
mucus mucciis, sucus succus ; 'es ist ebeu wie gesagt ein problem fur kiinftige
forsohung, noch einmal die losung des ratsels zu fiuden, naeh welohem princip
die lateinische sprache zur auspragung soloher — sei es satzphonetisoher sei es
aiich dialektischei — doubletten gelangte.' After aU the riddle does not seem
very terrible, littus for litus may safely be ascribed to confusion with littera: in
all the others it is noteworthy that we have an accented u before the double
letter. In all but sucus the Romance forms vouch for a short vowel in popular
Latin, and it may at least be conjectured that the easier fi, §, took the place of u
when accented while the cojfiisSSgflf'tfekilMfM'Si^h that the vowel dropped.

42 VEUNER'S law in ITALY. § 30.

Sanskrit enas (' that ') = Latin oinos {' one ') ;

ekas ' one ' perhaps = Oscan eko- ' that.'
Why should not

Sanskrit eSas ' that ' (Gr. ojo?) = Pelign. oisa,

so that casnar oisa aetats = ' senex unica aetate,' which contrasts
very well with the ' few feet ' {pes pros) of soil he occupies ?

If this explanation be rejected as too fanciful we must
either take Bartholomae's suggestion {Bezz. Beitr. 12. 80) that
the spelling with s is due to Latin influence like the word faher
and the alphabet used in the inscription, or suppose that ss
was regular in Pelignian as in Latin and Umbrian ; the diffi-
culty would be that Pelignian has the t perfect as regularly as
Oscan {coisatens Zv. D. 29). But there is clearly no warrant
for doubting that tt was regular in Oscan. If so, it would natu-
rally seem to follow, pace Bartholomae's theory, that tt was
kept in pro-ethnic Italic, and only sank to a sibilant in some of
the separate dialects. Accordingly adgretus etc. would natu-
rally be regarded as archaic forms, perhaps of the same age as
Lases, Auselius, with others quoted by the glossographers, and
the newly-discovered Nmnasioi on the Praenestine inscription
(v. infr. § 34, p. 48).

Note. In the article I have referred to (' Die "\^ertretung des altital.
ss im Oskischen,' B. B. xii. 80) Bartholomae develops a theory that Indo-
European d + t,t + t cet. had already sunk to ss or some approximate sound
in pro-ethnic Italic, which in Oscan was once more converted to tt or J)]'.
His main concern is to shew that tt does appear in Oscan to represent
I.-Eu. t+t etc., which as we have seen is certainly the case. The rest of
his proof seems far more problematical. It is necessary to follow the
argument a little closely since, if correct, it affects some of the evidence on
the Latin change of s to ;•, though almost equally in favour of and against
my theory. Its loss and gain cau be estimated very shortly. Two words
in which s derived from tt is kept after an unaccented syllable and which
I had explained' on the view that the tt was kept in Latin till after 350
B.C. when the period of rhotacism was over, are now thrown on our hands
quasillus and excusare. The former like pusillus must then have come
into use from Oscan or Sabine later than 350 b.c, and the s of eMusare etc.
may have been kept by cmissa. On the other hand if ss (s after long
vowels) had replaced tt from the earliest times in Latin my theory gains

' \. iufr. § 51, p. 72.
Digitized by Microsoft®

baktholomae's theory. 43

the not inconsiderable support of tlie mass of past participles like laesus
fusus rosus cet. in all of whioh we should then regard the preservation of
the s as due to accent, just as much as in caseus rdsa etc.

The arguments for Bartholomae's theory as opposed to the view I have
advocated may be very briefly summarised. In justice to him I should
add that he seems throughout to regard it a.s a matter of common agree-
ment, following Osthoflf and Brugmann, that I.-Eu. tt had become ss in
pro-ethnic Italic, and does not attempt to establish this point directly.
The only forms in which an admittedly original « or ss seems to him to
have become t are

1. patt-lens?] Zv. 0. 4 which he derives as an aoriat from *pat-sens.

2. The very doubtful "angetuzet (T. 'B.) = ingesser{nt." The meaning
of ' ingesserint ' does not seem very happy in the sentence where it occurs.
' aestimaverint ' is the equivalent usually given for the word from the needs
of the contest.

3. The perfect in tt which he compares, clearly with great probability,
to the Latin forms in ss, amassem etc. But it must be observed that even
from Thurneysen's investigations the origin of the doubled s in such forms
is hardly certain, though if we assume them to be merely bye-forms of
the s- or -sis- aorist, Bartholomae's view would give us a very satisfactory
explanation of the Oscan forms.

If his theory were merely that original ss became tt in Oscan it would
present no difficulties from my standpoint. Of the objections that follow
only those in Oscan would possess any weight against such a view and
these are not very serious.

Turning however to the arguments against the theory as it stands, we
encounter a good many substantial difficulties.

A. In Oscan.

1. aserum T. B. 20, where the first s is probably from -cfr- {ned-s-},
Bartholomae regards as a late formation.

2. meliissai Zv. 95, if correctly transcribed, he corisiders a Greek
word.

3. essuf he explains as for *eJcsuf, but the ss is of very doubtful
authority, v. § 27, p. 35 supr. So also n\e\ssimas Zv. 0. 41, which is not so
certain, as the s is elsewhere regular in this word. Of. § 18, p. 28 supr.

B. In Latin.

1. adgretus futus gnitus.

2. {f)ss remains in vorsus prOsa etc. whereas in words out of system,
if the s had existed from the earliest period of Latin we should have ex-
pected the regular change of rs to rr.

3. A very serious difficulty to the view that tt > ss was an Italic
not a Latin change is thcPfiBfefilS^ ^^f^sft^ in spelling even after long

44 verner's law in italy.

vowels down to Cicero's time. It seems equally improbable that the
language should have kept for four centuries either the sound of the ss in
that position, or the spelling after the sound was lost. Of course the ss in
writing may have been merely due to the influence of the forms after short
vowels like missus, but again it seems very improbable that the double
letters, which themselves were quite a late introduction, should have been
written except where they were sounded. The difficulty vanishes if we
suppose the change of it to ss only newly completed when double letters
began to be written. The long vowel would not lighten the consonant all
at once.

4. Finally there are the words quasillus excusare mentioned above
which are more difficult to explain on Bartholomae's hypothesis.

C. Generally.

1. No one supposes tt had become ss in Indo-European and there-
fore we cannot start with more than )>]) in Italic,

2. and if therefore this ]•]> became ss in Italic before the dialects
split, is it likely that individual dialects should exhibit the converse change
of ss to tt 1

3. The forms with tt in Latin (v. supr.) must have come from some-
where, and it does not seem hkely that the same people who failed- to
pronounce tt without Usping should have so altered a century or two later
as to change t to tt.

4. Briefly we have three certainties to argue from —

a. Original t r + < in Indo-European,

etc. J
/3. tt in corresponding positions in Oscan, and
y. ss in Latin.

Clearly the obvious conclusion is that
i. ItaUo tt

ii. remained tt in Oscan, and
iii. became ss in Latin.

This may seem a very small result of so long a digression but the be-
lief in an Italic ss seems to be a superstition that dies hard. It is to be
hoped that even its ghost may haunt us uo more.

Digitized by Microsoft®

IV. Rliotacism in the Minor Dialects.

31. Since the evidence from the minor dialects is so scanty
it might seem more logical to discuss them after
Latin, but there is very little to be said about them
and it is more convenient to place it directly after that of Oscan
and Umbrian, to which of course they are more closely akin.

Mommsen (Untert. Diall.) enumerates Scope.

Messapian

Oscan
Volscian

Sabellian

Marsian
Marnicinian
Sabine
Picentine.

Zv^taieff (Tnscrr. It. Med. Dial.) gives inscriptions from

Picentes Marsi

Marrucini Aequicolani

Sabini Volsci

Vestini Falisci

Peligni Capenates.

Mommsen (p. 96) describes the Messapii as ' ein vorgriechis-
cher den Kretern und Makedonern gleichartiger Stamm.' The
rest may be discussed in Zv^taieff's order, i.e. the geographical
from North to South, leaving the Falisci and Capenates to the
last as more akin to the Latin. It will be seen that in many
dialects, e.g. Volscian, where it has been assumed there was no
rhotacism on the ground of the occurrence of s between vowels
in several words at th^'®S#<fc|ytMe^''fe^E^yllable, the evidence for

4C vebnee's law in italy. § 32.

such a conclusion is greatly shaken by that of Umbrian and
Oscan already discussed. What newer results seem to be
afforded by the evidence are given by the table and map at
the end of this chapter.

Picentine.

32. Zv. D. 1—4.

There appears to be no final rhotacism in the Piceatine
inscriptions; e.g.tetis\ alies\

Otherwise

1. So far as they can be said to be deciphered, they appear
to offer no evidence as to rhotacism, and

2. If they did no conclusions could be based on materials
so completely uncertain.

The names of places, etc., however in Picenum appear to
afford ground for supposing that in respect of rhotacism Picen-
tine occupies the same position as Umbrian \ Falerio (Mod.
Fallerone) was a municipal town only made into a colony under
Augustus (Plin. iii. 13. 18). The name can hardly be separated
from that of Falerii (Mod. Falleri) in South Etruria, where
Falisci shews that r represents an original s. The river Flusor,
too (Mod. Chienti), which appears in the Tabula Peutingea is
most naturally regarded as an os- es- stem like arhor^ derived
from Fluusa (Osc). It is not quite easy to see the origin of
the s if it is connected with Jiuo. If rhotacism was present
Cumerus (Mod. M. Gomero) may contain an original s and the
following names may be fairly regarded as further evidence for
the explanation already suggested of the words in Umbrian
which shew s between vowels after the first syllable.

Names in River Flosis (Mod. Potensa), marked in Smith's and

Picenum. Droysen's Atlases.

1 In this and the following names of places I am indebted for most of the
references to De Vit's Oiwmasticon or the Dictionary of Geography.

^ The lengthening of the stem -vowel in honorem, etc., is perhaps peculiar to
Latin.

Digitized by Microsoft®

MAllRUCINrAN. § 33. 47

River Misius (Mod. Asola, distinct from R. Misciis, Mod.

Musone).
Pausulae Plin. iii. 13. 18.
Mod. Riv. Aso.

Marrucinian.

S3. Zv. D. 5—7.

No. -5. In Sabellic alphabet. In the transliteration so far
accepted (though scarcely £|,s yet translated) we j^g evidence in

have the words inscriptions.

asin rurasim (Corssen ' rusticuna ') irkesie iritn.

asin gives no certain evidence as to rhotacism.

In rurasim the a is the same symbol (V) elsewhere trans-
literated by u, but the a in asin is \/. The word is altogether
doubtful in form and it is improbable that rur- should be the
same s.tem as the Latin ruris on the same inscription as asin by
the ^ide of the Umbrian asa rusem. On the original we haye it
pmictuated ru : rusim.

irkesie, taken from I • RK..S : IE. The meaning of this
word and of irim is unknown.

No. fi. The Bronze of Rapino in Latin alphabet. It shews
(apparently) that Ma,rrucinian had no final rhotacisnti (aisos,^
asignas). It has no double consonants (amatens Maroucai).
The dialect geems intermediate to Oscan anid Umbrian, final
lis becomes f (iafc) as in Umbrian but the diphthongs are
preserved as in O.scaij.

No. 7. In Latin alphabet AS. an abbreviation for Asinii
fiUus.

On the whole there is no evidence of rhotacism, and there-
fore aisos (' dels ') asignas (' natas ad ararn ') esuc (' illo ') asum
(' arsum,' cf. § 18, p. 22, supr.) prove nothing; on the other hand
they are no evidence against rhotacism in the dialect. There
are no names in the district which help us, but geographical
considerations, as is c\B^-iti&e>t^ rsuc^smm at Mr Heawood's map,

48 VEIiNEll'S LAW IX ITALY. § 34.

point to the concluBion that rhotacism was absent from Marru-
cinian as from Sabine.

Sabine, etc.

34. On the only Sabine inscription (Zv. D. 8) we have
No rhotacisjti inesene (as Biicheler has shewn for mensene) and
in Sabine. Flusare = Lat. Florali. But the glosses (collected
by Mommsen) and many names we find to be distinctively Sabine
shew clearly that there was no rhotacism. Fasena, Auselius,
Lehasius, Yalesius, Volesus^, Volusus a.Te given by various autho-
rities as Sabine. Also Casinum Varro (LL. 7, 28, 29) interprets
as ' vetus.' crepero res creperae Varro says are also Sabine and
connected with crepusculum; if so they were probably borrowed
Sabine names '^ith the s form. Of Sabine origin are the host
at Rome. ^f gentile names at Rome in -sius which begin to

be very frequent on inscriptions under the Empire and had
doubtless been widely in use among the un-official classes a
good deal earlier. The influx is perhaps to be connected with
the migration of the agricultural population to Rome which the
reformers strove in vain to check or reverse. Such names are
Calvisius Numisius Vnlusius Aedesius Agrasiiis, cf also Maesius
'lingua Osca' Fest. Mlill. p. 136. It is curious to note a trace
of the origin of the name in the conjunction Calvisius Sabinus,
the friend of Pliny the younger, and also Oaesius Sabinus (Mart.
7. 27) Caesia Sabina (Cic. pro Caec. 4, 6), and this last name
may share with the Umbrian Caesena and the Latin Kaeso the
parentage of the numerous gentile names' beginning with
Gaes-, Caesennia' Caesellia Caesernia Caesetia Caesidia Caesiena
Caesilia Caesinia Caesionia.

In the new Latin inscription on the fibula from Praeneste
we have the dative of a proper name, JSfumasioi. If the date,
as Biicheler' holds with the explorers Helbig and Dummler, is

1 The name of a gigantic Satine Juv. 8. 182, Ov. Pont. 3. 2. 105.
^ Taken from De Vit.

3 Also Gaesenia, C. I. L. 1191, the n being probably doubled by the Latin accent
in its third stage.

■■ Jlheini.'^rhe!: Mii.':e\im, Vol. 42 (1887), 2nd no.
Digitized by Microsoft®

MAKSIAN. § 36. 49

as early as the 5th or 6th century B.C. it might be considered
an interesting example of Latin in which s had not yet passed
to r. At that date it is immaterial whether we regard it as
Latin or Sabine.

35. The solitary Vestinian inscription (Zv. D. 9) offers
no evidence. From geographical considerations it y ,■ ■
probably ranks with Sabine and Marrucinian.

Pelignian (Zv. D. 10 foil.) certainly coincided with Oscan, e.g.
28 T. Valesies 29 upsaseter. . .coisatens. The
sign s however is always used even where " wnian.
(e.g. upsaseter) in the Tabula Bantina we have z {censazet).
oisa in 12 has been already discussed, Minerva in 33
cannot be a true Pelignian form though the inscription
was found at Sulmo.

Marsian.

36. Here again the inscriptions (Zv. D. 34 foil.) give no help.
We have s between vowels but only after the first syllable
esos (37), Caso Casuntonom (43), Vesime (41). Pliny (H. N.
17. 22, quoted by Mommsen) notices a similarity between the
Umbrian and Marsian met hods of vine culture, which it must be
confessed does not prove much. But geographically the Marsi
appear connected with the Latins and Volscians and therefore
very probably shared their rhotacism.

Note. In Zv. D. 39 (which Mommsen and others consider a
Latin inscription) the third letter of the name of the deity, j^fote as to
elsewhere called Vesuna, has been generally read as z. ' Vezune.'
It will be seen however on inspection of the facsimile (Tab. vi. 6)
that the inscription has been carelessly engraved with only a straight
tool (e.g. the o's are square •0-). Hence to make s three strokes
were required, ^, but the engraver' was careless about joining the
strokes at the right points and instead of ^ we get the lowest stroke
affixed too high ^ (the s in the last word libs) and the middle stroke
joined to the top too far forward Ti "X the sign in the supposed
' YezuneJ The sign at the end of the first line A is the same with

' Compare the forms orS on ffle Loorian mscr. Eoehl I. G. A. 321.
C. 4

50 verner's law in italy. § 37.

its top stroke lost, and all of tliem are merely equivalent to tbe Latin
s denoting probably as in Pelignian both the breathed and voiced
sound.

Volscian.

Zl. The Aequicolan inscriptions, if they are genuine, give
no evidence. But we have the names Gliternum
Aeqman. (Y\m. iii. 17. 1) Amitemum which may contain -es

stems (v. supr. p. 16, § 11). Norvesiae proves nothing in our
ignorance of the Aequian accent and may have lost an n before
the s. The map shews that the geographical argument is not
very decisive, but it seems slightly to favour a connexion
between Volscian Aequian Marsian and Latin.

Mommsen states that 'rhotacism is strange to Volscian'
relying on the occurrence of s between vowels in the
scian. ^^jy inscription (the Tabula Veliterna), but it
is always after the first syllable, esaristrom (cf. Umbr. esona),
asif (' arens ') and the name Cosuties, and s occurs here in
Umbrian where rhotacism was certainly present. Generally the
dialect seems closely akin to Umbrian e.g. in the palatalisa-
tion of k before e and i (fasia), and the change of final -ns to f.
pihom recalls the Umbrian pihatu, etc. The geographical
names too, FrUsino (Juv. 3. 224, Mod. Frosinone) Casinum
by the side of Liris (which was originally *Loisis if it is to be
connected with lira) Privernwtn (p. 15) and the coin inscription
Auruncud in Sabine letters if it really is to be regarded as
a genuine Volscian form dating from the time when Aurunca
still existed, i.e. before it was destroyed by the Sidicini in
336 B.C.', all point to rhotacism under much the same conditions
as in Latin, and Auruncud would apparently shew that the
Volscian accent was the same as the Latin, though I do not
think any emphasis can really be laid upon this word. The
strong resemblance to Umbrian in other respects seems to me
the chief ground for supposing rhotacism in Volscian.

1 Cf. infr. § 5G, p. 78.
Digitized by Microsoft®

FALISCAN. § 38. 51

Faliscan.

38. Though there is a fairly large number of inscriptions
assigned to this dialect the evidence is somewhat Faliscan MM-
confused and it is difficult to arrive at more than a ""'*•
probable conclusion. The following are all the words that occur
which affect the question of rhotacism :

No. 55. Gesilia= Lat. Gaesellia.

56. Caesula.

60. Zertenea =Sertinia, cf 68 de zenatuo sententiad, which
seems to indicate the origin of the z, the preposi-
tion being treated as part of the word and the
accent of the compound falling on one of the following syllables,
dezdnatuo or dezenatuo (according as the Faliscan accent was
Italic or Latin). Sucb phrases as these caused a variation in
the spelling and the z appeared for initial s even where there
was nothing in its surroundings in the sentence to cause the
change of sound. This explanation implies nothing as to rhota-
cism since the originally sibilant character of the first sound
would be preserved in any case by the influence of the large
number of cases in which there was no tendency to change
it to r or z. The difference between s and z would be less
anomalous.

On this inscription (60) we find mate : for mater, and in 68
pretod de zen. sent, shewing that final r had a weak Final r
easily assimilated sound as in CretaQ and modern ""eathe ■
English.

65. M. Clipearius.

68. Menerva.

70 a (the inscription in Saturnians). Gond[ec]orant, sai-
[pis\su7ne, dederun[f], sesed.

70 b. Minervai, dederunt, coiraveront. This part of the

inscription Zv^taieff considers a later addition in Latin. It has

no trace of either Faliscan dialect or Etruscan alphabet.

71. Voltio Folcozeo Zeoatoi f. On the Z of Zextoi, cf supr.
jjQ gQ Digitized by Microsoft®

4—2

52 VERNER's law in ITALY. § 38.

This appears to be all the evidence on the question. It
Conclusion. leaves us three alternatives :

1. To consider Faliscan a non-rhotacising dialect, regarding
Menerva Glipearius as borrowed from Latin and 70 a as being
pure Latin as much as 70 b. Then Caesula as contrasted with
Folcozeo^ gives us the original relation between sound and
accent. This seems however unlikely since

a. Menerva occurs in a certainly non-Latin inscr., though
it also occurs in Pelignian, and

/3. the modern name (which wherever it is derived from
the ancient appears invariably to represent the pronunciation of
it prevailing on the spot) of Falerii is Fallen. This seems to
prove also that the Faliscans kept the old Italic accent on the
first syllable.

7. The geographical position of the Faliscans renders it
probable that they shared the rhotacism of the Latins and
Umbrians.

2. To consider Faliscan identical with Latin in point of
rhotacism though keeping the Italic accent. Caesula and
GaeselUa prove no more in Faliscan than in Latin as their
origin is so uncertain. We should in this case regard Folcozeo
as an Oscan or Sabine name with its original sound exactly
reproduced. Coiraveront in 70 b if it is not actually Latin,
would give us the same difficulty as the Latin coira cura v. infra
§ 58, p. 79, and Glipearius would be regular,

3. To consider Faliscan rhotacism identical with Latin
mi7ius the changes due to i and u. Here as in Umbrian there
is .really no evidence on the question. Caesula would be
regular.

Of these alternatives the second seems far the most probable
and has been assumed in the colouring of the map.

• The name Folcatius appears in the Index to the first volume of the C. I. L.
but in the inaor. (783) it is only a doubtful conjecture, which should perhaps he
corrected by the Faliscan form.

Digitized by Microsoft®

TABLE OF DIALECTS. § 39. 53

Summary.

39. The dialects may be divided into five classes in point
of rhotacism, though perhaps to little purpose, since a charac-
teristic of this kind argues very little by its presence or absence
for the affinity of any two dialects in other respects. Indeed
the whole argument from geography rests on the 'chain' as
opposed to the ' tree ' theory.

Digitized by Microsoft®

TABLE

SHEWIKG THE PREVALENCE OF

RHOTACISM IN THE ITALIC DIALECTS

AS EVIDENCED BY TRADITION, INSCKIPTIONS, AND LOCAL NAMES.
Names in brackets are included under the name they follow.

I. Dialects in which Rhotacism was certainly present.

1. Latin (Rutulian).

2. Umbrian. In this dialect only both final and

medial Rhotacism.

II. Dialects in which Rhotacism was probably present.

1. Picentine.

2. Faliscan.

3. Volscian.

III. Dialects in which there is no evidence but that of geographical

contiguity.

1. Marsian.

2. Aequian.

3. Hernican.

4. Vestinian.

5. Auruncanian.

I V. Dialect in which Rhotacism was probably absent.

Marrucinian.

V. Dialects in which Rhotacism was certainly absent.

1. Peligcian.

2. Sabine.

3. Oscan (Bantian).

The result is embodied in Mr Heawood's map. Names whose
form is of importance are printed in ordinary type : those in Italics
shew the distribution of the dialects as denoting the places where
inscriptions have been found : those in capitals have no reference to
the argument. Modern names are enclosed in brackets. The ground
plan of the tribal divisions is enlarged and slightly modified from
those given by Mommsen (Unterit. Diall.) and Droysen {Historische
Ilandatlas).

Digitized by Microsoft®

DIALECT MM' OF

ITALY

Cir. 400 B.C.

SHEWING THE AREA OF

RHOTACISM

jyuB Jfuri -Iihatai:isrrL
^^i Jihi/tadym prohahle
yon Htuttucism. „
No e\-idence ejvt-pt po K/niphictL/
condpiuty
.Va/ijt» ot' importan/x ffr their thrni , Ouis liScULTUm

SilBS at" insaiptutas shfrw^ th^ tir<ai of diaiects , Aits. £aiiii/i
MudoTi ruunes tti bracWts . thus .. (Asol f Afffionei

E Hea»-oodEA.EKG.S-.£«Z

StojiTords Ge':fQ.' Estab^-

Digitized by Microsoft®

56 veener's law in italy. § 41.

something like intelligible order, none made such economical
use of the examp'es, i.e. there was none in which the same word
appeared so rarely under different headings. It is perhaps in-
evitable that there should be a certain amount of crossing
between the classes, since in many cases a particular change
may be the result of more than one cause, either of which would
have been singly sufficient to produce it, as a man may have
more than one motive for an action. Nevertheless in com-
paring rival schemes, that is clearly the most exact, and there-
fore in reality the simplest and truest, which can find a separate
category for each separate aggregate of similar cases, or, so
to speak, can house the different families of words within the
strongest and thickest party-walls. But inasmuch as the pre-
sent scheme was only gradually developed it is probably still
open to improvement, though for the reasons indicated I am
inclined to be content with it as a fair working hypothesis.
Accordingly in this as in preceding sections prominence has
been given to the difficulties as well as to the advantages of the
arrangement adopted. Of one thing however I aili convinced,
there is some definite rule, if not discovered, then waiting
discovery.

41. Before however proceeding to discuss the evidence in
„ - , the same way in this as in the other Italic dialects.
Introductory there are one or two general questions arising from

the fuller state of our information as to Latin
which must be noticed first. These are (1) the points in which
the change appears to present special phonetic characteristics,
(2) the legitimacy of the ' borrowing * hypothesis, (3) the date
of the change of s to r in Latin, and (4) the bearing of the
evidence of rhotacism on the change of the Latin accent.

42. Apart from the general phonetic aspect of the change

of s to r which has been already discussed, two

Character- j- . - • t • i ■ i, ,.

istics of the leatures in Latm rhotacism call for remark, as
foTatin^""''' ^®"'& apparently peculiar to it, namely the influence
1. Influence of of i and u, and the influence of the r resulting
ia?if n on tie f^,^^^^ g on a preceding vowel'. As to the first, it

1 Br. G<h. § 33. 1.
Digitized by Microsoft®

INFLUENCE OF r ON i -AND U. § 42. 57

may or may not be peculiar to Latin' ; the second clianoe.
appears absent in Umbrian, /wreni corresponding to tjw change on
the Latin forent'. The rule is that i and U pre- * ""'' "•
ceding r that has come from s become e and S respectively.
Not much stress can be laid on such examples as tempus tem-
poris, cinis cineris, as the o in the first case probably and the e
in the second possibly, represents the original vowel, but in
sero ("rjfii) where the e is the vowel of the present-reduplication,
we know i was original, and it is extremely probable that this
was the case in the other two verbs of more or less parallel
form, gero and queror, where the Latinised Celtic gaesum and
the Latin quaeso quaero seem to shew the strong form of the
regular ai : i Ablaut in the Short A series, *giso and *quiso
(cf. miser : maestus) being ' 6th class ' or ' aorist ' presents, like
mic-dre liqu-ere cet. It is perhaps as well to remark that this
influence of r upon i and u is not in any way inconsistent with
their influence on s. r may be easier to pronounce than s in
connexion with i and u, but o and e easier with r than * and u.
Thus

(u)ru , . ,

>- are easier than

(u)su , ^ 1 or] . ^, (ur
... . I «,i^ ^c.o.^i. uL^c^u < ;., . , but also } easier than < . .
{tp^i J ( {i)si er ) [ir

It is however remarkable that an original r, as in mr, vireo,
pirus, hirundo, hirudo, does not exercise this influence on a
preceding i. The reason I suppose must be that the Latin r,
which came from Indo-European, was a genuine trilled conso-
nant, while the r which arose from the careless and, so to speak,
slight pronunciation of s had more vocalic character, and conse-
quently more influence on the preceding voweP.

1 V. § 20supr. p. 26.

' The difference however is probably not phonetic. Parent benurent would
be restored on the analogy of the singular ftist benust while in Latin the analogy
worked conversely, perhaps helped by the infin. fore which may be for *fuere,
tuderor etc. shew the regular e.

'^ This seems fairly well illustrated by the English pronunciation of r. "It
is strongest [i.e. most genuinely consonantal] between two vowels, as in merit"
(A. M. Bell, quoted by Koby, Vol. I. App. i.), and it does not seem much harder to
pronounce the i in birret than the g in merit : but where the r has its weak
sound as before a consonant or finally it always 'broadens' (more correctly I
think 'lowers') the vowel, a.PSi*ifi?'ii^^UPWffS> y/heie the vowel is not to be

o8 VEENER's law in ITALY. § 42.

An interesting example of tliis is the difference between the

Lat Flora J^atin Flora and the Oscan Fluusa\ The original

Osc. Fluusa. of both was *Fl6voza or Fldvuza in Italic (perhaps

shewing the same participial sufiSx as some trace in

the neuter iu Lat. papaver cadaver, and therefore representing^

the I.-Eu. stem *bhl- -uos-), which in Latin became immediately
either *Fl6vora or *Fl6vura, and ultimately in either case
*Flovora and, contracted, Flora, while in Oscan either *Fl6voza
sank to *Fl6vuza, or the latter was the form before the lan-
guages separated, and * Fldvuza became *Flouza, and ultimately
*Fluza written Fluusa. This seems to cast some doubt on the
derivation suggested for the Picentine river Flusor (p. 46),
since if the contraction had not taken place in Italic it would
probably have become *Fl6vura, and hence *F%uror as the
Latin Flora. We may suppose, however, that the contraction
had taken place in Umbrian before the period of rhotacism,
and this is also indicated by the Umbr. rusem- e', as contrasted
with the Latin ruris (Zend ravanh-) ihuris (^d'o??). This diver-
gence between the influence, or rather the date of the contrac-
tive influence, of accent in Latin and the other Italic dialects is
further indicated by the Latin ^ 6per-is, humerus, ti'dmerus by
the side of the Umbrian onse and the Oscan udpsannaTn
l>i lovfMcTifi, and need not surprise us more than the general
„, , , divergence of Latin accent from the Italic, which
Umbrian rho- was preserved in the other dialects. At a time
when accent was shifting, as it must have done in

distinguished from that of her herd, visitor word. Note that the pronunciation
of stirring, etc. is due to the influence of stir, etc.

^ Note that of course s in the Oscan alphabet may represent either the
voiced or the breathed sound.

^ It is scarcely necessary to observe that it does not represent the I.-Eu.
feminine form, but an Italic feminine formed from the masculine stem, i.e. the
noun which became in Latin ^os.

* The accent which by the contraction in Umbrian fell on the syllable imme-
diately before the z would not it is true (§ 26, p. 33) convert it to the breathed
sound but it certainly would prevent its change to ?'.

* This will be, I think, admitted as an easier explanation than Brugmann's
hypothesis of an Indo-European doublet *6meso- *6mso. Further examples of
a contraction which took place after but not before the rhotacism are the forms
dedro cedre.

Digitized by Microsoft®

BOKKOWING. § 43. 59

Latin before the rhotacism (v. infr. § 47), it would naturally be
given in pronunciation with less marked emphasis, and hence
would not exercise so much contracting influence, and the same
interval which allowed the change in Latin from the old accent
to the new, would allow the old accent to produce its normal
effect in other dialects where it was preserved ; so that there is
nothing to prevent our supposing, as it is natural to do, that
rhotacism took place, medially, at the same time in both Latin
and Umbrian.

43. Why then should Latin shew these special phonetic

characteristics, that is if we choose to regard them

as peculiar to it ? This brings us at once to the C'o)T«Zatiore of

-, . IT 1 , • T. specialised

second point to be discussed, the question of Bor- grammar and

rowing. A glance at any tribal map of Italy re- ^o^^^"'^
minds us how small a number of people the Latins
were compared with the multitude of aliens with whom they
came perpetually into close contact. At war and at peace,
fighting side by side with them in the Eoman armies, or against
them almost annually for the first century of the republic and
more, admitting them by degrees to full Roman citizenship,
erecting public monuments in all the free towns with inscrip-
tions written by Romans, but in the local dialect ; — in these and
a hundred other ways the Latin-speaking folk were constantly
forced to know something of the dialects spoken by their
neighbours, and of these perhaps especially the Sabines and
Samnites. And the fact that we find a certain number of
words borrowed from these sources completely adopted into the
Latin vocabulary is the almost inevitable consequence of the
history of the language itself. Thanks to the same geographical
position, at once central and isolated, which trained the Romans
to the headship of the Italic peoples, the language they spoke
became in many respects unique among its kindred dialects,
such for example as its accent, the imperfect in -bam, the infini-
tive in -re, the curious development of the 'perfects' in -si and
-ui ; and while these strong individual characteristics, partly as
signs of the character of the people who spoke it, partly as ren-
dering it intrinsically a(^a§» d|in@»(6i@B@w on for it the predomi-

60 verner's law in italy. § 44.

nance over its rivals, the isolation of which they are the signs
necessitated a considerable addition to its vocabulary when it
was spread over a large area. A conquering people may often
adopt the language of the conquered, as the Normans in Eng-
land ; but it seems that nearly always a language which is
adopted largely by aliens, though its grammatical structure
may remain long unaltered, admits a host of strange words into
its vocabulary. This was the case for example in the transition
from Attic to the Koiv!}, and from Latin to the several Romance
languages'.

44. In general of course it is regarded as a fair assumption
that a word whose form we find it difficult to ex-
borrowing in pla-in hy the laws of the language it is used in, so
particular f^j. ^s we know them, has very possibly been bor-
rowed from some other after these laws had ceased
working. But there is obviously a danger lest this method of
avoiding difficulties may only prolong the ignorance of the real
phonetic laws which has led us to adopt it, and it is perhaps a
pardonable digression to enumerate a few characteristics which
may justify the assumption of a borrowed word with more cer-
tainty than the mere convenience of the moment. The evidence
jp , . I ■ of borrowing is External and Internal. External
dence of bor- evidence can hardly be classified, as it includes so
lowing. rnany different species: the direct statements of

grammarians [Minerva a Sabinis, Varro) : our knowledge of
the political (e.g. classis^) or natural (e.g. elephas) history of
the districts from and into which it was introduced : or some
collocation, such as Caesius Sabinus, are among them. But
these are of course always accidental and frequently wanting ;
the Internal cannot escape notice if they are present.

^ It has been pointed out to me that personal names (cognomina, in English
the 'Christian' name) are very frequently borrowed, e.g. Philo, Philippus,
Blaesus. In the list of words borrowed from Sabine (p. 48) we have many
gentile names, which were probably introduced at a time when nomina were
not yet distinguished sharply from cognomina.

2 In point of fact I do not believe classis to be borrowed, but a regular -ti-
noun formed from clad- (clades) ' to out.' It has survived from a very early
period of the language and its concrete sense prevented its extension by -on-
{*classio).

Digitized by Microsoft®

EVIDENCE OF BORROWING. § 45. 61

Briefly they are

(1) Irregular phonetic form, judged by some internal evi-

well established law, e.g. rufus. rowing.

(2) Irregular flecdon, e.g. pelagus and other Gr. nouns;

also caro carnis (contrast hominis).

(3) Irregular gender, e.g. pelagus neuter, caro feminine.

(4) Parallelism with some word shewing the regular form

and a kindred hut different meaning, e.g. rifus
ruber.

Especially

(5) A peculiar limitation or ' secondarisation ' of meaning

which seems nearly always to attend an alien word,
e.g. caro in Oscan ' a part ', in Latin ' (a portion of)
meat ' ; rufus in Oscan ' red ', in Latin ' red-haired ' ;
vov^fio';^ in Syracusan Greek means a 'coin' {Tab.
Her.), being clearly borrowed from the Oscan
*numso- = Lat. numerus (v. supr. § 42), in the
wider signification of ' number '.

None of the examples just given affect my theory, but in
the course of the following pages we shall have opportunities of
applying these conditions with greater relevancy.

45. It is necessary to summarise once more the evidence
for the date of the change of s to r in Latin. Some Evidence as
of it appears to have been misinterpreted, and one ^l^thi Elmta-
of the passages from Livy I have not seen cited cis"»-
before.

1. Brugmann lays stress on the tradition that Appius
Claudius substituted the hooked G for Z in the ^^^^^^
Latin alphabet as shewing that the sound of the Claudius and
voiced sibilant had disappeared from Latin at the
date of his censorship 312 B.C.

1 £/ios shews the treatment of the group vowel+n + (T + vowel in pro-ethnic
Greek. iJ/xos : vovfi,os as eliiiDi^iiwidiiy Microsoft®

62 verner's law in italy. § 45.

2. On the fibula which Helbig and Diimmler have recently
Praenestine discovered at Praeneste there occurs the word Ifu-

masioi. The alphabet fixes its date at not later
than 500 B.C. and the other words are certainly Latin pure and
simple. Cf. § 84, p. 48 supr.

3. On the Buenos Inscription^ which is not later than

300 B.C.,

Duenos.

a. Z certainly does not occur ;
/3. while we have the form pacari which as being (pro-
bably, V. infr. § 55, p. 76) an analogy form would date from the
end of the rhotacising period.

4. Cicero (Ep. ad Fam. 9. 21) tells us that the consul of
„. 336 B.C. was the first of his family called Papirius

instead of Papisius (v. the following section). It
is sometimes said that 'proper names would yield to the
Change. in change later than other words' which would seem
proper names, ^q imply that the change was conscious, which a
real phonetic change appears never to be, though in days of the
printing-press the spelling, as it remains the same, may produce
a sort of retrospective consciousness. The remark seems equally
superfluous if it merely means that proper names would be less
frequently used than other words, seeing that the first time
they were used they would be pronounced in the new fashion.
It is of course quite true if applied only to the spelling of proper
names, and perhaps this is all that Cicero or his authority could
really vouch for.

5. So far as I can discover by the help of Halm's index

there are no passages in Quintilian bearing on this
Quintilian. ■ , «

6. The following passages from Livy give us a good deal

of help :
Livy.

a. 2. 80, Valerius Volesi filius, who was dic-
tator in 492 B.C.

/3. But the consuls for the same year are given in 2. 28
as Aldus Verginius et T. Vetusius, although

1 Cf. supr. § 12, p. IG.

DATE OF RHOTACISM. § 45, 63

7. in 2. 41 (486 B.C.) the mother of Coriolanus is
throughout called Veturia.

B. 3. 4 Gonsules inde A. Postumius Alhus et Sp. Furius
F'uscus. Furios Fusios scripsere quidam. Id admoneo ne quis
immutationem virorum ipsorum esse quae nominum est putet.
This gives us the key to the enigma. It shews that Livy con-
sidered the form with r the correct one, and the spelling with s
as a (perhaps) unexplained solecism. Hence the names of per-
sons well known in history like Valerius and Veturia would
appear in the form by which they were usually spoken of in
Livy's own day, whereas Volesus, which had passed out of use^
after giving rise to Volero, and the label of the lay figure
Vetusius would be merely transcribed after Livy's incurious
fashion". Sp. Furius Fuscus was consul in 462 B.C. The plural
Fusios shews that Livy found the form with the s in some of
his authorities and r in others at this place, and chose the r
form himself as being the prevailing one, the examples of it of
course occurring at later dates. We conclude therefore that the
change

(1) had certainly not taken place in 492 B.C. {Vetusius,
Volesus) ;

(2) probably had not taken place in 462 B.C. if we sup-
pose Fusios to represent the genuine spelling at that date. It
is possible that the variation here may really go back to a
variation in the usage of the Furian family itself in 462 B.C.
between the traditional and the phonetic spelling. It seems
rather an early date however for disputes as to orthography,
and the Papirii must, comparatively, have been ultra-con-
servative to have only adopted the new spelling 130 years after
the change in sound. They may not however have had occa-
sion to spell their names so often in the Consular Fasti. On
the whole it is best to regard these two dates 462 B.C. and
336 B.C. as the extreme limits in either direction. The change
itself must have been complete within a very much shorter

1 Until re-introduced from Sabine, v. supr. § 34, p. 48.

2 Illustrated in this case by the fact tbat he does not mention the variation

of spelling until he has committed himself in a preceding book to both alterua-
,. . . ., Digitized by Microsom

tives m a similar case.

64 VERNER'S LA.W IN ITALY. § 46.

period than 130 years in so small a community as the Latins.
Conclusion '^^^ °^'^ *^**® 450—350 B.C. may therefore be
retained with confidence until further evidence
enables us to determine its limits more narrowly.

46. The last point to be discussed is by far the most im-
portant, the bearing of the evidence of rhotacism
Date of the ^ ' , . . _ . j. tt -j.

change of the on the date of the change m the Latm accent, id.as it

Latin accent. ^^^^ already pointed out that the stock passage in
Proper names. Quintilian (1. 5. 22) might be quoted to shew that
the old accent lasted longest in proper names'? In a very brief
notice of the subject he selects as typical solecisms the accentu-
ation of the two names Gandllus and Cethegus on the first
syllable. 'Adhuc difiSciUor observatio est per tenores vel ad-
centus, quas Graeci m-pocraihia'i vocant cum acuta et gravis alia
pro alia ponuntur ut in hoc ' Camillus ' si acuitur prima, aut
gravis pro flexa, ut Cethegus, et hie prima acuta (nam sic
media mutatur).' It may of course merely represent a natural
mistake of non-Latin Italians pronouncing their adopted tongue
in the same fashion as their own ; but if so it is a very curious
coincidence that both the examples should be proper names,
which are not often quoted elsewhere as illustrations. If the
view of accent-change as largely analogical be correct, it is easy
to see that the old pronunciation would last longest in personal
names which are a kind of personal property, it being almost as
great a wrong to mispronounce a man's name as to steal his

1 A general shifting of accent, as distinguished from the change in the
few individual words in which it may have begun, does not seem, strictly
speaking, to be a purely ^AoweZtc change, but to involve a certain propor-
tion of arbitrary analogical influence. There is no a priori evidence
that any one method of accentuation is intrinsically easier than another,
and hence wlien the accent in a partictdar langiuige was changing there
must have been a certain amount of volition exercised on the part of those
who first set the fashion. The contrast of classical Latin where accent has
become bound by quantity with Oscan and Umbrian and late Latin where
quantity has been more or less suppressed in favour of accent seems to
point to the wish to pronounce syllables with the length that was felt pro-
perly to belong to them, as the motive power of the change. The steady
retrogression of accent in modern English, e.g. in such words as indispfitable

inJhputahlc, seems certainly analogical.

Digitized by Microsoft®

CHANGE OF ACCENT IN LATIN. § 47. 65

purse. The II of the modern Fallen seems to indicate that in
spite of its long e Falerii was accented on the first syllable.
The r in ValeriKS Veturius Masurius Rahlrius Papvrius
Etruria Pinarius may be due to an accent on the first syllable
retained for this reason, but they are not conclusive since, as
we shall see, they can all be explained quite regularly without
this hypothesis.

47. In order to shew as clearly as may be the unmistakable
conclusion which is forced upon us by the evidence
of rhotacism if we accept the arrangement of the cent. Direct
phenomena suggested in this essay, I have arranged evidence of
in five classes all the words (1) in which the change
of s to r cannot be due to the influence of i or u, and (2) in
which it need not, i.e. in which it might conceivably have been
caused by the absence of accent in the preceding syllable, and
(3) in which s is retained between vowels ; the inclusion of the
second class of words enables us to muster all that can possibly
be admitted as evidence on the question.

I. Words whose form is explicable only on the assumption
of the oldest accent. j^^^,^^ „^

II. Words whose form is explicable on the i"'""/-
assumption of either the oldest or the intermediate system but
not of the latest.

III. Words whose form is explicable on the assumption of
either the oldest or the intermediate or the latest.

IV. Words whose form is explicable 7iot on the assumption
of the oldest but on that of either the intermediate or the latest.

V. Words whose form is explicable not on the assumption
of the oldest nor of the intermediate but only of the latest.

By the intermediate stage of accentuation I mean that in
which the accent had become bound by quantity in so far that
it could not go back behind a long syllable in the penult, or if
the penult was short, behind a long syllable in the antepenult,
but could go back to the fourth from the end or to the initial
syllable, if all that intervened between it and the last were
sh ort. Digitized by Microsoft®

66 verner's law in italy. § 47.

It will be seen therefore that these five classes exhaust all
possible combinations of the three stages, it being remembered
that any change which is governed both by the oldest and the
latest systems will be equally subject to the rules of the inter-
mediate (e.g. foideris, a word whose accent was the same when
Latin passed into Romance as when Italic passed into Latin) ;
and also that any word governed by the intermediate but not by
the oldest is governed also by the latest^ and hence the (mathe-
matically^) possible classes '' explicable on the oldest or the latest
hut not on the intermediate," and " hy the intermediate hut not hy
the oldest or the latest" are historically impossible.

The results are as follows :- —

1. There are no words whose form is explicable only on

the assumption of the oldest accent (half-a-dozen
examples which might be placed here occurring also
as due to the influence of a following i or u, e.g. Pinarius) ex-
cept one example of an isolated form in a system in which the
remaining forms were all accented on the first syllable; this
would clearly be the sort of place in which the old accent would
linger longest, and cannot be quoted as evidence that that accent
was genuinely in force elsewhere. The example in question is
the genitive plural of the first declension, mensdrum, older
mensdrom', accented on the first syllable because of mdnsa
Tninsam mdnsdd mdnsaes (?) cet.

2. There is one word with r, one with s, and several proper
Cl II 2+ ^^™®^ '^^^'^ ** {gloria from (?) *cUvSzia, caesaries,

Valerius) which may be explained on either the
oldest or the intermediate but not on the latest system.

■■ Except in the (purely hypothetical) case of a word of five or more syllables
ending in --.---.

^ The number of alternative combinations may be represented hy the formula

which can be expanded in eight ways. The two oases
^-B + C,and -A + B-G
I have just explained are impossible, and - A -B - C represents the class of
9hanges in accented syllables.

' It is of course possible that the change of o to u in this (always) unaccented
syllable was before the period of rhotaoism but it is safest to dispense with so
doubtful an explanation, especially as vowel degradation as a whole is rather
late in Latin.

Digitized by Microsoft®

CHANGE OF ACCENT IN LATIN. § 47. 07

3. Counting rus (contracted for *rovos orig. *revos, cf. § 42,
p. 58) temporis foederis regere videram pulveris once ^^^ ^^^ ^g_
each as typical examples, there are some TWENTT-

FIVE words with r and TWENTY with s which are explicable
equally on all three systems.

4. There are some seventeen words with r including most
of the best-known examples of the change in root- ^^^^^ iy 21 +
syllables, and FOUR with s, which are not explicable

on the oldest system but by either the intermediate or tho
latest.

5. There are no words which need the supposition of the
latest accent. In caer'&leus (older cairUleus) the m ^^^^ ^ ^^^^
seems certainly original (v. infr. § 60, p. 83) and it

is this which has caused the change.

From these figures it is obvious

I. That there is no evidence that at the time when rhota-
cism began the oldest accent was in force.

II. That during the period the intermediate accent cer-
tainly came into force.

III. That there is no evidence that the latest system had
come into force before the end of the period, and a, certain
amount of evidence that it had not.

This last conclusion exactly agrees with the inference drawn
by Corssen from the contraction of forms like optumus Manlius
reccidi imperi, and the degradation of the vowel of the second
syllable in benivolus malivolus malig(e)nus, which clearly point
to the retention of the first-syllable accent on words of this
shape till a fairly late era. It is a natural conjecture that the
final change was due to the influence of the Greek accent, sup-
ported of course by that of the great bulk of words in Latin
which had a long syllable either in the penult or antepenult
and therefore an accent in the same position.

The argument of course implies that the exspiratory cha-
racter of the accent in Latin (and also in the other Italic
dialects) had at least begun to develop at this time. We can
trace a gradual deYelq^mg^i^o^l^^gg^^TQent in accentuation in

68 VERNER's law in ITALY. § 48.

the history of Latin, from the mainly musical accent which
probably came from the final stage of Indo-European, to the
almost purely stress-accent which moulded the Eomance lan-
guages. The Latin of the cultivated classes at Rome appears
to have resisted this tendency with more success than any other
of the descendants of pro-ethnic Italic.

48. Having thus summarised the evidence in favour of the
two corollaries as to the change of accent already given, § 5,
p. 6 supr., it will be legitimate as well as extremely convenient
to assume them in what follows. There follow lists of words
arranged under two separate methods,

(1) according to the phonetic cause of the condition in
which the sound is found :

(2) in the five classes just described.

It might seem more natural to put the second first, but
there is a considerable number of words where the change
appears to be due to analogical influence (e.g. Tiios maris for
*motis (metior) ara etc.) which are best disposed of in connexion
with the first arrangement. After the discussion here the
second classification will contain only lists of words with refer-
ences to preceding pages. First of all however it is desirable
to give a complete list of all words bearing on the question,
i.e. all those which shew s, or r representing an original s, be-
tween vowels in Latin, arranged according to the authorities by
whom they have been collected. This section of the essay will
then be concluded by removing from the list such words as
have been previously given by authorities but for one reason
or another appear inadmissible.

49. Corssen' gives the following list of words in which s
Words with r ^as becom^r between vowels :

from s. Lar-es ara feriae harena viarius nefarius etc.

(jf}7*SiRP7L t List

eram etc. quaero gero liaurio uro sero fieri nares
marem aeris cruris thuris juris muris moris flons roris gliris
speres (Enn.) foederis etc. liber {? loehesum ?) temporis etc.

' .-1 iixspr. 1. 228.
Digitized by Microsoft®

Further addi-

EXAMPLES OF THE CHANGE. § 50. 69

labons etc. arborem puheris pulveris etc. vires sperare prospera
plurimvs melioris etc. dirimere dirhibere mensdrum etc. dare ;
Curio Aurelius Spurius Furius Valerius Pinarius Papirius Vetu-
rius Numerius ; Falerii Etruria Cures.

The followiug are added by Brugmann and others : pdricida
(ttt^o?) mulieris (muliebris from -esris) humerus
numerus^ pejerare (Osth., from pejus orig. *pejeris) ^P!'^'^ autho-
pacari (Duen. Inscr. all interpp.) haereo queror
(questus) curare cura (Pel. coisattens) virus (to?) soror (Skt.
svasd) nurus (vvc'i) lira (Teut. leis-, Germ, geleise) oris gloris
ruris puris telluris gloria (? «Xeo?, Skt. gravas) vomeris puerius)
Marcipor (cf pusus pusa, pupulus for pupus-lus) for *povesus,
the r of the perfect, pluperfect, aad future perfect indie, and
the imperfect and perfect subj., and of the 2nd pers. sing, pres.
ind. pass, legere = i-Xeyea-o.

The following I think should also be added : caerulus cae~

ruleus (v. infr. § 60) glomerare tolerare (probably

-es- ] . . . . ^^""^

from j-stems) acieris (perh. a comparative like **""*•

mulier) arere (Volsc. asif, Umbr. asom) maereo (maestus),
equiria (equiso), pauper (?) pawperies (?) : Masurius (?) Liris (?)
Laurentum (Lausus) Aurunci (Ausones) Auruncud (cf § 37,
p. 50 supr.) Tibur (?) Ardea (?) Aricia (?) Caere (?) luridus
(? 'mala lustra').

50, Eoby (l. p. 59) gives the following list of words con-
taining s between vowels :

, n ~ , J ■ • -J n Words with s

All perfects and supines in -si and -sum irom between two

stems ending in dentals, asinus bdsium caesaries towels.

° _ . . J. T^ . Roby's list.

caesius casa caseus causa cisium jusus Laser miser

nasus pusillus quasillus quaeso rosa vasa ; Caesar Kaeso Lausus

Piso Sisenna Sosia ; Pisa Pisaurum.

Stolz (Lat. Gr. § 60) gives labosus (Lucil. Non. 8. 46) and
alludes to the ' large number of gentile names in
-sius.' Volusius Aedesius Agrasius Calvisius are
examples.

To these we must add the following : — rosidus agdso equiso

70 teener's law in italy. § 51.

Further ex- positus (posivi posui) pusula pusio siser immusulus
ampies. (^ sort of gagle, Fest. Mull. p. 112, 113. Cf. Mac-

beth, 'a mousing-owr) pesestas (Fest. Mull. 210 ' pestilentia ') :
Aenesi (Fest. Mlill. 20 ' comites Aeneae ') : Masurius (Pers. 5.90):
Tusanis (C. I. L. I. 971) : Aesola (a town in the district of the
Latini).

51. We may dismiss at once names of places situate in

districts where Latin was not spoken, as Pisa^,

eliminated^- Pisaurum^. Bisemxa too, like Porsenna, would seem

(1) as late in- to be an Etruscan name, and in view of the accen-

troductions, . ,-ii /e^/. /->^\

tuation 01 proper names noticed above (§ 46, p. 04)
it appears not to affect the argument, hasium cisium pusio
(teste Forcellini) do not occur in Plautus though they belong to
just that class of words in point of signification which is com-
monest in Latin comedy, and we may safely predict that they
would have occurred there if they had been in use at the time.
Pusula too is a late word, occurring first in Seneca. Gaesum is
a Gallic word, and Blaesus apparently (?) a Greek name.

Citres is a name occurring in Sabine country and must

(2) as errone- contain an original r : it is to be distinguished from
ously derived, -y^ords derived from the Italic root cois- (cusianes
koisis coisattens). Spurius is once written ^Trovatov in Dion.
Hal. III. 34 : but in view of the clo.se connexion of meaning
with a-7Telpa> ('sporadic' 'bastard') and the Oscan.name Mara
Spurnius (Z. 0. 82), it seems best to treat this as either a
mistaken reading (which of course in the present state of the
text is possible enough) or a mistaken etymology, either being
due to the influence of ^ov(Tio<i Fusius Furius and similar cases.
" causa from cav-ere " should also be placed here (v. infr.), and
lahosus if this is supposed to immediately represent the old
stem of lahos.

The chief class of exceptions are those in which s or ss of

masprobably ^^*®'' 1"^*"^ ^^ descended from an Italic -t-t-. First

not containimi we have adjectives in -osus which, as Osthoff has

pointed out, is best derived from -o-vont-tos (Impe-

' V. supr. § 19, p. 'i('> n.
V. Kupr. § IS), p. 2(i.
Digitized by Microsoft®

IRRELEVANT EXAMPLES. § 51. 71

riossus 414 A.U.C., Verrucossus 521 A.U.C. iu the P''™'^ of rho-
consular Fasti), where there was also a nasal to a. adjj. in
protect the sound from further corruption^ which °™^'
lasted on, as an element in the vowel, till quite late times.
Labosus clearly belongs here, whether it is for *labos-osus (like
clamosus dolosus fragosus and others given by Roby) or, as
seems at least plausible, formed not from the stem lahos-, but
from the verb lahare, on the analogy of clamare clamosus
onerare onerosus criminare criminosus moratus nwrosus dolere
dolosus and others. The meaning ' slippery ' would give a more
picturesque tinge to the two passages in Lucilius where it
occurs (Non. 8. 46), ' iter labosum,' and ' labosas Tantalu qui
poenas ob facta nefantia luvit,' which would describe the cup
slipping from his grasp.

The commonest case is of course that of participles and
perfects in s. After a long vowel or consonant the a participles
s was written single in Quintilian's^ time, but here **''•
in Cicero's the ss was kept in writing, though in pronunciation
then, as afterwards, it was probably kept only after short
vowels, as in missus, where it was always written from the time
of the first introduction of double consonants^. If Brugmann's
view of the pro-ethnic character of the change of tt to ss in
Italy were correct, all participles like fusus would be citable as
evidence in support of the theory advocated in this essay,
V. supr. § 30, p. 39 foil.

The derivation of caussa seems to me so obvious and certain
that I can hardly believe it has not been suggested y_ caussa qua-
before. On inscriptions of the republic (e.g. C. I. L. stJJus.
L 198, 556, and 533) the ss appears regular, and in the passage
in Quintilian (7. 20) already alluded to (§ 51 (2) /3. n.) it is

' This n appears not to occur in any inscription (v. Index to C. I. L.i.'n
adjecta,' where Mommsen gives only vicensumus etc.), but Eibbeck reads it from
the MSB. in two passages of Vergil.

= V. App. A. The fere in the passage there cited seems to me to imply that
the remark applied only to the large class of words, mainly participles, in which
s or ss came from tt.

^ Por the well-known cases of a long vowel with a single s where from the
form of the present we should have expected a short vowel with a double ss
(casus from cado, fusus horn f undo) , v. Osthoff, Perf. Exo. vi. p. 537.
Digitized by Microsoft®

72 VERNER'S law in ITALY. § 51.

given explicitly as one of the words which were so spelt ' Cice-
ronis temporibus paulumque infra.' Apart however from spell-
ing, which is at best very unsafe evidence unless independently
supported, we have the forms of the compounds incusare, excu-
sare, where the weakening of au to u shews there was no accent
on that syllable, from in-causdre, ex-causdre. The s therefore
we should expect to have become r if it had been single. These
forms however betray the secret by their resemblance to excu-
sum incusum. Is not caussa a past passive participle of an
original *caudo, to smite or cut (cf. Cauda, 'the smiter,' caudex,
' the bark, or the stump or plank cut off,' also Caudium, the
place where the valley divided or opened out into the plain) ?
Res caussa would = ' res decisa' 'res judicata,' and a glance at
the article in any dictionary will shew that the forensic signifi-
cation of the word is the oldest. A large number of words
meaning to 'judge' mean properly to 'cut,' e.g. KpLvai cernere
decide. The form *caudo must have died out in this derived
meaning and cudo have been substituted in the literal sense
from the compounds incudo etc., just as spicio^ miniscor have
banished *specio * meniscor, and cludo had supplanted claudo
in all writers except Cicero at the end of the republic. It had
probably only been preserved so long from the influence of
includo etc., by such independent forms as claustrum. An
incidental advantage of this explanation is to get rid of the
irregular u in the present stem of ciido.

In qudsillus an original ss has been reduced by the later
accent, as in cu7"Alis from currus. Gr. Kd6o<i shews the root
*qath. *qath-lo- became qudlo- in pro-ethnic Italic or Latin,
*quath-tlo- or a diminutive * quath-tillo- became quassillus in
Latin I The same may have happened in Maswrius, or the ss
which sometimes occurs in the name may be due to the wish to
express the accent (§ 46, p. (35 supr.) on a short syllable (§ 27,
p. 35 supr.). On the other hand there is no reason for the
loss of a second s in casa, nor for supposing an original ss in
quaeso, unless indeed the subjunctive meaning ' I will beg ' or
'let me beg' which Brugmann supposes, be considered more

' Given by Br. Gds. § 65, Aiim. 2.
- V. § 30, p. 39 supr.

Digitized by Microsoft®

THE EXAMPLES ARRANGED. § 52. 73

appropriate to the parenthetic ' quaeso ' than the simple ' I beg.'
Where it was used as a part of the same verb as quaerit quae-
rimus cet. qvar^bam quaer^mus cet. the r, which was phonetically
regular in these, forced itself into quaero also, but where it
remained out of system as a mere rhetorical particle (cf. Engl.
prithee, please) it kept the phonetic form proper to itself The
passage in Quintilian (1. 6. 33), even as restored by Halm
(' satis est vetus quaeso : quid opus est quaesito dicere ? '), seems
too uncertain to be worth discussing here. The singleness of
the s in ndsus is shewn by the Sa.nskrit ndsa, 0. Bulg. nosu,
Engl, nose cet. Pesestas is probably dialectic ; in Latin the
regular form would have been *pestas like clamosus for *clam8-
sosus.

52. I have now only to give the list of words which con-
stitute the evidence for and against the theory in Latin, with
brief comments where they are needed. They are as follows :

1. Words in which s is preserved by accent (i.e. in which it
occurs between two vowels after an accented syllable and is not
followed by i or u, or, if so, is not preceded by i or m or a long
vowel or diphthong).

2. Words in which s has become r after an unaccented
syllable.

3. Words in which s has become r after an accented
syllable and is not followed by i or u. These have to be ex-
plained.

4. Words in which s has become r after an accented syl-
lable under the conditions described.

5. Words in which we have s between vowels after an
unaccented syllable. Of these there are only four : Pusilliis
asellus (infr. § 54) pesestas quasillus v. supr.

Digitized by Microsoft®

74

VERNERS LAW IN ITALY.

53.

B. Evidence as to the cause of the change of s to r.
1. List of words in which s is kept by accent.

AenJsi

Caisar

Gae'sula (? Falisc.)

KaSso

Laiisus

53. agdso
asmus
cdsa
cdseiis

caesaries (PI. Mil. 1. 1. 64)
equfso

fiisus (' spindle ')
imtniisulus

idser (PI. Rud. 3. 2. 16)
mtser
ndsus

pdsitus (posui)
pus us

quadso {quadsere Enn.)
rosa
rdsidus
siser
vdsum

MdsHrius (?)
Ptso

Sisenna (?)
SSsia

Aisola

aijaso etc.

54. The words agdso equtso (' stable-boj^ ' 'jockey') like the
proper names Kaiso Ptso would be mostly used
as appellatives, in the Vocative, and hence its
accent would prevail over that of the oblique cases agasdnem
etc. They seem to be a genuine Latin formation.

asinus. The anaptyptic vowel must have been earlier than
450 B.C. since *asnos would have become *arnos, v. § 11,
p. 14 supr. The simple word has kept the s in asdllus.
caesaries, Caesar (' cum caesarie natus ' Fest.) have usually
been compared with the Sanskrit kesara (also written
kegara) 'hair', and is traditionally distinguished from
Kaeso etc. ('a caeso matris utero') which had ss = tt. For
the accent of caesaries v. supr. § 47, p. Co foil.
fiisus ' a spindle ' apparently occurs first in Catullus (Fore).
Is it a past participle, or should we compare Skt. bhush

Digitized by Microsoft®

S KEPT BY ACCENT. § 54. 75

' to adorn, set off, arrange around ' ? It is perhaps neces-
sary to remark here that at the time of the rhotacism
the vowel of the terminations {domin)-us {milit)-is cet.
was S, ^ not u, i.

immtisulus. Here also the -u(lus) of later Latin was cer-
tainly at the time of the rhotacism. I do not know
that any derivation has hitherto been given for this
word. That suggested (supr. § 50, p. 70) from mus, is
perhaps better than nothing.

positus may of course have been still regarded as a com-
pound at the date of rhotacism. It was certainly not so
regarded when posui was formed which however is later
than Plautus. In compounds it sank to ^postus and this
by the side of the regular (re)-posim'' appears to have
given rise to {re)quistvi from *requistum (cf. quaestus
quaestor) which finally authorised quaesvtum, the original
flexion having doubtless been *quaessi *quaestum like
gessi gestum.

p'Asus has kept pusillus and then itself dropped out of use.
It must however have been a borrowed word originally.
Fusus •.puer{us) asUmb. onse : hwmerus; Osc. Niou/io-ti? :
numerus ; rusem : ruris ; Fluusa : floris.

quaeso. quaesindam etc. (Enn. ap. Fest. 258) are analogy
forms.

rosa. Nothing but desperation could compel an etymo-
logist to regard this word as borrowed.

rosidas. If this form really occurs the vowel of the second
syllable was probably intermediate between i and e,
and therefore not sufficient to drag back the s to r if it
was not predisposed in that direction. This may be the
case in luridus (' mala lustra ') where the u would have
a more directly rhotacistic influence than the 5 of rosidvs.

siser. It seems more probable that the Greek aiaapov

is borrowed from this, than conversely, from (1) the

change of declension which is more natural from the

consonantal to the o class, (2) the change of the vowel, (3)

the irregularity of the cr between vowels in Greek.

1 The s in podvi would be kept by that oi positus.
Digitized by Microsoft®

7G

VERNERS LAW IN ITALY.

vdsum, the o stem is probably Latin, the consonantal Um-
brian. We have vasus abl. pi. ia Umbrian, correspond-
ing to *' vasibus ' {frdtrus = 'frdh'ibus '), while the same
case in Latin is vasis.

Aenesi. The final i was of course oe or oi at 450 B.C.

Caesula, v. supr. § 38, p. 52.

Lausus possibly gave his name to the Latin town Lau-
rdntitm.

Sisenna, v. supr. § 51, p. 70.

2. Words in which s became r after an unaccented syllable.

55. dcieris 1

aes *d(i)eris

drhSrem

drere

Aurdra *a'AsSris

Cdrerem

cinerem

coirdre

cdngerit

cdnqueritw

cdnserit

cms *cre(u)or{s

cAcumeris

dM^runt

eram

flos *fld(u)oris

foederis

fore forent

gerihat geremus

glomerdre

gloria (*gle(u)oria)

har^na

haerere

honoris {*lwndris)

ln'iiaSnis

-ioris (*-i(i)Sris) of the com-
parative

Idgere etc. = iXeyecro

lacerdre

liberum ?

maerere

Mdrciporum

mulierem

nilmerus

pacdri (Duenos Inscr.) and
inff. in -are -ere -Ire from
-d(i)ere etc., TImb. staient
staheren

pejerdre

prdsperum

pfiberein

piierum

p-Mv&rem

querebar

regere etc.

rigerem etc.

rus *rd{u)oris

serebam

sirempse

sordrem

Digitized by Microsoft®

r FROM S IN UNACCENTED SYLLABLES. § 56. 77

sperdre vidSro etc. tolerdre

timpSris vtdtrim, etc.

thus *th'&(u)eris vdmSrem

Aur^lius Aricia

N'&m Srius A u runca

Mdsih-ius ? Fdlerii ?

M4rcurius ? Laurdntum ?

* Rdbierius ? Tiburis ?

Vit'tLrius
Vdlero

56. acieris may be a comparative form like mulier.

Aurora like Flora formed from a noun in -Ss -ons.

eram forent, etc., v. supr. § 26, p. 33.

glomerdre tolerdre lacerdre are all probably formed from

-es- stems.
gloria : if this is connected with /cXeo? it must owe its g to

such collocations as hanc gloriam, magnam gloriam (cf.

viginti = e'lKari etc.).
honoris etc. It is now, I believe, generally held that the

long vowel of these stems is due to the wish

-QS -57*15.

to distinguish them from the neuter nouns
in -Sris etc. This explanation is rendered a good deal
easier by supposing that the change took place after
that of s to r by the aid of the analogy of the masculine
nouns of agency in -tor -toris. The gender of arbos
(perhaps due to its connexion with the names of trees
which were all feminine) protected it from this altera-
tion.

humerus niimerus, v. supr. § 42, p. 58.

The comparative suffix has been altered in the same way as
the nouns in -os -oris.

liberum belongs to the list if loebesum (Fest.) is correct.

Aricia was the site of human sacrifices. Does this connect
it with areo (' bim asif Volsc.) ?

Falerii, Mod. Falleri, seems to point to a first-syllable accent,
V. supr. § 46, V-D-lked by Microsoft®

78 verner's law in italy. § 56.

Aurunca. Servius (Aen. 7. 727, Georg. 2. 167) tells us that
the Greeks called the Aurunci also Ausones and it is
impossible that two such Barnes so exactly alike in all
but the variation of s and r (Dion. Hal. calls them
AvpajryKOL as well as AvpovyKoi 1. 26, 6. 32) and de-
noting so very nearly the same people should be of
distinct origin. The reason for the Latinised form of
the name easily appears from their history. They
belonged (Arist. 7. 9. 10, Polyb. 34. 11, Strab. 5. 4. 3')
to the Oscan stock and originally inhabited the part
of Italy between Tyrrhenia and Oenotria, which they
called Ausonia, a name which at a later date found its
way into Latin poetry, probably from a Greek source
(Ap. Rhod. 4. 553, Verg. Aen. 10. 54). The city which
the Ausones founded in (probably hostile) Volscian
territory they called Ausonca (contracted from *Ausonica
just as Marrouca is from *Mdrrovica). With this the
Romans were at war as early as 505 B.C., again in 495,
and 345 B.C. (Livy 2. 16. 17; 5. 26. 27; 7. 28) so that
they were familiar with the name before and during the
rhotacising period. We only know of it through Latin
sources, and therefore in the Latin form, as we should
expect, seeing that the city was destroyed by the Sidicini
in 336 B.C. The generic name Ausones which was later
(Plin. 3. 9. 4, Livy 8. 15. 16; 9. 25) applied to the
inhabitants of Gales, Minturnae and Vescia, represents
the local name which still survived and has lasted down
to modern times in the little river Ausente near the site
of Minturnae.

If the coin Auruncud really dates from before the de-
struction of the town in 336 B.C. we might suppose that it
proved that the Ausones in Aurunca shared the Latin accent
and rhotacism, but even then it would be much more probably
explained as due to Latin influence. I have been unable to
find any facsimile of this coin to ascertain the genuineness of
the jR.

' The references in tliie note come from De Vit's 0>wm<isticon.
Digitized by Microsoft®

THE EXCEPTIONS. § 58. 79

3. r from s in accented syllables.

57. The following words shew r after an accented syllable
without any following i or u :

ara (os) oris etc.

aurum (gios) gloris

cura {mos) moris (for *motis)

lira (ros) roris

plurimus (pus) puris (for *putis)
virus heri (%^69)

eram ero cet. (mas) marem
fore, forent cet. Lares

dare

58. ara, v. p. 22, § 18 supr. where it is explained as due to
the influence of arire etc., on the strength of a passage
from Varro.

aurum would be a much less common word among the Latin
peasantry than Aurdra, and the picturesque connexion
between the two is one which was sure to be kept up.
Varro again (7. 83) gives us direct evidence of the
popular feeliug.

cura, old Lat. coira, would be naturally governed by the
form of curdre etc. which was in most constant use
(cf. Eng. ' do '), while cu7-a would be as comparatively
infrequent as the Eng. deed.

lira, I.-Eu. *loisa. To explain the i instead of the regular
u I believe recourse is generally had to the influence
of the compounded forms dellrus (in the oldest stage)
d^llrdre, delirdre. The same cause would explain
the r.

plurimus (ploirome old Lat.) is of course formed from pluris
or its preceding forms, ultimately a trisyllabic pliSris =
Gr. TrXeow (from 7rXe(t)o(<r)o9).

vlrvs neut. as compared with its cognate Gr. to? offers a

peculiarity both of meaning and gender, to? ttovtov as

a poetical phrase for ' salt ' would strike us as an absur-
^ '■ Digitized by Microsoft®

80 VERNER'S law in ITALY. § 58.

dity, but Lucretius speaks of ' taetri primo7-dia viri'
in this sense, where, as in similar phrases, the meaning
is obviously helped out if not provided by the proximity
of vires, so that the root-meaning of the word was taken
to be 'strength, essential potency,' and the analogy of
vis vires would have converted *visus into virus. This
suggests also a possible explanation of the gender. By
the side of this apparent derivative denoting a concrete
thing, 'essence, poisonous essence,' stood a real derivative
denoting a person, namely vir 'a man,' whose oblique
cases only differ from those of virus in the quantity
of the I. Accordingly virus was treated as a neuter
noun to mark its impersonalitj'-, perhaps on the analogy
of vulgus, if that was already in existence.

These five words (ara aurum cura lira virus) are the only
serious exceptions as the rest (v. infr.) are either due to sentence
accent (eram) or parts of a grammatical system (dare). Never-
theless their number is disquieting, however possible each of
the explanations just suggested may be singly. In aurum cura
lira the first syllable originally consisted of a diphthong whose
second member is i or u, and it would be possible to suppose
that in old Latin the two elements had not completely coalesced,
so that the words would be virtually trisyllables with the ac-
cent on the first, d-u-rum c6-i-ra l6-i-ra, and we might erect
this into a special class of changes {'all dissyllables heginning
with an i or u diphthong ') at the expense only of adopting
Brugmann's explanation of quaeso and regarding Lausus ' as
Sabine (v. the list supr. § 53, p. 74). Lira however would still
owe its I to delirus and ara and virus would be left. Or again
should we suppose them to contain the suffix -ro- affixed to
the s of the root in Latin, not in Italic ? On the whole the
probability seems to me decidedly to rest with the separate
explanations of these words and the single explanation of the
other evidence already suggested and given in § 5 as one of
the conclusions of this essay.

' This would not affect the TJmbrian ; cf. § 42, p. 58 (Fht.mr Flora run em
rurh).

Digitized by Microsoft®

r FROM S IN ACCENTED SYLLABLES. § 59. 81

oris moris followed the analogy of jflos floris (v. § 42, p. 58
supr.) lahos laboris etc. and these with the words
which became monosyllables on contraction (rus thus
aes, phis crus (?)) together with those in which the r
was regular as preceding the i of the stem and follow-
ing an i or u or long vowel (glis glirium etc. mus muris
(Skt. musiha) jus juris) established the rule for mono-
syllables whose nominative ended in s, unless there were
some neighbouring word to protect them (as cos, cotis,
cautes). The form speres quoted from Ennius is an
example of this influence, further helped by sperdre.
heri is the locative (cf. teniperi) of an old Latin* hes.

Lares : Lases : Lar : *las exactly as

mares : mas and

arborem : arbosem : arbor : arhos,

the old nominative *las being lost the sooner because
the word was generally used in the plural.

dare may have been influenced by the compounds prddere
didere cet. as well as by the regular -re.

foreforent have been discussed § 26, p. 33 n. supr.

4. List of word's in which the change appears to be due to

i and u.

59. a. Words where s has become r after an accented
syllable between i and i :

virium etc. serii (*sisit) Papirius

glirium etc., girit (*gisit) Rabirius

equiria queritur {*qidsitur) (? for *R&Merius)

Liris (?) dirimit

dirhibet.

With equTria contrast equfso.

For gerit etc. v. supr. § 42, p; 57. They would be also

influenced by cringerit etc. The second i of dirimit dirhibet

stands on a level with that of rosidus luridus § 54, p. 75 supr.

The words would be ^'^ftfiS&WM&^si^^*'*'"'*^^'^^ dirhib^re cet.

c. 6

82 veener's law in italy. § GO.

Faplrius. As to the accent of proper names v. § 46, p. 64
supr. For the exceptions Calvisius etc. (Sabine names)
V. I 34, p. 48 supr.
/S. Where s has become r after an accented syllable be-
tween u and u.

n'drus gen. nurios. Gr. i/uo?, Skt. smim.
7. Where s has become r after an accented syllable be-
tween u and i.

jilri etc. Curio

telMri etc. Etruria

milri etc. Furius

haibrit etc. Spurius (?) v. § 51, p. 70 supr.

{e)'&rit etc. /lawr/if urit would be also in-

luridus V. supr. § 54, p. 75. fluenced by urshat etc.

60. S. Words in which s has become r after a long
accented syllable before i or is.

/a-we (feridri) Cadrites (?)

?i^m (Bkt. nasi-ka) Falerii Uv. supr. § 46,

nef drills Findrius) p. 64)
parictda ^

quadrit (v. supr. § 51, cairuleus

p. 73) cadrulus
vidrius

and some others where the long vowel is % or u, which have
already appeared under (a) or (7).

caerulus is the only word which needs comment. Brug-
mann derives it from caelum by dissimilation of the first I,
which is of course possible enough, and we may in that case
dismiss the word. But the constant conjunction 'caerula caeli'^
would be rather meaningless, and the parallelism of ruber 'red',
rufus 'red-haired', caerulus 'blue', caesius 'blue-eyed' (caesia

' The first syllable of pdric'ida can hardly he called unaccented in the same
sense as that of sordrem. In such polysyllables we have evidence in Eomance
that a bye accent was kept on the first syllable.

^ If in spite of this there is a connexion between the words it seems more
likely to be that Ciielmii is for * caesium.

Digitized by Microsoft®

EVIDENCE AS TO THE CHANGE OF ACCENT. § 61. 83

mV^o = 'Minerva' ('a Sabinis')) seems to connect it with the
clearly' borrowed word caesius. On the latest system of
accentuation, which was probably fairly established by 200 B.C.,
the accent on caeruleus (which we find in Ennius side by side
with caerulus) would be on the third syllable from the end and
this would therefore have been preserved from sinking to u
if it had been an original o, since the change from m to o
before I in unaccented syllables took place quite late, as is
evidenced by the frequent variation in spelling, e.g. Aesola
Aesula, and therefore after the final change of accent. It may
be thought that the u of cairulus had influenced caerAleus,
but the influence is more likely to have been the other way.
It is usual to find the older form preserved in such cases.
In caesi-us caeru-lus may we not see an example of the
common parallelism of t and u stems in the same or different
languages ? The it stems in Latin have all disappeared in
various ways (e.g. suavis vacuus), but traces of them are left
in words in -lo- and -ro- e.g. anguis : angu-lus, inula : Castrmn
Inui (cf. yiapadwv), oculus : aiKv<;, ungula : ungu-is vidulus :
viduus, also ancora (orig. *anc'tLra; does the change oi 'iJito S
before r point to an original s, * ancus, * ancoris ? v. supr. § 42,
p. 57) : dryKvpa (for *dyKvp-t,a). For the formation c£ dyKiiXo';
Ba{cr)vX6'; Ka/nrv\o<i. The u stems like tribus (tribulis) are
of course distinct.

There are a few words in Festus about which nothing
is known and which may very well be Sabine like fasena:
murgisonem 'a mora et decisione' (!) (perhaps to be placed
with equiso supr. § 64, p. 74) adasia ' ovis vetula recentis
partus'.

C. Evidence as to the change of accent.

61. Since all the words in this list have occurred before
and have been fully discussed it seems unnecessary to add
references, since they can be at once ascertained on reference
to the index accompanying the essay, which has been con-

Digi?rzlWyh%%BbM-

6—2

84

VERNEES LAW IN ITALY.

61.

structed for me with great kindness by one or two friends. A
query denotes that the word had probably not reached the form in
which it appears in the hst (in other respects than the change
of s to r) before the beginning of the period of rhotacism, e.g.
pacdri ? which before 450 B.C. was probably *pacdiesi. For the
method of arrangement v. § 47 supr. pp. 65 — 68.

1. Words in which s which became r fdllows a syllable
which was unaccented only on the oldest system of accentuation.

Idhorisl etc.
pUorisl etc.
pdcdril etc.
tdllicrisl etc.
minsdrum etc.

The proper names Rahlriusi Paplriusi Etrurial Pindriusi
Fdlerii etc., stand on a different footing.

2. Words explicable either by the oldest or by the inter-
mediate but not by the latest system of accentuation.

Words with r. a. *gU(u)dria ; Vdlerius Veturius cet.

Words with s. ^. caisaries Mdsurius.

3. Words explicable either by the oldest or by the inter-
mediate or by the latest system. An accent in ( ) denotes one
probably not prevailing at the time of rhotacism.

Words with r. a

foMeris etc.
tdmporis etc.
r^gere etc.
regerem etc.
piidveris etc.
vtdero etc.
c^rerem
pfiberes

aes iflos crus rus thus) d{i)eris
drborem prdsperum ltherum{V)

dederunt etc. cdnserit cdvgerit

Ugere etc. (= iXeyea-o) prd-dere
Vdlero
Tibriris ?

pejerdre tolerdre

Words with s.

A

lacerdre

m'dl I erem dc i eris

h'Amerus wAmerus

pilerum Mdrciporum (for -fuerum).

dsinus pdsitus Caesar

cdsa piisus Kaiso

cdseus qua^so Lausus

Digitized by Microsoft®

EVIDENCE AS TO THE CHANGE OF ACCENT. § 61. 85

fisus
l&ser
ndsus
miser

rSsa
rdsidus
siser
vdsum

Piso

Sdsia

A4sola,

Words with r.

4. Words explicable not by the oldest but by either the
intermediate or the latest system.

a. harina Aurdius

A urdra. Auvanca

sordris Arioia

arire haerire maer^re Laur4ntum
coirdre sperdre haurire
geriham seribam querihar
sirempse.

/8. agdso immiisulus

equiso Aen^si.

5. Words explicable only by the latest system of accentu-
ation. caerMeus ?

Words with s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

APPENDIX.

A. S between voiuels in Classical Latin and Romance.

62. Some amount of doubt still appears to rest on the
State of the question of the pronunciation of s between vowels
question. (rosa casus) in Latin of the classical period. Corssen
asserted, on the ground of the Italian pronunciation, that in
this position the s was voiced. This view Mr Roby rejected
(Lat. Gr. Vol. I. Pref xlix), asking for a more precise investiga-
tion of the facts in the Romance languages. So far as I know
this task has been hitherto left unattempted, though the diffi-
culty it involves is merely that of comparing data which have
already been carefully collected. Little apology therefore is
needed for reopening the question in the light of our present
information, especially when its solution appears to lie on the
surface of the evidence. An examination of the whole of the
somewhat complex details of the history of s between vowels in
Romance can, I think, lead us to only one conclusion, that s
was never anything but a breathed sound in Latin till quite
late times, certainly long after Quintilian. The same conclusion
is supported by what we can infer from Latin itself of the
usual pronunciation of s medially, e.g. from its effect on pre-
ceding consonants {apstineo lapsum cet), as has been long ago
pointed out. Before however proceeding to deal categorically
with ' s between vowels in Italian, Spanish, etc' the evidence of
its history in Latin proper needs some slight comment, and
that is practically confined to the often-quoted passage in
Quintilian (L 7. 20), which appears to have been frequently
misunderstood.

Digitized by Microsoft®

QUINTILIAN. § 63. 87

63. 'Quid quod Ciceronis temporibus paulunque infra, /ere
quotiens s littera media vocalium longarum vel
subiecta longis esset, geminabatur ? ut " caussae,"
"cassus," " divissiories": quomodo et ipsum et Vergilium quo-
que scripsisse manus eorum decent. Atqui paulum superiores
etiam illud, quod nos gemina dicimus "iussi," una dixerunt.'

The bearing of this remark has, I think, been missed
through neglect of the important modification fere
and the general drift of the context. The chapter on the pro-
in which the passage occurs deals with orthography nimciation
as specifically distinguished from pronunciation. 7.
init. ' Nunc, quoniam diximus quae sit loquendi regula, di-
cendum quae scribentibus custodienda, quod Graeci opdoypa-
(j)iav vocant, nos recte scribendi scientiam nominemus.' The
writer is throughout concerned with differences of spelling not,
as he understood them, based on any difference in pronuncia-
tion, e.g. the man who wrote r)ialus ('apple-tree') without the
apex pronounced it in just the same way as those who wrote
Tndlus. He deals first (§ 2 — 10) with divergences caused by
the desire to spell etj^mologically, as exspecto, obtineo, pro-
nounced expecto, optineo, generally allowing the etymological
spelling where it served to distinguish two words whose sound
was the same ; then (§ 11 — 29) he discusses variations from
the modern spelling due to adherence to custom, for example,
criticising adversely ('supervacuum') Lucilius' spelling of the
nom. plur. of the second declension and of the dative sing, of
the third with et, puerei, furei, on the ground that i can
denote both the long and the short sound. This shews that he
regarded the difference merely as one of spelling, as indeed it
had clearly become, since the spelling ei has no etymological
connexion with the original oi oe of the nom. plur. Similarly
he quotes the modern spelling hsre as opposed to the ancient
heri, while in 1. 4. 8 he says the sound is neither e nor i but
intermediate. And in all the rest of the examples he gives, it
is to be observed that he is speaking not of any change of
sound, but merely of the divergence between the modern and
an archaizing spelling, nor does he here discuss the latter from
an etymological point of view, though he is aware that at least
Digitized by Microsoft®

88 VEKNER'S law in ITALY. § 63.

some of the variations, e.g. the d of the ablative, should be so
explained. Now if the single s between vowels had been voiced
in his time it would have had an entirely different sound from
ss, which is always breathed even in Romance, and he would
certainly have alleged this as an argument in favour of the
spelling with a single s where the sound was voiced. He in
fact concludes the chapter by expressly recommending the
phonetic as opposed to the historical spelling.

It will be agreed then that in the words of which Quin-
tilian is speaking, the s, written single in his time

in a particu- . . .

lar class of and double in Cicero's, was certainly a breathed
sound. It only remains to ask. Which are they ?
'fere quotiens s littera media vocalium longarum vel suhiecta
longis esset geminabatur, ut caussae cassus divissiones.' These
three words all happen to be nouns and this accident has
obscured what seems to me the real meaning of the statement,
namely, that in Cicero's time the ss was regularly written in all
past participles (and their derivatives) whose first syllable ended
in s preceded by a long vowel, i. e. the participles of long vowel-
stems ending in dentals. Of course the ss was always written
after short vowels, in missus etc. both in early and late times,
and there was no variation of spelling to comment on : that
only occurred after long vowels, and there only in participles
and their derivatives, e.g. caseus was never written with ss :
hence the modification fere. The participles would form far the
largest class of words of this form. But caussae ? That is
a participial form too if the derivation from *caudo suggested
in § 51 supr. p. 72, be correct.

Why then was the ss kept in these words in spelling so late
as the last century of the republic when, as Osthoff '

Onyui of , , , ,

the Cicero- has shewn, the sound must soon have become single
man. spell- ^f^gj. ^ JQ^g yowel ? The simplest answer seems to
be that the ss itself was of no great antiquity in
this position : of course patior : passus etc. would help to keep
rddo : rdssus etc., but a spelling that sunk out of use between
Cicero and Quintilian could not have been maintained, one
would think, by purely artificial considerations over a space of

i Paf. E.xc. VI.
Digitized by Microsoft®

SS IN PLAUTUS. § 64. 89

very many years before Cicero, when education was confined to
a far narrower circle tban during and after the Augustan period.
We have then good reason for supposing that the change of tt
by which ss came to stand in this position could not have been
complete much before the introduction of double letters of
which Quintilian also speaks. This first appears in the decree
of Aem. Paulus 189 B.C. and became generally prevalent about
135 — 115 B.C. (Stolz, Lat. Gr. Init.). From the earliest times
the sound of ss where it occurred after long vowels may have
been less full than after short, since we find it written single
here on the inscription just mentioned in the pluperfect sub-
junctive and the perfect infinitive. This does not however
affect our question since the s or ss here in all probability had
nothing to do with tt and may have been (1) reduced to a single
s before the other ss was first pronounced, and (2) only written
ss afterwards on the pattern of esse essem. We conclude there-
fore that the Ciceronian spelling of the participles „ , .
with ss is a trace of the comparatively late change of
tt to ss in this position, though one that might hardly have sur-
vived but for the influence of the forms with ss after short vowels
like missus where the sound survived as well as the writing.

64. Before leaving the Latin evidence, perhaps some com-
ment is needed on the ss in the Plautine words
malacissare batissare cet., where it is commonly

taken as representing the (Campanian or Sicilian sound of the)
Greek ^. In view of the Romance evidence as to the invariably
breathed character of the ss, no one now supposes that it de-
noted a voiced sound in any but these words, and (1) even here
it seems still uncertain whether it does represent ^ and not
cro", while (2) before the introduction of z in Cicero's time it is
difficult to see how otherwise the sound could have been trans-
literated. The descendant of the original Gr. l^=a-h must have
had a much thicker and heavier sound than the single Roman
s, and there was no character in the Latin alphabet to repre-
sent the voiced sound.

65. The facts of the representation of Latin s or ss between
vowels in the Romance languages appear to be as Latin s in
follows: Digitized by Microsom ^'"""""-

90 vejrnek's law in italy. § Co.

Spanish. (Diez, Gr. der Rom. 8pr.* i. p. 363.) Latin

s = s, z, p. s in Spanish is always breathed and

represents not only Latin s, (rosa deciso) but x ns rs

ansio anxius, mesa mensa, oso ursus.

z has a difficult sound which Diez compares to the Eng. ths

as in deaths, but appears to be always breathed. It has many

different origins {ti di ce ci st so j), and apparently represents

Latin s between vowels in only a few words (rosar) though it

frequently appears initially (zugar), especially before i and e

{ziiifonia).

f is of course breathed and represents s only before i and e,

decir desidere, acechar assectari.

Examples of Latin s kept in Spanish as a breathed sound

are

puse positus deciso decisus

raso-jo rasus incluso inclusus

ceso-je caesus cosa ]

r\ a ■ ■ r causa

U. bp. riso risus causa)

In Portuguese (Diez, 1. 384) Latin s between vowels of
Portuguese, whatever origin always becomes voiced, except in

Provencal, words borrowed from Spanish, which kept the
French. .

breathed sound, e.g. queiso = Sp. queso, Lat. caseus.

In French also every s between vowels is voiced (Diez, 1. 433)

except where it is the initial of the second half of a compound,

desuetude vraisemhlance. In Provencal (Diez, 1. 404) it is

voiced and frequently exchanged with z. In some MSS we have

occasionally ss not merely to represent Latin ss (fossa) but also

s in a few words. This may shew a local persistence of the

breathed sound, but is probably only a freak of orthography.

In Wallachian however (Diez, 1. 430) s is always breathed
Wallachian. ^^^ ^^ frequently replaced by s' (Eng. sh), especially
before i. z rarely appears, except sometimes ini-
tially.

Putting aside the Italian changes, which are too in-
volved to be much use as evidence on one side or
the other, we find that in two out of five languages
wo have a sibilant between vowels remaining or becoming a
Digitized by Microsoft®

Summary.

S BETWEEN VOWELS IN ITALIAN. | 66. 91

breathed sound, and in the other three becoming or remaining
voiced. The change from a breathed to a voiced fricative in
vocal surroundings is natural, easy, and of frequent occurrence
in almost anj;- language, whereas that from a voiced to a
breathed in this position is unnatural and unparalleled. There
can therefore be no possible doubt as to which of the two was
the parent of the other. The evidence of Spanish and Wal-
lachian alone abundantly proves that Latin s between voiuels
was always breathed, and as we have already seen, all the evi-
dence we can get from Latin itself leads us to exactly the same
conclusion. Typical examples are —

Lat. causa = Span, causa, Wal. cause,

Lat. (late) *rdsa = Span, rosa, Wal. rus'e,

Lat. casa = Span, casa, Wal. case,

Lat. caseus = Span, queso, Port, queiso. It. cascio,

in all of which Latin s is represented by a breathed sound.
These prove the genuine phonetic character of the representa-
tion, since they cannot have been affected by the participles in
-Iso- -rso- -xo- -pso- etc. which, it might have been suggested,
had kept the breathed sound in the participles in -so after
vowels.

It now only remains for us to discuss the changes of the
sound in Italian.

66. The rules for the pronunciation of s between vowels
in Italian are as follows (Diez, 1. 347 — 8. Dr H.
Vockeradt, Lehrbuch der It. Spr. Berlin, 1878,
pp. 8, 9) :

s between vowels in Italian is always voiced except

1. in adjectives ending in -oso^, glorioso hellicoso and

their derivatives in -osia -osita ;

2. in the verbal endings -si -se -sero -so when preceded

by e, and substantives in -esa derived from these ;

3. in words beginning with mis- dis- es- tr'as- when the

1 Fernow held that the s is voiced where the termination is preceded by
a consonant, as in ontoso. This apparently arbitrary restriction is unknown to
Dr Vockeradt, and only (juoted by Diez in passing.
Digitized by Microsoft®

92 teener's law in italy. § 66.

second half of the compound begins with a vowel,
and compounds of words beginning with s with
prefixes ending in vowels ; and
4. in cosa roso riso.

The third class we may dismiss from further consideration,
the pronunciation of the s being simply determined by its
sound as an initial or final when the words are uncompounded.

The other rules point clearly to the influence of analogy
Origin of the o'^ Other arbitrary change. It may safely be asserted
distinction, ^jj^t no phonetic cause could have separated riso
and roso ,from the mass of other past participles with a voiced
s between vowels in which it has exactly the same origin,

Latin s-« ss- tt. The verbal forms in -eso etc., it is true,

have a breathed s, but they have no claim to be regarded
as anything but an accidental class, acceso from accensus, difeso
from defensus, peso from pensus, teso from tensus, but also leso
from laesus, crese (Dante, Pg. 32. 32) from *cresus. It seems
clear that the reason for the breathed s is to be found in
the nasal which originally preceded it in the majority of the
forms, as in the adjectives in -oso orig. -onso-, though here
the n was only rarely written in Latin, there being no parallel
forms to preserve it in the spelling as there was e.g. in
accendere : accensus. Nevertheless it does occur in MSS, e.g.
Verg. Eel. 1. 5, Publ. Syr. 169, which shews that the nasal
colour of the vowel was kept into quite late times. The
change of a breathed to a voiced s between vowels must
have taken place before this was lost. Afterwards leso C7'ese
reso and any others there may be of this form (which altogether
would be a far smaller number than those which originally
ended in -ensus) came over to the breathed pronunciation'.

1 The n of the French rendre, Ital. rendere, Port, render, seeias clearly due
to the parallelism of the (late) Latin past participle ''resus, itself only a popular
coinage. After the breathed sound had been restored by the influence of the
other participles in -eso the proportion resus ; tesus gave rendere : tendere in
place of reddere, whether this took place separately in Italian, French and
Portuguese, or as seems probable on common ground. In the languages in
which all the participles kept the breathed s the connexion would not be so close
between the forms in -eso and the nasal presents. Hence, as we should expect,
the old Spanish form (Catalonian) is )■<•(/■<•, and Proven(,;al, in which the s

Digitized by Microsoft®

ORIGIN OF ITALIAN BEEATHED S. § G6. 93

Probably however in course of time the forms in -eso would
have yielded to the influence of the others in -aso -oso -uso all
with voiced s as rimdso (remansus) spaso {expansus) apparently
have done, but for such forms as misso fesso arso corso flusso
ripulso avolso, in all of which -so was breathed. These with
the forms in -eso seem to have created the feeling that in
participles the s might be either breathed or voiced without
any clear reason for the distinction. Hence the breathed
sound was restored where it was useful to avoid confusion with
words of different origin; rOso 'bitten', was by this means
distinguished from ^rosa 'a rose', and riso 'a smile' from riso
'rice' an Arabic word. Cosa naturally felt the influence of
the numerous adjectival forms in -oso -osa to which it would
seem more akin than to participles, of which there are very few
if any in -oso.

This account of the breathed s in such cases as due to
an analogical and comparatively modern readjustment of pro-
nunciation receives a curiously exact confirmation from a
passage in an old Piedmontese grammar (Pipino^ pub. 1783).
He states (p. 12) that the sound of s between vowels in
Piedmontese is " soft like s in the Italian words cosa roso rosa
naso Piedmontese Marchese." This shews that in Pipino's
time the later rule for the pronunciation of cosa and roso
in a different way from rosa naso had at all events not become
common in the Court circle in which he moved, but all four still
kept their natural sound. So that there are no real exceptions
to the rule that 'Latin s between vowels became voiced in Italian
as in French, Provencal and Portuguese^, hut re-
mained breathed in Spanish and Wallachian.'

appears to have longer remained breathed, redre. The later Spanish rendir
ia due to Portuguese influence, as seems proved by the form renta, which would
have become renda if derived from a Latin form with t.

' Note that in late Latin the d of rosa appears to have been lengthened, on
the analogy perhaps of ros roris.

2 Camb. University Libr. Aa. 21. 34.

2 The four dialects most exposed to Celtic influence, as has been pointed
out, I think, by Seelmann.

Digitized by Microsoft®

94 verner's law in italy. § 67.

B. Final S in Aryan and the change ofS to R in Sanskrit.

67. The difficulties attached to the history of the sibilants
in the Aryan languages have attracted little discussion of late.
Bloomfield's attack on the traditional explanations of the
changes of final s {A.yn. Journal of Philology, 1882) was an-
swered by Osthoff in his History of the Perfect ; but since then
no new attempt has been made to face the problem, though it
still presents many difficulties. In the Grundriss (§ 556. 3)
Brugmann doubtfully repeats Osthoff 's explanation ('nicht
unwahrscheinlich '). I trust it will not be thought impertinent
to approach the question once more with a slightly clearer view
of the phonetic aspect of the changes involved, and in the hope
not of producing any new and elaborate scheme, but merely of
reconciling what is most probable in the accounts of both
authorities. It is clearly necessary to begin by stating briefly
what arguments have been advanced on either side.

68. Bloomfield begins by giving examples of Sanskrit e or

medially resulting from the loss of s after an
Bloomfield. . . , JT _, ^ , , , , , ,

origmal I.-Jiiu. e or o, where he holds that the

Sanskrit sound is and has always been strictly non-diphthongal.
sedus = Lat. sedi, edhi = Gr. iadi, dehi and dhehi, Zend dazdi,
nedlyas, Zend nazdyo, medha, Zend mazda. He compares further
the loss of the sibilant in sidati, Zend hidhaiti, and in Skt.
mldha nlda tida udha dudhabha cet. The Vedic nom. sing.
avayds from the stem avaydj, he explains as formed on the
analogy of the instr. pi. in -obhis from original -ozhhis. The o
in sodaga vodhar is e labialised by the preceding v, lost in sas
but kept in Zend hsvas, Gr. crFe^, Arm. vez. Sodhar from sah
has followed vodhar from vah. On the strength of these
examples he concludes that the o in e.g. agvo dravati is non-
diphthongal and goes back directly to the final -os of I.-Eu.
*ekuos lengthened by compensation on the loss of the s before
the voiced consonant. Similarly an Aryan e resulted from final
-es before voiced consonants. When S and d had both sunk
to a and -es and -as before breathed consonants to -as the
Digitized by Microsoft®

bloomfield's theory. § 68. 9.5

variants e and o seemed anomalous, and in nearly all dialects
the conquered, as it naturally would, since it occurred in
an enormously preponderating majority of cases, in Zend, where
it banished as except before enclitics, in Sanskrit, Pali and
most Prakrit dialects ; but in some of the latter the e was
chosen, where it represents Sanskrit -as in all cases, without
respect to the character of the following sound. The Vedic
ahar udhar usar, are different stems independent of ahas etc.
and the one or two rare examples of ar elsewhere for -as as
bhimar are arbitrary imitations of this apparent analogy. He
concludes that e and o both existed separate from a at the latest
period of pro-ethnic Aryan, and finds a further example in
the Zend instr. and dat. pi. of -as stems, raocebish, raocebyo,
J.-Eu. *leukesbhis, Zend e being regularly the long form of
^=Skt. tt, e.g. Gath. emavant=Skt. amavant with secondary
lengthening of the first syllable. Similarly we have occasionally
mane vace for mano vaco, which seem to shew the original
sound' still resisting the levelling tendency. In Sanskrit mano-
bhis etc., shew the victory of the analogical or ' inferential '
extending from external to internal combination. Bloomfield
then finally deals with the scansion of o and e in Veda. He
proves by almost exhaustive statistics that they are certainly
treated as short syllables before vowels, but since he holds
they were non-diphthongal cannot accept the native explanation
of the loss of the final u and i, " 8 and e were the real sounds
here represented by the symbols ('^T '^) ; before other vowels
they gave up their qualitative difference and were represented
by a, (^) but before a, itself the signs for the long vowels and
diphthongs were resorted to, maJcing possible the retention of the
quality or colour of the vowels in writing,^' the short quantity
being traditionally retained in the metre.

The theory thus briefly sketched, whether right or wrong,
may be said to mark an epoch in Aryan phonology. The
resemblance between Sanskrit and Zend final -o and the
common Indo-European termination -os when once pointed
out by authority is altogether too striking to be left on one

1 o would of course be regular in the nom. sing, [fihos) but the e would

come from -ebis etc. at a time when e and S alternated.
Digitized by Microsoft®

9G verner's law in italy. § 69.

side. It must either be accepted and welcomed as an extremely-
important addition to our knowledge of the history of the
vowels', or fully and finally refuted, and any refutation, to
be satisfactory, must substitute a clearer account of the pheno-
mena than we have so far attained. It seems almost self-
evident from a common-sense point of view that there is
a priori far too strong a probability in favour of Bloomfield's
theory for it to be summarily put aside simply because we find
there may be other explanations of the phenomena that are
equally possible and do not involve a greater amount of difiQculty.
There is such a thing, surely, as weight of evidence, as well
as mere numerical preponderance of the arguments advanced ;
and while we cannot allow any theory, however plausible, to
override Phonetic Laws that are well-known and fully esta-
blished, it is clearly unscientific to overlook the possibility
that some of our minor deductions from these may possess
far less authority than the Laws themselves. We may be led
by adherence to ascertained principles to explain some small
number of forms in a particular language in one and only one
way, involving the rejection of a theory which deals plausibly
with large masses of facts, and in any case we can hardly be
too careful in keeping such difficulties in view ; but we ought
to be quite certain that it is a principle and not a prejudice at
stake. The particular forms are on their trial, quite as much
as the theory.

69. Having said thus much on the general issue we are
Defects of his free and bound to notice the weaknesses in Bloom-
theory, field's position. In the first chapter of the Perfect

Osthoff deals with most of them in detail. Brieflj^ they seem
to be two, neglect of chronology, and the (apparently unnecessary)
assertion of the non-diphthongal character of the Sanskrit e
and where they come from final -es -os. Through the first
omission he has passed by in silence the very serious difficulty
of the Zend forms in -az corresponding to the Sanskrit e. Was
the loss of the s completed before or after Zend and Sanskrit

1 And in the same direction as we are led by all recent investigations,
e.g. by the recognition of the c-colouring of the reduplicating vowel in the
perfect.

Digitized by Microsoft®

DIFFICULTIES OF BLOOMFIELD'S THEOET. § 69. 97

parted company ? If afterwards, as Osthoff points out, we are
left to suppose that the change of ^ and Sto a took place in Zend
and Sanskrit separately, which is clearly improbable ; if before,
where does the a come from in mazda- nazdisMha- dazdi,'vi\i\c\i
Bloomfield himself quotes ? These forms at least need to be
explained, as well as ' myazda hazdyat. The second defect is
equally serious. Why need it be assumed that e and o derived
from es os are pure monophthongs? It is at least quite con-
ceivable that and e should be diphthongised instead of merely
lengthened in compensation for a lost consonant. In modem
English we have hardly any pure monophthongal long vowels.
Bloomfield's view at all events brings us into very serious diffi-
culties. In the first place there is the question of the short
quantity of e and o in Veda. The explanation I have quoted
verbatim from Bloomfield seems at least very obscure, especially
the words in italics (§ 68, supra p. 95). How can the "possibility"
of expressing a particular sound " in writing " under certain
circumstances preserve the quality of the sound in speech in
those circumstances and those oidy ? And for what conceivable
reason did the Hindoo grammarians insist on writing o before d
but a before at u e and o to denote exactly the same sound ?
On the other hand the native theory of the loss of the second
component of the diphthong (t, u) has many analogies; not merely
in this very group of languages, the locatives Zend zastay-d
O. Pers. dastay-a (where of course the i is original) but in
the Greek final at ot,, whose short quantity in scansion and accent
is simply due to the loss of i. Again if Sanskrit o is merely
an I.-Eu. lengthened by loss of s why should not it also
represent I.-Eu. o after which s was lost, as for example in the
nom. plur. masc. (Osc. Nuvlanus) Skt. agvas? Why do we have
a^vd dravanti and not dgvo dravanti 1 On the usual view of
the as a diphthong we should answer, ' because a long vowel
is not so likely to be diphthongised in compensation for the
loss of a consonant as a short one.' Finally, and this is of
course the chief objection, why did o and e in Aryan remain

' The question of the changes of as in Sanskrit in the middle of words

(madgm, of. Lat. mergus, majjati = mergit) is yet another difSoulty of which
Bloomfield's article makes no mention.

Digitized by Microsoft® tj

98 .VERNER'S law in ITALY. § 70.

nearer to ou ei than to a when they resulted from -?s -Ss before
a voiced consonant and not elsewhere ? And if they were not
nearer to the sounds which finally became o and e in Sanskrit
than they were to a, is it conceivable that they should have
been written 6 e and not d 1

70. Osthoff {Perf. 1 foil.) begins by pointing out the Zend
forms with az = Skt. e, and where this equation
holds he urges that the loss of the sibilant is a
change confined to individual languages, as Latin and Sanskrit,
though in some cases (Gr. iBpv(o} the loss is Indo-European.
He rejects Brugmann's suggestion of a ' dissimilationstrieb ' as a
reason for the opposite treatment of the s in sidati Gr. ihpiia
and 1^0) o^o<; Teut. asts., and questions the evidence for the
form hidhaiti in Zend. The preliminary chapter concludes by
enumerating eight points in the case.

1. Skt. e = Zend az, in all Bloomfield's examples as well as
in miyedha = Tnyazda ' meat-offering.'

2. The optative hazdyat which Hubsehmann has discovered
in Yt. 13. 3. It may, it is true, be a late formation on the
analogy of forms like *jaghmydt *ca-khr-ydt, but " this proves
nothing, since sedima may equally well be a new formation in
Sanskrit." It is and must be purely capricious to deny that
Sanskrit e = Zend az.

3. Sedima for *sddima is not due to ' a slight difference of
pronunciation' of the original and the hysterogen e in Indo-
European, because Sanskrit levels rather than preserves small
vowel-d ifferences '.

4. The Latin sedimiis may only go back to an Italic
*sesdimus.

The other four points only go to prove the existence of the
type of perfect-stem SED- in pro-ethnic Indo-European.

Osthoff then gives his own explanation of the facts one by
one (p. 15). First he states the law for Indo-European that s
was lost before voiced explosives when these were followed by a

1 This was written (1884) before Hubschmanu's discovery of Skt. !=I.-Eu. 9.
Digitized by Microsoft®

osthoff's theory. § 70. 99

second consonant, but kept when it was followed by vowels,
iSpvay but 1^0} Zend rodcehyd but opea-fjn, the variation being
due to a different division of the syllables ; Zend nazdyS Skt.
nedlyas should have been *nddy6 and *nadlyas, but the
az e were restored from the superlative form nazdishtS nedish-
thas ; this of course on the supposition that the word dates
back to Indo-European. The e from az is a change peculiar
to Sanskrit and due to the ' i-colouring ' of the z. Cf. Arc.
Tot? rats = Att. Toi)? Ta9 Dor. tok? rai/?. Again, in the Sanskrit
forms corresponding to Gr. /xtcr^o? Zend mizhdem, mldkvas,
midhusas, the dh of the nom. is for dh on the analogy of the
other cases, the I.-Eu. forms being mldhv-, mizdu. The Zend
instr. pi. radcebish should be -azbish, but has been influenced by
the dative form in -ebyS. That in this form we have e not d he
attributes to the umlaut of the following y. The dat. plur. of
fem. d stems is always -abyo except in one case, Yt. 10. 93
haSriehyS, which Osthoff claims as the true form, the others
being new formations. Similarly the e in sedus edhi, etc., had
nothing to do with the quality of the L-Eu. e. This follows
from the chronological difficulty noticed in Bloomfield's theory,
and is also supported by the fact that Skt. e in

kiyedha from Mynt-dha,
medha from mndh-dha Gr. fj,evdijpTj';,
nedishthas Zend nazdishtS from I.-Eu. nd-s(e)d-,
trnedhi from tr-na-z-dhi,

has for its component not I.-Eu. e but Aryan & of various other
origins. Dr J. Schmidt's view of an ' e-colouring ' in the I.-Eu.
n in the first two cases, Osthoff thinks " hardly needs refuta-
tion." The ' i-colouring ' of ^; however does not affect a preced-
ing d, nor (i when the z is followed by Skt. j, arddhvam Tnajjati.
[Brugmann (Gds. § 591) confines the change to the words in
which the z is followed by d or dh; zbh > dbh {mddbhis
usadbhis vidvadbhis) zg > dg (madgas) he considers the regular
changes.]

Passing then to the changes of final s Osthoff (p. 36)
develops his theory of the origin of o in Sanskrit before vowels,
nasals, liquids and voiced explosives. The ' pause-forms ' of as
Digitized by Microsoft® 7 — 2

100 VERNER'S law in ITALY. § 71.

as in pro-ethnic Aryan were ah ah. These were ' substituted '
for az and az before voiced explosives, and for as as before
vowels and all other consonants except dentals and palatals,
where the s was kept, because of its close physiological connexion
with the following sound, ah became o before voiced conso-
nants, and this was made general in Zend except before en-
clitics, and in Sanskrit supplanted ah before vowels, nasals and
liquids, while ah was kept before breathed guttural and labial
explosives, ah became a in Zend and a in Skt. before voiced
explosives, and these were similarly apportioned. Then the
relation of agvam : kavim, sunum produced kavih, sunuh as the
pause-forms of kavis sunus. Then since pitur, etc., also became
pituh, etc., before a pause, kavih sunuh produced an analogical
kavir sunur in the same position as that in "which pitur
appeared, namely before voiced explosives and vowels. This
view of the purely analogical change of s to r is held also by
Bloomtield (Am. J. P. 3, p. 31 n.) but rejected by Bmgmann,
who allows (Gds. § 647. 6) a real phonetic change of i to r
before vowels, nasals and liquids, though the i in this position
he has to explain as an analogical substitution for s. He does
not however reject (§ 556) Osthoff's explanation of the 6.

71. Having thus reviewed the orthodox position as fully

rt g ; . and faithfully as we can, it is at least lawful to

mlts of the .point out where it fails of conviction, and to sift its

discussion. , • ,• t. -, • , ttt ,

certainties irom its conjectures. We may grant

Osthoff's law for the loss of s in Indo-European, though the

direct evidence in its favour is almost confined to the word

ihpvw ; we are clearly bound to admit that e in some words

came from az in Sanskrit after it had split off from Zend,

whether or not we hold with Dr J. Schmidt that the a retained

an ' e-colouring.' And if we allow the diphthongal character of

Sansk. e, as we have seen (supra § 69, p. 97) we must, it becomes

immaterial what the exact character of its first component may

have been. jSTevertheless, admitting all this as fully as we may,

we are very far from necessarily rejecting Bloomfield's theory in

its entirety. It is quite possible for a change which took place

partially in Indo-European and partially in Sanskrit, to have

Digitized by Microsoft®

MODIFICATION OF BLOOMFIELD'S THEORY. § 71. 101

taken place also in the intermediate stage of pro-ethnic Aryan :
the forms in nazd- may very well have been formed in Aryan,
perhaps on the pattern o£pi-zd-, at a later time than the loss of
z before voiced consonants, which Bloomfield supposes took place
before ? and S had sunk to a; the word in fact does not seem to
occur except in Sanskrit and Zend, and Osthoff himself finds a
difficulty in supposing it Indo-European, hazdyat again by
Osthoff's own law must be a new formation, and it may just as
well have been formed in Zend or later Aryan as at any earlier
time. These are the only two forms in Zend which stand in
our way since in imazda- etc. the z is not original and did not
belong to the earliest period of Aryan. In Sanskrit however
we seem to have clear proof {madgus majjati) that z was kept
medially before gutturals and palatals after the change of ^ and
d to &, but it is not so certain whether it remained so long
before bh, since mddbhis usadhhis vidvadbhis may conceivably
be new formations from the loc. pi. in -tsu. I do not know
whether OsthofFs explanation of e <^ a in Zend (supra, p. 99)
has been confirmed, but in want of further evidence than he
gives in its favour, we are free to regard the forms ebyo -ebish
as shewing a trace of I.-Eu. e (e* < ez-) before -bh-"^ ; the Vedic
avayds, Zend mane vace etc. are further evidence for Bloom-
field's theory which Osthoff does not notice. In any case we
have seen that there is no evidence against the view that z was
lost before d dh and n in Aryan before the time when e and S
sank to (X. All that is essential to Bloomfield's explanation of
Sanskrit and Zend o and Prakr. e as arising directly from I.-Eu.
final -8s -Ss is that we should be allowed to suppose a loss of
final s before voiced explosives, liquids and nasals in Aryan : and
if he were granted its loss only before d dh n r I it would not
be a great stretch of probability to suppose that the form they
took before these was made general before other voiced explo-
sives.

Such are the reservations we must make in deference to
Osthoff's arguments, and these are all. But are there no in-
herent weaknesses in his own position ? It is at least a satis-

' Indeed until the Zend Avesta is better known can we be certain that other
forms with e= Skt. e may mlgUiBB^ 8^jA)erS&itti>'!

102 _ VERNEr'S law in ITALY. § 72.

faction to recognise our ignorance. And Osthoff's theory cer-
tainly presents very considerable difficulties. They seem fairly
obvious but I do not know that they have been definitely
pointed out before. Whether or not they are fatal or even
serious the reader must decide.

72. The basis of the whole structure is a " substitution of
Difficulties of *^® pause-form " for the sound naturally belonging
Osthoff's own to final -as -as in the middle of the sentence. On
^'"^^' the average, we may reckon, a word occurs at the

end of a sentence or clause about once for every seven or eight
times that it is used elsewhere ; by Osthoff's theory we are
therefore asked to suppose that the form which a word had one
time in eight was felt to be so inherently proper to it that it
was substituted for the form it had the other seven times.
Even if we suppose the early Aryans averaged only three or
four words to a clause the improbability is only reduced to
4 : 1 instead of 8 : 1. And if it is nevertheless a phenomenon
to be expected for some reason or other, why is there no illus-
tration forthcoming? Even on its author's own shewing it
appears to be without analogy of any kind. But the substitu-
tion when made was not completed : -as was kept before
dentals and palatals, because of the close physiological con-
nexion between them and the preceding s. But surely when a
particular sound is substituted for another by analogy, by the
feeling that the new sound is the correct one, the change is
generally carried out with completeness ? Are we justified in
combining analogy and phonetics in this way? Be this as it may
we have a far more serious difficulty to the theory in the fact
that the forms in -h are only beginning to appear in use in the
Rig- Veda where -as is at least as common as ah before k(h) and
p(h). If -ah was the regular form in pro-ethnic Aryan, how is
it we find the older form in Sanskrit ? Are we really to sup-
pose another analogical readjustment, -as t- -as c- dragging over
-ah k- -ah p- -ah n- -ah I- ? Credat Judaeus. This difficulty
Osthoff does not notice ; Brugmann (§ 556. 3) escapes it only
by supposing the exceptions -as k- etc. made in Aryan to the

original substitution oi ah-, so that the pausc-furm should have
Digitized by Microsoft®

bruqmann's view. § 73. 103

intruded before vowels and voiced consonants but not else-
where. Such a limitation is purely arbitrary. Everything
seems to shew that the change to Visarga is a late change,
almost peculiar to post-Vedic Sanskrit, -ds -as -is -us as ^s us
are constantly kept (Whitney, c. 2) where later Sanskrit sub-
stituted h for s or s. The final -e in Prakrit = Skt. -as o is one
of the strongest points in Bloomfield's case, but Osthoff and
Brugmann say nothing about it, and their theory leaves it com-
pletely unexplained. Finally what of the phonetics of the
change of ah to au through the middle stage a} ? Why should
a mere emission of breath like h produce a lowering of the
tongue and rounding of the lips ? 3 {gh) is a fairly common
sound, e.g. in Teutonic. Does it ever produce a similar labial
diphthongisation of the preceding vowel? At all events the
change needs illustration and Osthoff gives none.

73. It is hardly necessary to criticize OsthofFs analogical
explanation of the Sanskrit rhotacism, as it has change of s
been rejected by Brugmann. The attempt to ex- *" '^•
plain a change of an individual sound, not of forms in any kind
of system; by an analogy on the narrowest conceivable basis, is a
noteworthy example of the dangers of the imaginative method.
Like Brugmann's derivation of the Greek perfects in -ku from
the single pattern eScoKa, it would have been long ago forgotten
but for the distinguished position of its author. Such explana-
tions have as a rule the unique advantage that they cannot be
directly disproved ; but in this case the fact that h is only
beginning to appear in the Veda while -r from -s is fully
established renders it untenable. Brugmann's view is that ir ur
came by regular phonetic change from -i£ -uz ori-
ginally only before vowels, these having been sub-
stituted for -is -us on the pattern of the Sanddhi of voiced
explosives. Then ir ur displaced -iz -uz before voiced explo-
sives. This is open to very little objection. Only if we hold
that s may as easily pass to rh as i to r, and that before con-
sonants as readily as vowels (supra, §§ 7 — 9, p. 9) we need not
assume quite so much shifting in usage as is necessary for his
view, havisas would indicate that rhotacism did not tak-e place
Digitized by Microsoft®

104 verner's law in italy. § 74.

between vowels (it is only an accentual accident that it did
so in Latin) but we should consider the r the natural phonetic
result of an abridged -s before voiced consonants and similarly
perhaps the h from rh as the true form of s before k and p. That
before voiced consonants final s was kept down to the period of
rhotacism, and not changed to d, as it was medially, we may
ascribe to the influence of its form before vowels and t o, just as
in Zend where -s is universal after i and u. On the other hand
there are one or two forms with r before breathed consonants
which may possibly indicate that the change took place there
also (aglrpada, cf. purpati). This however is quite uncertain ;
it is at any rate very simple to suppose that the forms with r
before d dh h hh etc. were extended to the position before
vowels, e.g. havir daddmi, giving havir ddaddmi. This saves us
one of Brugmann's two readjustments, which it is to be observed
are supposed to act in a contrary direction. A more definite
objection to his view is to be found in the regularity of r be-
fore voiced explosives. If *patl daddti *patid bharati had been
the regular phonetic forms and -ir was only an analogical sub-
stitution we should expect to find a certain amount of variation
and traces of -i, -id at least somewhere. But they do not occur.

74. If then the theories of Bloomfield, Osthoff, and Brug-
mann still leave us an open question we are likely to be very
sceptical of any further attempts at formulating definite ex-
planations. Nevertheless every attempt helps, and equally by
its failure or success, so long as it does not violate established
principles. The scheme that follows is merely a modification of
Bloomfield's theory and claims no positive merit of its own ;
I shall be more than content if it is found free from serious
errors of principle, and at the same time can afford any light
for future research by indicating the limits to which the investi-
gation has so far been carried. I leave to the reader's con-
sideration without further comment the history of the various
changes in the order that seems to me to involve the fewest
difficulties, stating the alternatives in the most doubtful points.
What amount of probability may attach to it I cannot decide,
but it seems to be at least a possible solution.

Digitized by Microsoft®

RESULT OF THE DISCUSSION. § 74. 105

A. In Pro-ethnic Aryan.

1. Final. Modified re-
a. -8s, -Ss became o^ ei before voiced ex- sioZfid/s

plosives^ and aspirates, and before theory.

liquids and nasals.
/S. -OS, -es became o^, & under the same conditions.
7. -is, -los became -is, -us before all sounds but voiced

explosives and -iz, -uz before these.

2. Medial.

a. -zg-, -zj- remained.

/3. -ezbh-, -ozbh- probably became -dbh-, -o-bh-.
7. -ezd-, -ozd- became -eH-, -o'-d and -ezd-, -ozd- became
-e^d-, o^d-.

3. Later on

a. and e sank to a,

/S. 0- and e^ sank to a" and a\ o" and e' to d- and a'.

B. In Sanskrit.

1. a. i. a-, of were blended with au, ai and became

0, e.
ii. Or and of sank to a.

/3. -iz-, -uz- became the cerebral iz, uz, which

i. Medially became -id- -ud- (Brugmann Gds. § 591)
except before d dh, with which they combined
to -id- -ud-.
ii. Finally probably remained being kept by
iii. -is- us-, which became is us and so remained
before vowels and breathed consonants.

2. a. Final and e both appearing before voiced ex-

plosives, etc., where only one sound -as appeared
before breathed consonants and vowels, was
everywhere substituted for e except in Prakrit,
where e banished o. On the pattern of the
Sanddhi of breathed explosives" o was sub-

1 V. § 71 supra ad fiu.
= Br. Gds. § 647.
Digitized by Microsoft®

106 vernee's law in italy. § 74.

stituted for -as before vowels and lost its final u
except before a, with which it coalesced, leaving
simply 0.
/3. Medial -az-

i. before d, dh became c.
ii. before _;" became -a/-,
iii. before g and (?) b became -ad-.

3. Later on

a. Final i became r, and was substituted for s before
vowels as o for -as.

/3. Final s passed through rh to h except before dentals
and palatals. Its retention here probably
caused some variation in the other cases, so
that the h was not fully adopted until sup-
ported by the change of -as to -ah. If we
doubt the change to rh, we must put -ih « is
on a level with -ah < as.

ry. mandbkis havirbhis replace the true phonetic forms
on the analogy of mano havir.

4. Finally -as sinks to ah except before t, th, c, ch.

C. In Zend.

1. a. a- Or became o e, a" became d.

/3. Final -as became -a, except before enclitics which

were practically a part of the word,
fy. Final -d became -a.

2. The ending o is everywhere substituted not merely
a. for e but also

/8. for -&s (before vowels and breathed consonants)
7. except before enclitics.

3. -a was originally proper before voiced explosives, -S,

elsewhere.

4. -ts -!t.s remain and banish -iz -uz.

Digitized by Microsoft®

107

C. Final S arM R in TJmhrian.

75. The change of final s to ?- in. later Umbrian has no
direct bearing on the theory advanced in the preceding chapters,
but the subject is of course closely related to it and it is
desirable to put the facts on record more definitely than has
been hitherto attempted. Brugmann {Gds. § 655. 9) expressly
leaves it an open question whether there are any phonetic
conditions which determine the loss or retention of the r, or
whether its occasional omission is merely due to a careless
engraver. Whether or not any such conditions can be dis-
covered will best appear from a few statistics. We have to
exclude from consideration all words in which final s never
became r, i.e. those, and only those, in which it was only the
written representative of a stronger sound, -ss -s{i) -ns -cs -ps or
the like, e.g. homonus aveis,fus, sis, vas, erus (Bucheler, Umhrica,
p. 184). Also we must distinguish the loss of -/ (= orig. -ns)
from that of a genuine -s or -r. Final r is not omitted in
V VI and VII in any words in which s is kept in the earlier
period (except sei si {=sis) which does not happen to occur
at all in I — IV), so that there is, strictly speaking, no loss
of final r, only of final s ; hence we must first see where final s
is dropped in Tables I — IV.

76. In Table I a, s is kept sixteen times (five times in one
phrase) before a, e, p, t, v, j, and a pause, and pi„aisin

. dropped once in the adverb heri(s) before p. Tables i—iv.

In I 6, s is kept twenty-one times, before a, e, i, k, p, t, h, s,
s', and a pause, and dropped four times, before a, Jc, p, t = d.

In II a, s is kept nineteen times, before p, k, f, s, m, v, once
before t= d (l. 28), and lost five times before a, p and a pause.

In II b, s is kept twelve times, before k, p,f, m, and a pause,
once before t = d, and dropped twenty-eight times (twenty-
seven in a long list of names in which it is kept twice) and
once in the adverb heri(s), before a, e, i, k, p, t, s, m, v.

In III and IV s is kept forty-two times before a, e, i, k, p, t,
/; s, n, V, h, and droppgd^hr^g^^nes^^fore a, e, s.

108 verner's law in italy. § 77.

From this it seems to follow that no rule for the loss or
retention ofs in the older periocLcan be based upon the character
of the following sound, so far as we can tell from the evidence
we have. Curiously words with final s only occur twice before
voiced explosives {t = d), and in one place it is kept and in the
other omitted. Before all other classes of sound it seems
equally kept and lost. On the other hand all words in which
it is lost have one characteristic in common and it can hardly
be accidental, thei/ are all datives or ablatives plural ending in
-e(s) -ei{s) -i{s), except the adverb heri, where the i is probably
long. We might conjecture then that after long vowels s was
regularly lost under certain further conditions (e.g. before a
pause or before some classes of following sounds or perhaps in
enclitics, or again in words of more than a certain number of
syllables where the last would be further from the accent) which
we have no evidence to determine. Then the two forms would
be confused and their proper positions obscured in usage.

77. The variations of final r are much smaller. In VI and
Final r in VII it is only omitted in heri hertei (and there
y—yil- always) and twice in sei si for sis (VI a 23, b 27).

Seeing however that these two tables are only modernised
copies of documents in which final s was regular, not much
reliance can be placed on their apparent consistency in this
respect. The engraver probably adopted a uniform spelling for
the same grammatical forms wherever they occurred. In VI
b 27 si (followed by a vowel) and sir (followed by p) occur side
by side, the former being, we may conclude, the genuine form.
In V however, which very possibly contains original, not copied,
documents, there is less regularity. In the first section (a I —
13) not counting herte r is lost twice, once in emantu herte
(emantur herte occurring just below) and once in a dative
plur. eikvasese A tiedier ; r appears before a, e, u, p, h. In the
next section (a 14—6 5) it is lost in this same phrase, but kept
before a, e, u, p,t = d,f. In the fragment in Latin alphabet
we have it once omitted before d in the same case, Claverni
dirsans frater Atiersiur, and kept before a, e, o, p, d, s, m.

Summing up then we may feel certain of this much, that
Digitized by Microsoft®

FINAL / IN UMBRIAN. § 77. 109

final s or final r that has come from s so far as our evidence
extends are only lost after long vowels or diphthongs. In eman-
tur the r is probably original. What farther conditions caused
its loss or retention it seems impossible to discover. But the
statistics given above will be available for further investigation,
and may very likely prove more intelligible to other eyes than
they are to mine.

I need scarcely ask the reader to follow the variations of the
writing in the case of final /. One tendency seems distinctly
observable, both in I — IV and VI and VII, to write it only once
in phrases where it occurs at the end of each word in the phrase.
This would seem to indicate that it only existed in spelling at
the time when the copy was made. However in the probably
uncopied Va we have it written once, and in Vb it is once
written and twice omitted, all four times before a pause. It is
hardly worth while to pronounce any decision on evidence so
confused.

Digitized by Microsoft®

110

teener's law in ITALY.

APR D. THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE LATIN PERFECT.

OSTHOFF, AND

A. Indo-European.

P-

EH

2)8.

6

uoida

uoitl'tha

uoide

uidma''^} 1

nitt'te

uidnti

eueidgsm

eueidess

eueidast

eueidssma^(s)

eueid8sta^(s)

eueidasnt

edeiksm

edeikss

edeikst

edeiks(9')ma''(s)

edeiksta''(s)

edeiksnt

uidai
uitsai
uitHai

Then 1. Middle and Act. of perfect
fused ■. • of short vowel of
pi. active.

2. 1 Phonetic development of

Aor., and loss of aug-
ment.

3. Levelling of 1st pers. plur.

perf. in consonant and
vowel stems and also to
anaptyptie vowel in dei-
xlmus.

4. Levelling of 3rd pers. plur.

B. Latin.

■pldl
visti
vide
vidimus

vistis
vidontt

veidisem
veidls
veidist
veidimus f
veidistis t
veidisjnt

First Stage.

-f-

deixem
deix
deixt

deix(i)mus f
deixtis t
deixent

to thematic -ont.
Then 5. s becomes r in the 1st pers.
sing, and 3rd pers. plur.
of aor.

6. veidls gives veidit for veidist

on •/• of videris, viderlt,
helped hy regimus, re-
git.

7. veidls, veidit give veidl on

•/. of subj. deice, deices,
deicet, supported by vldi,
sedi.

^ Osthoff {Perf. p. 570) would insert here another stage: "2nd pi. 'risis
altered to vistis on ■/• of estis, etc., and the variants visis vistis give rise to
visti as well as visi." This seems unnecessary, as it is quite possible that tt!i
became st in Latin, though tt may have at once become s,'!, or, more probably,
remained as it was, and visti would drag over ^i-ittis.

Digitized by Microsoft®

Ill

SIMPLIFIED FROM THE THEORIES OF THURNEYSEN,
BRUG.MA.NlSr.

C. Latin.

Second Stage

D. Final Stage

vidi

'fidi

visti

fidisti

vide Wided

fidit

vidimus

(2).

fidimus

vistis

fidistis

vido(nt)

fidSruni
-ere

veidi
.veiderem

veldl

veidls

veidisti

veidit

(1)

veidit

veidimns

veidimus

veidistis

veidistis

veidSr*"

veiderunt
-gre

-erunt
-ere

(3)

deixem

(2)

deixi

dixi

deix

' deixti

dixti

deixt

deixit

dixit

deiximus

(1)-

deiximus

diximus

deixtis

deixtis

dixtis

deixent

. deixent

dixerunt

tutudi
etc.

etc.)

(4)

dixisti

dixistis

Then 8. The Aorist finally remo- Tlien 10, The expelled veiderem forms

delled on the Perfect ; vi-
dimuSy. vistis, vidi : visti 11.

gives to veidimus, veidis-
tis, veidi, deiximus, deix-
tis : veidisti, deixti.
veidi, veidit give deixi, de-
ixit. 12.

the pluperfect.

Finally the remodelled aor-
ist imposes its flexion on
all genuine perfects like
vidi, dedi, fidi, tutudi,
and

on dixi.

Digitized by Microsoft®

112 VERNER'S law in ITALY.

The advantages of this arrangement are

1. That it supposes a fairly continuous development, each stage
in the process being so to speak homogeneous until it is completed.

a. The singular perfect active is remodelled on
i. the plural perfect active,
ii. the singular perfect middle, and
iii. difierent forms within its own system are levelled.

/3. The aorist which has

i. meanwhile undergone phonetic change and conse-
quent internal analogical readjustment,

ii. is now gradually and consistently remodelled on
the plan of the perfect, which still survives.

iii. The loss of its 1st person by rhotacism precipitates
the fusion of the tenses, and

y. The flexion of the aorist is now transfeired bodily to
the perfect as well.

2. By taking the aorist as the back-bone of the structure it
avoids the diflSculty of lengthening the stem- vowel of the perfect.

3. It shortens the process by which t or d is added to the 3rd
pers. sing, of the form with a long stem-vowel.

4. It accepts the aid of both methods of explaining the forma-
tion of the 2nd pers. sing, in -isti, and

5. This part of the scheme is not vitiated by Osthoff's objection
to "uejdasm etc." in I.-Eu. since deiximus, deixtis would give deixti
on the ■/•' of vidimiis, mstis, msti.

6. Osthoff's objection (Perf. p. 571) to the accent vevdesm/as
sedeshos by the side of Casmsna *pruzx4na is now removed if we
suppose the first to have belonged to the older, the others to the
later stage of the Latin accent : v. supra, p. 65 foil.

Digitized by Microsoft®

INDEX OF WORDS.

ABBREVIATIONS.

L.

Latin

L-Eu.'

Indo-European

0.

Oscan

Skt.

Sanskrit

U.

Umbrian

Zd.

Zend

Aeq.

Aecjuian

0. c. s.

Old Church Slavonic

Etr.

Etruscan

Goth.

Gothic

Fal.

Falisoan

Ger.

German

Mars.

Marsian

Fr.

French

Mruo.

Marruoinian

Prov.

Provencal

Pel.

Pelignian

Port.

Portuguese

Pio.

Picentine

Sp.

Spanish

Sab.

Sabine

Walo.

Wallachian

Vol.

Volsoiau

In.

Italian

lo.

Pro-ethnic Italic

(The first figure denotes the section, the second the page.)

acceso In. 66 91.
aoechar Sp. 65 90.
acieris L. 5S 76, 66 77, 61 84.
aQirpada Skt. 73 104.
adasia L. 60 83.
adgretus L. 30 39, 42.
Aedesius L (?). 34 48.
Aenesi L. SO 70, 54 76.
Aequasins L (?). 22 28.
aes a- (i) -oris L. 49 68, 55 76.
Aesernia 0. 20 26.
A^sernim 0. 5 5, 29 38.
Aesis U. 17 21, 20 26.
Aesola or -ula L.
agaso ti. SO 69,
ager Falemus L.
agitur, igitur L.
iyxiXos. 60 83.
Agrasius L (?). 34 48.
ahar, ahas Skt. 68 95.
ahenus L. 5 6, 12 16.
ahesnes U. 11 14, 12 16.
aisos Mruc. 18 23, 33 47.
aisusis 0. 18 28.

[a]!tt!umO. 3O40. Digitized by I

C.

SO 70, 53 74, 60 83.
S3 74, 54 74.
11 16.
26 34.

alies Pic. 32 46.

amassem L. 30 39, 43.

amatens Mruc. 33 47.

amavant Skt. 68 95.

ambrefurent U. 23 29.

Ameria U. 23 29.

Amiternum Aeq. 37 50.

amosio L (?). 29 38.

ancora L. 60 83.

AyKvpa. 60 83.

angetuzet 0. 6 5, 29 38, 30 40.

anguis L. 60 83.

angulus L. 60 83.

ansio Sp. 65 90.

appei U. 27 34, 35.

E. Aprusa U. 22 28.

Aprusia and Aprucia L. 22 28.

apstineo L. 62 86.

ara L. 18 22, 40 55, S7 79.

aradhvam Skt. 70 99.

arbos, arbor, arbosem L. 32 46, 55

76, 56 77, S8 81, 61 84.
Ardea L. 12 17, 49 69.
ardeo L. 18 22, SO 69.

,.arerejj, 18 22, 55 76, 61 85.

icrosofm

8

114

INDEX OF WORDS.

AriciaL. 5e 77, 61 85.

aridus L. 12 17, 18 22.

arso In. 66 93.

asa U. 4 4, 18 22.

asellus L. 52 73, 64 74.

aseriatum U. 18 22.

aserum 0. 29 38, 30 43.

asiane XJ. 18 23, 20 26.

asif Vol. 37 50, 56 77.

asignas Mruc. 33 47.

asin Mruc. 33 47.

asinus L. SO 69, 54 74.

-asius and arius U. 4 4, 22 28.

asneis Goth. 9 12.

*asnos L. 54 74.

aso asom U. 18 22.

-aso In. 66 93.

assum L. 18 22.

asum Mruc. 33 47.

atero U. 23 29.

Aurelius L. 49 69, 61 85.

aurora L. 18 24, 56 77, 61 85.

aurum L. 18 24, 58 79, 80.

Aurunca, Auruuci, Ausones 37 50,

49 69, 56 78, 61 85.
Auselius L. 18 24, 30 42.

,, Sab. 34 48.
Ausonia L. 56 78.
*ausoris L. 55 76.
avayas Skt. 68 94.
avolso In. 66 93.
avvei U. 27 35.

B

-bam L. 43 59.

basium L. 51 70.

bassimL. 27 35 (n.).

batissare L. 64 89.

b^uivolus L. 47 67.

benurent U. 5 5, 23 29, 42 51 n.

benuso U. 21 26.

berus, berva U. 24 29.

bhimar Skt. 68 95.

*bhlv5s I.-Eu. 42 58.
♦bhflsh Skt. 54 74.
bim asif Vol. 18 22.
Blaesus L. 43 60n., 51 70.
Bla[ttius] 0. 30 40.
bucca L. 30 41 n.

cadaver L. 42 58.

cado L. 51 71 n.

caelum L. 60 82.

Caere Caerites L. 49 C9, 60 82.

eaeruleus L. 47 67, 60 82, 83.

caerulus L. 60 82, 83.

Caesar L. 53 74, 54 74.

caesaries L. 47 66, 53 74, 54 74.

Caesellia Fal. 34 48, 38 52.

Caesena U. 17 21, 34 48.

Caesenia L. 34 48 n.

Caesennia L. 34 48.

Caesemia L. 34 48.

Caesetia L. 34 48.

Caesia Sabina L. 34 48.

Caesia virgo L. 60 83.

Caesidia L. 34 48.

CaesUia L. 34 48.

Caesinia L. 34 48.

Caesionia L. 34 48.

caesius L. 50 69, 60 83.

Caesius Sabinus L(?). 44 60, 34 48.

caesna L. 12 16.

Caesula Fab. 38 51, 52.

Caisidis 0. 29 38.

ca-kr-yat Skt. 70 98.

Calvisius Sab. 34 48, 59 82.

camena L. 5 (B) 6, 78 112.

Cameria, Camerinum, Gameses 23 29.

Camillus L. 46 64.

canus L. casnar Pel. 12 16.

Canusium 0. 22 28.

CAR 11 14n.

carmen L. 5 6, 11 15.

carmen (comb.) L. 11 15.

caro, carnis L. 44 61.

casa L. 50 69.

casa Sp. 65 91.

cascio In. 65 91.

case Walo. 65 91.

caseus L. SO 69, 63 88, 65 91.

Casinum Vol. 37 50.

casinum Sab. 34 48.

casmena L (?). 12 16.

casnar oisa aetate Pel. 30 41.

Caso Mars. 36 49.

(jastram Skt. 11 14 n.

castrare L. 1 1 14 n.

casuntonom Mars. 36 49.

casus L. 51 71 n., 62 86, 63 87.

Cauda L. 51 72.

caudex L. 51 72.

Caudium 51 72.

*caudoL. 5172,63 88.

causa and cosa Sp. 65 90.

causa, caussa L. 51 70, 71, 63 88.

cause Wale. 65 91.

censazet 0. 29 38.

cererem L. 61 84.

cernere L. 51 72.

Cesilia Fal. 38 51.

ceso -je Sp. 65 90.

C^thegus L. 46 64.

cette L. 30 39.

ch initial O. C. S. lO 13 n.

cinerem L. 42 57, 55 76.

Digitized by Microsoft®

INDEX OF WOKDS.

115

oisimn L. 51 70.

clamosua L. si 71.

claudo oludo L. 61 72.

*cl6v6zia L (?). 47 66.

Clipearius Pal. 38 51, 52.

Cliternum. 37 50.

o6-i-ra L. (?) 58 79, 59 80.

coil-are L. 55 76, 69 80.

ooiraverunt Fal. 38 51.

ooisatens, coisattens Pel. 30 39, 42,

35 49,51 70.
congerit L. 59 81.
conqueritur L. 59 81.
consent L. 69 81.
003, ootis L. 58 81.
cosa In. 66 92.
cosmis L. 12 17.
oosmisu L (?). IS 17.
cosmittere L (?). 12 16.
CossuB h. 30 40.
Cosuties Vol. 37 50.
Cotta 0. 30 40.
covertuso U. 21 26.
crepero Sab. 34 48.
crepusoulum Sab. 34 48.
crese In. 66 92.
cruris L. 49 68, 65 76.
cucumeris L. 65 76.
cudo L. 61 72.

Cumerus (mod. Comero) Pic. 32 46.
oura, coira L. 58 79.
curare L. 49 69, 58 79.
Cures Sab. 49 69, 51 70.
Curio L. 49 69, 59 82.
Cusianes L. 6170.

D

dare L. 58 81.

dastaya 0. Pers. 69 97.

SavUs. 68 99.

dazdi Zd. 69 97.

-de U. 25 32 n.

deoir Sp. 65 90.

deciso Sp. 65 90.

dederun(t) Fal. 38 51.

dederunt L. 61 84.

degetasiui 0. 22 27. '

deguno L. 12 16.

dehi Skt. 68 94.

delirare L. 58 79.

delirus L. 58 79.

dequrier U. 25 31.

der = that and the Mod. Ger. 26 S'i.

dersicurent U. 23 29.

d6su6tude Fr. 65 90.

-dha Skt. lO 12 n.

diasisO. 22 27.

didere, digero L. 12 17.

diteso In. 66 92.

Digitized by

dirhibet, dirhibere L. 49 69, 59 81.

uirimit L. 69 81.

dirnico L. 12 16.

dismota L. 12 17.

diurnus L. 11 15.

divissionea L. 63 87.

dixet -isset L. 11 15.

dixti, -isti L. 11 15, 78 111.

dolosus L. 51 71.

dudhabha Skt. 68 94.

dumus L. 6 6.

dusmusL(?). 12 16.

edhi Skt. 68 94.
egmazum 0. 29 38.
eikvasese atiedier TJ. 77 108.
eikvasia, eikvasates, eikvase(n)se U.

22 27.
eiuom 0. 12 17, 27 35.
eisak 0. 27 36.
eiscurent U. 23 29.
eisuc-en 0. 6 5, 26 33, 27 36, 29 38.
eizeio zicelei 0. 26 33.
eizo- 0. 29 38.
ekas Skt. ao 42.
eko- O. 30 42.
elisuist 0. 30 41.
emantu herte U. 77 108.
emavant Zd. 68 95.
enas Skt. 30 42.
ennom, enom U. 27 34.
equasius L. 22 22.
equiria L. 49 69, 69 81.
equiso L. 50 69, 54 74, 61 85.
eram, ero L. 26 33, 66 77, 58 80.
erarunt U. 23 29, 25 31.
ere eso- and eizo- U and 0. 24 29, 25

80, 26 32, 27 36.
erietu U. 24 29.
eru erom TJ. 24 29.
erus U. 24 29, 75 107.
esaristrom XJ. 18 28.
esas Skt. 30 4'i,
esidu 0. 27 35.
eso U. 4 4, 17 21, 18 23.
esone esunu eesona U. 17 21, 18 23.
csos Mars. 18 23, 36 49.
esso- and ezo- U. 27 35.
essu U. 27 34 n.
esuc Mruc. 33 47.
esuf and essuf 0. 27 35, 29 38.
Etruria L. 46 65, 69 82.
euront U. 24 29, 26 30
excusare L. 30 42.
czariaf U. 22 28.
czom O. 18 22, 26 33, 29 18.
Microsoft®

116

INDEX OF WORDS.

faamat 0. 11 15.

Falerii mod. Falleri. 11 16, 32 46,

46 65, 58 98, 60 82, 61 84.
Falerio mod. Fallerone Pic. 11 16,

32 46.
Ager Falernus L. 1116.
famelO. 11 15.
famulus L. 11 15.
Fasena Sab. 34 48.
fasia Vol. 37 50.
fefure U. 23 29.
ferest U. 24 29.
feriae (feriarl) L. 49 68, 60 82.
ferime, ferine U. 24 29.
fesnereU. 23 29.
fesso In. 66 93.
Fisanius 0. 19 25.
Fiso, Fissiu, Fisiu U. 19 25.
Fisuvi U. 19 25.
flora L. 42 58, 56 77.
Flos, *flo(v)ori3, floris L. 49 68, 55

76, 58 81, 61 84.
Flosis Pic. 32 46.
*Flovoza Ic. 42 58.
flusare Vest. 34. 48.
Fluaor Pie. 32 46, 42 58.
flusso In. 66 93.
Fluusa 0. 32 46, 42 58.
fluusasiais 0. 22 27.
foederis L. 47 79, 49 81, 59 100.
*foidezos lo. 5 5.
Folcatius (?) L. 38 52 n.
Foloozeo Fal. 38 52.
forent, fore L. 26 33 n., 42 57 n.
formosus L. 22 28.
fossa Pr0¥. 65 90.
fragosus L. 51 71.
frosetnm U. 21 27.
Frusino Vol. 37 50.
fiintlere U. 23 29.
furentU. 23 29, 26 33 n., 42 57 n.
Furius L. 5 6, 51 70, 59 82.
furu U. 24 30.
fus U. 75 107.
fusible Fr. 9 11.
Fusius L. 45 63, 51 70.
fuso In. 9 11.

fusus {spindle) L. 51 71, 53 74.
futtilis L. 30 40.
futus L. 30 39.

gaesum Celt. 42 57, SI 70.
gerebat etc. Lat. 61 85.
gerit (*gi3it) Lat. 59 81.
germen L. 11 15.
gero, queror L. 42 57, 49 68.
glirium L. 59 81.

glomerare L. 56 77.

gloria L. 47 66, 55 76, 56 77.

glos, gloris L. 57 79.

gluttire, glutuB L. 30 41 n.

gnitus L. 30 43.

gutta L. 30 40.

hadnebyo /or -abyo Zd. 70 99.

haerere L. 55 76.

harena L. 55 76.

baurit L. 59 82.

havir dadati Skt. 73 104.

havirbhis Skt. 74 106.

hazdyat Zd. 69 97, 70 98, 71 107.

heri L. 58 81, 63 87.

heris beries U. 24 30.

herte U. 77 108.

bidhaiti Zd. 70 98.

hodiernus L. 1116.

homonus U. 75 107.

honoris L. 32 46 n., 55 76, 66 77.

hornus L. 11 15.

humerus L. 42 58, 56 77.

ISpria. 70 98,71100.

igitur L. 26 34.

iunnusulus L. 50 70, 53 74, 54 75.

imperi L. 47 67.

Imperiossus L. 5171.

includoL. 5172.

inoluso Sp. 65 90.

inoudo L. 51 72.

incusare L. 5 1 72.

Inui, castrum L. 60 83.

-ior -ioris {coinpar.) L. 55 76.

irkesieMruc. 33 47.

ise U. 21 26.

isont U. 15 20, 26 33.

issoc U. 26 33, 27 34.

Vfu. 70 98.

Juppiter L. 30 41 n.

jus juris L. 58 81, 59 82.

K

Kaeso L. 54 74.

karo O. 24 30, 44 61.

karu U. 24 30.

Kaselate U. 17 21, 19 2.5.

kateramu U. 23 29.

kepara Skt. 54 74.

kiyedba Skt. 70 99.

Koisis U. 17 21, 20 26.

kuestretie U. 25 31.

kuraia, kuratu U. 25 30.

Kureties, Kureiate, Coredier U. 24 30.

kurslasiu U. 22 27.

Digitized by Microsoft®

INDEX OF WORDS.

117

labos (oris) L. 58 81.

labosus L. 51 71.

laoerare L. 56 77.

lapsum L. 62 86.

lares, lar L. 57 79, 58 81.

laser L. 53 74.

Lases L. SO 42, 58, 81.

Laurentum L. 54 76, 55 77.

Lausus L. S3 74, 54 76, 58 80.

Lebasius L. 34 48.

legere etc. L. 55 76.

leso In. 66 92.

*leukesbhia I.-Bu. 68 95.

liber (oW/ormloebesum) L. 49 68.

libs Mars. 36 49 n.

lira (Teut. leis) L. 37 50, 58 79.

Liris Vol. 37 50.

littera L. 30 41 n.

littua L. 30 41n.

luriduB L. 54 75, 59 81.

M

madbhis Skt. 70 99, 71 101.

madgus Skt. 69 97,70 99,71101.

maerere L. 5S 76.

Maesius 0. 34 48.

majjati Skt. 69 97, 70 99.

malaoissare L. 64 89.

m&lig(e)nus L. 47 67.

milivolus L. 47 67.

mallom 0. 27 34 n.

mane /or man5 Zd. 68 95.

Manlius L. 47 67.

manObbis Skt. 68 95, 74 106.

Mara Spurnius 0. 51 70.

Marciporum L. 55 77.

Maro L. 24 30.

maronato U. 24 80.

Maroucai Mruc. 33 47.

Marruvium. 19 25.

Maninus L. 24 30.

mas, marem L. 57 79.

MasuriuB L. 46 65, 51 72, 53 74.

mate : for mater Fal. 38 51.

mattus L. 30 39.

mazda Zd. 69 97, 71 101.

medha Skt. 68 94, 70 99.

medicatinom, medicatud, meddix

27 34 n.
Menerva Fal. 38 51.
mensarum etc. L. 47 66.
mensene Sab. 34 48.
mergus L. 12 17.
mesa Sp. 65 90.
midan 0. H. Ger. 30 41.
midha Skt. 68 94.
midhvas (midhusas) Skt. 70 99.
Misous B. mod. Musone Pic. 32 47.
Digitized by

miser L. 4 4, 42 57, 53 74.

Misius E. (m. Asola) Pio. 32 47.

misso In. 9 11, 66 93.

missus L. 5177,63 88.

Misus (m. Misa) U. 17 21, 19 26.

mitto L. 30 41.

morosus L. 51 71.

mos, moris L. 58 81.

mucus mucous L. 30 41 u.

mulierem L. 55 76.

murgisonem L. 60 83.

mua muris L. 58 81, 59 82.

Museiate U. 19 25.

miisika Skt. 58 81.

myazda Zd. 69 97.

N

Nar Narnia U. 24 30.

naratu U. 24 30.

naris L. 5 6, 60 82.

nasika Skt. 60 82

nasusL. 5, 5, lO 13 n., 51 72, 53 74.

nazdy6, nazdishto Zd. 70 99.

nedisthas, nedlyas Skt. 68 94, 70 99.

nefarius, nefasius L. 22 28, 60 82.

Ner Nero U. 24 30.

ner (nerus Aviip) 0. 24 30.

nesimei U. 18 23, 20 26.

nesimum 0. 29 38.

nest Eng. 9 12

nldas Skt. 9 12, 68 94.

nidus L. 9 12, 12 17.

Niou/x(7us 0. 42 58

nirum (vripiov) TJ. 24 30.

nois vois, nobis vobis L. 12 17.

noisi nisi L. 12 17.

Norvesiae Aeq. 37 50.

nose Eng. 51 73.

nosuO.C. S. 10l3n.,5l73.

vovflfios. 44 61.

NovkrinomO. 23 29.

Nuceria U. 23 29.

Numasioi L. 30 42.

numerus L. 42 58, 55 76.

Numisius L. 34 48.

*numso 0. 44 61.

vioi 59 82.

nurus (us) L. 5 6, 59 82.

Nuvlanus Osc. 69 97.

-obhis from -ozbhis Skt. 68 94.
oculus L. 60 83.
oinos L. 30 42.
oisa Pel. 30 41.
ihKbs. 60 83.
olle L. 24 30.

omeso omso (?) I.-Eu. 42 58 n.
ibixbs. 44 61 n.
Microsoft®

118

INDEX OF WOEDS.

onerosus L. 51 71.

onse U. 42 58.

ooserclom U. 18 24, 21 27.

operis L. 42 59.

optumus opitumus L. 47 67.

OS oris L. 57 79, 58 81.

*6s osis (' year ') Ic. 11 15.

osatu oseto U. 21 27.

ose ustite uus U. 11 15, 18 24.

osii 0. 29 38.

-oso -osa (adj.) In. 66 93.

oso Sp. 65 90.

-osas from -o-vont-tos L. 51 70.

pacariL. 12 16, 45 62, 55 76.

panthas Skt. 30 40.

papaver L. 42 58.

Papirius Papisius L. 45 62, 46 65,

59 81.
parioida L. 49 69, 60 82.
patt 0. 30 40.
pauper pauperies L. 49 69.
Pausulae Pic. 32 47.
pejerare L. 49 69, 65 76.
pelagus L. 44 61.
pepurkurent U. 23 29.
peracne U. 24 30.
Perazuane U. 24 30.
Pesaro In. 19 26.
pesestas L. 50 70, 51 73.
pesetom U. 17 21, 18 24.
pesna, petna, petsna, penna L. 12 16.
peso In. 66 92.
pessum pessimus L. 18 24.
Petra Pertusa U. 22 28.
Philippus L. 43 60 n.
PMlo L. 43 60 n.
pieisum 0. 29 38.
pihom Vols. 37 50.
Pinarius L. 46 65, 47 66, 60 82, 61

84.
*pis U. 25 31.
Pisa Etr. 19 26 n., 51 70.
Pisatello B. In. 17 21.
Pisauxum U. 4 4, 19 26
pisher pisi pisest U. 18 23, 25 32.
pisi U. 4 4, 25 32.
Piso L. 53 74, 54 74.
pi-zd- Skt. 71 101.
plenasier U. 22 27.
■wXiovi. 58 79.
plurimus L. 57 79, 58 79.
plus pluris *pl6oris L. 58 79, 81.
Plusa E. In. 17 21.
poe poi U. 25 32.
poizad O. 24 30, 29 38.
poUad O. 24 30, 29 38.
ponisiater puni<;ate U. 22 2i^.

pono *posnoL. 9 12, 12 16.

pora U. 24 30, 29 38.

Porsenna Etr. 51 70.

positus posui posivi L. S3 74, 54 75.

posmom 0. 11 14.

praesentid 0. 29 38.

presso In. 9 11.

pretod de zen. sent. Fal. 38 51.

primus L. 5 6.

prithee, please Eng. 51 73.

Privernum Vol. 11 16, 37 50.

procanurent U. 23 29.

prodere dedere L. 58 81.

prosesetu U. 17 21.

prosperum L, 49 69.

prufatted U. 27 36.

prusikurent U. 23 29.

Pubdipe Pupdike U. 15 19.

pubes L. 49 69.

pu-e U. 25 32 n.

puer (-us) L. 49 69, 54 75, 55 76.

pulverem L. 47 67, 55 76.

punttram 0. 30 40.

purasiai 0. 22 27.

pure U. 24 30, 25 32.

pure (vepuratu irvp) TJ. 24 30.

purpati Skt. 73 104.

pus 0. 25 32.

pus puris L. 57 79, 58 81.

puse puze pusei pusi U. 2 1 27, 2 S 32.

puse Sp. 65 90.

pusillus L. 54 75.

pusio L. 50 70.

pusula L. 50 70, 51 70.

pusus L. 53 74, 54 75.

Q

quaesendum L. 54 75, 58 80.
quaesito L. 51 73.
quaesivi quaesitum quaestus. 54 75.
quaeso quaero quaerebat L. 42 57,

51 72, 53 74.
quasiUus L. 30 42, 50 69, 51 72.
queiso Port. 65 90.
quelle Fr. 24 30 n.
querebar L. 55 76.
queritur (*quisitur) L. 59 81.
queso Sp. 65 90.
quo L. 25 32 n.

;• in English in 'stirring '. 42 58 n.

r in English, final and before conso-
nants. 42 57 n.

Eabirius * R&bierius (?). 46 65, 55 77,
59 HI.

raouebish Zd. 68 95,

Digitized by Microsoft®

INDEX OF WORDS.

119

raocebyo Zd. 70 99.

raao-je Sp. 65 90.

raseus rasus L. 63 88.

ravanh- Zd. 43 58.

-re 0/ infin. L. 43 59, 5S 76.

rScoidi 1. 47 67.

redre Prov. 66 92 n.

regere L. 47 67, 55 96.

regerem L. 6S 96.

*regezent lo. S 5.

render Port. 66 92 n.

rendere In. 66 92 n.

reudre Fr. 66 92 n.

rendir Sp. 66 92 n.

renta Sp. 66 92 n.

requisivi requisitum L. 64 75.

reso In. 66 92.

*resus L. 66 92 n.

retre Catal. 66 92 n.

rimaso In. 66 93.

ripulso In. 66 93.

riso In. 66 93.

ros roris L. 57 79, 58 81.

rosa Sp. 65 90, 66 93.

rosa O.'C. S. lO 13 n.

rSsa L. 53 74, 54 75, 62 86, 65 90

rose Fr. 7 9 n.

rosidus L. 53 74, 54 75, 59 81.

roBo In. 66 92.

rozar Sp. 65 90.

ruber L. 44 61, 60 82.

rufus L (?). 44 61, 60 82.

-rum (gen. pi. 1st deol.). 47 66, 61

84.
rurasim(?) Mruc. 33 47.
rus ruris *re(vJoris L. 33 47, 47 67,

55 76, 58 81.
rus'e Wale. 65 91.
Eusellae Etr. 19 26.
rusemU. 18 23,42 58.
P. Rutilius Eufus L. 30 40.
rutilus L. 30 40.
rutilare L. 30 40.

sai(pis)sume Fal. 38 51.

SED- L-Bu. 68 94.

sedus sedima Skt. 68 94, 70 98.

seffei Pel. 97 35 n.

sei si = (sia) U. 75 107.

Sentinnm U. 19 26.

sepse U. 21 27.

sero serebam L. 42 67, 55 76.

serit (*siait) L. 59 81.

aeritu U. 24 30.

sese L. 18 24.

sese sesust U. 21 27.

sesed Fal. 38 51.

seso U. 17 21, 18 24.

Digitized by

sestentasiaru U. 22 27.

-si, -ui, -vi, perfects in, 43 59.

Bidati Skt. 68 94, 70 98.

sirempse L. 26 34, 65 76.

sis U. 75 107.

Sisenna L. 51 70, 53 74, 54 76.

siser L. S3 74, 54 75.

Siuttiis 0. 3O40.

snusa Skt. 59 82.

sopir U. 25 31.

sororem L. 5 5, 49 69, 55 76,

Sosia L. 53 74.

spaso In. 66 93.

sperare L. 55 77, 58 81.

speres L. 58 81.

spicio L. 51 72.

Spuriua (^iroinof) L. 61 70, 69 82

staheren U. 23 29.

2raTTi7)is 0. 30 40.

stuppa L. 30 41 n.

Suasa U. 19 26.

suasum L. 19 26.

suavia L. 60 88.

sueus suocua L. 30 41 n.

*8uezorem O. L. 6 5.

surur aururout U. 14 20, 24 30, 25

30, 26 33.
sveso U. 26 34.

taousim (?) 0. 29 38.

taaam Skt. lO 13 n.

tasez ta(jez U. 17 21.

Taurasia 22 28.

techu 0. C. S. lO 13 n.

tellus telluri L. 49 69, 59 82.

temperi L. 68 81.

tempus temporis L. 42 57, 47 67,

65 77.
teremnattena 0. 30 39.
Teaenaces Tesenooea U. 19 25.
teso In. 66 92.
tesu Skt. lO 13 n.
tetis Pie. 32 46.
that, the Eng. 26 33.
thus thuris L. 42 58, 49 68, 56 77,

68 81.
Tibur L. 49 69.
TittiuB 0. 30 40.
rats Tois Arc. 70 99.
Toitesia (?) L. 12 16 n.
tolerare L. 55 77, 66 77.
tonstrix L. 30 40.
-tor -toria L. 66 77.
triarius L. 22 28.
Triresmus Triretamue L. 12 16.
trnedhi Skt. 70 99.
turbaaaitur L. 2126.
turuf U. 24 30.
Microsoft®

120

INDEX OF WORDS.

Tusanis L. 60 70.

tuB6 0. C. S. lO 13 n.

tutere tuderor tuderato U. 6 5, 23

29, 42 57 n.
tuvere U. 23 29.

U

udha Skt. 68 94.
uhtretie U. 25 31.
uittiuf 0. 30 40.
ungula L. 60 83.
upsaseter Pel 21 27, 35 58.
(e)urit urebat &c. L. 59 81.
urna L. 11 15.
urnasier U. 22 27.
uru U. 24 30.
usadbhis Skt. 70 99.
usaie U. 17 21, 18 24.
68 95.
18 24.
22 28.
17 21.
17 21.
18 22.
27 36.

uupsen 0. 14 18,

usar Skt.
usil Etr.
-usium 0.
TJso E. In.
ustite U.
ustum L.
uimated 0.
uups-annam

21 27.
uus V. ose. 42 58.

vaoe/or vaco Zd. 68 95.

vacuus L. 60 83.

Valerius L. 45 63, 47 66, 55 77.

Valesius Pel. 35 49 ; Sab. 34 48.

varie U. 24 30.

*vas Skt. 11 15.

vas U. 75 107.

vas vasum L. 18 24, 53 74, 54 76

Tasirslom U. 18 24.

vastus L. 18 24.

vaaus U. 18 24.

veiro U. 24 30.

Venusia 0. 22 28.

ver veils L. 11 15, 16.
verehasiui 0. 22 27.
veres U. 24 30.
verna L. S 6, 11 15.
vernus L. 11 16.
Verrucossus L. 5171.
Vesiuicates U. 17 21, 19 25.
Vespasia Sab. 22 28 n.
Vesta L. 19 25.
VesuUia 0. 19 25.
Vesune U. 17 21, 19 25.

„ Mais 36 58 n.
vetemus L. 11 15.
Vetusius Veturia Veturius L. 45 62,

49 69, 55 77.
Vezune(?) Mars. 36 49 n.
viarius L. 49 68, 60 82.
viden, satin L. 12 16.
videram viderim videro &c. L. 47

67, 55 77.
vidulus L. 60 83.
viduuB L. 60 83.
vidvadbhis Skt. 70 99.
viginti L. 56 77
vir L. 58 80.
vis vires L. 58 80.
virium &c. L. 59 81.
virus L. 49 69, S7 79, 58 80.
vodhar Skt. 68 94.
Voiainier U. 17 21, 20 26.
VoleroL. 45 63,55 77.
Volesus L. 34 48, 45 63.
Voltio Folcozeo Zextoi f. Fal. 38 51.
Volusius L. 34 48.
Volusus L. 34 48.
vomis vomeris L. 55 77.
vraisemblanee Fr. 65 90.
vulgus L. 58 80.

zastaya Zd. 69 97.
Zertenea Fal. 38 51.
zinphonia Sp. 65 90.
zugar Sp. 65 90.

cambbidoe; feinted by o. j. clay, m.a. and sons, at the university press.
Digitized by Microsoft®

TRtJBNER'S

Oriental $r %,immstit Ij^nUmtiom.

JL OA-TJ^LOO-TJIB

BOOKS, PERIODICALS, A¥D SERIALS,

^istorp, ^Languages, JReligions, antiquities, litera^
tute, anD (j^eograpDp of tjje Cast,

^ffl> KINDRED SUBJECTS.

PUBLISHED BY

Ti^tJBIsrEI^ & oo.

LONDON:
TRUBNEE & CO., 57 and 59, LUDGATE HILL.

1888.
Digitized by Microsoft®

CONTENTS.

FAOa

Triibner's Oriental Series 3

Serials and Periodicals 7

Archseology .Ethnography, Geography, History, Law, Literature, Numismatics,

and Travels 26

The Keligions of the East 41

Comparative Philology (Polyglots) 48

Grammars, Dictionaries, Texts, and Translations : —

FAOE FA SB

56 Icelandic 84

51 Japanese 85

53
53
54
54
66
56
57

Accad — V. Assyrian
African Languages ...

Albanian

American Languages

Anglo-Saxon

Arabic

Assyrian

Australian Languages ...

Aztek — V. American Lang.

Babylonian — v. Assyrian

Basque

Bengali

Bihari

Brahoe (Brakui)

Braj Bhak& — v. Hindi ...

Burmese

Celtic — V. Keltic

Chaldaic— «. Assyrian ...

Chinese v(for books on and in
Pidgin -English see under
this beading)

Choctaw — V. American Lang.

Coptic — V. Egyptian

Gorean

Cornish— ti. Keltic

Cree ) — ». American Lan-

Creole { guages

Cuneiform— J). Assyrian

Danish

Dutch (Pennsylvania) ... .«

Egyptian

English — Early and Modern
English and Dialects

Frisian

Gaelic — v, Keltic

Gaudian

German (Old)

Gipsy

Gothic

Greek (Modern and Classic) ..

Gujar^ti

Gurmukhi

Hawaiian

Hebrew ...

Hidatsa — v.

Hindi

Hindustani

Hungarian

American Lang.

58
58
58
58

59

59

64

64
92
64

65

79

79
79
79
80
80
81
81
81
81

83
84

Icelandic

Japanese

Irish — V. Keltic

Kabail

Kanarese

Kayathi

Keltic(Cornish,Gaelic, Welsh, Irish)

Konkani

Libyan

Mahratta (Marathi)

Malagasy

Malay

Malayalim ... ..,

Maori

Oriya — v. Uriya ...

Pali

Pazand

Peguan

Pehlvi

Pennsylvania Dutch

Persian

Pidgin- English

Polish

Prakrit

Pukshto (Pakkhto, Pashto)
Punjabi — V. Gurmukhi
Quichua— ». American Languages

Eonmanian

Russian

Samaritan

Samoan

Sanskrit

Serbian

Shan

Sindhi

Sinhalese

Suahili

Swedish

Syriac

Tamil

Telugu

Tibetan

Turki

Turkish

Umbrian

Urdu — V. Hindustani

Uriya

Welsh — V. Keltic ...

Digitized by Microsoft®

TEUBNER'S OETENTAL SERIES.

"A knowledge of the commonplace, at least, of Oriental literature, philosophyj
and religion is as necessary to the general reader of the present day as an acquaint-
ance -with the Latin and Greek classics was a generation or so ago. Immense strides
have been made within the present century in these branches of Ifaming ; Sanscrit
has been^brought within the range of accurate philology, and its invaluable aincient
literature thoroughly investigated ; the language and sacred books of the Zoroastriana
have been laid bare ; Egyptian, Assyrian, and other records of the remote past have
been_ deciphered, and a group of scholars speak of still more recondite Accadian and
Hittite monuments ; but the results of all the scholarship that has been devoted to
these subjects have been almost inaccessible to the public because they were contained
for the most part in learned or expensive works, or scattered throughout the numbers
of scientific periodicals. Messrs. Truenek & Co., in a spirit of ^enterprise which
does them infinite credit, have determined to supply the constantly-increasing want,
and to give in a popular, or, at least, a comprehensive form, all this mass of know-
ledge to the world." — Times.

THE FOLLOWING WOEKS AEE KOW EEADT.

Post 8vo. cloth, uniformly bound.

Essays on the Sacked Langtjase, "WBiTiiras, and Religion of

THE Paksis. By Mabtin HauG, Ph.D., late Professor of Sanskrit and Com-
parative Philology at the University of Munich. Edited and enlarged by Dr
E. W. West. To which is also added a Biographical Memoir of the late Dr.
Haug, by Prol. Evans. Third Edition, pp. xlviii. and 428. 1884. 16«.

Texts eeom the Buddhist Canon, known as Dhammapada. With,
accompanying Narratives. Translated from the Chinese by S. Beal, B.A.,
Prof, of Chinese, University Colleg«, Loudon, pp. viii.-I76. 1878. 7s. 6d.

The Histoet ge Indian Litekatuee. By Albebcht Webee.
Translated from the German by J. Mann, M.A., and T. Zaohaeiae, Ph.D.,
with the sanction of the Author. Second Edition, pp. Kxiv.-360. 1882. 10*. 6<?.

The Modeen Langitages of the East Indies. By Eobeet Citst.
Accompanied by Two Language Maps. pp. xii.-198. 1878. 7s. &d.

The Bieth of the Wae God. A Poem by Ki.LiDi.SA. Translated
from the Sanskrit into English Verse. By Ralph T. H. Gkipfith, M.A.,
Principal of Benares College. Second Edition, pp. xii.-116. 1879. Us.

A Classical Dictionaet of Hindu Mythology and Histoey,
Geography and Litekatuke. By John Dowson, M.R.A.S., late Professor
in the Staff College, pp. xix. and 412. 1879. 16s.

Selections feom the Koean. "With, a Commentaky. Translated by
the late E. W. Lane, Author of an "Arabic-English Lexicon," etc. New Edition,
Revised, with Introduction on the History and Development of Islam, especially
with reference to India. By Stanley L. Poole, pp. cxii.-l76. 1879. 9«.

Meteicax Teajtslations feom Sanskeit "Weitees. Witb an Intro-
duction, many Prose Versions, and Parallel Passages from Classical Authors.
By J. MuiK, C.I.E., D.C.L. pp. xliv. and 376. 1879. \is.

Modeen India and the Indians. Being a Series of Impressions, Notes,
and Essays. By Sir Monier Monier- Williams, K.C.I.E., D.C.L., etc., etc.
Eourth Edition, pp. 366, with an Index and Map. 1887. 14«.

Digitized by Microsoft®

4 Linguistic Publications 0/ Tr'uhner 8f Co.,

MiSCELLANEOTrS ESSATS EELAUNG 10 IlTDIAN^ SUBJECTS. By B. H.

Hodgson, F.R.S.j late of the Be.C.S., etc. 2 vols. pp. viii.-408, and viii 348.
1880. 28s.

The Lite ob Legend oe Gattdama, the Buddta of the Burmese. "With
Annotations, The Ways to Neihban, and Notice on the Phongyies or Barmese
Monks. By the Eight Rev. P. Bigandet, Bishop of Ramatha. Third Edition.
2 vols. pp. zz. and 268, and viii. and 326. 1880. 2ls.

The Gulistan; or, Kose Garden of Shekh Mushliu'd-din Sadi of
Shiraz. Translated for the first time into Prose and Verse, with a Preface,
and a Life of the Author, from the Atish Kadah, by E. B. Eastwick, F.R.S.,
M.R.A.S., etc. Second Edition, pp. xxvi. and 2i4. 1880. 10s. 6d.

Chinese Bttbdhism. A Volume of Sketches, Historical and Critical.
By J. Edkins, D.D., pp. ixvi. and 454. 1880. 18s.

The Histoet of Esaehadbon (Son oe Sennacheeib) King op As-
syria, B.C. 681-668. Translated from the Cuneiform Inscriptions in the British
Museum. The Original Texts, a Grammatical Analysis of each Word, Explana-
tions of the Ideographs, and list of Eponyms, etc. By E. A. Budge, B.A., etc.
pp. xii. and 164. 1880. 10s. Gd.

A Taimudic Miscellany; or, One Thousand and One Extracts from
the Talmud, the Midrashim, and the Kabbalah. Compiled and Translated by
P. J. Hershon. With a Preface hj the Rev. F. W. Fareae, D.D., Canon of
Westminster. With Notes and Copious Indexes, pp. xxviii. and 362. 1880. 14».

BiTDiiHisT BiETH SioEiES ; or, Jataka Tales. The oldest collection of
Folk-lore extant : being the Jatakatthavannana, for the first time edited in the
original Pali, by V. Fattsboll, and translated by T. W. Rhys Davids. Trans-
lation. Vol. I. pp. cxvi. and 348. 1880. 18s.

The Classicai Poeiet oe the Japanese. By Basil Chambeelain,
Author of " Yeigio Henkaku, Ichiran." pp. xii. and 228. 1880. 7s. 6d.

Linguistic and Oeiental Essays. "Written from 1846 to 1887. By
E. CusT. pp. 496. 1880. 10s. 6d. Second Series, pp. 562, with 6 Maps. 1887. 21s.

The MesnetI. (TJsually known as the Mesneviyi Sherif, or Holy
MesnevI) of Mevlana (our Lord) Jelalu'd-Din Muhammed er-EQmi. Book I,
With a Life of the Author. Illustrated by a Selection of Characteristic Anecdotes,
by Mevlana Shemsu'd-Din Ahmed el Eflaki, el 'Arifi. Translated and the Poetry
Versified in English, by J. W. Eedhouse, M.E.A.S. pp. xv. and 136, v. and
290. 1881. 21s.

Easteen Peoteebs and Emblems, Illustrating Old Truths. By the
Rev. J. Long, M.B.A.S., P.R.a.S. pp. xvi. and 280. 1881. 6s.

Indian Poetey. Containing " The Indian Song of Songs," from the
Sanskrit of the " Gita Govinda" of Jayadeva ; Two Books from " the Iliad of
India " (Mahabharata) ; and other Oriental Poems. Fourth Edition. By Sir
Edwin Arnold, M.A., K.C.I.E., etc. pp. viii. and 270. 1886. 7s. 6«;.

Hindu Philosophy. The Sankhya Earika of Iswara Blrishna. An
Exposition of the System of Kapila. With an Appendix on the Nyaya and
Vaiseshika Systems. By J. Davies, M.A. pp. viii. and 162. 1881. 6s.

The Religions op India. By A. Baeth. Authorised Transla-
tion by Rev. J. Wood. pp.336. 1881. 16s.

A Manual op Hindu Panthj;ism. The Vedantasara. Translated,
with Copious Annotations, by Major G. A. Jacob, E.S.C. With Preface by
E. B. CowELL, M.A., Prof, of Sanskrit in Cambridge University, pp. x. and
129. 1881. 6s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E. C. 6

The dTTATEAiNS OF Omab KhattIm. Translated by E. H. "Whiniteld,
M.A., late of H.M. Bengal Civa Service, pp.96. 1881. 5s.

The Quateains op Omak 'Kra.yyAm. Persian Text, and English. Verse
Tl-anslatioii by E. H. "Whinfield, M.A., late Be.C.S. pp. 368; 1883.
10*. 6d.

The Mind op Mencius ; or, Political Economy founded upon Moral
Philosophy. A Systematic Digest of the Doctrine of the Chinese Philosopher
Mencius. Translated from the Original Text, and Classified with Commenta
and Explanations by the Eev. Ernst Faber, Ehenish Mission Society.
Translated from the German with Additional Notes, by the Eev. A. B.
Hutchinson, C.M.S., Hong-Kong. pp. xvi. and 294. 1881. 10s. 6cl.

TsTnTi-llGoAiT, THE SupEEME Beiko OP THE Khoi-Khoi. By Theo-
PHiLus Hahn, Ph.D., Custodian of the Grey Collection, Cape Town, etc. pp.
xii. and 154. 1881. 7s. 6d.

TusEP AN^D ZuLAECHA. A Pocm by Jami. Translated from the Persian
into English "Verse. By E.. T. H. Gkifpith. pp. xiv. and 304. 1882. 8s. 6rf.

The Indian Empike : its History, People, and Products. By Sir "W. "W.
Hunter, K.C.I.E., LL.D. Second Edition, pp. 780. With Map. 1886. 21s.

A Comprehensive Commentaet to the Qt7ean : comprising Sale's
Translation and Preliminary Discourse, with Additional Notes and Emendations.
"With a complete Index to the Text, Preliminary Discourse, and Notes. By Eev.
E; M. 'Wherry, M.A., Lodiana. Vol. I. pp. xii. and 392. 1882. 12s. 6d.
Vol. II. pp. xii.-408. 1884. 12s. 6d. Vol. III. pp. viii.-416. 1885.
12s. 6d. Vol. IV. pp. xiii.-340. 1886. 10s. 6d.

Comparative Hisioet op the Egyptian and Mesopotamian Keligions.
By C. P. Tiele. Egypt, Babel-Assur, Yemen, Harran, Phoenicia, Israel.
Vol. I. History of the Egyptian Eeligion. Translated from the Dutch, with the
co-operation of the Author, by James Baliinbal. pp. 2xiv.-230, 1882. 7s. 6d.

The Saeva-Daesana-Samgeaha; or Review of the different Systems of
Hindu Philosophy. By Madhava Acharya. Translated by E. B. Cowell,
M.A., Cambridge ; and A. E. Gough, M.A., Calcutta, pp. xii.-282. 1882. 10s. 6d.

Tibetan Tales, Derived from Indian Sources. Translated from the
Tibetan of the Kah-Gyur. By F. Anton von Schiepner. Done into English
from the German, with an Introduction, by W. E. S. Ealston, M.A. pp.
lxTi.-368. 1882. 14s.

Linguistic Essays. By Cael Abel, Ph. Dr. pp. viii.-266. 1882. 9s.

Contents. — Language as the Expression of National Modes of Thought — The Conception of
5.0Te in some Ancient and Modem Languages— The English Verbs of Command— The discrimi-
nation of Synonyms— Philological Methods — The Connection between Dictionary and Grammar
— The Possibility of a Common Literary Language for the Slave Nations — Coptic latensifieation
— The Origin of Language— The Order and Position of Words in the Latin Sentence.

HiNDii Philosophy. The Bhagavad Git a or the Sacred Lay. A
Sanskrit Philosophical Poem. Translated, with Notes, by John Davies, M.A.
(Cantab.), M.E.A.S. pp. vi.-208. 1882. 8s. 6d.

The -Philosophy op the Upanishads and Ancient Indian Metaphysics.
By A. E. Gouge, M.A. Calcutta. Pp. xxiv.-268. 1882. 9s.

Udanavaega : A Collection of Verses from the Buddhist Canon. Com-
piled by Dharmatrata. The Northern Buddhist Version of Dhammapada.
Translated from the Tibetan of Bkah-hgyur, Notes and Extracts from the Com-
mentary of PradinaTarman, by W. W. Eookhill. Pp. ivi.-224. 1883. 9*.
■' •" ^i^itited by Microsoft®

6 Linguistic Publications of Truhner 8f Co.,

A HiSTOET OP Bttema. Including Burma Proper, Pegu, Taungw,
Tenasserim, and Arakan. From the Earliest Time to the End of the First
War with British India. By Lieut.-General Sir A. P. Phayrb, G.C.M.G.,
K.C.S.I., &c. pp. xii. and 312, with Maps and Plan. 1883. 14».

A Sketch of the Modeen Lansitages oe Afeica. By E.. N. CnsT.
Accompanied hy a Language Map. By E. G. Eatenstein. Two Yols,
pp. xvi.-288, viii.-278, with Thirty-one Autotype Portraits. 1883. 18s.

OUTIIN-ES OF THE HiSIOET OP EkLIGIOST TO THE SPEEAB OF THE UlTITEESAL

Eeligions. By Prof. C. P. Tiele. Translated from the Dutch by J. E. Cabpentee,
M.A., with the Author's assistance. Third Edition, pp. xx. and 250. 1884. 7». 6rf.

Eeligion is CnrKTA ; containing a brief Account of the Three Keligiona
of the Chinese ; with Observations on the Prospects of Christian Conversion
amongst that People. By Joseph Edkins, D.D., Peking. Third Edition,
pp. xvi. and 260. 1884. 7a. 6d.

The Life op the Bttbdha and the Eaelt Histoet of his Oedee.
From Tibetan Works in the Bkah-hgyur and Bstan-hgyur. With notices on
the Early History of Tibet and Khoten. Translated by W. W. Eockhili.,
Second Secretary U.S. Legation in China, pp.284. 1884. 9s.

Buddhist Ebcoeds op the "Westeen "Woeid. Translated from the-
Chinese of Hiuen Tsiang (a.d. 629) hy S. Beal. Dedicated by permissiooi
to H.E.H. the Prince of Wales. 2 vols. pp. 250 and 378. 1884. 24s.

The Sankhta Aphoeisms of Kapila. "With Illustrative Extracts from
the Commentaries. Translated by J. E. Ballantyne, LL.D., late Principal
of Benares College. Edited by F. Hall. Third Edition, pp. 472. 1884. 16s.

The Oedinances op Manit. Translated from the Sanskrit, with Intro-
duction by the late A. C. Buenell, Ph.D., CLE. Completed and Edited by E.
W. Hopkins, Ph.D., Columbia College, New York. pp. 446. 1884. 12s.

Life and "Woeks op Albxandee Csoma de Koeos between 1819 and
1842. With a Short Notice of all his Published and Unpublished Works and
Essays. From Original and for the most part Unpublished Documents. By T.
Dtika, M.D., F.E.C.S. (Eng.), Surgeon-Major H.M.'s Bengal Medical Service,
Eetired, etc. pp. xii.-231. 1885. 9s.

Leaves peom Mt Chinese Sceap-Book. By F. H. Balpotje, Author of
<■ Waifs and Strays from the Far East," etc. pp.216. 1887. 7s. Gd.

Ancient Peoveebs and Maxims peom Buemese Sotjeces ; or, the Niti.
Literature of Burma. By J. Gbat, Author of " Elements of Pali Grammar,"
etc. pp. 192. 1886. 6s.

Masnavi I Ma'nati : the Spiritual Couplets of Maulana Jalalu-'d-Din
Muhammad i ECimi. Translated and abridged by E. H. Whinfield, M.A..
pp. xxxii. and 330. 1887. 7s. 6d.

The Sataeas op Bhaeteihaei. Translated from the Sanskrit by the
Eev. B. Hale Wortham, B.A., M.E.A.S. pp. xii.-72. 1886. 5s.

Manata-Dhaema-Casiea : the Code of Manu. Original Sanskrit Text
with Critical Notes. By J. Jolly, Ph.D., Professor of Sanskrit in the University
of Wurzburg ; late Tagore Professor of Law in the University of Calcutta, pp.
viii. and 346. 1887. 10s. 6d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

5T and 5Q, Ludgate Hill, London, E^C, 7

MisCTXtANLOus Papeks helatins to iNDo-CHUfA. Eeprinted for the
Straits Branch of the Eoyal Asiatic Society, from Dalrymple's " Oriental Reper-
tory," an^ the "Asiatic Kesearohes" and " Journal" of the Asiatic Society of
Bengal, pp. xii.-318, vi.-112. 1887. 21s.

MiscELiANEOirs Papers keiating to Indo-China and the Ikdiait Aechi-
PELAQO. Beprinted for the Straits Branch of the K. Asiatic Society, from the
" Journals " of the K. Asiatic, Bengal Asiatic, and E. Geographical Societies ;
the "Transactions" and "Journal" of the Asiatic Society of Batavia, and the
" Malayan Miscellanies." Second series. 2 vols. pp. Tiii. and 307, and 313.
With Five Plates and a Map. 1887; £1 S».

\FoLK Tales op Kashmir. By the Eev. J. Hintok Knowies, F.R.G.8.,
M.E.A.S., etc. (C.M.S.) Missionary to the Kashmiris. Pp.xii.-SlO. 1888. 16«.

SERIALS AND PERIODICALS.

Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, — Jotjenai, op the
BoYAL Asiatic Society op Great Beitain and Ireland, from the Com-
mencement to 1863. First Series, complete in 20 Vols. 8vo., with many Plates,
Price £10 ; or, in Single Numbers, as follows : — Nos. 1 to 14, 65. each ; No. 15,
2 Parts, 4s. each ; No. 16, 2 Parts, 4«. each ; No. 17, 2 Parts, 4s. each ; No.
18, 68. These 18 Numbers form Vols. I. to IX.— Vol. X., Part 1, o.p. ;
Part 2, 5s. ; Part 3, 6s.— Vol. XI., Part 1, 6s. ; Part 2 not published.— Vol.
XII., 2 Parts, 6s. each.— Vol. XIII., 2 Parts, 6s. each.— Vol. XIV., Parti.
5s. ; Part 2 not published.— Vol. XV., Part 1, 6s. ; Part 2, with 3 Maps, £2 2s.
—Vol. XVI., 2 Parts, 6s. each.— Vol. XVII., 2 Parts, 6». each.— Vol. XVIII.,

2 Parts, 6s. each Vol. XIX., Parts 1 to 4, 16s.— Vol. XX., Parts 1 and 2, 4s.

each. Part 3, 7s. 6d.

Asiatic Society, — Jouenai op the Eotai Asiatic Society op Geeat
Bbitain and Ireland. New Series. Vol. I. In Two Parts, pp. iv. and
490, sewed. 1864-5. 16s.
Contents.— I. Yajra-chhedik£, tbe "Kin Kong Kingr," or Diamond S^tra. Translated from
the Chinese by the Rer. S. Beal. — II. The Pfiramitl-hridaya Stitra, or, in Chinese, " Mo-ho-p6-
ye-po-lo-mih-to-sin-king," i.e. "The Great PSramitS. Heart Sdtra." Translated from the
Chinese by the Rev. S. Beal. — III. On the Preservation of National Literature in the East.
By Col. F. J. Goldsmid. — IV. On the Agricultural, Commercial, Pinancial, and Military Statistics
of Ceylon. By E. R. Power. — V. Contributions to a Knowledge of the Vedie Theogony and
Mythology. By J. Muir, D.C.L. — VI. A Tabular List of Original Works and Translations, pub-
lished by the late Dutch Government of Ceylon at their Printing Press at Colombo. Compiled
by Mr. M. P. J. Ondaatje. — Til. Assyrian and Hebrew Chronology compared, with a view of
showing the extent to which the Hebrew Chronology of XJssher must be modified, in conformity
with the Assyrian Canon. By J. "W. Bosanquet. — VIII. On the esiisting Dictionaries of the
Malay_ Language. By Dr. H. N. van der Tuuk. — IX. Bilingual Readings : Cuneiform and'
Phoenician. Notes on some Tablets in the British Museum, containing Bilingual Legends
(ABsyriau and Phoenician). By Major-Gen. Sir H.Rawlinson, K.C.B. — X. Translations of Three
Copper-plate Inscriptions of the Fourth Century a.d., and Notices of the Ch^lukya and Gurjjara
Dynasties. By Prof. J . Dowson, Staff College, Sandhurst. — XI. Yama and the Doctrine of a
Future Life, according to the Rig-, Yajur-, and Atharva-Vedas. By J. Muir, D.C.L.— XII. On
the Jyotisha Observation of the Place of the Colures, and the Date derivable from it. By "W.
D. Whitney, Prof, of Sanskrit, Yale College, U.S.A.— Note on the preceding Article. By Sir E.
Colebrooke, Bart., M.P.— XIII. Progress of the Vedie Religion towards Abstract Conceptions
of the Deity. By J. Muir, D.C.L.— XI V. Brief Notes on the Age and Authenticity of the Work
of Aryabhata, Vaxahamihira, Brahmagupta, Ehattotpala, and Bhlskaracharya. By Dr. Bh&u
Dajt.— XV. Outlines of a Grammar of the Malagasy Language. By H. N. Van der Tuuk.—
XVI. On the Identity of Xandrames and Krananda. By E. Thomas, Esq.

Vol. II. In Two Parts, pp. 522, sewed. 1866-7. 16s.

GoMTENTS.— I. Contributions to a Knowledge of Vedie Theogony and Mythology. No. 2;

By J. Muir. —II. Miscellaneous Hymns from the Rig- and Atharva-Vedas. By J. Muir.— III.

Eive hundred questions on the Social Condition of the Natives of Bengal. By the Rev. J. Long;

—IV. Short account of the Malay Manuscripts belonging to the Royal Asiatic Society. By

Digitized by Microsofm

8, lilngulstit Publications of Triibner 8f Co.,

Dr. H. N. Tan der Tuuk.— V. Translation of tbe Amitabha Sfltra from Ihe Chinese. By the Rev.
S. Beal.— VI. Tbe initial coinage of Bengal. By E. Thomas.— VII. Specimens of an Assyrian
Dictionary. By E. Norris.— VIII. On the Belations of the Priests to the other classes of llndian
Society in the Vedie age. By J. Muir.— IX. On the Interpretation of tbe Veda. By tbe same. —
X. Ah attempt to Translate from tbe Chinese a work known as tbe Confessional Services of the
great compassionate Kwan Yin, possessing 1000 bands and 1000 eyes. By the Rev. S. Beal. —
—XI. Tbe Hymns of the Gaup§iyanas and tbe Legend of King Asamati. By Prof. Max Muiler.
—XII. Specimen Chapters of an Assyrian Grammar. By the Kev. E. Hincks, D. D.

Vol. in. In Two Parts, pp. 516, sewed. With Photograph. 1868. 22s.
Contents.- I. Contributions towards a Glossary of the Assyrian Language. By H. F. Talbot,
—II. Remarks on tbe Indo-Chinese Alphabets. By Dr. A. Bastion.- III. The poetry of
Mobamed Rabadan, Arragonese. By tbe Hon. H. E. 3. Stanley.— IV. Catalogue of the Oriental
Manuscripts in tbe Library of King's College, Cambridge. By E. H. Palmer, B.A.— V. De-
scription of tbe Amravati Tope in Guntur. By J. Fergusson, F.R.S.— VI. Remarks on Prof.
Brockbaus' edition of tbe Kathasarit-sagara, Lambaka IX. XVIII. By Dr. H. Kern, Prof, of
Sanskrit, University of Leyden. — VH. The source of Colebrooke's Essay .** On tbe Duties of a
Faithful Hindu Widow." By Fitzedward Hall, D.CL. Supplement : Further detail of proofs
that Colebrooke's Essay, " On tbe Duties of a Faithful Hindu Widow," was not indebted to
tbe Vivadabbangarnava. By F. Hall.— Vtll. Tbe Sixth Hymn of the First Book of the Rig
Veda. By Prof. Max MUUer.— IX. Sassanian Inscriptions. By E. Thomas.— X. Account of an
Embassy from Morocco to Spain in 1690 and 1691. By tbe Hon. H. E. J. Stanley.— XI. Tbe
Poetry of Mobamed Rabadan, of Arragon. By the same.— XII. Materials for the History of
India for the Six Hundred Years of Mohammadan rule, previous to the Foundation of the British
Indian Empire. By Major W. Nassau Lees, LL.D.— XIII. A Few Words concerning tbe Hill
people inhabiting tbe Forests of the Cochin State. By Capt. G. E. Fryer, M.S.C.— XIV. Notes
on the Bbojpurl Dialect of Hindi, spoken in Western Bebar. By J. Beames, B.C.S.

Vol. IV. In Two Parts, pp. 521, sewed. 1869-70. 16s.
Contents. — I. Contribution towards a Glossary of tbe Assyrian Language. By H. F. Talbot.
Part II. — II. On Indian Chronology. By J. Fergusson, F.R.S. — III. Tbe Poetry ol Mohamed
Rabadan of Arragon. By tbe Hon. H. E. J. Stanley.— IV. On tbe Magar Language of Nepal.
By J. Beames, B.C.S. — V. Contributions to the Knowledge of Parsee Literature. By E. Sachau,
Ph.D. — VI. Illustrations of tbe Lamaist System in Tibet, drawn from Chinese Sources. By
W. F. Mayers, of H.B.M. Consular Service, China.— VII. Khuddaka PStba, a P41i Text, with a
Translation and Notes. By R. C. Cbilders, late Ceylon C.S. — VIII. An Endeavour to elucidate
Rashiduddin's Geographical Notices of India. By Col. H. Yule, C.B.— IX. Sassanian Inscriptions
explained by tbe Pablavi of tbe P^rsis, By E. W. West. — X. Some Account of the Senbyd
Pagoda at Mengdn, near tbe Burmese Capital, in a Memorandum by Capt. E. H. Sladen, Politi-
cal Agent at Mandal€; with Remarks on the Subject by Col. H. Yule, C.B. — XI. Tbe Brhat-
SanbitS. ; or. Complete System of Natural Astrology of Varaba-Mibira. Translated from Sanskrit
into English by Dr. H. Kern. — XII. The Mohammedan Law of Evidence, and its influence on
tbe Administration of Justice in India. By N. B. E. Baillie, — XIII. Tbe Mohammedan Law of
Evidence in connection with tbe Administration of Justice to Foreigners. By the same. — ^XIV.
A Translation of a Bactrian PSli Inscription. By Prof, J. Dowson. — XV. Indo-Parthian Coins.
By E. Thomas.

Vol. V. In Two Parts, pp. 463, sewed. With 10 full-page and folding Plates.
1871-2. Us.ed.
Contents.— I. Two Jdtakas. Tbe original Pdli Text, with an English Ti'anslation. By V,
FausboU.— 11 . On an Ancient Buddhist Inscription at Keu-jung kwan, in North China. By A.
Wylie. — III. Tbe Brhat Sanbita ; or. Complete System of Natural Astrology of Varaha-Mihira
Translated from Sanskrit into English by Dr. H. Kern.- IV. Tbe Pougol Festival in Southern
India. By C. E. Cover.- V. Tbe Poetry of Mohamed Rabadan, of Arragon. By the Right Hon.
Lord Stanley of Alderlcy.— VI. Essay on tbe Creed and Customs of the Jangams. By C. P.
Brown.— VII. On Malabar, Coromandel, Quilon, etc. By C. P. Brown.— VIII. On the Treatment
of the Nexus in tbe Neo-Aryan Languages of India. By J. Beames, B.C.S.— IX. Some Remarks
on tbe Great Tope at Sancbi. By tbe Rev. S. Beal.— X. Ancient Inscriptions from Mathura.
Translated by Prof. J. Dowson.— Note to the Mathura Inscriptions. Bv Major-Gen. A. Cun-
ningbam.— XI. Specimen of a Translation of tbe Adi Granth. By Dr. E.'Trumpp.— XII. Notes
on Dhammapada, with Special Reference to tbe Question of Nirvana. By B. C. Childers, late
Ceylon C.S— XIII. Tbe Brhat-Sanbita ; or. Complete System of Natural Astrology of VarHha-
mihira. Translated from Sanskrit into English by Dr. H. Kern.— XIV. On tbe Origin of tbe
Buddhist Arthakatbfis. By the Mudliar L. Comrilla Vijasinba, Government Interpreter to the
Ratnapura Court, Ceylon. With Introduction by R. C. Cbilders, late Ceylon C.S.— XV. The
Poetry of Mohamed Rabadan, of Arragon. By the Right Hon. Lord Stanley of Alderlcy,—
XVI. Proverbia Communia Syi'iaca. By Capt. R. F. Burton.- -XVII. Notes on an Ancient
Indian Vase, with an Account of tbe Engraving thereupon. By C. Home, late B.C.S.— XVIII.
Tbe Bbar Tribe. By tbe Rev. M. A. Sberring, LL.D., Benares. Communicated by C. Home,
late B.C.S.— XIX. Of Jihad in Mohammedan Law, and its application to British India. By
N. B. E. BaiUie.— XX. Comments on Recent Peblvi Decipherments. With an Incidental Sketch
of the Derivation of Aryan Alphabets. And Contributions to tbe Early History and Geography
of Tabaristdn. Illustrated by Coins. By E. Thomas, F.R.S. " r j.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E, G. 9

Vol. VI., Part I, pp.-212, sewed, with two plates and a map. 1872. 8«.

Contents. — The Ishmaelitee. and the Arabic Tribes who Conquered their Country. By A.
Sprenger.— A Brief Account of Four Arabic Worlts on the History and Geography of Arabia.
By Captain S. B. Miles. — On the Method's of Disposing of the Dead at Llassa, Thibet, etc. By
Charles Home, late B.C.S. The Brbat-Sanhit&; or, Complete System of Natural Astrology of
Tar^ba-mihira, Translated from Sanskrit into English by Dr. H. Kern.— Notes on Hwen
Thsang's Account of the Principalities of Tokbjlrist&n, in which some Previous Geographical
Identifications are Reconsidered. .By Colonel Yule, C.B.— The Campaign of .ffiliua Gallus in
Arabia. By A. Sprenger.— An Account of Jerusalem, Translated for the late Sir H. M. Elliot
from the Persian Text of NSsir ibn Khusrfl's Safan4mah by the late Major A. B,. Fuller.— The
Poetry of Mohamed Babadan, of Arragon. By the Bight Hon. Lord Stanley of Alderley. *

Vol. VI., Part'II., pp. 213 to 400 and Ixxxlv., sewed. Illustrated with a Map,
Plates, and Woodcuts. 1873. 8«.

Contents. -On Hiouen-Thsang's Journey- from Patna to Ballabhi. By James Fergusson,
D.C.L., F.B.S.— Northern Buddhism. [Note from Colonel H. Yule, addressed to the Secretary.]
— :Hwen Thsang's Account of the Principalities of Tokharistan, etc. By Colonel H. Yule, C.B. —
The Byhat-Sanhita; or. Complete System of Natural Astrology of Varaha-mihira. Translated
from Sanskrit into English by Br. H. Kern. — The Initial Coinage of Bengal, imder the Early
Muhammadan Conquerors. Part II. Embracing the preliminary period between a.h. 614-634
(AjD. 1217-1236-7). • By Edward Thomas, F.R.S.— The Legend of Dipankara Buddha. Translated
from the Chinese (and intended to illustrate Plates xxix. and l., 'Tree and Serpent Worship ').
By S. Beal. — Note on Art. IX., ant6 pp. 213-274, on Hiouen-Thsang's Journey from Patna to
Ballabhi. By James Fergusson, D.G.L., F.E.S. — Contributions towards a Glossary of the
Assyrian Language. By H. F, Talbot.

Vol. VII., Parti., pp. 170 and 24, sewed. With a plate. 1874. 8*.

Contents.— The Upa8ampada-Eammav&c&, being the Buddhist Manual of the Form and
Manner of Ordering of Priests and Deacons. The Pdli Text, with a Translation and Notes,
By J, F. Dickson, B. A. —Notes on the Megalithic Monuments of the Coimbatore District,
Madras. By M. J. Walhouse, late M,C.S, — Notes on the Sinhalese Language. No. 1. On the For-
mation of the Phu-al of Neuter Nouns. By E. C. Childers, late Ceylon C.S.— The Pali Text
of the Mahdparinibbdna Sutta- and Commentary, with a Translation. By R. C. Childers, late
Ceylon C.S. — The Brihat-Sanhita ; or. Complete System of Natural Astrology of Varaha-mihira.
Translated from 8j£nskrit into English by Dr. H. Kern,— Note on the Valley of Choombi.
By Dr. A. Campbell, late Superintendent of Darjeeling. — The Name of the Twelfth Imdm on the
Comage of Egypt. By H. Sauvaire and Stanley Lane Poole.— Three Inscriptions of Para-
krama B4bu the Great from Pulastipura, Ceylon (date circa 1180 a. o.). By T. W. Rhys Davids.
—Of the Kharij or Muhammadan Land Tax ; its Application to British India, and Effect on
the Tenure of Land. By N. B. E. Baillie.— Appendix : A Specimen of a Syriac Version of the
Ealilah wa-Xflmnah, with an English Translation. By "W. Wright.

Vol.VII.,PartII,,pp. 191 to394, sewed. With seven plates and a map. 1875. 8s.

Contents.— Slgiri, the Lion Rock, near Pulastipura, Ceylon; and the Thirty-ninth Chapter
of the Mahavamsa. By T. W. Rhys Davids. —The Northern Frontagers of China, Part I,
The Origines of the Mongols. By H. H. Howorth.— Inedited Arabic Coins. By Stanley Lane
Poole.— Notice on the Dinars of the Abbasside Dynasty. By Edward Thomas Rogers.— The
Northern Frontagers of China. Part II. The Origines of the Manchus. By H. H. Howorth.
—Notes on the Old Mongolian Capital of Shangto. By S. W. Bushell, B.Sc, M,D,— Oriental
Proverbs in their Relations to Folklore, History, Sociology ; with Suggestions for their Collec
tion. Interpretation, Publication. By the Rev. J. Long.— Two Old Simhalese Inscriptions. The
SahasaMalla Inscription, date 1200 ad., and the Ruwanwseli Dagaba Inscription, date 1191 A.D.
Text, Translation, and Notes. By T. W. Rhys Davids.— Notes on a Bactrian Pali Inscription
and the Saravat Era. By Prof. J. Dowson. — Note on a Jade Drinking Vessel of the Emperor
Jahtogir. By Edward Thomas, F.R.S.

Vol. VIII., Part I., pp. 156, sewed, with three plates and a plan. 1876. 8».

Contents.— Catalogue of Buddhist Sanskrit MSS. in the Possession of the R.A.S. (Hodgson
Collection). By Prof. E. B. Cowell and J. Eggeling.— On the Ruins of Sigiri in Ceylon. By
T. H. Blakesley, Ceylon.— The Patimokkha, being the Buddhist Office of the Confession of Priests.
The Pali Text, with a Translation, and Notes. By J. V. Dickson, M.A., Ce.vlon C.S.— Notes
"on the Sinhalese Language. No. 2. Proofs of the Sauskritic Origin of Sinhalese. By R. C.
Childers, late of the Ceylon Civil Service.

Vol. VIII., Part II., pp. 157-308, sewed. 1876. 8s.

Contents.- An Account of the Island of Bali. By R. Friederioh.— The Pali Text of the MahS.-

parinibbana Sutta and Commentary, with a Translation. By R. C. Childers, late Ceylon C.S.—

The Northern Frontagers of China. Part HI. The Kara Khitai. By H. H. Howorth.— In-

■edited Arabic Coins. II. By S. L. Poole.— On the Form of Government under the Native

. Sovereigns of Ceylon. By A. deySJ^feEgk^^^fe M^a^^ar, Ceylon.

10 Linguistic Publications of Trilbner ^ Co.^

Vol. IX., Part I., pp. 156, sewed, with a plate. 1877. 85.

Contents.— Bactrian Coins and Indian Dates. By E. Thomas, F.R.S.— The Tenses of the-
Assyrian Verb. By the Rev. A. H. Sayce, M.A.— An Account of the Island of Bali. By R.
Friedericb {continued from Vol. VIII. n.s- p. 218).— On Ruins in Makran. By Major Moekler.
— Inedited Arabic Coins. III. By Stanley Lane Poole,— Further Note on a Bactrian Pali Inscrip-
tion and the Samvat Era. By Prof. J. Dowson.— Notes on Persian Beldchistan. From the
Persian of Mirza Mehdy Khfin. By A. H. Schindler.

Vol IX., Part II., pp. 292. sewed, with three plates. ]877. 10s. M.

Contents.— The Early Faith of Asoka. By E. Thomas, F.R.S.— The Northern Frontagers,
of China. Part II. The Manchus {Supplementary Notice). Part IV. The Kin or Golden Tatars.
ByH. H. Howorth. — On a Treatise on Weights and Measures by Eliy4, Archbishop of Nisfbfn.
By M. H. Sauvaire.- On Imperial and other Titles. By Sir T. E. Colebrooke, Bart., M.P.— Affi-
nities of the Dialects of the Chepang and Kusundah Tribes of Nipdl with those of the Hill Tribes ■
of Arracan. By Capt. C. J. F. Forbes. F.R.G.S., M.A.S. Bengal, etc.— Notes on Some Anti-
quities found in a Mound near Damghan, By A. H. Schindler.

Vol. X., Part I., pp. 156, sewed, with two plates and a map. 1878. 8*.

Contents.— On the Non-Aryan Languages of India. By E. L. Brandreth.- A Dialogue on
the Vedantic Conception of Brahma. By PramadA DSsa Mittra, lateOffi. Prof, of Anglo-Sanskrit,
Gov, College, Benares. — An Account of the Island of Bali. By R. Friederich (continued from
Vol. IX. N.S. p. 120).- Unpublished Glass Weights and Measures. By E. T, Rogers.— China,
via. Tibet. By 8. C, Boulger.— Notes and Recollections on Tea Cultivation in Kumaon and
Garhwai. By J. H. Batten, late B.C.S.

Vol. X., Part II., pp. 146, sewed. 1878. 6«.

Contents.— Note on Pliny's Geography of the East Coast of Arabia. By Major-Gen. S. B. Miles,
B.S.C. The Maldive Islands; with a VocabulM^ taken from Francois Pyrard de Laval, 1602 —
1607. By A. Gray, late Ceylon C.S.— On Tibeto-Burman Languages. By Capt. C. J. F. S.
Forbes, Burmese C.S. Commis^on.— Burmese Transliteration. By H. L. St. Barbe, Resident at.
Mandelay.— Ou the Connexion of the Mona of Pegu with the Koles of Central India. By
Capt. C. J. F. S. Forbes, Burmese C.C. — Studies on the Comparative Grammar of the Semitic-
Languages, with Special Reference to Assyrian. By P. Haupt. The Oldest Semitic Verb-Form.
— Arab Metrology. II. El-Djabarty. By M. H. Sauvaire.— The Migrations and Early History
of the White Huns ; principally from Chinese Sources. By T. W. Kingsmill.

Vol. X., Part III., pp. 204, sewed. 1878. 8s.

Contents.— On the Hill Canton of SS15.r,— the most Easterly Settlement of the Turk Race.
By Robert B. Shaw. — Geological Notes on the River Indus. By GriflBn W. Vyse, Executive
Engineer P.W.D. Panjab. — Educational Literature for Japanese Women. By B. H. Chamber-
lain. — On the Natural Phenomenon Known in the East by the Names Snb-M-Kazib, etc., etc..
By J. W. Redhouse.— On a Chinese Version of the Sfiiikhya KirikS, etc., found among the-
Buddhist Books comprising the Tripitaka and two other works. By the Rev. S. Beal. — The
Rock-cut Phrygian Inscriptions at Doganlu. By E. Thomas, F.R.S. — Index.

Vol. XI., Part. I., pp. 128, sewed, with seven illustrations. 1879. 5«.

Contents.— On the Position of Women in the East in the Olden Time. By E. Thomas, F.R.S.
— Notice of Scholars who have Contributed to our Knowledge of the Languages of British India
during the last Thirty Tears. By R. N. Cust.— Ancient Arabic Poetry; its Genuineness and
Authenticity, By Sir W. Muir, K.C.S.I.- Note on Manrique's Mission and the Catholics in the
time of Shdh Jabfin. By H. G. Keene.— On Sandhi in Pali. By the late R. C. Childers.- On
Arabic Amulets and Mottoes. By E. T. Rogers.

Vol. XL, Part II., pp. 256, sewed, with map and plate. 1879. 75. 6(f.

Contents.— On the Identification of Places on the Makran Coast mentioned by Arrian, Ptolemy,
and Marcian. By Major E. Moekler. — On the Proper Names of the Mohammadans. By Sir T.
E. Colebrooke, Bart., M. P.— Principles of Composition in Chinese, as deduced from the Written
Characters. By the Rev. Dr. Legge.— On the Identification of the Portrait of Chosroes II. among
the Paintings in the Caves at Ajanta. By James Fergusson, Vice-President. — A Specimen of
the Zoongee (or Zurngee) Dialect of a Tribe of Nagas, bordering on the Valley of Assam,
between the Dikho and Desoi Rivers, embracing over Forty Villages. By the Rev. Mr. Clark.

Vol. XI. Part III. pp. 104, cxxiv. 16, sewed. 1879. 85.

Contents. — The Gaurian compared with the Romance Languages. Part I. By E. L.
Brandreth.— Dialects of Colloquial Arabic. By E. T. Rogers.— A Comparative Study of the
Japanese and Korean Languages. By W. G. Aston.— Index.

Vol. XII. Part I. pp. 152, sewed, -with Table. 1880. 5«.

Contents.— On "The Most Comely Names," i.e. the Laudatory Epithets, or the Titles of Praise-
bestowed on God -in the Qur'au or by Muslim Writers. By J . W. Redhouse.— Notes on a newly-
discovered Clay Cylinder of Cyrus the Great. By Major-Gen. Sir H. C. Rawlinson, K,C.B.—
Note on Hiouen-Thsang*s Dhanakaeheka. By Robert Sewell, M.C.S. — Remarks by Mr.
FergUBson on Mr, Sewell's Paper.— A Treatise on Weights and Measures. By Eliyd, Archbkbop-
of Nialbln. By H. Sauvaire. (Supplement to Vol. IX., pp. 291-315)- On the Age of th&
Ajantfi Caves. By Rfijendrallla Mitra, CLE. —Notes on Babu R&jendral& Mitra's Paper on
the Age of the Caves at Ajuntd. By J. Fergusson, F.R.S.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 ani 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.C. 11

Vol. XII. Part II. pp. 182, sewed, with map and plate. 1880. 6s.

CoHTENTS.^On Sanskrit Texts Discovered in Japan. By Prof. Max Muller.— Extracts from
Beport on the Islands and Antiquities of Bahrein. By Capt. Durand. Followed by Notes by
Major-Gen. Sir H. C. Bawlinson, K.C.B.— Notes on the Locality and Population of the Tribes
dwelling between the Brahmaputra and Ningthi Bivers, By the late G. H. Damant^ Political
Ofiicer, N£ga Hills.— On the Saka, SamTat, and Gupta Eras, A Supplement to his Paper on Indian
Chronology. By J. Fergusson, D.C.L.— The Megha-Sutra. By C. Bendall. — Historical and
ArchsBological Notes on a Journey in South-Western Persia, 1877-1878. By A. Houtum-
Schindler.— Identification of the " False Dawn " of the MusUms with the "Zodaacal Light" of
Europeans. By J. W. Redhouse,

Vol. XII. Part III. pp. 100, sewed. 1880. 4».

GoNTBNTs, — The Gaurian compared with the Romance Languages. Part II. By E. L.
Ei^andreth,— The TJzbeg Epos. By Arminius Vambfty.— On the Separate Edicts at Dhauli and
Jaugada. By Prof. Kern. — Grammatical Sketch of the Kakhyen Language. By Bev. J. N.
Gushing.— Notes on the Libyan Languages, in a Letter addressed to R, N, Gust, Esq., by Prof.
F. W. Newman.

Vol. XII. Part IV. pp. 152, with 3 plates. 1880. 8s.

CONTBNTS.- The Early History of Tibet, from Ghinese Sources. By S. W. Bushell, M.D.—
Notes on some Inedited Coins from a Collection made in Persia during the Years 1877-79. By
Gtty Le Strange, M.E.A.S.— Buddhist Nirvana and the Noble Eightfold Path. By Oscar
Frankfurter, Ph.D.— Index.- Annual Report, 1880.

Vol. XIII. Part I. pp. 120, sewed. 1881. 5s.

Contents.— Indian Theistic Reformers. By Prof. Monier Williams, C.I.E.— Notes on the Kawi
Language and Literature. By Dr. H. N. Van der Tuuk.— The Invention of the Indian Alphabet.
By John Dowson. The Nirvana of the Northern Buddhists. By the Rev. J. Edkins, D.D.— •
An Account of the Malay " Chiri," a Sanskrit Formula. By W. E. Maxwell,

Vol. XIII. Part II. pp. ITO, with Map and 2 Plates. 1881. 8s.

CoBTEMTS.— The Northern Frontagers of China. Part V. The Khitai or Khitans. By H. H.
Howorth. — On the Identification of Nagarahara, with reference to the Travels of Hiouen-Thsang.
By W. Simpson. — Hindu Law at Madras, By J. H. Nelson, M.C.S.— On the Proper Names of
the Mohammedans. By Sir T. E. Colebrooke, Bart., M.P.— Supplement to the Paper on Indian
Theistic Reformers, published' in the January Number of this Journal. By Prof. Monier
WilUams, CLE.

Vol. XIII. Part III. pp. 178, with plate. 1881. 7s. Gd.

COHTKHTS. — The Avar Language. By C. Graham.— Caucasian Nationalities. By M. A,
Morrison.— Translation of the Markandeya Furana. Books VII., VIII. By the Rev. B.
Hi Wortham.— Lettre k M. Stanley Lane Poole sur quelques monnaies orientales rares ou inSdites
de la Collection deM. Ch, del'Ecluse, ParH. Sauvaire.— Aryan Mythology in Malay Traditions.
By W. E. Maxwell, Colonial Civil Service.— The Koi, a Southern Tribe of the Gond. By the
Bev. J. Gain, Missionary.— On the Duty which Mohammedans in British India owe, on the
Principles of their own Law, to the Government of the Country. By N. E. E. Baillic.— The
L-Foem of the Arabs, by Shanfara, Re-arranged and translated by J. W. Redhouse, M.R.A.S.

Vol. XIII. Part IV. pp. 130, cxxxvi. 16, with 3 plates. 1881. lOs. &d.

Contents,- The Andaman Islands and the Andamanese. By M. V. Portman. — Notes on Marco
Polo's Itinerary in SouthernPersia, By A. Houtum-Schindler.— Two Malay Myths : ThePrincess
of the Foam, and the Raja of Bamboo, By W, E, Maxwell.— The Epoch of the Guptas. By
E; Thomas, F.R.8.— Two Chinese-Buddhist Inscriptions found at Buddha Gaya. By the Rev, S,
Beal,, With 2 Plates. — A Sanskrit Ode addressed to the Congress of Orientalists at Berlin. By
Rama Dasa Sena, the Zemindar of Berhampore ; -with a Translation by S. Krishnavarma. —
Supplement to a paper, " On the Duty which Mahommedans in British India owe, on the Principles
of their own Law, to the Government of the Country." By N. B. E. Baillie. — Index.

Vol. XIV. Part I. pp. 124, with 4 plates. 1882. 5s.

Contents.— The Apology of Al Kindy : An Essay on its Age and Authorship. By Sir W
Muir, K.C.S.I.— The Poet Pampa. By L. Bice.- On a Coin of Shams ud Duny9, wa ud Din
MahmM Shah. By C. J. Rodgers, Amritsar.— Note on PI, xxviii. flg. 1, of Mr. Fergusson'a
"Tree and Serpent Worship," 2nd Edition. By S. Beal, Prof, of Ghinese, London University.—
On the present state of Mongolian Researches. By Prof. B, Julg, in a Letter to R, N. Oust,—
A Sculptured Tope on an Old Stone at Dras, Ladak, By W, Simpson, r,E,G.S,— Sanskrit Ode
addressed to the Fifth International Congress of Orientalists assembled at Berlin, September,
1881, By the Lady Pandit Rama-bai, of Silohar, Kachar, Assam ; with a Translation by Prof,
Monier "Williams, CLE,— The Intercourse of China with Eastern Turkestan and the Adjacent
Countries in the Second Century e,c. By T. W. Kingsmill.— Suggestions on the Formation of
the Semitic Tenses. A Comparative and Critical Study. By G. Bertin.— On a Lolo MS. written

on Satin. By M. T. de La Couperie

digitized by Microsoft®

12 Linguistic Publications of Truhner / Co.,

Vol. XIV. Part II. pp. 164, mth three plates. 1882. 7». 6rf.

CoNTENTS.-On Tartar and Turk. By S. W. Koklle. Ph.D.-Notice of Scholars who have Con-
tributed to our Knowledge of the Languages of Africa. By R. N. Cust--Graminatical Sketch
of the Hausa Language. By the Eev. J. F. Sohon, F-,ll-G.S.,-Buddh«t Saint Worship By
A. Lillie.-Gleanings from the Arabic. By H. W. Preeland, M.A.-Al Kahirah and its Gates.
By H. C. Kay, M. Af-How the Mah4bh4rata begins. By Edwin Arnold, C.S.I.-Arab Metrology.
IV. Ed-Dahaby. By M. H. Sauvaire.

Vol. XIV. Part III. pp. 208, with 8 plates. 1882. 8j.

Contents.— The Vaishnaya Religion, with special reference to the Siksha-patrl of the
Modem Sect called Svami-Narayana.' By Monier Williams, C.I.E., D.C.L.— Further Notes on
the Apology of Al-Kindy. By Sir W. Muir, K.C.S.I., D.C.L., LL.D.-The Buddhist Caves of
Afghanistan. By W. Simpson.— The Identification of the Sculptured Tope at Sanchi. By W.
Simpson— On the Genealogy of Modem Numerals. By Sir E. C. Baylcy, K.C.S.I., CLE.
—The Cuneiform Inscriptions of Van, deciphered and translated, by A. H. Sayce.

Vol. XIV. Part IV. pp. 330, clii. 1882. 14s.

Contents.— The Cuneiform Inscriptions of Van, deciphered and translated, by A. H. Sayce.
—Sanskrit Text of the Siksha-Patri of the Svami-Narayana Sect. Edited and Translated bj
Prof. M. Williams, CLE.— The Successors of the Siljaks in Asia Minor. By S. L. Poole.— The
Oldest Book' of the Chinese (The Th-King) and its Authors. By T. de la Couperic.

Vol. XV. Part I. pp. 134, with 2 plates. 1883. 6s.

Contents.- The Genealogy of Modem Numerals. Part II. Simplification of the Ancient Indian
Numeration. By Sir E C. Bayley, CLE.— Parthian and Indo-Sassanian Coins. By E. Thomas,
F.E.S.— Early Historical Relations between Phrygia and Cappadocia. By W. M. Ramsay.

Vol. XV. Part II. pp. 1 58, with 6 tahles. 1883. 5s.

Contents.— The Tattva-muktavali of Gauda-pftmanandachakravartin. Edited and Trans-
lated by Professor E. B, Cowell.— Two Modern Sanskrit slokas. Communicated by Prof. E. B.
Cowell.— Malagasy Place-Names. By the Rev. James Sibree, jun. — The Namakkira, with
Translation and Commentary. By H. L. St. Barbe. — Chinese Laws and Customs. By
.Christopher Gardner.— The Oldest Book of the Chinese (the Fh-King) and its Authors
(continued). By Tervien de LaCouperie.— Gleanings from the Arabic. By H. W. Freeland.

Vol. XV. Part III. pp. 62-cxl. 1883. 6s.

Contents. — Early Kannada Authors. By Lewis Rice. — On Two Questions of Japanese
Archaeology. By B. H. Chamberlain, M.R.A.S.— Two Sites named by Hiouen.Thsang in the
10th Book of the Si-yu-ki. By the Eev. S. Beal.— Two Early Sources of Mongol History. By
H. n. Howorth, F.S.A.— Proceedings of Sixtieth Anniversary of the Society, held May 21, 1883.

Vol. XV. Part IV. pp. 140-iv.-20, with plate. 1883. 5s.

Coktents. — The Rivers of the Vedas, and How the Aryans Entered India. By Edward
Thomas, F.R.S.— Suggestions on the Voice-Formation of the Semitic Verb. By G. Berlin, M.R.A.S.
—The Buddhism of Ceylon. By Arthur Lillie, MJR..A.S.— The Northern Frontagers of China.
Part VI. Hia or Tangut. By H. H. Howorth, F.S.A.— Index — List of Members.

Vol. XVI. Part I. pp. 138, with 2 plates. 1884. 7s.

Contents.- The Story^of Devasmita. Translated from the Katha Sarit Sagara, Tar^ga 13,
Sloka 54, by the Eev. B. Hale Wortham.— Pujahs in the Sutlej Valley, Himalayas. By William
Simpson, F.E.G.S. — On some New Discoveries in Southern India. By E. Sewell, Madras CS. —
On the Importance to Great Britain of the Study of Arabic. By Habib A. Salmons. —
Grammatical Note on the Gwamba Language in South Africa. By P. Berthoud, Missionary
of the Canton de Vaud. Switzerland, stationed at Valdfizia, Spelonken, Transvaal. (Prepared
at the request of B. N. Cust.) — Dialect of Tribes of the Hindu Khush, from Colonel Biddulph's
Work on the subject (corrected).— Grammatical Note on the Simnlinf Dialect of the Persian
Language. By the Eev. J. Bassett, American Missionary, Tabriz. (Communicated by E. N. Cust.)

Vol. XVI. Part II. pp. 184, with 1 plate. 9s.

Contj5:nts.— Etymology of the Turkish Numerals. By S. W. Koelle, Ph.D., late Missionary
of the Church Missionary Soc, Constantinople. — Grammatical Note and Vocabulary of the
Kor-kii, a Kolarian Tribe in Central India. (Communicated by K. N.Cust.)-The Pariah Caste
in Tiavancore. By S. Matcer.— Some Bihan Folk-Songs. By G. A. Grierson, B.C.S., Offl.
Magistrate, Patna. — Some further Gleanings fi'om the Si-yu-ki. By the Eev. S. Beal. — On the
Sites of Brahmandbfld and Mansllrah in Sindh ; with notices of others of less note in their
Vicinity. By Major-Gen. M. R. Haig. — Antar and the Slave Daji. A Bedoueen Legend. By
St. C iiaddeley.- The Languages of the Early Inhabitants of Mesopotamia. By G. Pinclies.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G. 13

Vol. XVI. Part III. pp. 74.— clx. 10*. 6A
„CoNTiiHTS.— On the Origin of the Indian Alphabet. By R. N. Cost.— The Yi king of the
Chinese as a Book of Divination and Philosophy. By Rev. Dr. Edkins.-On tha Arrangement of
the Hymns of the Kig-veda. ByF. Pinoott.— Proceedings of the Sixty-first Anniversary Meetinir
of the Society, May 19, 1884. i a

Vol. XVI. Part IV. pp. 134. 8*.

Contents.— S'uka-sandesah. A Sanskrit Poem, hy Lakshmt-dasa. With Preface and Notes in
English by H. H. Rama Varma, the Maharaja of Travanoore, G.C.S.I.— The Chinese Book of the

Odes, for English Readers. By C. F. R. Allen.— Note sur les Mots Sanserits composes aveo T^f^.
Par J. van den Gheyn, S.J.— Some Remarks on the Life and Labours of Csoma de Koros,
delivered on the occasion when his Tibetan Books and MSS. -wete exhibited before the R.A.S.,
Jnne 16, 1884. By Surgeon-Major T. Duka, M.D., late of the Bengal Army.— Arab Metrology.
V. Ez-Zahr&wy. Translatedand AiinotatedbyM.H. Sauvaire, del'Acad^miede Marseille.

Vol. XVII., Part I., pp. 144, with 5 plates. 1885. 10s. 6<f.

_ CoNTBNTB.— Story of Sliiuten Doji. From a Japanese "Maklmoub" in Six "Ken," or
Bolls. By F. V. Dicklns.— The Bearing of the Study of the Bantu Languages of South
Africa on the Aryan Family of Languages. By the Rev. F. W. Kolbe.— Notes on Assyrian
and Akkadian Pronouns. By G. Berlin.— Buddhist Remains near -Sambhur, in Western
K^jputana, India. By Surgeon-Major T. H. Hendley.— Gleanings from the Arabic. By
■H. W. Freeland.— Dialects of Tribes of Hindu Kliush, from Colonel Biddulph's Work on
•the Subject. II. Sliina (Giljit Dialect). III. Khowar (Chltral Valley).

Vol. XVII., Part II., pp. 194, with 1 map. 1885. 9».

Contents.— Languages of the Caucasus. By B. N. Cuat.— The Study of the South Indian
Vernaculars. By G. U. Pope, d;d.— The PallavaJ. By the Eev. T. Foulkes.— Translation
of Books 81-93 of the Markandcya Purina. By the Rev. B. H. Wortham.— Notes on Prof.
E. B. Tyler's " Arabian Matriarchate," propounded by him as President of the Anthropo-
logical Section, British Association, Montreal, 1884. By J. W. Redhouse, LL.D -The
Northern Frontagers of China. Part VII. The Shato Turks. By H. H. Howorth.

Vol. XVII., Part III., pp. 344, with 2 plates. 1885. 10s. 6<?.

Contests.— Age of the Avesta. By Prof, de Harlez.— Chinese Game of Chess. By H. F.
W. Holt.— Customs and Superstitions connected with the Cultivation of Bice in the
Southern Province of Ceylon. By C. B. J. le Mesurler.— Vernacular Literature and Folk-
Lore of the Fanjab. By T. H. Thornton, C S.l. — Beginnings of Writing In and around
Tibet. By T. de Lacouperie.— Index. Proceedings of the Sixty-second Anniversary Meeting
of the Society held on the 18th of May, 1885. List of Members.

Vol. XVIII., Part I., pp. 128, with 2 plates. 1886. 5s.

Contents.- Ancient Navigation in the Indian Ocean. By the Rev. J. Edkins, D.D,,
Peking.— La Calle and the Country of Khomair, with a Note on North African Marbles ;
being the Report of a recent Tour addressed to H.M. Secretary of State. By Consul-
General R. L. Playfair.— Bushmen and their Language. By G. Eertin.— Inscriptions at
Cairo and the Burju-z Zafar. By Henry C. Kay.— Gleanings from the Arabic : Lament of
Maisun, the Bedouin wife of Muawiya. By H. W. Freeland, M.A.— Discovery of Caves on
the Murghab. By Gapt. De Lacssoe and the Hon. M. 6. Talbot, R.E. With Notes by W.
Simpson.— The Alchemist: A Persian Play. Translated by Guy Le Strange.

Vol. XVIII., Part II., pp. 196. 1886. 10s. U.

Contents.- On Buddhism in its Relation to Brahmanism. By SirM. Monier- Williams,
K.C.I.E,— The Stories of Jimutavahana, and of Harisarman. Translated by Rev. B.
Hale Wortham. — Geographical Distribution of the Modern Turki Languages. By
M. A. Morrison. With a Note, Table of Authorities, and a Language Map.— A Modern
Contributor to Persian Literature. Riza Kuli Khan and his Works. By Sidney Churchill.
—Some Bhoj'puri Folk-Songs. Edited and Translated by G. A. Grierson .-Observations
on the various Texts and Translations of the so-called " Song of Meysun " ; an Inquiry into
Meysun's Claim to its Authorship ; and an Appendix on Arabic Transliteration and Pro-
nunciation. By J. W. Redhouse.

Vol. XVIII., Part III., pp. 314, with 10 plates. 1886. 10s. 6(?.

Contents.- Rock-Cut Caves and Statues of Bamian. By Capt. the Hon. M. G. Talbot,
B.E. With Notes hereon, and on Sketches of Capt. P. J. Maitland, by W. Simpson.—
Sumerian Language and its Affinities. By Prof. Dr. Fritz Hommel, Munich.— Early
Buddhist Symbolism. By B. Sewell.— Pre-Akkadian Semites. By G. Berlin.— Arrange-
ment of th« Hymns of the Adi Granth. ByF. Pinoott. Annual Report.
Digitized by Microsoft®

14 Linguistic Publications of Truhner ^ Co.,

Vol. XVIII., Part IV., pp. 112, with 11 plates. 1886. la. Gd.

CoNTENTB.— Ancient Sculptures in China. By R. K. Douglas.— Moeque of Sultan Nasir
Mohammed Ebn Kalaoun, in the Citadel of Cairo. By Major C. M. Watson, E.E.— Lan-
guages of Melanesia. By Prof. G. von der Gabelentz.— Notes on the History of the Bana
'Okayl. By H. C. Kay.— Foreign Words in the Hebrew Text of the Old Testament. By
the Rev. S. Leathes, D.D.

Vol. XIX., Part I., pp. 192, with 3 plates. 1887. 10».

Contents.- Story of the Old Bamboo Hewer : A Japanese Romance of the Tenth Century.
Translated with Notes, etc., by F. V. Dickins. - Brahui Grammar, after the German of the
late Dr. Trumpp. By Dr. T. Duka.— Some useful Hindi Books. By G. A. Grierson.—
Original Vocabularies of Five West Caucasian Languages, compiled by Mr. Peacock.—
Art. A Version in Chinese, by the Marquis Tseng, of a Foem written in English and
Italian by H. W. Freeland.

Vol. XIX., Part II., pp. 160, with 3 plates. 1887. 10s.

Contents.- Narrative of FS-hien. By the Rev. S. Beal.— Priority of Labial Letters
illustrated in Chinese Phonetics. By the Rev. J. Edkins. — Education in Egypt. By H.
<3unynehame.— The Tri-Ratna. By F. Pincott, — Description of the Noble Sanctuary at
Jerusalem in 1470 A.D. By Eamal (or Shams) ad Din as Suyuti. Extracts re-translated
by Guy le Strange.

Vol. XIX., Part III., pp. 218, with 5 plates. 1887. 10».

Contents. — Life and Labours of A. Wylie, Agent of B. and F. Bible Society in China.
3y H, Cordier.— Modern Languages of Oceania. With Language Map. By Dr. E. W.
Cust.— Ibnu Eatuta in Sindh. By Major-General Haig.— Formosa Notes on MS3., Races
and Languages. By Prof. T. de Lacouperie, Including a Note on Nine Formosan M^S.
iy E. Babcr.— Revenues of the Moghul Empire. By H G. Keene. — Annual Report for 1886.

Vol. XIX., Part IV., pp. 202, with 1 plate. 1687. IDs.

Contents.- The Mirycks or Stone-men of Corea. By Prof. T. de Lacouperie (Plate). —
Fre-Sanskrit Element in Ancient Tamil Literature. By £. S. W. Senathi Raja. — Were
Zenobia and Zebba'u Identical? By J. W. lledhouse.- First Mandala of the Uig-Veda.
By F. Pincott.— Origin and Development of the Cuneiform Syllabary. By G. Berlin.—
Babylonian Chronicle. By T. G. Pinches.— Index— List of Members.

Vol. XX., Part I., pp. 164, with 3 plates. 1888. 10s.

Contents. — Cuneiform Inscriptions of Van. By the Rev. Frof. A. H. Sayce, M.A. —
Some Suggestions of Origin in Indian Architecture. By W. Simppon. — The Chaghatal
Muglials. By E. E. Oliver.— Sachau's Alberuni. By Major-Gen. Sir F. ,1. Goldsmid, C.B„
K. C.S.I.

Asiatic Society. — Teaistsactions of the Eotal Asiatic Society of

Great Britain and Ireland. Complete in 3 vols. 4to., 80 Plates of Fac-
similes, etc., cloth. London, 1827 to 1835. Published at j69 5s. ; reduced to
j65 6s.
The above contains contributions by Professor Wilson, G. C. Hanghton, Davis, Morrison,
Colebrooke, Humboldt, Dorn, Grotefend, and other eminent Oriental scholars.

Asiatic Society of Bengal. — Journal. 8vo. 8 numbers per annum.

4s. each number. Puoceedinqs. Published Monthly, Is. each number.

Asiatic Society of Bengal. — Jouhnal. A Complete Set from the

beginning in 1832 to the end of 1878, being Vols. 1 to 47. Proceedings, from
the commencement in 1865 to 1878. A set quite complete. Calcutta, 1832 to
1878. Extremely scarce. £100.

Asiatic Society of Bengal, — Centenaet Review of the, from 1784
to 1883. Part I. History of the Society. By Eajendralala Mitha, LL.D.,
CLE. Part II. Archseology, History, Literature, etc. By Dr. A. F. R.
HoERNLE. Part III. Natural Science, etc. By BabooP. N. Bose. Parti!
contains an Alphabetical Index to the Papers and Contributions to the
" Asiatiek Researches," and the " Journal and Proceedings of the Asiatic
Society of Bengal," from the commencement up to 1883. Part II. contains a
Classified Subject Index of the Society's Publications during the same period,
under the heads of (1) Antiquities ; (2) Coins, Weights, Measures, etc. ; (3)
• History ; (4) Language and Literature ; (5) Religion, Manners and Customs.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E. C, 15

Part III. contains a similar Index, classified under the heads of (11 Mathematical
and Physical Science ; (2) Geology ; (3) Zoology ; (4) Botany ; (S) Geography ;
(6) Ethnology ; (7) Chemistry, fioyal 8vo. pp. 216— ciii. ; 109, xcvi. 20, cloth.

Asiatic Society, Boyal. — Bombay Branch. — Jotthnai. Nos. 1 to 35

in 8vo. with many plates. A complete set. Extremely scarce. Bombay,
1844-78. jei3 IDs.

Asiatic Society Royal. — Bombay Branch. — Jotjenai,. Nos. 1 to 45.

5«. to 10«. 6d. each number. Several Numbers are out of print.

Asiatic Society, Royal. — Ceylon Branch (Colombo.) — Joubnal. Part

for 1845. 8to. pp. 120, sewed. Price Is. 6A

Contents ir-On Buddhism. No. 1. By the Ksv. D. J. Gogerly.— Translated Ceylonese
Literature. By W. Knighton. — The Elements of the Voice in reference to the Roman and
Sinhalese Alphabets. . By the "Rev. J. C. Macvicar,— Crime in Ceylon. ■By_ the Hon. J. Stark. —
Ancient Coins. By S. C. Chitty, —Collection of Statistical Information in Ceylon. By John
Capper.— On Buddhism. No 2. By the Rev. D. J. Gogerly.

1846. 8vo. pp. 176, sewed. Price Is. 6d.
Contents: — On Buddhism. By Rev. D. J. Gogerly.— Sixth Chapter of the Tiruvathavur
Parana, translated with Notes. By S. C. Chitty.— The Discourse on the Minor Results of Con-
duct, or the Discourse Addressed to Suhba. B;^ Rev. D. J. Gogerly. — On the State -of Crime in
Ceylon. By Hon. J. Stark.— Language and Literature of the Singalese. By Eev. S. Hardy. —
Education Establishment of the Dutch in Ceylon. By Rev. J. D. Palm.— Account of the Dutch
Church in Ceylon. By Kev. J. D. Palm.- Some Experiments In Electro-Agriculture. By J.
Capper.— Singalo Wada, translated hy Rev. D. J. Gogerly.— Colouring Matter Discovered in the
husk of the Cocoa Nut. By Dr. R. Gygax.

1847-48. 8to. pp. 221, sewed. Price Is. 6d.

Contents :— The Mineralogy of Ceylon. By Dr. R. Gygax.— The Dutch Church in Ceylon.
By Rev. J. D. Palm.— Go the History of Jafiha, from the Earliest Period to the Dutch Conquest.
By S. C. Chitty.— The Rise and Fall of the Calany Ganga, from 1843 to 1846. By J. Capper.
— The Discourse respecting Ratapala. Translated by Rev. D. J. Gogerly.— The Manufacture
of Salt in the Chilaw and Putlam Distriets. ByA. O. Brodie.— A Royal Grant engraved on a
Copper Plate. Translated, with Notes. By Rev. D. J. Gogerly.— Ancient and Modem Coins
of Ceylon. By Hon. Mr. J. Stark.— Notes on the Climate and Salubrity of Putlam. By A. O.
Brodie.— Revenue and Expenditure of the Dutch Government in Ceylon, during the last years
of their Administration. By J. Capper.— On Buddhism. By Rev. D. J. Gogerly.

1853-56. Part I. 8vo. pp. 56, sewed. Price 7s. 6d. (or the 3 parts £1).
Contents :— Buddhism : Chariya Fitaka. By Rev. D.J. Gogerly.— Laws of the Buddhist
Priesthood. By Rev. D. J. Gogerly.— Statistical Account of the Districts of Chilaw
Korle, Seven Korles. By A. O. Brodie.— Catalogue of Ceylon Birds. By E. F. Kelaart, and
and Putlam, N. W.P. By A. 0. Brodie.— Rock Inscription at Gooroo Godde Wihare, in the Magool.
By E. L. Layard.

1853-55. Part II. 8vo. pp. 102, with extra plates, sewed. Price 7s. 6d.
' Contents:- Catalogue of Ceylon Birds. By E. F. Kelaart and E. L. Layard. — Forms
of Salutations and Address known among the Singalese. By Hon. J. Stark. — Rock In-
scriptions. By A. O. Brodie. — On the Veddhas of Biutenne. By Rev. J. Gillings. — Rock
Inscription at Firamanenkandel. By S , C. Chitty.— Analysis of the Great Historical Poem of the
Moors, entitled Surah. By S. C. Chitty.

1853-55. Part III. 8to. pp. ISO, sewed. Price 7s. 6d.
Contents : — Analysis of the Great Historical Poem of the Moors, entitled Surah. By
S. C. Chitty. — Description of New or little known Species of Reptiles found in Ceylon. By
E. F. Kelaart.— Laws of the Buddhist Priesthood. By the Kev. D. J. Gogerly. — Ceylon Ornitho-
logy. By E, F. Kelaart.— Account of the Rodiyas, with a Specimen of their Language, By
S, C. Chitty. — Rock Inscriptions in the North-Western Province. By A. O. Brodie.

1865-6. 8vo. pp. xi:. and 184. Price 7s. 6d.
Contents :— On Demonology and "Witchcraft in Ceylon. By D. de Silva Gooneratne Modliar.
—First Discourse Delivered by Buddha. By Rev. D. J. Gogerly. Pootoor 'Well.- The Air
Breathing Fish of Ceylon. By Barcroft Boake, B.A.— On the Origin of the Sinhalese Language.
By J. D'Alwis.— Remarks on the Poisonous Properties of the Calotropis Gigantea, etc. By
W. C. Ondaatjie.— On the Crocodiles of Ceylon. By Barcroft Boake.— Native Medicinal Oils.

Digitized by Microsoft®

16 Linguistic Publications of Triibner ^ Co.,

1867-70. Part I. 8to. pp. 150. Price 10*.

CoNTBNTS :— On the Origin of the Sinhalese Language. By James De Alwis.— A Leotm-e on
Buddhism. By the Rev. D. J. Gogerly.— Description of two Birds new to the recorded Fauna
of Ceylon. By H. Nevil.— Description of aNew Genuaand FiTe New Species of Marme Uni-
valves from the Southern Province, Ceylon . By G. Nevill.— A Brief Notice of Robert Knox and
his Companions in Captivity in Kand^ for the space of Twenty Years, discovered among the
Dutch Records preserved in the Colonial Secretary's Office, Colombo. By J. R. Blake.
1867-70. Part II. 8to. pp. xl. and 45. Price 7s. 6rf.

CONTEHTs:— Summary of the Contents of the First Book in the Buddhist Canon, called the
P4rijika Book.— By the Rev. S. Coles.— Parijika Book— No. 1.— PSrSjika Book— No. 2.
1871-72. 8vo. pp. 66 and xxxiv. Price 7«. 6d.

Contents :— Extracts from a Memoir left by the Dutch Governor, Thomas Van Rhee, to his
successor. Governor Gerris de Heer, 1697. Translated from the Dutch Records preserved in the
Colonial Secretariat at Colombo. By B. A. van Cuylenberg, Government Record Keeper.— The
Food Statistics of Ceylon. By J. Capper.— Specimens of Sinhalese Proverbs. By L. de Zoysa,
Mndaliyar, Chief Translator of Government.— Ceylon Reptiles : being a preliminary Catalogue
of the Reptiles found in, or supposed to be in Ceylon, compiled from various authorities. By
W. Ferguson.— On an Inscription at Dondra. No. 2. ' By T. W. Rhys Davids, Esq^.
1873. Part I. 8vo. pp. 79. Price Is. 6d.

Contents :— On Oath and Ordeal. By Bertram Fulke Hartshome.— Notes on Prinochilus
Vincens. By W. V. Legge.— The Sports and Games of the Singhalese. By Leopold Ludovioi.—
OnMiracles. By J. De Alwis.— On the Occurrence of Scolopax Rusticola and Gallinago Scolo-
pacina in Ceylon. By "W. V. Legge. — Transcript and Translation of an Ancient Copper-plate
Sannas. By Mudliyar Louis de Zoysa, Chief Translator to Government.
1871. Part I. 8vo. pp. 94. Price 7». 6«?.

Contents : — Description of a supposed New Genus of Ceylon, Batrachians. By W. Ferguson,
— ^Notesonthe Identity of Piyadasi and Asoka. By Mudaliyar Louis de Zoysa.— The Island
Distribution of the Birds in the Society's Museum. By W. V. Legge.— Brand Marks on Cattle.
By J. De Alwis. — Notes on the Occurrence of a rare Eagle new to Ceylon ; and other interesting
or rare birds. By S. Bligh. — Extracts from the Records of the Dutch Government in Ceylon.
By R, van Cuylenberg.— Stature of Gotama Buddha. By J. De Alwis.
1879. 8to. pp. 58. Price 5s.

Contents. — Notes on Ancient Sinhalese Inscriptions. — On the Preparation and Mounting of
Insects for the Binocular Microscope. — Notes on Neophron Puenopterus (Savigny) from
Nuwara Eliya.— On the Climate of Dimbula.— Note on the supposed cause of the existence of
Patanas or Grass Lands of the Mountain Zone of Ceylon.

1880. Part I. 8to. pp. 90. Price 5s.

Contents. — Text and Translation of the Inscription of Mahindelll. at Mihintale. — Glossary. —
A Paper on the Vedic and Buddhistic Polities.— Customs and Ceremonies connected with the
Faddi Cultivation. — Gramineae, or Grasses Indigenous to or Growing in Ceylon.
1880. Part II. 8vo. pp. 48. Price Ss.

Contents. — Gramineae, or Grasses Indigenous to or Growing in Ceylon. — Translation of two
Jatakas.— On the supposed Origin of Tamana, Nuwara, Tambapanni and Taprobane.— The Rocks
and Minerals of Ceylon.

1881. Vol. VII. Part I. (No. 23.) 8vo. pp. 66. Price 5s.

Contents.— Hindu Astronomy : as compared with the European Science. By S. Mervin. —
Sculptures at Horana. By J. G. Smilher. — Gold. By A. C. Dixon. — Specimens of Sinhalese
Proverbs. ByL.De Zoysa. — Ceylon Bee Culture. By S. Jayatilaka.— A Short Account of the
Principal Religious Ceremonies observed by the Kandyans of Ceylon. By C. J. R. Le
Mesurier. — Yalentyn's Account of Adam's Peak. By A. Spense Moss.

1881. Vol. VII. Part II. (No. 24.) 8vo. pp. 162. Price 5s.

Contents, — The Ancient Emporium of Kalab, etc., with Notes on Fa-Hian*s Account of
Ceylon. By H. Nevill.— The Sinhalese Observance of the Kal&wa. By L. Nell.— Note on the
Origin of the Vedd4s, with Specimens of their Songs and Charms. By L. de Zoysa.— A Hflniyam
Image. By L. Nell.— Note on the Mir4 Kautiii Festival of the Muhammadans. By A. T.
Sham-ud-diii,- Tericulture in Ceylon. By J. L. Vanderstraaten.— Sinhalese Omens. By S.
Jayatilaka.

1882. Extra Number. 8vo. pp. 60. Price 5s.

Contents.— Ibu Batuta in the Maldives and Ceylon. Translated from the French of M. M.
Defremery and Sanguinetti, By A. Gray.

Asiatic Society (Royal). — North China Branch of,— Journal. — Old

Series, 4 numbers, and New Series. Parts 1 to 12. The following numbers
are sold separately : Old Series — No. II. May, 1859, pp. 145 to 256.
No. III. December, 1859, pp. 112. 7s. 6J. each. Vol. II. No. I. Sept., 1860,
pp. 128. 7s. 6rf. New Series— No. I. Dec.,, 1864, pp. 174. 7s. 6rf. No. II.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Imdgate Hill, London, E.G. 17

Dec, 1865, pp. 187, with maps. U. 6d. No. HI. Dec, 1866, pp. 121. 9a.
No. IV. Dec, 1867, pp. 21)6. 10s. M. No. VI. for 1869 and 1870, pp. 216.
7*. 6rf. No. VII. (1871-2) pp. 270. 10*. No. VIII. pp. 200. \0s. 6d. No!
IX. pp. 254. 10s. 60. Nc X. pp. 336 and 279. £1 Is. No. XI. (1877) pp.
200. 10s; 6d. No. XII. (1878) pp. 337. with maps. £1 1». No. XIII.
(1879) pp. 138, with plates, 10s. 6d. No. XIV. (1879) pp. 80, with plates, is.
No. XV. (1880 pp, 390, with plates, 1,5s. Vol. XVI. (1881) pp. 248. 12s. 6il.
■ Vol. XVII. (1882) pp. 246 with plates. 12s. 6rf. Vol. XVIII. (1883) pp.
228, with 2 plates.

Asiatic Society (Royal). — China Braneh of the, — Journal. — 8vo.

sewed. Vol. XIX. Part I. (1884) pp. 125. Vol. XX. (1885) pp. 322,
with plate. Vol. XXI. (1886) pp. 370, with plate.

Asiatic Society of Japan. — Teansactions. Vol. I. From 30th October,

1872, to 9th October, 1873. 8vo. pp. 1 10, with, plates. 1874. Vol. II. 18T3.
8vo. pp. 249. 1874. Vol. III. Part I. 1874. Vol. III. Part II. 1876.
Vol. IV. 1875. Vol. V. Parti. 1876. Vol. V. Part II. (A Summary of the
Japanese Penal Codes. By J. H. Longford.) Vol. VI. Part I. pp. 190. Vol.

VI. Part II. 1878. Vol. VI. Part III. 1878. 7». Qd. each Part.— Vol.

VII. Part I. (Milne's Journey across Europe and Asia.) 5s. — Vol. VII. Part

II. March, 1879. 5s.— Vol. VII. Part III. June, 1879. 7s. 6rf. Vol. VII.
Part IV. Nov., 1879. 10s. 6d. Vol. VIII. Part I. Feb., 1880. 7s. 6d.
Vol. VIII. Part II. May, 1880. 7s. 6d. Vol. VIII. Part. III. Oct.,
1880. 10s. ea. Vol. VIII. Part IV. Dec, 1880. 5». Vol. IX. Part I.
Feb., 1881. 7s.6d. Vol. IX. Part II. Aug., 1881. Is. 6d. Vol. IX. Part

III. Dec, 1881. 6s. Vol. X. Part I. May, 1882. 10s. Vol. X. Part II.
Oct., 1882. 1s.6d. Vol. X. Supplement, 1883. £1. Vol. XI. Part I. April,
1883. 7s. 6d. Vol. XI. Part 11. Sep., 1883. 7s. 6d. Vol. XII. Part I.
Nov., 1883. 5s. Vol. XII. Part II. May, 1884. 5s.

Asiatic Society, Royal. — Straits Branch.— Jotjenal. No. 1. 8vo. pp.

pp.- 130, sewed, 3 Maps and Plate. July, 1878. Price 9s.
, Contents.— Inaugural .Address of the President. By the Yen. Archdeacon Hose, M.Aj—
Distribution of Minerals in Sarawak. By A. Hart Everett. — Breeding Pearls. By N. B.
l)ennys, Ph.D. — Dialects of the Melanesian Tribes of the Malay Peninsula. By M, de Mililuho-
Maclay. — ^Malay Spelling in English. Report of Government Committee (reprinted) . — Geography
of the Malay Peninsula. Part I. By A. M. Skinner.— Chinese Secret Societies. Part I. By
W. A. Pickering. — Malay Proverbs. Part. I. By W. E. Maxwell.— The Snake-eating
Hamadryad. By N. B. Dennys, Ph.D.— Gutta Percha. By H. I. Murton.— Misceltaneous Notices.
No. 2. 8vo. pp. 130, 2 Plates, sewed. December, 1878. Price 9s.
Contents:— The Song of the Dyak Head-feast. By Rev. J. Perbam. — Malay Proverbs. Partll.
ByB. W. Maxwell.— A Malay NautcH. By F. A. Swettenham.-Pidgin English. By N. B.
Dennys, Ph.D.— The Founding of Singapore. By Sir T. S. Raffles.— Notes on Two Persk
Manuscripts. By W. E. Maxwell.— The Metalliferous Formation of the Peninsula. By D.-D;
Daly. — Suggestions regarding a new Malay Dictionary. By the Hon. C. J. Irving, — Ethnological
Excursions in the Malay Peninsula. By N.-von Miklulio.Maclay. — Miscellaneous Notices.

No. 3. 8vo. pp. iv. and 146, sewed. July, 1879. Price 9s.
Contents : — Chinese Secret Societies, by W. A. Pickering. — Malay Proverbs, Part HI , by W.
E. Maxwell.— Notes on Gutta Pereha, by F. W. Burbidge, W. H. Treacher, H. J. Murton.— The
Maritime Code of the Malays, reprinted from a translation by Sir S. Raffles. — A Trip to Gunong
Bumut, by D. F. A. Hervey.— Caves at Sungei Batu in Selangor, by D. D. Daly.— Geography
of Aching, translated from the German by Dr. Beiber.— Account of A Naturalist's Visit to Selan-

for, by A. J. Hornady.— Miscellaneous Notices : Geographical Notes, Routes from Selangor ^to
ahaug, Mr. Deane's Survey Report, A Tiger's Wake, Breeding Pearls, The Maritime Code, and
Sir F. Raffles' Meteorological Returns.

No. 4. 8vo. pp. XXV. and 65, sewed. December, 1879. Price 9s.
Contents. -r-List of Members. ^Proceedings, .General Meeting.— Annual Meeting,— Council's
Annual Report for 1879. —Treasurer's Report for 1879.— President's Address.— Reception- of
iProtessor Nordenskjold.— The Marine Code. By Sir S. Raffles,— About Kinta. By H. W, d
Leech,— About Shin and Bernam, By H, W, Leech,— The Aboriginal Tribes of Perak. By
W. E. Maxwell, -The Vernacular Press in the Straits, By E, Vi^, Birch,— On the GuUga of
Borneo. By A. H. Everett.-On^g^ggg'^^^^)^^'Q-^ Correction.

2

18 Linguistic Publications of Truhner ^ Co.,

No. 5. 8vo. pp. 160, sewed, July, 1879. Price 9s.
Contents,— Selesilah (Book of the Descent) Of the Rajas of Bruni. By H. liOW.— Notes to
Ditto.— History of the Saltins of Bruni.— List of the Mahomedan Sovereigns of Brum.— HiBtoric
Tablet.— Aoheh. By G. P Talson.— From Perals to Shin and down the Shin and Bernam Rivers.
By F. A. Swettenham.— A Contribution to Malayan Bibliography. By N. B. Dennys.— Compa-
rative Vocabulary of some of the Wild Tribes inhabiting the Malayan Peninsula, Borneo, etc.—
The Tiger in Borneo. By A. H. Everett.

No. 6. Svo. pp. 133, witli 7- Photographic Plates, sewed. Decemher, 1880. Price 9«.
Contents.— Some Account of the Independent Native States of the Malay Peninsula. Part I.
By F. A. Swettenham.— The Ruins of Boro Burdur in Java. By the Ven. Archdeacon G. F. Hose.
A Contribution to Malayan Bibliography. By N. B. Dennys.— Report on the Exploration of the
Caves of Borneo. By A, H. Everett.— Introductory Remarks. By J. Evans.— Notes on the
Report- Notes on the Collection of Bones. By G. Bush.— A Sea-Dyak Tradition of the
Deluge and Subsequent Events. By the Rev. J. Perham.— The Comparative Vocabulary.

No. 7. Svo. pp. xvi. and 92. With a Map, sewed. June, 1881. Price 9«.

Contents. — Some account of the Mining Districts of Lower Perak. By J. Errington de la
Croix.— Folklore of the Malays, By W. E. Maxwell.— Notes on the Rainfall of Singapore. By
J. J. L. Wheatley. — Journal of a Voyage through the Straits of Malacca on an Expedition to
the Molucca Islands. By Captain W. C. Lennon.

No. 8. 8vo. pp. 56. With a Map, sewed. December, 1881, Price 9«.

Contents. — The Endau and its Tributaries. By D. F. A. Hervey. — Itinerary from Singapore
to the Source of the Sembrong and up the Madek. — Petara, or Sea Dyak Gods. By the Rev. J.
Perham.— Klouwang and its Caves, West Coast of Atchin. Translated by D. F. A. Hervey. —
Miscellaneous Notes ; Varieties of *'Getah" and "Rotan."— The "Ipoh" Tree, Perak.— Com-
parative Vocabulary.

No. 9. Svo. pp. xxii. and 172. With three Col. Plates, sd. June, 1882. Price 12s.

Contents. - Journey on Foot to the Patani Frontier in 1876. By W. E. Maxwell.— Probable
Origin of the Hill Tribes of Formosa. By John Dodd. — History of Perak from Native Sources.
By W. E. Maxwell.— Malayan Ornithology. By Captain H. R. Eelham. — On the Transliteration
of Malay in the Roman Character. By W. E. Maxwell. — Kota Glanggi, Fahang. By W.
Cameron.-- Natural History Notes. By N. B, Dennys.— Statement of Haji of the Madek Ali. —
Pantang Kapur of the Madek Jakun, — Stone from Batu Pahat.— Rainfall at Lankat, Sumatra,

No. 10. Svo. pp. XV. and 117, sewed. December, 18S2. Price 9s.

Contents. — Journal of a Trip from Sarawak to Men. ByN. Denison. — The Mentra Tradi-
tions. By the Hon. D. F. A. Hervey.— Probable Origin of the Hill Tribes of Formosa. By J.
Dodd.— Sea Dyak K eligion. By the Rev. J. Perham.— The Dutch in Perak. By W. E. Max-
well. — Outline History of the British Connection with Malaya. By the Hon. A. M. Skinner. —
Extracts from Journals of the Soci€t6 de Geographic of Paris, — Memorandum on Malay Trans-
literation. — The Chiri. — Register of Rainfall.

No. 11. Svo. pp. 170. With a Map, sewed. June, 1S83. Price 9s.

Contents. — Malayan Ornithology. By Captain H. R. Kelham. — Malay Proverbs. By the
Hon. W. E. Maxwell. — The Pigmies. Translated by J. Errington de la Croix. — On the Patani,
By W. Cameron.— Latah. By H. A. O'Brien. — The Java System. By the Hon. A. M. Skinner.
— Batu KSdok.-Prigi Acheh. — Dutch Occupatiou of the Dindings, etc.

No. 12. Svo. pp. XX. and 28S, sewed. December, 1S83, Price 9s.

Contents.- Malayan Ornithology. By Captain H. R. Kelham. — Gutta-producing Trees. By
L. Wray.— Shamanism in Perak. By the Hon. W. E. Maxwell.- Changes in Malayan Dialects.
By A. M. Ferguson.- Straits Meteorology. By the Hon. A. M. Skinner.— Occasional Notes.
By the Hon. W. E. Maxwell.

No. 13. Svo. pp. XX. and 116, sewed. June, 1S84. Price 9s.
Contents.- The Pigmies. Translated by J. Errington de la Croix.— Valentyn's Description
of Malacca.— By Hon. D. F. A. Hervey.— The Stream Tin Deposit of Perak. By the Rev. J. E,
Tenison- \\ oods.— Rerabau. By the Hon. D. F. A. Hervey.- The Tawaran and Putatan Rivers'
By S. Elphinstone Dalrymple.— Miscellaneous Notes.

Digitized by Microsoft®

51 and 59, Ludgat& Hill, London, E. C. 19

No. 15. 8vo. 172, sewed. June, 1885. Price 9».
CoNTKNTB, — Journal kept during a Journey across the Malay Peninsula /with Maps). By F.

A. Swettenham. — The Object and Results of a Dutch Expedition into the Interior of Sumatra
in the years 1877, 1 878, and 1879. Translated from the French, by R. N. Bland.— Further Notes
on the Rainfall of Singapore. By J. J. L. Wheatley.— A Glimpse at the Manners and Customs
of the Hill Tribes of North Formosa. By J; Dodd.— Genealogy of the Royal Family of Brunei,
Translated from the Malay by W. H. Treacher. — French Land Decree in Cambodia. Translated
from the French by the Hon. W. E. Maxwell, C.M.G.— Malay Language and Literature. By
Dr. Reinhold Rost. — A Missionary's Journey through Laos from Bangkok to TJbon. By the Rev,
N. J. Couvreur, Singapore. — Valentyn's Account of Malacca. Translated from the Dutch.

No. 16. 8vo, pp. 220, sewed. December, 1886. Price 9«.

Contents.— Plan for a Volunteer Force in the Muda Districts, Province Wellesley. By the late
J. R. Logan. — A Description of the Chinese Lottery known as "Hua-Hoey." By C. W. S.
Kynnersley.— On the Roots in the Malay Language. Prom the Dutch of J. Pynappel.— Klieng's
War Raid to the Skies ; a Dyak Myth. By the Rev. J. Perham.— Valentyn's Account of Ma-
lacca. Translated from the Dutch (continued from Journal, No. 15).— On Mines and Miners in
Klnta, Perak. By A. Hole, Inspector of Mines, Kinta.

No. 17. 8vo. pp. 160-84, sewed. June, 1886. Price 9«.

Contents.— Biography of Siam. By E. M. Satow.— Sri Rama ; a Fairy Tale told by a Malay
Rhapsodist, By W. E. Maxwell.- History of Malacca from Portuguese Sources. Contributed
by £. Koch. — Occasional Notes.

No. 18. 8vo. pp. XX. and 376, sewed. December, 1886. Price 9».

Contents.— Biography of Siam. By E. M. Satow. — English, Sulu, and Malay Vocabulaw.
By T. H. Haynes. — Raja Donan, a Malay Fairy Tale told by a Malay Rhapsodist. By W. E.
Maxwell.— The Survey Question in Cochin China. By M. Camouilly- — Notes on Economic
Plants, Straits Settlements, by N. Cautley. — Index to Journal-of the Indian Archipelago. By N.

B. Dennys.

American Oriental Society. — Journal of the American Osientai,
Society. Vols. I. to X. and Vol. XII. (aU published). 8vo. Boston and
New Haven, 1849 to 1881. A complete set. Very rare. £14.

Volumes 2 to S and 8 to 10 and 12 may be had separately at £1 Is. each.

Antananarivo Annual and Madagascar Magazine. — A Eecord of

Information on the Topography and Natural Productions of Madagascar, and
the Customs, Traditions, Language. and Eeligious Beliefs of its People. Edited
by the Rev. J. Sibkbb, F.E.G.S., and fiev. E. Babon, F.L.S. Demy 8vo. pp.
iv. and 132, with plate, paper. 2s. &d.

Anthropological Society of London, Memoirs read before the, 1863-

1866. 8vo. pp. 542, cloth. 21s. Vol.11. 8vo., pp. x. 464, cloth. 21*.

Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland (The Journal

of the). Published Quarterly. 8vo. sewed.

Biblical Archaeology, Society of. — Transactions of the. 8vo. Vol. I.

Part. I., 12s. 6rf. Vol. I., Part II., 12s. 6rf. (this part cannot be sold
separately, or otherwise than with the complete sets). Vols. II. and III.,
2 parts, 10s. 6rf. each. Vol. IV., 2 parts, 12». 6d. each. Vol. V., Part. I., ISs. ;
Part. II., 12s. 6d. Vol. VI,, 2 parts, 12s. 6d. each. Vol. VII. Part I. 10s. 6d.
Parts II. and III. 12s. 6d. each. Vol. VIII., 3 parts, 12s. 6d. each.
Vol. IX. Parti. lis.U.

Proceedings. Vol. I. Session 1878-79. 2s. &d. Vol. II. 2s. Gd. Vols.
III., IV., and V. 6s. each. Vols. VI., VII., and VIII. (1886-6). 6». each.

Sibliotheca Indica. A Collection of Oriental Works published by

the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Old Series. Fasc. 1 to 261. New Series.
Faso. 1 to 607. (Special List of Contents and prices to be had on application.)

Browning Society's Papers. ^-Demy Svo. wrappers. 1881-84. Part

I., pp. 116. lOs. Bibliography of Eobert Browning from 1833-81. Part II.
pp. 142. 10s. Part III., pp. 168. 10s. Part IV., pp. 148. 10s. Part V.,
pp. 104. 10s. 1885-86. Part VII., pp. 168. 10s. Part VIII., pp. 176. 10s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

20 Linguistic Publications of Triibner 8f Co.,

Browning. — Bibliography of Eobert Browning from 1833-81. Com-
piled by F. J. FuKNivALL. Demy 8vo. pp. 170, wrapper. Third Edition.
Enlarged. 1883. 12s.

Browning's Poem's (Illustrations to). — 4to. boards. Parts I. and II,
lOs. each.

Calcutta Review (The). — Published Quarterly. Price 6«. per annum.

Calcutta Review. — A Complete Set pkom the Commencement in

1844: to 1882. Vols 1. to 75, or Numbers 1 .to 140. A fine clean copy.
Calcutta, 1844-82. Index to the first fifty volumes of the Calcutta Ee»iew,
2 parts. (Oalcutta, 1873). Nos. 39 and 40 have never been published. £66.
Complete sets are of great rarity.

Calcutta Review (Selections from the). — Crown 8vo. sewed. Nos. 1.

to 45. Ss. each.

Cambridge Philological Society (Transactions of the). — Yol. I. From

1872 to 1880. 8vo. pp. xvi. and 420, wrapper. 1881. 15«.
Contents — ^Preface. — The Work of a Philological Society. J. P, Postgate. — TransactionB of
the Cambridge Philological Society from 1872 to 1879.— Transactions for 1879-1880.— Reviews.
• ^-Appendix,

Vol. II. for 1881 and 1882. Svo. pp. viii.-286, wrapper, 1883. 12s.
Vol. III. Part I. 1886. 3s. 6i^.

Cambridge Philological Society(Proceedingsof the). — PartsI andll.
1882. Is. 6<?.;III. Is. ; IV.-VI. 2s. 6(?.; VII. and VIII. 2s. IX. Is.;
X. and XI. Is. Gd. ; XII. Is. 6d. ; XIII.-XV. 2s. Qd.

China Review; or, Notes and Queries on the Far East. Published

bi-monthly. 4to. Subscription £1 10s. per volume.

Chinese Recorder and Missionary Journal. — Shanghai. Subscription

per volume (of 6 parts) 16s.

A complete set from the beginning. Vols. 1 to 10. 8vo. Eoochow and

Shanghai, 1861-1879. £9.

Containing important contributions on Chinese Philology, Mythology, and Geography, by
Kdkins, Giles, Bretschneider, Scarborough, etc. The earlier volumes are out of print.

Chrysanthemum (The). — A Monthly Magazine for Japan and the Far
East. Vol. I. and II., complete. Bound £1 Is. Subscription £1 per volume.

Geographical Society of Bombay.— Jouenai and TaANSAcrioNs. A

complete set. 19 vols. Svo. Numerous Plates and Maps, some coloured.

Bombay, 1844-70. £10 10s.
An important Periodical, containing grammatical sketches of several languages and dialects,
as well as the most valuable contributions on the Natural Sciences of India. Since 1871 the
.ibove is amalgamated with the " Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society."

Indian Antiquary (The).— A Journal of Oriental Eesearch in Archseo-

lOgy, History, Literature, Languages, Philosophy, Religion, Folklore, etc.
Edited by J. P. Fleet, CLE , M.E.A.S., etc., and Capt. R. C. Temple,
F.II.G.S., M.E.A.S., etc. 4to. Published 12 numbers per annum. Sub-
scription £l 16s. A complete set. Vols. 1 to U. iP28 10s. (The earlier
volumes are out of print.)

Indian Archipelago and Eastern Asia, Journal of the. — Edited by

J. R. Logan, of Pinang. 9 vols. Singapore, 1847-55. New Series. Vols.

I. to IV. Part 1, (all published), 1856-59. A complete set in 13 vols. Svo.

with many plates. £30.
Vol. I. of the New Series consists of 2 parts ; Vol. II. of 4 parts • Vol. III. of

No. 1 (never completed), and of Vol. IV. also only one number was published
A few copies remain of several volumes that may be had separately.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G^ 21

Indian Notes and Queries. A Monthly Periodical devoted to the
Systematic Collection of Authentic Notes and Scraps of Information regarding
the Country and the People. Edited by Captain E. C. Temple, etc. 4to.
Subscription per annum. .16».

Japan, Transactions of the Seismological Society of, Vol. I. Parts i.
andii. April-June, 1880. 10s. Si^. Vol.11. July-December, 1880. 6s.
Vol. Ill, January-December, 1881. 10s. 6(?. Vol. IV. January-June. 1882. %s.

literature, Eoyal Society of. — See under " Eoyal."

Madras Journal of Literature and Science. — Published by the

Committee of the Madras Literary Society and Auxiliary Royal Asiatic Society,
and edited by Mokeis, Cole, and Brown. A complete set of the Three Series
(being Vols. I. to XVI., First Series; Vols. XVII. to XXII. Second Series;
Vol. XXIII. Third Series, 2 Numbers, no more published). A fine copy,
uniformly bound in 23 vols. With numerous plates, half calf. Madras,
1834-66. £i1.
Equally scarce and important. On all South-Indian topics, especially those relating to

Natural History and Science, Public Worlcs and Industry, this Periodical is an unrivalled

authority.

Madras Journal of Literature and Science. 1878. (I. Yolume of

the Fourth Series.) Edited by Gustav Oppert, Ph.D. 8vo. pp. vi. and 234,
and xlvii. with 2 plates. 1879. 10s. 6d. Contents.— I. Oa the Classification
of Languages. By Dr. G. Oppert. — II. On the Ganga Kings. By Lsvfis
EioE. 1879. pp. 318. 10s. U. 1880. pp. vi. and 232. 10s. 1881. pp.
vi. and 338. 10s.
Orientalist (The). — A Monthly Journal of Oriental Literature, Arts,
Folk-lore, etc. Edited by W. Goonetellike. Annual Subscription, 12s.

Pandit (The). — A Monthly Journal of the Benares College, devoted to
Sanskrit Literature. Old Series. 10 vols. 1866-1876. New Series, vok. 1 to 9.
1876-1887. £,\ is. per volume.

Panjab Notes and ftueries, now Indian Notes and Queries, which

see above.
Peking Gazette. — Translations of the Peking Gazette for 1872 to 1885.

8vo. cloth. 10s. ^d. each.

Philological Society (Transactions of The). A Complete Set, in-
cluding the Proceedings of the Philological Society for the years 1842-1853.
6 vols. The Philological Society's Transactions, 1854 to 1876. 15 vols. The
Philological Society's Extra Volumes. 9 vols. In all 30 vols. 8vo. £19 13s. 6<f.
, Proceedings (The) of the Philological Society 1842-1853. 6 vols. 8vo. £3.
Transactions of the Philological Society, 1864-1876. 15 vols. 8vo. £10 16s.
*,« The Volumes for 1867, 1868-9, 1870-2, and 1873-4, are only to be had in
■complete sets, as above.

For 1854; containing papers by Rev. J. W. Blakesley, Rev. T. 0. Cockayne,
Eev. J. Davies, Dr. J. W. Donaldson, Dr. Theod. Goldstiicker, Prof. T. Hewitt
Key, J. M. Kemble, Dr. E. G. Latham, J. M. Ludlow, Hensleigh "Wedgwood,
etc. 8vo. cl. £1 is.

For 1855 : with papers by Dr. Carl Abel, Dr. W. Bleek, Eev. Jno. Davies, Miss
h. Gurney, Jas. Kennedy, Prof. T. H. Key, Dr. E. G. Latham, Henry Maiden,
W. Ridley, Thos. Watts, Hensleigh Wedgwood, etc. In 4 parts. 8vo. £1 Is.

*jis* Kamilaroi Language of Australia, by W. Eidley ; and False Etymologies, by
H. "Wedgwood, separately. Is.

Digitized by Microsoft®

22 Linguistic PuUications of Trubner 4" Co.,

For 1856-7: with papers by Prof. Aufrecht, Herbert Coleridge, Lewis Kr. Daa,

M. de Haan, W. C. Jourdain, James Kennedy, Prof. Key, Dr. G. Latham, J. M.

Ludlow, Eev. J. J. S. Perowne, Hensleigh Wedgwood, K. F. Weymouth, Jos.

Yates, etc. 7 parts. 8vo. (The Papers relating to the Society's Dictionary

are omitted.) £1 Is. each volume.
For 1858 : including the volume of Early English Poems, Lives of the Saints,

edited from MSS. by F. J. Furnivall; and papers by Em. Adams, Prof.

Aufrecht, Herbert Coleridge, Rev. Francis Crawford, M. de Haan Hettema,

Dr. E. G. Latham, Dr. Lottner, etc. Svo. cl. 12s.
For 1859: with papers by Dr. E. Adams, Prof. Aufrecht, Herb. Coleridge, F. J.

Furnivall, Prof. T. H. Key, Dr. C. Lottner, Prof. De Morgan, F. Pulszky,

Hensleigh Wedgwood, etc. 8vo. cl. 12s.
For 1860-1 : including The Play of the Sacrament; and Pascon agau Arluth, the

Passion of our Lord, in Cornish and English, both from MSS., edited by_ Dr.

W. Stokes ; and papers by Dr. E. Adams, T. F. Barbara, Eev. D. Coleridge,

H. Coleridge, Sir J. F. Davis, D. P. Fry, Prof. T. H. Key, Dr. C. Lottner,

Bishop Thirlwall, H. Wedgwood, E. F. Weymouth, etc. Svo. cl. 12s.
For 1862-3 : with papers by C. B. Cayley, D. P. Fry, Prof. Key, H. Maiden,.

Eich. Morris, F. W. Newman, Eobert Peacock, Hensleigh Wedgwood, E. F*

Weymouth, etc. 8vo. cl. 12s.
For 1864 : containing 1. Manning's (Jas.) Inquiry into the Character and Origin

of the Possessive Augment in English, etc. ; 2. Newman's (Francis W.) Text of

the Iguvine Inscriptions, with Interlinear Latin Translation; 3. Barnes's (Dr.

W.) Grammar and Glossary of the Dorset Dialect ; 4. Gwreans An Bys — The

Creation : a Cornish Mystery, Cornish and English, with Notes by Whitley

Stokes, etc. 8vo. cl. 12s.
*»* Separately : Manning's Inquiry, 3s. — N-ewman's Iguvine Inscription, 3s. —
Stokes's Gwreans An Bys, 8s.
For 1865 : including Wheatley's (H. B.) Dictionary of Eeduplicated Words in the

English Language ; and papers by Prof. Aufrecht, Ed. Brock, C. B. Cayley,

Eev. A. J. Church, Prof. T. H. Key, Eev. E. H. Knowles, Prof. H. Maiden,.

Hon. G. P. Marsh, John Ehys, Guthbrand Vigfosson, Hensleigh Wedgwood, H.

B. Wheatley, etc. 8vo. cl. 12s.
For 1866 : including 1. Gregor's (Eev. Walter) Banffshire Dialect, with Glossary-

of Words omitted by Jamieson ; 2. Edmondston's (T.) Glossary of the Shetland

Dialect; and papers by Prof. Cassal, C. B. Cayley, Danby P. Fry, Prof. T. H.

Key, Guthbrand Vigfusson, Hensleigh Wedgwood, etc. 8vo. cl. 12s.
*,* The Volumesfor 1867, 1868-9, 1870-2, and 1873-4, are out of print.
Besides contributions in the shape of valuable and interesting papers, the volume for
1867 also includes : 1. Peacock's (Eob. B.) Glossary of the Hundred of Lonsdale j
and 2. Ellis (A. J.) On Palseotype representing Spoken Sounds; and on the
Diphthong " Oy." The volume for 1868-9—1. Ellis's (A. J.) Only English
Proclamation of Henry III. in Oct. 1258 ; to which are added " The Cuckoo's Song "
and " The Prisoner's Prayer," Lyrics of the XIII. Century, with Glossary; and 2.
Stokes's (Whitley) Cornish Glossary. That for 1870-2—1. Murray's (Jas. A. H.)
Dialect of the Southern Counties of Scotland, with a linguistical map. "That for
1873-4— Sweet's (H.) History of English Sounds.
For 1876-6 : containing Annual Addresses (Eev. E. Morris President), Fourth

and Fifth. Sources of Aryan Mythology by E. L. Brandreth; C. B. Cayley on

Italian Diminutives ; Changes made by four young Children in Pronouncing

English Words, by Jas. M. Menzies; Manx Language, by H. Jenuer; Dialect

of West Somerset, by F. T. Elworthy ; English Metre, by Prof. J. B. Mayor ;

Words, Logic, and Grammar, by H. Sweet ; The Eussian Language and its

Dialects, by W. E. MorfiU ; Eelics of the Cornish Language in Mount's Bay,.

by H. Jenner. Dialects and Prehistoric Forms of Old English. By Henry-

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E. C. 23

Sweet; The Dialeota of Monmouthshire, Herefordshire, Worcestershire,
Gloucestershire, Berkshire, Oxfordshire, South Warwicltshire, South North-
amptonshire, Buckinghamshire, Hertfordshire, Middlesex, and Surrey, with a
New Classification of the English Dialects. By Prince L. L. Bonaparte (Two
Maps), Index, etc. Part I., 6«. ; Part II., 6«. ; Part III., 2».

For 1877-8-9 : containing the President's (H. Sweet) Sixth, Seventh, and (Dr. J. A.
H. Murray) Eighth Annual Addresses. Accadian Phonology, by Prof. A. H.
Sayce ; Sere and There in Chaucer, by Dr. R. Weymouth ; Grammar of the
Dialect of "West Somerset, by F. T. Elworthy ; English Metre, by Prof. J. B.
Mayor; Malagasy Language, by the Rev. W. E. Cousins; Anglo-Cymric Score,
by A. J. Ellis, F.R.S ; Sounds and Forms of Spoken Swedish, by Henry Sweet ;
Eussian Pronunciation, by Henry Sweet. Index, etc. Part I., 3«. ; Part II.,
Is. Part III. 8f.

For 1880-81 : containing Some Phonetic Laws in Persian, by Prof. Charles Eieu,
Ph.D. ; Portuguese Simple Sounds, compared with those of Spanish, French,
English, etc., by H.I.H. Prince L. L. Bonaparte ; The Middle Voice in
Virgil's ^neid, Book VI., by B. Dawson, B.A. ; Difficulty in Russian Grammar,
byC. B. Cayley; The Polabes, by"W. E. MorfiU, M.A.; The Makua Language,
by Rev. C. Maples, M.A. ; Distribution of English Place Names, by W. E.
Browne, M.A. ; Dare, " To Give " ; and f-Sere " To Put," by Prof. Postgate,
M.A. ; Differences between the Speech ov Edinboro' and London, by T. B.
Sprague, M.A. ; Ninth Annual Address of President (Dr. J. A. H. Murray)
and Eeports; Sound-Notation, by H. Sweet, M.A. ; On Gender, by E. L.
Brandreth; Tenth Annual Address of President (A. J. Ellis, B.A.) and Ee-
ports ; Distribution of Place-Names in the Scottish Lowlands, by W. E.
Browne, M.A. ; Some Latin and Greek Etymologies, and the change of i to J)
in Latin, by J. P. Postgate, M.A. ; Proceedings, etc. ; The n of an, etc., in
the Authorized and Eevised Versions of the Bible. By B. Dawson, B.A. ;
Notes on Translations of the New Testament. By B. Dawson, B.A. ; Simple
Sounds of all the Living Slavonic Languages compared with those of the
Principal Neo-Latin and Germano- Scandinavian Tongues, By H.I.H. Prince
L.-L. Bonaparte ; The Eomonsch or Ehsetian Languages in the Grisons and
Tirol. By E. Martineau, M.A. — A Rough List of English Words found in
Anglo-French, especially during the Thirteenth and Fourteenth Centuries ; with
numerous References. By Rev. W. W. Skeat, M.A. ; The Oxford MS. of the
only English Proclamation of Henry III., 18 October, 1258. By Eev. W. W.
Skeat, MA. ; and Errata in A. J. Ellis's copy of the only English Proclamation
of Henry III., in Phil. Trans. 1869. Index; List of Members. Part I. 12s.
Part II. 8s. Partm. Is.

For 1882-3-4 : 1. Eleventh Annual Address (A. J. Ellis, B.A.); Obituary of Dr.
J. Muir and Mr. H. Nicol. Work of the Society. Reports. SoraeXatin Ety-
mologies. By Prof. Postgate, M.A. Initial Mutations in the Living Celtic,
Basque, Sardinian, and Italian Dialects. By H. I. H. Prince L.-L. Bonaparte.
Spoken Portuguese. By H. Sweet, M.A. The Bosworth-ToUer Anglo-Saxon
Dictionary. By J. Piatt, inn. The Etymology of " Surround." By Eev.
Prof. Skeat. Old English Verbs in -egan and their Subsequent History. JBy Dr.
J. A. H. Murray. "Words connected with the Vine in Latin and the Neo-Latin
Dialects. By H. I. H. Prince L.-L. Bonaparte. Names of Eui-opean Reptiles
in the Living Neo-Latin Languages. By H. I. H. Prince L.-L. Bonaparte.
Monthly Abstracts. English Borrowed Words in Colloquial Welsh. By T.
Powell. Oscan Inscription Discovered at Capua in 1876. By G. A. Sclirumpf.
On TiiKwp, w4hapos, irsKdpios. By E. F. Weymouth. Portuguese Vowels,
according to Mr. R. G. Vianna, Mr. H. Sweet and Myself. By H.I.H. Prince
L.-L. Bonaparte. Spoken North Welsh. By Henry Sweet. Italian and Uralic
Possessive Suffixes Compared. By H.I.H. Prince L.-L. Bonaparte. Albanian in
Digitized by Microsoft®

24 Linguistic PuMications of Truhner 8f Co.,

Terra d'Otranto. By H.I.H. Prince L.-L-Bonaparte. Thirteenth Annual Address
of President (J. A. H. Murray). Simple Tenses in Modern Basque and Old
Basque, etc. By H.I.H. Prince L.-L. Bonaparte. Index. Monthly Abstracts.
List of Members. Part I. 10s. Part II. 10s. Part III. 15s.
For 1885-7 : Eoglish Etymology. By Eev. Prof. Skeat. Critical EtyraologieB.
By H. Wedgwood. Paii Miscellanies: Notes and Queries on Palu By Dr.
E. Morris. On the Revised Version of the New Testament. By B. Dawson.
Tilin: A Study of Child Language. By Sr. D. A. Machado-y- Alvarez, of
Seville. Notes on English Etymology, and on "Words of Brazilian and Peruvian
Origin. By Rev. Prof. Skeat. Celtic Declension. By W. Stokes. Neo-
Celtic Verb Substantive. By. W. Stokes. Influence of Analogy as explaining
certain Examples of Unoriginal L and R. By Dr. F. Stock. Sound-Changes
in Melanesian Languages. By Rev. R. H. Codringtoii.. Notes on English
Etymology. By Rev. Prof. Skeat. Notes on the Revised Version of the Old
Testament. By B. Dawson. Monthly Abstracts. List of Members. Fourteenth
Annual Address of President (Rev. Prof. Skeat). Obituary : Mr. Bradshaw,
Mr. "Walter Raleigh Browne, Prof. Cassal, Archbishop Trench, Dr. Stock.
Report by the President on the "Work of the Philological Society. The Presi-
dent on Ghost Words. "W. R. MorfiU on Slavonic Philology (April 1884 to
1886). J. Boxwell on ^ntali. Prof. Thurneysen on Celtic Philology. Prof,
de Lacouperie on the Languages of China before the Chinese. The Breton
Glosses at Orleans. By "W. Stokes. Remarks on the Oxford Edition of the
Battle of Ventry. By S. H. O'Grady. On the Derivations of "Cad, Luther,
Ted." By. H. "Wedgwood, M.A. The Origin of the Augment. By Rev.
A. H. Sayce, M.A. On the Place of Sanskrit in the Development of Aryan
Speech in India. By J. Boxwell, B.C.S. The Primitive Home of the Aryans.
By Rev. Prof. Sayce, M.A. Notes on English Etymology. By Rev. Prof.
Skeat, LL.D. Index. Monthly Abstracts. List of Members. Part I. 10s.
Part II. 15s.

The Society's Extra Volumes.

Early English Volume, 1862-64, containing: 1. Liber Cure Cocorum, a.d. c
1440. —2. Ilampole's (Richard RoUe) Pricke of Conscience, a.d. c. 1340. —
3. The Castell off Love, a.d. e. 1320. 8vo. cloth. 1865. .£1.

Or separately: Liber Cure Cocorum, Edited by Rich. Morris, 3s.; Hampole's
fRoUe) Pricke of Conscience, edited by Rich. Morris, 12s. ; and The Castell off
Love, edited by Dr. R. F. Weymouth, 6s.

Dan Micbel's Ayenbite of Inwyt, or Remorse of Conscience, in the Kentish
Dialect, a.d. 1340. From the Autograph MS. in Brit. Mus. Edited with
Introduction, Marginal Interpretations, and Glossarial Index, by Richard
Morris. 8vo. cloth. 1866. i2s.

Levins's (Peter, a.d. 1570) Manipulus Vocabulorum : a Rhyming Dictionary of
the English Language. With an Alphabetical Index by H. B. Wheatley. 8vo.
cloth. 1867. 16s.

Skeat's (Rev. W. W.) Moeso-Gothic Glossary, with an Introduction, an Outline of
Moeso-Gothic Grammar, and a List of Anglo-Saxon and old and modern Eng-
lish Words etymologically connected with Moeso-Gothic. 1868. 8vo. cl. 9s.

Ellis (A. J.) on Early English Pronunciation, with especial Reference to
Shakspere and Chaucer: containing an Investigation of the Correspondence of
Writing with Speech in England from the Anglo-Saxon Period to the Present
Day, etc. 4 parts. 8vo. 1869-75. £2.

Mediaeval Greek Texts: A Collection of the Earliest Compositions in Vulgar
Greek, prior to a.d. 1500. With Prolegomena and Critical Notes by W.
Wagner. Part I. Seven Poems, three of which appear for the first time.
1870. 8vo. 10s. 6d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G. 25

Poona Sarvajanik Sabha, Journal of the. Edited by S. H. Chip-
LONKAB. Published quarterly. 3<. each number.

Hoyal Society of Literature of the United Kingdom (Transactions

,of The). First Series, 6 Parts in 3 Vols., 4to., Plates; 1827-39. Second
Series, 13 Vols, or 88 Parts. 8vo., Plates; 1813-86. A complete set, as far
as published, £11 10s. Very scarce. The first series of this important
series of contributions of many of the most eminent men of the day has long
been out of print and is very scarce. Of the Second Series, Vol. I.-lV.,
each containing three parts, are quite out of print, and can only be had in
the complete series, noticed above. Three Numbers, price 4s. 6d. each, form
a volume. The price of the volume complete, bound in cloth, is 1 3s. 6rf.

Bepmate Fuhlwations.

I. Fasti Monastici Aevi Saxonici : or an Alphabetical List of the Heads of
Beligious Houses in England previous to the Norman Conquest, to which ia
prefixed a Chronological Catalogue of Contemporary Foundations. Sy Walteb
DE Gkat BmcH. Boyal 8vo. cloth. 1872. 7s. 6(f.

II. Li Chantaki pi Lancellotto ; a Troubadour's Poem of the XIV. Cent.
Edited fi-om a MS. in the possession of the Royal Society of Literature, by
Walter de Gkay Bikoh. Royal 8vo. cloth. 1874. 7s.

III. Inquisitio Comitatus Cantabriqiensis, nunc primum, e Manuscripto
nnico in Bibliotheca Cottoniensi asservato, typis mandata : subjicitur inquisitio
EUensis : cur^ N. E. S. A. Hamilton. Royal 4to. With map and 3 facsimiles,
1876, £2 2s.

iV, A CoMMONPLAoE-BoOK OF JoHN MiLTON. Reproduced by the autotype
process from the original MS. in the possession of Sir Fred. U. Grraham, Bart.,
of Netherby Hall. With an Introduction . by A. J. Uorvrood, Sq. folio.
Only one hundred copies printed. 1876. £2 2s.

V. Chronioon ADiE DE UsK, A.D. 1377-1404. Edited, with a Translation and
Notes, by Ed. Maunde Thompson. Royal 8vo. 1876. 10s. 6ii.

SyEo-Egyptian Society. — Original Papers read before tbe Syro-

j Egyptian Society of London. Volume I. Part 1. 8vo. sewed, 2 plates arid a
map, pp. 144. 3s. 6rf,

Temple. — The Legends op the Panjab, By Captain R. C. Temple,
' Bengal Staff Corps, F.G.S., etc. Crown 8vo, Vol. I. (Nos. 1 to 12), cloth,
£1 10s. Vol. II. (No. 13 to 24)i cloth, £1 10s. Vol. III. in course of pub-
lication. Subscription in Nos. 24s.

Trubner's American, European and Oriental Literary Record. —

A Eegistei: of the most important works published in North and South
America, in India, China, Europe, and tbe British Colonies ; with occasional
Notes on German, Dutch, Danish, French, etc., boolcs. 4to. lu Monthly
Numbers. Subscription 5«. per annum, or 6d. per number. A complete set,
Nos. 1 to 142. London, 1865 to 1879. £\2 12s.

Yorkshire Notes and ftueries. — With the Yorkshire Genealogist,
Yorkshire Bibliographer, and Yorkshire Folk-lore Journal. Edited by J,
HoKSFALL Turner, Idel, Bradford. Eighty pages, with Illustrations, Distinct
pagination of each subject. Published Quarterly, demy 8vo. Price Is. 6d. each
or 5s. per annum, if paid in advance.

Digitized by Microsoft®

26 Linguistic Publications of Triibner §■ Co.,

Archeeology, Ethnography, Geography, History, Law,
Literature, Numismatics, and Travels.

Abel. — SiATic AND Iatib-. Ilchester Lectures on Comparative Lexico-
graphy. DeKyered at the Taylor Institution, Oxford. By Cabl Abel, Ph.D.
Post 8vo. pp. •riii.-124, cloth. 1883. 6s.

Abel. — Linguistic Essays. See Triibner's Oriental Series, p. 5.

Alberiini's India. See " Sachau," page 38.

All. — tThe Peoposed Poxiticai, Legal and Social Repoems in the
Ottoman Empire and other Mohammedan States. By Mohlati Chekagh Am,
H.H. the Nizam's CItiI Service. Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. liv.-184. 1883. 8».

Arnold. — Indian Idtlls. Fromthe Sanskrit of the Mahabharata. By Sir
Edwin Aknolii,M.A.,E.C.I.E.,&c. Post 8vo. cloth, pp. 'xii. -282. 1883. 7«.6<f.

Arnold. — Indian Poetet. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," page 4.

Arnold. — Pearls of the Faith. See page 41.

Arnold. — India Eetisited. By Sir Edtvin Aenold, M.A., K.C.I.E.,
etc.. Author of the " Light of Asia," etc. With Thirty-two Full-page Illus-
trations from Photographs selected by the Author. Crown 8to. pp. 324, cloth.
1886. 7s. 6rf.

Arnold. — The Song Celestial. See page 96.

Arnold. — The Seceet op Death. See page 96.

Arnold. — Lotus and Jewel. Containing " In an Indian Temple,"
"A Casket of Gterae," " A Queen's Revenge." With other Poems. By Sir E.
AttNOiD, M.A., K.C.I.E., etc. Crown 8vo. pp. vi. and 264. 1887. 7s. 6d.

Baddeley. — Lottts Leayes. By St. Claie Baddeiet. Fcap. folio,

pp. xii. and 118, half-vellum. 1887. 8s. 6d.
Baden-Powell. — A Manual oe Jueispeudence foe Eoeest Oeficees.

By B. H. Baden-Powell, B.C.S. 8vo. half-bound, pp. ixii-554. 1882. 12s.
Baden-Powell. — A Manual of the Land Retenue Systems and Land

Tenures of British India. By B. H. Baden-Powell, B.C.S. Crown 8vo.

half-bound, pp. xii.-788. 1882. 12s.

Badley. — Indian Missionaet Recoed and Memoeial Volume. By

the fiev. B. H. Badley, of the American Methodist Mission. New Edition.
8vo. cloth. [In Preparation.']

Balfour. — "Waifs and Steats feom the Fae East. See p. 59.
Balfour. — The Divine Classic of Nan-Hua. See page 59.
Balfour. — T agist Texts. See page 41.
BaUantyne. — Sanehta Aphoeisms of Kapila. See p. 6.
Beal. — See pages 6, 41 and 42.

Bellew. — Fbom the Indus to the Tigeis: Journey through Balochistan,
Afghanistan, Khorassan, and Iran, in 1872 ; with a Synoptical Grammar
and Vocabulary of the Brahoe Language, and a Record of Meteorological
Observations and Altitudes on the March. By H. W. Bellew, C.S.I. , Surgeon
B.S.C. Demy 8vo. pp. viii.-496, cloth. 1874. 10s. 6(;.

Bellew. — Kashmie and Kashgae. A Narrative of the Journey of the
Embassy to Kashgar in 1873-74. By H. W. Bellew, C.S.I. Demy 8to. cloth-
pp. xxxii. and 420. 1875. 10s. 6d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G. 27

Bellew — The Races oi' AFSHiwisTAir. Being a Brief Account of
the Principal Nations inhabiting that Country. By Surgeon-Major H. W.
Bellew, C.S.I., late on Special Political Duty at Kabul. Crown 8vo. pp. 124,
cloth. 1880. 7s. 6A

Beveridge. — The Disteict of Bakaesanj ; its History and Statistics.
By H. Bevebidge, B.C.S. 8vo. cloth, pp. xx. and 460. 1876. 21».

Bhandarkar. — Eablt Histoey op the Dekkan, Down to the Ma-
HOMEDAN CoNaiTEST. By E. G. Bhandabkar, M.A., Prof, of Oriental
languages, Dekkan College. 8vo. pp. vi.-122, wrappers. 1885. 5».

Bibliotlieca Orieutalis: or, a Complete List of Books published

in France, Germany, England, and the Colonies, on the History, Religions,
Literature, etc., of the East. Edited by C. Feiedeeici. Part I., 1876,
sewed, pp. 86, 2«. 6d. Part II., 1877, pp. 100, 3s. 6d. Part III., 1878,
3s. 6i. Part IV., 1879, 3s. 6d. Part V., 1880. 3s.

Biddulph. — Teibes oe the Hindoo Koosh. By Major J. Bibbulph,
B.S.C., Political Officer at Gilgit. 8yo. pp. 340, cloth. 1880. 15s.

Blades. — An Accottnt op the German Mobality Plat, Entitxed
Depositio Coknuti TTPOGEArHici, as Performed in the 17th and 18th
Centuries. With a Ehythmical Translation of the German Version of 1648.
By "W. Blades, Typographer. To which is added a Literal fiepriut of the
Unique Original Version, written in Plaet Deutsch, by Paul de Wise, and
printed in 1621. Small 4to. pp. xii.-144, with facsimile Illustrations, in an
appropriate binding. 1885. 7s. 6rf.

Bleek. — Ketnaed the Fox in South Afeica ; or, Hottentot Fables
and Tales. See page 51.

Blochmann. — School Geographt op Inbia and British Bttemah. By

H. Bloohmann, M.A. 12mo. wrapper, pp. vi. and 100. 2s. &d.

Bombay Code, The. — The ITDrepealed Bombay Eegulations, Acts of the
Supreme Council, relating to Bombay, and Acts of the Governor of Bombay in
Council. With Chronological Table. Koyal 8vo. pp. xxiv.-774, cloth. 1880. £1 Is.

Bombay Presidency. — Gazettbee of the. Demy 8vo. half-bound.
VoL II., 14s. Vols. in.-VIL, 8s. each; Vol. VIII., Qs.; X., XL, XIL,
XIV., XVI., 8s. each; Vols. XXI., XXIL, XXIII., 9s. each.

Bretschueider. — Notes on Chinese MEDiiETAL Teatellees to the

West. By E. Beetschneidee, M.D. Demy 8vo. sd., pp. 130. 5s.
Bretschueider. — On the Knowledge Possessed bt the Ancient

Chinese of the Aeabs and Arabian Colonies, and other Western Coun-
tries mentioned in Chinese Books. By E. Bketschneidee, M.D. , Physician
to the Kussian Legation at Peking, 8vo. pp. 28, sewed. 1871. Is.

Bretschueider. — Notices oe the Medijeval Geogeaphy and Histoet
or Central and Westeen Asia. Drawn from Chinese and Mongol Writings,
and Compared with the Observations of Western Authors in the Middle Ages.
By E. Beetschneidee, M.D. 8vo. sewed, pp. 233, with two Maps. 1876. \2s.&d.

Bretschueider. — AECH.a;oLOGicAL and Histobical Beseaeches on
Peking and its Environs. By E. Bketschneidee, M.D., Physician to the
Eussian Legation at Peking. Imp. 8vo. sewed, pp. 64, with 4 Maps. 1876. 5s.

Bretschueider. — Botanicon Sinicuii. Notes on Chinese Botany, from
"Native and Western Sources. By E. Bretsohneider, M.D. Crown 8vo. pp.
228, wrapper. 1882. 10s. 6rf.

Bretschueider. -^ Inteecouese of the Chinese with Western

COUNTEIES IN THE MiDDLE AgES, AND ON KiNDHED SoEJECTS. By E.

Breisohneideb, M.D. Digitized by Microsoft® (^'^ '*« ^'''^"•>

28 Linguistic Publications of Truhner Sf Co.,

Brown. — The Icelandic Discoteeees op Ameeica; oe, Honoue to

Whom Honour is Due. By Mabie A. Bbown. Crown 8vo. pp. viii. and

2U, cloth. With Eight Plates. 1887. la.U.
Budge. — AssYEiAN Texts. See p. 56.

Budge. — HisioEr of Esaehabdon. See Trubaer's Oriental Series, p. 4.
Biihler. — Eleven Land-Gkants or the CHAtrLUKTAS oe Anhilvad.

A Contribution to the History of Gujarat. By G. Buhlek. 16mo. sewed,

pp. 126, with Facsimile. 3«. 6rf.

Burgess. — Aeghjeologicai Stjbvet of "Westeen India. By James
Burgess, LL.D., etc., etc. Royal 4to. half bound. Vol. 1. Report of the
First Season's Operations in the Belgam and Kaladgi Districts. 1874. With
56 photographs and lith. plates, pp. Tiii. and 45. 1875. £2 2*. Vol. 2.
Report of the Second Season's Operations. The Antiquities of Kathiawad and
Kaohh. 1874-5. With Map, Inscriptions, Photographs, etc., pp. x. and 242.
1876. £3 3». Vol. 3. Report of the Third Season's Operations. 1875-76.
The Antiquities in the Bidar and Aurangabad District, pp. viii. and 138.
With 66 photographic and lithographic plates. 1878. £2 2». Vols. 4.
and 5. Reports on the Buddhist Cave Temples, the Elura Cave Temples, the
Brahmanical and Jaiua Caves in Western India: containing Views, Plans,
Sections, and Elevations of Facades of Cave Temples ; Drawings of Architectural
and Mythological Sculptures ; Facsimiles of Inscriptions, etc. ; Translation of
Inscriptions, etc., pp. X.-140 and Tiii.-90, half morocco, gilt tops -with 165
Plates and Woodcuts. 1883. £6 6s.

Burgess." — -Aech^ological Stikvet op Soittheen India. Vol. I. The

Buddhist Stupas of Amaravati and Jaggayyapeta in the Krishna District,
Madras Presidency, Surveyed in 1882. By James Bukgess, LL.D., C.I.E.,
etc., Director-General of the Survey. With Translations of the Asolca Inscrip-
tions at Jaugada and Dhauli by George Buhler, LL.D., C.I.E., etc.. Prof,
of Sanskrit in the University of Vienna. Containing Sixty-nine Collotype and
other Plates of Buddhist Sculpture and Architecture, etc., in South-Eastem
India ; Facsimiles of Inscriptions, etc. ; and Thirty-two Woodcuts. Super-
royal 4to. pp. X. and 131, half-morocco. 1887. £4 4*.

Burgess. — The Rock Temples op Eltjea oe Veeul. A Handbook for
Visitors. By J. Burgess. 8vo. 3s. 6(?., or with Twelve Photographs, 9s. 6d.

Burgess. — The Rock Temples op Elephanta Described and Illustrated
with Plans and Drawings. By J. Bukgess. 8vo. cloth, pp. 80, with drawings,
price 6s. ; or -with Thirteen Photographs, price £1.

Burne. — Sheopshiee Folk-Loee. A Sheaf of Gleanings. Edited by
C. S. Burne, from the Collections of G. F. Jackson. With Map of Cheshire.
Demy Bvo. pp. xvi.-664, cloth. 1886. 25s.

Burnell. — Elements of Soitth Indian PALiEOOEAPHT. From the
Fourth to the Seventeenth Century a.d. By A. C. Burnell. Second Enlai^d
Edition, 35 Plates and Map. 4to. pp. xiv. and 148. 1878. £2 12s. &d.

Byrne. — General Peinciples op the Sietjcitjee op Language. By
James Byrne, M.A., Dean of Cloufert; Ex-Fellow of Trinity College,
Dublin. 2 vols, demy 8vo. pp. xix. and 604, xviii. and 396, cloth. 1885. 36».

Bryne. — Oeigin op the Greek, Latin and Gothic Roots. By James
Byrne, M.A., Dean of Clonfert, etc. Demy 8vo. pp. viii. and 360, cl. 1888. 18>.

Carletti. — History of the CoNauEST op Tdnis. Translated by J. T.
Cakletti. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. 40. 1883. 2s. 6rf.

Cesnola.— The Histort, Teeasttees, and ANiiauiTiEs of Saxamis,
IN THE Island op Cyprus. By A. P. Di Cesnola, F.S.A. With an
Introduction by S. Birch, D.C.L. With over 700 Illustrations and Map of
Ancient Cyprus. Royal 8vo. pp. xlviii.-326, cloth, 1882. £1 lis. 6rf.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.C. 29

Chamberlain. — Japanese Poetet. See page 4.

Chattopadhyaya. — The Yateas; or the Popular Dramas of Bengal.
Post 8vo. pp. 50, wrapper. 1882. 2s.

Clarke. — The English Stations in the Hill Regions op India : their
Value and Importance, with some Statistics of their Produce and Trade. By
Hyde Clarke, V.P.S.S. Post 8vo. paper, pp. 48. 1881. Is.

Colebrooke. — The Life and Miscellaneous Essays oe Henet Thomas

CoLEBKOOKE. In 3 vols. Demy 8vo. cloth. 1873. Vol.1. The Biography by
bis Son, Sir T. B. Colebrooke, Bart, M.P. With Portrait and Map. pp. xii.
and 492. 14s. Vols. II. and III. The Essays. A New Edition, with Notes
by E. B. Cowell, Professor of Sanskrit in the University of Cambridge.
' pp. xvi.-544, and X.-520. 28s.

Conway. — Veenee's Law in Italy. An Essay in the History of
the Indo-European Sibilants. By R. S. Conway, Gonville and Caius College,
Cambridge ; Classical Scholar in the University of Cambridge ; Exhibitioner in
Latin in the University of London. With a Dialect Map of Italy by
E. Heawood, B,A., F,R.G.S. Demy 8vo. pp. vi. and 120, cloth. 1887. 5s.

Crawford. — Eecollections oe Teavels in New ZEAXAjfD and Adsibalia.
By J. C. Crawpoiid, F.G.S., Resident Magistrate, Wellington, etc.,e{iB. With
Maps and Illustrations. 8vo. cloth, pp. xvi. and 468. 1880. 18s.

Cunningham. — Coeptjs Inscexptiondm Indicaedm. Yol. I. Inscrip-
tions of Asoka. Prepared by Albxandek Cunningham, C.S.L, etc. 4to.
olotb, pp. xiv. 142 and vi., with 31 plates. 1879. 42s.

Cunningham. — The Sttjpa oe Bhaehut. A Buddhist Monument,

ornamented with numerous Sculptures illustrative of Buddhist Legend and
History in the third century B.C. By Alexandbe, Cunningham, C.S.I., CLE.,
Director-General Archseological Survey of India, etc. Royal 4to. cloth, gilt,
pp. viii. and 114, with 51 Photographs and Lithographic Plates. 1879. £3 3s.

Cunningham. — The Ancient Geogeaphy op India. I. The Buddhist

' Period, including the Canapaigns of Alexander, and the Travels of Hwen-Thsang.
By Alexandek Cunntngham, Major-General, Royal Engineers (Bengal Re-
tired). With thirteen Maps. 8vo. pp. xx. 590, cloth. 1870. 28s.

Cunningham. — Aech^ological StrKVEY op India. Reports, made

during the years 1862-1882. By A. Cunningham, C.S.I., Major-General,
etc. With Maps and Plates. Vols. 1 to 18. 8vo. cloth. 10s. and 12s. each.

Cust. — PiciUEES OF Indian Life. Sketched with the Pen from 1862
to 1881. By R. N. Cust, late of H.M. Indian Civil Service, and Hon. Sec.
to the Royal Asiatic-Society. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. x. and 346. 1881. 7s. 6d.

Cust. — Indian Langitages. See " Triihner's Oriental Series," page 3.

Cust. — Afeican Languages. See "Triibner's Oriental Series," page 6.

Cust. — Linguistic and Oeiental Essays. See " Truhner's Oriental
Series," page 4.

Cust. — Language : as Illusteatbd by Biblp, Teanslaiion. By R. N.
- Cust, LL. D. Demy 8to. pp. 86, wrapper, 1886, Is.

.Dahl. — National Songs, Ballads and Sketches by the most Celebrated
Scandinavian Authors. Translated by J. A. Dahl, Professor of the English
Language. Square crown 8to. pp. 128, cloth. 1887. 2s. 6d.

Dalton. — Desceiptive Ethnology op Bengal. By Col. E. T. Dalton,

C.S.I., B.S.C., etc. Illustrated hy Lithograph Portraits copied from Photo-
graphs. 38 Lithograph Plates. 4to. half calf, pp. 310. £6 6s.
Digitized by Microsoft®

30 Linguistic Publications of TVUbner §■ €o.,

Da Cunlia. — Notes os the Histoex and ANiiauiTrEs of Chaui aitd

Bassein. By J. Gerson da Cunha, M.R.C.S. and L.M. Eng., etc. 8vo.
cloth, pp. xvi. and 262. With 1 7 photographs, 9 plates and a map. £1 5s.

Da Cimlia. — Conteibuiions to the Study of Indo-Poetugttbse Numis-

MATios. By J. G. Da Cunha, M.E.C.S., etc. Crown 8to. stitched in wrapper.

Fasc. I. to IV., each 2s. 6rf.
Das. — The Inbian Etot, Land Tax, Peemaneni Settlement, and the

Famine. Chiefly compiled by Abhay Chakan Das. Post 8vo. cloth, pp.

iT.-662. 1881. 12s.

Davids. — Coins, etc., op Cetion. See " Numismata Orientala," Yol.

I. Part VI.
Dennys. — China and Japan. A Guide to the Open Ports, together

-with Pekin, Yeddo, Hong Kong, and Macao ; a Guide Book and Vade Mecum
or Travellers, etc. By W. F. Mayers, H.M.'s Consular Service; N. B.
Dennys, late H.M.'s Consular Service; and C. Kino, Lieut. R.M.A. Edited
by N. B. Dennys. 8vo. pp. 600, 56 Maps and Flans, cloth. £2 2s.

Dowson. — Diction AET of Hindu Mythology, etc. See " Triibner's

Oriental Series," page 3.
Edmundson. — Milton and Yondel. A Curiosity of Literature. By

G. Edmundson, M.A. Crown 8vo. pp. vi.-224, cloth. 1885. 6s.
Egerton. — An Illttsteated Handbook oe Indian Aems ; being a
Classified and Descriptive Catalogue of the Arms exhibited at the India
Museum ; with an Introductory Sketch of the Military History of India. By
the Hon. "W. Eseeton, M.A., M.P. 4to. sewed, pp. viii. and 162. 1880. 2s. 6d.

Elliot. — Memoirs on the Histohy, Polkloee, ajstd DisiEiBinriON of
the Races op the Nohth Western Provinces of India. By the late Sir
H. M. Elliot, K.C.B. Edited, etc., by John Beames, B.C.S., etc. In
2 vols, demy 8vo., pp. xr., 370, and 396, cloth. With two Plates, and four
coloured Maps. 1869. 36s.

Elliot. — Coins of Sotttheen India. See "Numismata Orientalia."

Vol. III. Part II. page 36.
Elliot. — The Histoet op India, as told by its own Historians. The

Muhammadan Period. Edited from the Posthumous Papers of the late Sir

H. M. Elliot, K.C.B., by Prof. J. DowsoN. 8 vols. 8vo. cloth. 1867-1877.

Sets, £8 8s. ; or separately, Vol.1, pp xxxii.and 542. £1 2«. — Vol. II. pp. x.

and 580. 18«.— Vol. III. pp. xii. and 627. 24s.— Vol. IV. pp. x. and 563. 21s.

—Vol. V. pp. xii. and 576. 21s.— Vol. VI. pp. viii. and 574. 21s.— Vol. VII.

pp. viii. and 674. 21s.— Vol. VIII. pp. xxxii., 444, and Ixviii. 24s.

Farley. — Egypt, Cypeus, and Asiatic Ttjeket. By J. L. Faelet,

Author of "The Resources of Turkey," etc. Deiny 8vo. cl., pp. xvi.-270. 1878.
10s. 6</.

Eeatherman. — The Social Histoey op the Eaces of Mankind. By
A. Featherman. Demy 8vo. cloth. The Aramaeans, pp. xvii. and 664. 1881.
£1 Is. The Nigritians. pp. 826. 1885. 31s. &d. Papuo and Malayo-
Melanesians. pp. 626. 1886. 26s. Oceano-Melanesians. pp. 462. 1887.
25s.

Perguson. — Sitmmaey of Infoemation Eegaeding Ceylon : Its Natural
Features, Climate, Population, Religion, Industries, Agriculture, Government,
Laws, Objects of Interest, etc., in 1887, the Queen's "Jubilee Tear." Com-
piled by A. M. and J. Ferguson, Editors of the Ceylon Observer, Tropical
Agriculturist, etc., etc. Post 8vo. iv.-26. wrapper. 1887. 2s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

, 57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E. C. 31

Fergusson and Burgess. — The Gate Tempies of India. By James
Febgubson, D.O.L., F.E.S., and James Burgess, F.R.6.S. Imp. 8vo, half
bound, pp. zx. and 536, with 98 Plates, £2 2s.

Fergusson. — A.ECH2EOLoaT isr India. With especial reference to the
Works of Babu Eajendralala Mitra. By J. Fekgusson, C.I.E. 8vo, pp; 116,
with Illustrations, sewed. 1884. 6s,

Forchhammer. — An Essay on the Souecbs and Development ob'
BoEMESE Law. From the Era of the First Introduction of the Indian Law to
the Time of the British Occupation of Pegu. By Dr. E. Forchhammer, Ph.D.,
Professor of Pali at the Government High School, Bangoon. Imperial 8ro. pp,
Ti.-110, cloth. 1885. 10s. 6d.

Fornander. — An Account of the Polynesian Race : Its Origin and

Migration, and the Ancient History of the Hawaiian People to the Times of
Kamehameha I. By A. Fornander, Circuit Judge of the Island of Maui,
H.I. Post 8vo. cloth. Vol. I., pp. xvi. and 248. 1877. 7s. 6d. Vol. II.,
pp. viii. and 400. 1880. 10s. 6d. Vol. III., pp. xii.-292. 1885. 9s.

Forsyth. — Eepoet op a Mission id Yaekund in 1873, under Command

of Sir T. D. Forsyth, K.C.S.I., C.B., Bengal Civil Service, with Historical
and Geographical Information regarding the Possessions of the Ameer of
Yarkund. With 45 Photographs, 4 Lithographic Plates, and a large Folding
Map of Eastern Turkestan. 4to. cloth, pp. iv, and 573. £5 5s.

Gardner. — Paethian Coinare. See " Numismata Orientalia." Vol.1,
Part V.

Garrett. — A Classical Dictionaey op India, illustrative of the My-
thology, Philosophy, Literature, Antiquities, Arts, Manners, Customs, etc., of
the Hindus. By John Garrett. 8vo. pp. x. and 798. cloth. 28s.

Garrett. — Supplement to the above Classical Dictionaey of India.

By J. Garrett, Dir. of Public Instruction, Mysore. 8vo. cloth, pp. 160. 7s. 6<?.

Garrett. — Moenins Houes in India. Practical Hints on Household
Management, the Care and Training of Children, etc. By Elizabeth Garrett.
Crown 8vo. pp. X.-124, cloth. 1887. 3s. 6d.

Gazetteer of the Central Provinces of India. Edited by Chaeies

Grant, Secretary to the Chief Commissioner of the Central Provinces. Second
Edition. With a very large folding Map of the Central Provinces of India.
Demy 8vo. pp. clvii. and 582, cloth. 1870, £1 4s.

Geiger. — Conietbuiions to the Histoby op the Development op the

Human Bace. Lectures and Dissertations by L. Geiger. Translated from
the German by D. Asher, Ph.D. Post 8vo. cloth, pp. x. and 156. 1880. 6».

Goldstiicker. — On the Deficiencies in the Peesenx Administeation

or Hindu Law ; being a paper read at the Meeting of the East India As-
sociation on the 8th June, 1870. By Theodor GoldstUckek, Professor of
Sanskrit in University College, London, &c. Demy 8vo. pp. 56, sewed. Is. 6d.

uover. — The Folk-Songs of Southben India. By Chaeles E. Govee.

8vo. pp. xxiii. and 299, cloth. 1872. 10s. 6d.

Grierson. — Bihae Peasant Life ; being a Discursive Catalogue of the
Surroundings of the People of that Province, with many Illustrations from
Photographs taken by the Author. Prepared under Orders of the Government
of Bengal. By George A. Grierson, B.C.S. Eoyal 8vo. pp. xxviii.-586,
half-bound. 15s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

33 Linguistic PuhKcations of Triibner ^ Co.,

Griffin. — The Eajas op the Pttnjab. History of the Principal States

in the Punjab, and their Political Relations with the British Government. By
Lepel H. Griffin, B.O.S. ; Under Sec. to Gov. of the Punjab, Author of
"The Punjab Chiefs," etc. Second edition. Eoyal 8vo., pp. xiv. and 630.
1873. 21s.
Griffis. — CoEEA ; Without awd Within, Chapters on Corean History,
Manners and Religion. With Hendrick Hamel's Narrative of Captivity an*
Travels in Corea, Annotated. By "W. E. Gbiffis. Crown 8vo. pp. 316, with Map
and Illustrations, cloth. 1885. 6s.

Griffis. — The Mikabo's Empire. Book I. History of Japan from
660 B.C. to 1872 A.D. Book II. Personal Experiences, Observations, and
Studies in Japan, 1870-74. By W. E. G-biffis. Illustrated. Second Editioiu"
8vo. pp. 626, cloth. 1883. £1.

Growse. — Mathtora : A District Memoir. By F. S. Gkowse, B.C. 8.,

CLE. Second Revised Edition. Illustrated. 4to. boards, pp. xxiv. and 520.
1880. 428.

Hahn. — Tsuni||Goam. See Triibner's Oriental Series, page 5.

Head. — Coinage of Ltdia and Peesia. See "Ntiinismata OrientaUa."
Vol. I. Part III.

Heaton. — Atjstealian Dictionaet of Dates and Men of the Time.

Containing the History of Australasia, from 1542 to May, 1879. By I. H. HeatonI
fioyal 8vo. cloth pp. iv.— 554. 1879. 16».

Hebrew Literature Society. See page 82.

Hilmy. — The Liteeature op EaYPT and the Soudan. From the

Earliest Times to the Tear 1885, inclusive. A Bibliography. Comprising
Printed Books ; Periodical Writings and Papers of Learned Societies ; Maps and
Charts; Ancient Papyri; Manuscripts, Drawings, etc. By H.H. P&ikcb
Ibrahim-Hilmy. Dedicated to H.H. the Khedive Ismail. Vol. I. (A-L),
demy 4to. pp. viii.-398, cloth. 1886. £1 lis. Gd.

Hiudoo Mythology Popularly Treated. — An Epitomised Description

of the various Heathen Deities illustrated on the Silver Swami Tea Service
presented, as a Memento of his visit to India, to H.B..H. the Prince of Wales,
K.G., by His Highness the Gaekwar of Baroda. Small 4to. pp. 42, limp cloth.
1875. 3«. &d.

Hodgson. — Essays on the Languages, Liteeatuee, and Religion
OF Nepal and Tibet ; with Papers on their Geography, Ethnology, and
Commerce. By B. H. Hodgson, late British Minister at Nepil. Royal
8vo. cloth, pp. 288. 1874. lis.

Hodgson. — Essays on Indian Suejects. See "Triibner's Oriental

Series," p. 4.
Hunter. — The Impeeiai Gazetteee of India. By Sir "Wiixiam
Wilson Hunter, K.C.S.I., C.I.E., LL.D., late Director-General of Statistics
to the Government of India. Published by Command of the Secretary of
State for India. 14 vols. 8vo. half morocco. 1887. £3 3s.
" A gi-eat -work has been unostentatiously carried on for the last twelve years in India; the
Importance of whicli it is impossible to exaggerate. This is nothing less than a complete
Statistical surveyor the entire British Empire in Hindostan. . . . We have said enough to show
that the * Imperial Gazetteer ' is no mere dry collection of statistics ; it is a treasury from which
the politician and economist may draw countless stores of valuable information, and into which
the general redder can dip with the certainty of always finding something both to interest and
instruct him." — Times.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E. G. 33

Hunter. — A Statistical Accotjitt op Bbngal. By SirW. W. HuNiEa,

K. C.S.I. , LL.D., etc. Director-Gen. of Statistics to the ©overnment of India.

■VOL. VOL.

I. 24 ParganiB and Sundarbans.
II. Nadiyd and Jessor.'
III. Midnapur, Hdglt and.HouraK-
rv. Bardw^n, 6irbb.iltu and ■B&akur&.
Y. Dacca^ B^kargaDJ, Farldpur and Mai-

man^inb.
VI. Cbittagong Hill Tracts, CSdittagong,
Noabbail, Tipperab, and Hill Tipperab
State.
VII. Meldab, Eangpi^r auf] Bin&jpur.
VIIL RSjsfalbf and Bogr&.
IX. MbrsbidabM and PSbnS.

X. Ddrjiling, Jalpiigurl and Euch Bebar
XI. Patni and SSran. [State.

XII. Gayi and Sb4b4bSd.

XIII. Tirbut and Cbampiran.

XIV. Bbigalpur and Sant&l ParganSs.
XV. Mongbyr and Purniab,

XVI. Hazilvib&gh and LnbSrdagS.
XVII. Singbbam, Cbutii NigpurTributary

States and M&nbbdm.
XVIII. Cuttaok and Balasor.
XIX. Puri, and Orissa Tributary States.
XX. Fisberies, Botany, and General Index

Published by coniimand of the Government of India. In 20 Vols. 8vo. half-
morocco. £3.

Hunter. — A Statistical AceoirsT op Assam. By Sir "W. "W. Htjnteb,

K.C.8.I., LL.D., etc. 2 vols. 8vo. half-morocco, pp. 420 and 490, with Two

Maps. 1879. 10«.
Hunter. — Famine Aspects op Ben9al Distktcis. A System of Famine

Warnings. By Sir W. W. Hunter, K.C.S.I., LL.D., etc. Crown 8vo. cloth,

pp. 216. 1874. 7s. 6rf.
Hunter. — The Indian Mitsalmans. By Sir"W. "W. HlinfTEE, K.C.S.I.

LL.D., etc. Third Edition. 8vo. cloth, pp. 219. 1876. \0s. 6d.
Hunter. — A bkiep histoet op the iNDiAtf People. By Sir W. W.

Hunter, K.C.S.I., LL.D., etc. Crown 8yo. pp. 222 with map, cloth. 1884.

3s. 6el.
Hunter. — ^Indian Empire. See Triibner's Oriental Series, page 5.
Hunter. — An Accoitnt op the British Settlement op Aden

in Arabia. Compiled by Captain F. M. Hunteb, Assistant Political Resident,
Aden. Demy 8vo. half-morocco, pp. xii.-232. 1877. 7s. 6d.

India. — Finance and Eevendb Accounts op the Government op, for
1882-83. Fop. 8vo. pp. viii.-220, boards. 1884. 2j. 6d.

Jacobs. — The Je-wish Qfesiion. 1875-1884. A Bibliographical
Hand-list. Compiled by Joseph Jacobs, B.A., late Scholar of St. John's
College, Cambridge. Fcap. 8vo. pp. xii. -96, -wrapper. 2s.

Japan. — Map op Nippon (Japan) : Compiled from Native Maps, and
the Notes of recent Travellers. By E. H. Bbunton, F.E.G.S., 1880. In
4 sheets, 21s.; roller, varnished, £1 Us. 6d.; Folded, in case, £1 5s. 6d.

Juvenalis Satirae. — ^With a Literal English Prose Translation and
Notes. By J. D. Lewis, M.A. Second, Revised, and considerably
Enlarged Edition. 2 Vols, post 8vo. pp. xii.-230, and 400, cloth. 1882. 12s.

Eaegi. — ;The Eie Veda : the Oldest Literature of the Indians. By
Adolph Kaeoi, Professor in the University of Ziirich. 8vo. pp. viii.-198,
cloth. 1886. 7s. 6rf.

Eerrison. — A Common-place Book op the Fipieenth Cenitjet. Con-
taining a _ Eeligious Play and Poetry, Legal Forms, and Local Accounts.
Printed from the .Original MS. at Brome Hall, Suffolk. By Lady Caboline
Keeeison. Edited, with Notes, by Lucy Totjlmin Smith. Demy 8vo. with
Two Facsimiles, pp. viii.-176, parchment. 1886. 7s. 6d.

EittS. A CbMPBNDIITM OP THE CaSTES AND TrIBES FoFND IN InDIA.

Compiled from the (1881) Census Reports for the Various Provinces (excluding
Burmab) and Native States of the Empire. By E. J. Kiiis, B.CiS. Fcap.
folio, pp. xii. 90, board8.D/J^gty t^Microsoft®

3

34 Linguistic Publications of Triibner 8f Go.

Enowles. — A Dictiojtaet of Eashmiei Peoteebs and Sayings. Ex-
plained and Illustrated from the Eich and Interesting Folk-lore of the Valley,
By the Rev. J. Hinton Knowles, F.R.G.S., etc. (C.M.S.), Missionary to the
Kashmiris. Crown 8to. pp. Tiii.-263, cloth. 1885. 8».

Leituer. — Sinin-I-Islam. Being a Sketch of tte History and

Literature of Muhammadanism and their place in Universal History. For the
me of Maulvis. By G. W. Lbitner. Part I. The Early History of Arabia
to the fall of the Abassides. 8vo. setred. Lahore. 6e.

Leitner. — Histoet of Indigenous Editcation in the Panjab since
Annexation, and in 1882. By G. W. Leitner, LL.D., late on special duty
with the Education Commission appointed by the Grovemment of India. Fcap.
folio, pp. 588, paper boards. 1883. £5.

Leland. — Fusang ; or, the Discovery of America by Chinese Buddhist
Priests in the Fifth Century. By Charles G. Leland. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp.
xix. and 212. 1875. 7s.6d.

Leland. — The Gypsies. See page 69.

Leonowens. — Life and Teatbi is India. Being Recollections of a

Journey before the Days of Railroads. By Anna H. Leonowens. 8vo. pp. 326,
Illustrated, cloth. 1885. 10s. Gd.

Liude. — Tea in India. A Sketch, Index, and Register of the Tea
Industry in India, with a Map of all the Tea Districts, etc. By F. Linde,
Surveyor. Folio, wrapper, pp. xxii.-30, map mounted and in cloth boards.
1879. 63s.

Long. — Eastern Proverbs and Emblems. See page 4.

Lowell. — Choson : THE Land of the Moening Calm. A Sketch of
Korea. By Percival Lowell. Super-royal 8vo. pp. X.-412, cloth. 1886. 24*.

HcGrindle. — The Commerce and Ifavigation of the Erythraean Sea.
Being a Translation of the Periplus Maris Erythraei, by an Anonymous Writer,
and of Arrian's Account of the Voyage of Nearkhos, from the Mouth of the
Indus to the Head of the Persian Gulf. With Introduction, Commentary,
Notes, and Index. Post 8vo. cloth, pp. iv. and 238. 1879. 7«. 6d.

UcCrindle. — Ancient India as Desceibed by Megasihenes and

Abrian. A Translation of Fragments of the Indika of Megasthenes collected
by Dr. Schwanbekk, and of the First Part of the Indika of Arrian. By J.
W. McCkindle, M.A., Principal of Gov. College, Patna. With Introduction,
Notes, and Map of Ancient India. Post 8vo. cloth, pp. xii.-224. 1877. 7s. 6d.

McCrindle. — Ancient India as described by Ktesias, the Knidian,
a translation of the abridgment of his "Indica," by Photios, and fragments
of that work preserved in other writers. By J. W. McCrindle, M.A. With
Introduction, Notes, and Index. 8vo. cloth, pp. viii. — 104. 1882. 6s.

KcCrindle. — Ancient India as Desceibed by Ptolemy. A Transla-
tion of the Chapters which describe India and Central and Eastern Asia in the
Treatise on Geography written by Klaudios Ptolemaios, the Celebrated
Astronomer; with Introduction, Commentary, Map of India according to
Ptolemy, and a very Copious Index. By J. W. McCrindlb, M.A. Demy
8to. pp. xii.-373, cloth. 1885. 7s. 6d.

MacKenzie.— The History of the Relations of the Government with
the Hill Tribes of the North-East Frontier of Bengal. By A. MacKenzie,
B.C.S., Sec. to the Gov. Bengal. Royal. Svo.pp. xviii.-586, cloth, with Map.
1884. 16s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Sill, London, E.G. 35

STadden. — Coins op the Jews. See"Numismata Orientalia," Vol. U.

Slan. — Ok the ABOEiensrAi Inhabitants ojf the Andaman Islands.
By E. H. Man, Assistant i Superintendent Andaman and Nioobar Islands,
F.E.G.S., M.R.A.S., etc. With Report of Researches into the Language of
the South Andaman Islands, by A. J. Ellis, F.R.S., F.S.A. Reprinted from
" The Journal of the Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland."
Demy 8vo. pp. xxviii.-298, with Map and Eight Plates, cloth. 1885. I0». 6A

Kariette. — Monuments of Upper Egypt. See page 65.

Uarkham. — ^The Naeraxives of the Mission op Geoege Boole,
B.C.S., to the Teshu Lama, and of the Journey of T. Manning to Lhasa. Edited,
with Notes, Introduction, and lives of Bogle and Manning, by C. E. Maekham,
C.B. Second Edition. 8vo. Maps and lUus., pp. clxi. 314, cl. 1879. 21».

Marsden's Numismata Orientalia. New International Edition.
See under Numismata Orientalia.

Marsden. — Numismata Okientalia Illttsieata. The Plates of the

Oriental Coins, Ancient and Modem, of the Collection of the late TV. Marsden.

Engraved from Di-awings made under his Directions. 4to. 67 Plate?, cl. 31s. %d.
Harttn. — The Chinese : thbie Education, Philosopht, and Lbttees.

By W. A. P. Martin, D.D., LL.D., President of the Tungwen College, Pekin.

8vo. pp. 320, cloth. 1881. 7», 6rf.

Mason. — Burma : Its People and Productions ; or, Notes on the Eauna,
Flora, and Minerals of Tenasserira, Pegu and Burma. By the Rev. P. Mason,
D.D. Vol. I. Geology, Mineralogy, and Zoology. Yol. II. Botany. Re-
written by 'W.Theobald, late DeputyrSup. Geological Suryey of India. 2
vols. Royal 8vo. pp. xxvi. and 560 ; xvi. and 781 and xxxvi.cloth. 1864. £Z.

Matthews. — Ethnology and Philology of the Hidatsa Indians.

By Washington Matthews, Assistant Surgeon, U.S. Army. Contents : —
Ethnography, Philology, Grammar, Dictionary, and English-Hidatsa Voca-
bulary. 8vo. cloth. £1 \U. 6d.

Mayers. — China and Japan. See Dennys.

Mayers. — The Chinese Goveenment. A Manual of Chinese Titles,

categorically arranged and explained, with an Appendix. By W. F. Mayers.

Second Edition, with Additions by G. M. H. Playfair, Roy. 8vo. cloth, pp.

Ixx.-loS. 1886. 15s.

Metcalfe. — The Englishman and the Scandinavian ; or, a Comparison
of Anglo-Saxon and Old Norse Literature. By Frederick Metcalpe, M.A.,
Author of " The Oxonian in Iceland, etc. Post 8vo. cloth, pp. 512, 1880. 18s.

Milton and Vondel. — See Edmundson.

Mitra. — The ANiiauiiiEs op Oeissa. By Rajendealala Mitba.

Published under Orders of the Government of India. Folio, cloth. Vol. I.
pp. 180. With a Map and 36 Plates. 1875. M 6s. Vol. II. pp. vi. and 178
1880. £4. .4s.

Mitra. — Buddha Gaya ; the Hermitage of Sakya Muni. By Rajen-
oralala MitkA, Lli.D., C.I,E.'4to. cloth, pp. xvi. and 258, with 51 plates.
1878. £3.

Mitra.: — The Sanskeit Buddhist Liteeaiuee op Nepal. By R4jendea-
LALA Mitra, LL.D., CLE. 8vo. cloth, pp. xlviii.-340. 1882. 12s. &d.

Moor. — The Hindu Pantheon. , By Edwaed Mooe, F.R.S. A new-
edition, with additional Plates, Condensed and Annotated by the Rev. W. O.
Simpson. Svo. cloth; pp. xiii. and 401, with 62 Plates. 1864. £Z.

Digitized by Microsoft®

36 Linguistic Publications of Triibner 8f Co.,

Morris. — A Desceiptite and Hisioetcai Accottnt op the GoBATEEr
District in the Presidency of Madras. By H. Mokris, formerly M.CS- 8to.
cloth, with map, pp. xii. and 390. 1878. 12«.

Miiller. — Ancient Inscriptions in Cetlon. By Dr. Edwaed MiitLEE.
2 Vols. Text, crown 8to., pp. 220, cloth and plates, ohlong folio, cloth.
1883. 21«.

Munro. — Majoe-Geneeax Sie T. Muneo, Bart., K.C.B., Governor of
Madras. Selections from hie Minutes and other Official 'Writings, Edited, with
an Introductory Memoir and Notes, by Sir A. J. Aebuthnot, K.O.S.I., C.I.E.
New Edition. Demy 8vo. pp. cxliT.-626, with Map, cloth. 1887. £1 1».

North. — !NoETa:'s Pltjtaech, Foite Chapiees or ; Containing the Lives
of Caius Marcius, Coriolanns, Julius Caesar, Marcus Antonius, and Marcus
Brutus, as Sources to ShakeBpeare''s Tragedies ; Coriolanus, Julius Cassar, and
Antony and Cleopatra ; and partly to Hamlet and Timon of Athens. Photo-
lithographed in the size of the Edition of 1595. With Preface, Notes com-
paring the Text of the Editions of 1579, 1595, 1603, and 1612 ; and Reference
Notes to the Text of the Tragedies of Shakespeare. Edited by Prof. F. A.
Leo, Ph.D., Member of the Directory of the German Shakespeare Society; and
Lecturer at the Academy of Modern Philology at Berlin. Folio, pp. 22, 130
of facsimiles, half-morocco. Library Edition (limited to 250 copies), £1 lis. 6d, ;
Amateur Edition (50 copies on a superior large hand-made paper), £3 3«.

Notes, KoTTGH, OP JoTXRNETS made in the years 1868-1873, in Syria,
India, Kashmir, Japan, Mongolia, Siberia, United States, Sandwich Islands,
Australasia, etc. Demy 8to. pp. 621, cloth. 1875. 14s.

XTumismata Orientalia. — The Inteenationai Numismata Oeientaiia.

Edited by Edward Thomas, F.R.S., etc. Vol. I. Illustrated with 20 Plates
and a Map. Royal 4to. cloth. 1878. £3 \S>. 6d.
Also in 6 Parts sold separately, royal 4to., wrappers, viz.: —
Part I.— Ancient Indian Weights. By E. Thomas, F.R.S., etc. Pp. 84, with
Plate and Map of the India of Manu. 9s. 6d. II. — Coins of the Urtuki
Turkumans. By S. L. Poole. Pp. 44, with 6 Plates. 9s. III. The
Coinage of Lydia and Persia, from the Earliest Times to the Fall of the
Dynasty of the Achtemenidffi. By B. V. Head, Assistant- Keeper of Coins,
British Museum. Pp. viii. and 56, with three Autotype Plates. 10s. 6rf.
IV. The Coins of the Tuluni Dynasty. By E. T. Rogers. Pp. iv. and 22,
and 1 Plate. 5s. V. The Parthian Coinage. By P. Gardner, M.A. Pp»
iv. and 65, with 8 Autotype Plates. 18s. VI. The Ancient Coins and Measures
of Ceylon. With a Discussion of the Ceylon Date of the Buddha's Death.
By T. W. Ehys Davids, late Ceylon C. S. Pp. 60, with Plate. 10s.

Nnmismata Orientalia. — Vol. II. Coins op the Jews. History of the
Jewish Coinage in the Old and New Testaments. By F. W. Madden, M.R.A.S.,
Member of the Numismatic Society of London, etc. With 279 woodcuts and a
plate of alphabets. Royal 4to. sewed, pp. xii. and 330. 1881. £2.
Or as a separate volume, cloth. £2 2s.

Numismata Orientalia. — ^Vol III. Part I. The Coins op Aeaxan, op
Pequ, and of Burma. By Lieut. -General Sir Arthur Phayre, C.B.,
K.C.S.I., G.C.M.G., late Commissioner of British Burma. Royal 4to. pp.
viii. and 48, with 5 Autotype Illustrations, sewed. 1882. 8s. %d. Also con-
tains the Indian Balhara and the Arabian Intercourse with India in the Ninth
and following centuries. By Edward Thomas, F.R.S. Vol. III. Part II.
The Coins of Southern India. By Sir W. Elliot. Eoval 4to nnTiii -IGs"
with Map and 4 Plates. 1886. 25s. an- ■ >

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E, C, 37

ITutt. — A Sketch ob SAMAEiiAif History, Dogma, and LiiEEATtTEB.

An Introduction to " Fragments of » Samaritan Targum." By J. W. Nutt,

M.A., &o., See. Demy 8vo. pp. 180, cloth. 1874. o».
Olcott. — A Buddhist Catechism, according to the Canon of the Southern

Cliurcli. By Col. H. S. Olcott, 24mo. pp. 32, wrapper. 1881. Is.

Oppert. — On the Ancient Commeeoe of India : A Lecture. By Dr.
Gr. OppEBX. 8vo. paper, 60 pp. 1879. Is.

Oppert. — CONTBIBUTIONS TO THE HiSTOET OF SoTJTHEEN InDIA. Part I.

Insckiptions. By Dr. G. Oppekt. 8vo. paper, pp. vi. and 74, -with a Plate.
1882. 4s.
Orientalia Antiqua ; oe Doctjmbnts and Rbseahches eelatens to
THE History op the 'Writings, Languages, and Arts op the East.,
Edited by Terrien de La Couperie, M.R.AJS., etc., etc. Fcap. 4to. pp. 96,
with 14 Plates, wrapper. Part I. 5s.

Ozley. — Egypt : and the Wonders of the Land of the Pharaohs. By
W. OxLEY. Illustrated by a New Version of the Bhagavat-Gita, an Episode
of the Mahabharat, one of the Epic Poems of Ancient India. Crown 8to. pp.
viii -328, cloth. 1884. 7s. 6d.

Palmer. — Egyptian Cheonicies, with a harmony of Sacred and

Egyptian Chronology, and an Appendix on Babylonian and Assyrian Antiquities,
By William Palmbk, M.A., late Fellow of Magdalen College, Oxford.
2 vols. 8to. cloth, pp. Ixxiv. and 428, and viii. and 636. 1861, 12s.
Fatell, — Cowasjbe Patbll's Cheonology, containing corresponding
Dates of the different Eras used by Christians, Jews, Greeks, Hindlis,
Mohamedans, Farsees, Chinese, Japanese, etc. By Cowasjee SiORAbjee
Patell. 4to. pp. viii. and 184, cloth. 50s.

Pathya-Vakya, or Niti-Sastra. Moral Maxims from the Writings
of Oriental Philosophers. Paraphrased, and Translated into English by
A. D. A. 'WiJATASiNHA. Foolscap 8vo. sewed, pp. viii. and 54. 1881. 8s.

Faton. — A History of the Egyptian EEVOLinioN, from the Period of
the Mamelukes to the Death 'of Mohammed Ali ; from Arab and European
Memoirs, Oral Tradition, and Local Research. By A. A. Paton. Second
Edition. 2 vols, demy 8vo. cloth, pp. xii. and 395, viii. and 446. 1870. 7s. 6d.

Phillips.— KopAL-ExTNDALA. A Tale of Bengali Life. Translated
from the Bengali of Bunkim Chandra Chatterjee by H. A, D. Philips,
Bengal C.S. Crown 8vo. pp. 240, cloth. 1885. 6s.

Pfoundes. — Fu So Mimi Bukuro. — A Budget of Japanese ITotes.

By Capt. Pfoundes, of Yokohama. 8vo. sewed, pp. 184. 7s. 6d.
Phayre. — Coins of Abakan, etc. See " Numismata Orientalia,"

Vol. III. Part I.
Piry. — Lb Saint Edit. Littbeature Chinoise. See page 63.

Flayfair. — The Cities and Towns of China. A Geographical Diction-
ary by G. M. H. Playpair, of Her Majesty's Consular Service in China. 8to.
cloth, pp. 506. 1879. 25s.

Poole. — Coins of the TJEruKf TurkumIns. See "Numismata Ori-
entalia," Vol. I. Part II.

Poole. — A Scheme of Mohammaban Dynasties Diteing the Khaiifate.
By S. L. Poole, B.A. Oxon., M.R.A.S., Author of " Selections from the Koran,"
etc. 8vo. sewed, pp. 8, wilii a plate. 1880. 2s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

38 Linguistic Publications of Trubner 8f Co.,

Poole. — An Index to Pbeiodical Liteeatttee. By "W. T. Poole,
LL.D., Librarian of the Chicago Public Library. Third Edition, brought
down to January, 1882. Eoya^Svo. pp. sxviii. and 1442, cloth. 1883.
£3 13s. 6<?.

Ralston. — Tibetan Tales. See Triibner's Oriental Series, page 5.

Ram Raz.^EssAT on the Aechiteciuee of the Hindtis. By Rait Raz^

Native Judge and Magistrate of Bangalore. With 48 plates. 4to. pp. xiv. and
. 64, eened. London, 1834. £2 Is.

Rapson. — The Stebggie between England and Feance eoe Supeemact
IN India. (The "Le Bas " Prize Essay for 1886.) By E. J. Eapson, B.A.
Crown 8to. pp. viii. and 120, cloth. 1887. 4s. &d.

RaTenstein. — The Russians on the Amtje ; its Discovery, Conquest,
and Colonization, with a Description of the Country, its Inhabitants, Produc-
tions, and Commercial Capabilities, and Personal Accounts of Russian Travel-
lers. By E. G. Ratenstein, F.R.G.S. With 4 tinted Lithographs and 3-
Maps. Bvo. cloth, pp. 500. 1861. IS.

Raverty. — Notes on Afghanistan and Paet op Baiitchistan, Geo-

graphical, Ethnographical, and Historical. By Major H. G. Eavebtt, Bombay
N. I. (Retired). Fcap. folio, wrapper. Sections I. andll. pp. 98. 1880. 2s^
Section III. pp. vi. and 218. 1881. 5*. Section IV. pp. x-136. 1883. Ss.

Rice. — Mtsoee Insceiptions. Translated for the Government by
Lewis Rice. Svo. pp. vii. 336, and xix. With a Frontispiece and Map.
Bangalore, 1879. £1 10s.

Rockhill. — Life op the Buddha. See page 6.

Roe and Fryer. — Teavels in India in the Seventeenth Centuet.

By Sir Thomas Roe and Dr. John Fryer. Svo. cloth, pp. 474. 1873. 7s. 6rf.

Rogers. — Coins op the Ttjittni Dynasty. See "Nnmismata Ori-
entalia," Vol. I. Part. IV.

Routledge. — English Rule and Native Opinion in India. From.

Notes taken in the years 1870-74. By James Routledge. Post Bvo.
cloth, pp. 344. 1878. 10s. U.

Rowbotham. — A Histoey op Music. By John Feedeeick Eotvbotham,

late Scholar of Balliol College, Oxford. 3 vols, demy Svo. pp. xx. and 342.
cloth. Vol. I. 1885. Vol. IL 1886. Vol. IIL 1887. Each Volume, 18s.

Roy. — The Lteics op Ind. — By Dejendea Lala Roy, M. A. &c.. Author
of " The Aryan Melodies." Crown 8vo. pp. vui. — 79, cloth. 1887. 2«. 6rf.

Sachau. — ALBEEtrNi's India. An Account of the Religion, Philosophy,
Literature, Chronology, Astronomy, Customs, Laws, and Astrology of India,
about A.D. 1030. Edited in the Arabic Original by Dr. Edward Sachau, Pro-
fessor in the Royal University of Berlin. With an Index of the Sanskrit
Words. 4to. pp. xli. and 371, cloth. 1887. £3 3s.

Sangermano. — A Desceipiion op the Buemese Empiee. Compiled

chiefly from Native Document, by the Rev. Father Sangermano, and translated
from his MS. by W. Tandy, D.D., Member of the Roman Sub-Committee of
the Oriental Translation Fund. Royal 8to. pp. x.— 228, cloth. 1885. 8s.

Sastrl — FoLKLOEE in Southeen India. By Pandit S. M. Nat^sa
S.isTRl, Government Archaeological Survey. In Two Parts, crown 8vo Di>. 136
wrapper. 1886. 3s. ^^

Schiefher.— Tibetan Tales. See Triibner's Oriental Series, page 5.
Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Rill, London, E.G. 39

Schlagiutweit. — Giossabt op Geogkaphical Teems fhom India and

Tibet, with Native Transcription and Transliteration. By Hekmann de

ScHLAOiNTWEiT. With an Atlas in imperial folio, of Maps, Panoramas,

and Views. Royal 4to., pp. xxiv. and 293. 1863. £i.
Sewell. — Eepoet on the Amakatati Tope, and Excavations on its Site

inl8t7. By E. Sewell, M.C.S. EoyaL4to. 4 plates, pp. 70, boards. 1880. 3«.
Sewell. — AECH.a;oLOGicAL Stjrtey as Sotjtheen India. Lists of the

Antiquarian Remains in the Presidency of Madras. Compiled under the Orders

of Government, byE. Sewell, M.C.S. Vol. I. 4to. pp. 400, cloth. 1882. 20s.
Sherring. — Hindu Tribes and Castes as represeuted in Benares. By

the Eev. M. A. Sherring. With Illustrations. 4to. Cloth. Vol. I. pp. xxiv.

and 408. 1872. Now £6 6s. Vol. II. pp. Ixviii. and 376. 1879. £2 8s.

Vol. III. pp. xii. and 336. 1881. £1 12s.

Sherring — The Sacebd City op the Hindus. An Account of
Benares in Ancient and Modern Times. By the Rev. M. A. Sherring, M.A.,
LL.D. ; and Prefaced with an Introduction by Fitzedward Hall, Esq., D.C.L.
8vo. cloth, pp. xxxvi. and 388, with numerous full-page illustrations. 1868. 21s.

Sibree. — The Geeat Apeican Island. Chapters on Madagascar.

Researches in the Physical Geography, Geology, Natural History and Botany,
and in the Customs, Language, Superstitions, Folk-Lore and Religious Belief,
and Practices of the Different Tribes, Illustrations of Scripture and Early
Church History, from Native Statists and Missionary Experience. By the Rev.
Jab, Sibree, jun., F.R.G.S., of the London Missionary Society, etc. Demy
8vo. cloth, with Maps and Illustrations, pp. xii. and 372. 1880. 10s. %d.

Steel and Temple. — Wide-Awake Stoeies. A Collection of Tales
told by Little Children between Sunset and Sunrise in the Punjab and Kashmir.
By F. A. Steel and R. C. Temple. Crown 8vo. pp. xii. — 446, cloth.
1884. 9s.

Strangford.— Obiginal Leitees and Papers op the late Yiscoitnt

Strangfoed, upon Philological and Kindred Subjects. Edited by Viscountess
Stbangfokd. Post 8vo. cloth, pp. xxii. and 284. 1878. 12s. 6d.

Thomas. — Ancient Indian Weights. See ITumismata Orientalia,"
Vol. I. Part I.

Thomas. — Comments on Recent Pehiti Decipheembnts. See page 92.

Thomas. — Sassanian Coins. Communicated to the Numismatic Society
of London. By E. Thomas, P.R.S. Two parts. With 3 Plates and a Wood-
cut. 12mo. sewed, pp. 43. 5s.

Thomas. — The Indian Balhara, and the Arabian Intercourse with
India in the ninth and following centuries. By Edward Thomas. See
Numismata Orientalia, Vol. III. Part I. page 30.

Thomas. — Records op the Gupta Dynasty. Illustrated by Inscrip-
tions, Written History, Local Tradition and Coins. To which is added a
Chapter on the Arabs in Sind. By Edward Thomas, F.R.S. Folio, with a
Plate, handsomely bound in cloth, pp. iv. and 64. 1876. Price 14s.

Thomas. — The Chronicles op the PathXn Kings op Dehli. Illus-
trated by Coins, Inscriptions, and other Antiquarian Remains. By Edward
Thomas, F.R.S. With numerous Copperplates and Woodcuts. Demy 8vo.
cloth, pp. xxiv. and 467 1871. £l 8s.

Thomas, — The Reyenue Resources op the Mughai, Empire in India,

from A.D. 1693 to a.d. 1707. A Supplement to " The Chronicles of the Path&,n
Kings of Delhi." By E. Thomas, F.R.S. 8vo. pp. 60, cloth. 3s. 6d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

40 Linguistic Publications of Triihner 8f Co.,

Thorburn.— BANNtJ ; or, Our Afghan Frontier. By S. S. Thoebtteic,
Settlement Officer, BanniS District. 8vo. cloth, pp. x. and 480. 1876. 18s.

Vaughan. — The MiinrEES anb Customs oe the Chiitbse of the
Sthaits Settlements. By J. D. Vaughan, Advocate and Solicitor^ Supreme
Court, Straits Settlements. Bvo. pp. iT.-120, boards. 1879. 7«. 6d.

Watson, — Index to the Native and Scientiitc Names oe Indian and

OTHER Eastern Economic Plants and Products, By J. F. Watson,
M.A., M.D., etc. Imperial 8vo., cloth, pp. 650. 1868. £1 lis. 6d.

Wedgwood. — Contested Etymologies in the Dictionary of the Rev.
W. W. Skeat. By Hensleigh Wedgwood. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. ^111.-194.
1882. 5s.

West and Buhler. — A Digest of the JTindtt Law of Inheritance,

Partition, Adoption ; Embodying the EepUes of the Sastris in the Courts of the
Bombay Presidency. With Introductions and Notes by the Hon. Justice Ray-
mond West and J. G. BiiHLEK, CLE. Third Edition. 870. pp. xc.-1450,
wrapper. 1884. 36s.

Wheeler. — The Histoet of India eeom the Eaeuest Ages. By J.

Talboys Wheeler, Assistant Secretary to the GoTernment of India in the
Foreign Department, etc. etc. Demy 8to. c). 1867-1881.
Vol. I. The Vedic Period and the MahaBharata. pp.lxxv. and 576. OutofPrint.
Vol. II., The Kamayana and the Brahmanic Period, pp. Ixxxviii. and 680, with
two Maps. 21«. Vol. III. Hindu, Buddhist, Brahmanical Revival, pp. 484,
with two maps. 18s. Vol. IV. Part I. Mussulman Rule. pp. xxxii. and 320.
14s. Vol. IV. Part II. Moghul Empire — ^Aurangzeb. pp. xxviii. and 280. 12s.

Wheeler. — Eaelt Recoeds of British India. A History of the

English Settlement in India, as told in the Government Eecords, the works of
old travellers and other contemporary Documents, from the earliest period
down to the rise of British Power in India. By J. Talboys Wheeler.
Eoyal 8vo. cloth, pp. xxxii. and 392. 1878. 15».

Williams. — Modben India and the Indiajts. See Triibner's Oriental

Series, p. 3.

Wilson. — Panjab Customaet Law. Vol. IV. Geneeai Code of
Tribal Custom in the Sirsa District op the Pdnjab. Drawn up by J.
Wilson, Settlement Officer. Imperial 8vo. pp. viii. and 194, cloth. 1886. 7«.

Wirgman. — A Sketch Book of Japan. By C. Wiegman. Contain-
ing 39 Humorous Sketches on the Manners and Customs of the Japanese, with,
accompanying Explanations. Eoyal 8vo. oblong, bound in Japanese gilt cloth.
1885. 15s. V

Wise. — Commentaet on the Hindu System of Medicine. By T. A.
Wise, M.D., Bengal Medical Service. 8vo., pp. xi. and 432, cloth. 7«. 6d.

Wise. — Review of the Hisioey of Medicine. By Thomas A.
Wise, M.D. 2 vols. 8vo. cloth. Vol. I., pp. xcviii. and 397 : Vol. II.,
pp. 574. 10s. '

Worsaae.— The Pee-Histoey of the Noeth, based on Contempobaey
Memorials. By the late Chamberlain J. J. A. Worsaae, Dr. Phil Hon
F.S.A., F.S.A. Scot., M.R.I.A., &c., &c. Translated, with a brief Meioir of
the Author, by H. F. Morland Simpson, M.A. Crown 8vo. pp xxx and
206, cloth, with Map and Illustrations. 1886. 6».

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Bill, London, E.C^ 41

Wright. — The Celt, ihb Eomaw, and the Saxon ; a History of the
Early Inhabitante of Britain down to the Conversion of the Anglo-Saxons to
Christianity. Illustrated by the Ancient Remains brought to light by Recent
Research. By Thomas Wkight, M.A., F.S.A., &o., &c. Corrected and En-
larged Edition. Crown 8vo. pp. xiv. and 662, with nearly 300 Engravings, cloth.
1885. a<.

THE RELIGIONS OE THE EAST.

Adi Granth (The) ; oe, The Holt Sceiptuees of the Sikhs, trans-
lated from the original Gurmukhl, with Introductory Essays, by Dr. Ernest
Trumpp, Prof. Oriental Languages, Munich. Koy. 8vo. cl. pp. 866. £1 l2s. M,

Alabaster. — The "Wheel oe the Law : Buddhism illustrated from

Siamese Sources by the Modern Buddhist, a Life of Buddha, and an account of
the Phrabat. By Henry Alabastek, Interpreter of H.M. Consulate-General
in Siam. Demy 8vo. pp. Iviii. and 324, cloth. 1871. 14s.

Amberley. — An Analysis oe Reliqiotts Belief. By Yisooitnt

Amberley. 2 vols. 8vo. cl., pp. xvi. 496 and 612. 1876. 30«.

Apastamhiya Dharma Sutram. — Aphoeisms op the Sacbed Laws vs

THE Hindus, by Apastamba. Edited, with a Translation and Notes, by G. Biihler.
2 parts. 8vo. cloth, 1868-71. £\ 4«. 6d.

Arnold. — The Light of Asia ; or, The Great Eenunciation (Maha-

bhinishkramana). Being the Life and Teaching of Gautama, Prince of India,
and Founder of Buddhism (as told by an Indian Buddhist). By Sir EDWm
Arnold, M.A., K.C.I.E., etc. Cheap Edition. Grown 8vo. parchment, pp.
xvi. and 238. 1887. 3s. 6<?. Library Edition, post 8vo. cloth. Is. 6d.
Illustrated Edition. 4to. pp. xx. -196, cloth. 1884. 21».

Arnold. — Im>iA^ Poetet. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," page 4,

Arnold. — Pearls op the Faith; or, Islam's Eosary. Being the
Ninety-nine Beautiful Names of Allah (Asma-el-'Husna), with Comments in
Yerse from various Oriental sources as made by an Indian Mussulman. By
Sir E. Arnold, M.A., K.C. I.E., etc. Fourth Ed. Cr. 8vo. cl., pp. xYi.-320,
1887. 7s. 6d.

Balfour. — Taoist Texts ;_ Ethical, Political, and SpeculatiTe. By
F.H.Balfour. Imp. Svo. pp. vi.-118, cloth. [1884.] 10s. 6il.

Ballantyne. — The Sankhya Aphorisms of Kapila. See p. 6.

Sanerjea. — The Asian Witness, or the Testimony of Arian Scriptures
in corroboration of Biblical History and the Rudiments of Christian Doctrine.
Including Dissertations on the Original Home and Early Adventures of Indo-
Arians. By the Rev. K. M. Banerjea. Bto. sewed, pp. iviii. and 236. 8s. 6d.

fiarth. — Eeligions of India. See "Triibner's Oriental Series,"
page 4.

Beal.^A Catena op Buddhist Sceiptuees peom the Chinese. By S.
Bbal, B.A. Svo. cloth, pp. xiv. and iSe. 1871. 15s.

Beal. — The Eomantio Legend op Sakhta Buddha. From the
Chinese-Sanscrit by the Rev. S. Beal. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. 400. 1875. 12s.

Seal. — The Dhajimapada. See "Triibner's Oriental Series," page 3,
Digitized by Microsoft®

42 fAngmUic Fublications of Truhner §• Go,

Beal. — AssTEAci of Potje Leciukes on Bitdbhist LrrEEATUEE ur Chkta,
Delivered at University College, London. By Samuel Beal. Demy 8vo.
cloth, pp. 208. 1882. 10*. ^d.

Beal.— Buddhist Kecords of the "Western "World. See " Trubner'a

Oriental Series," p. 6.
Bigandet.— Gattdama, the Buddha of the Burmese. See "Trubner'a

Oriental Series," page 4.
Brockie. — Inbian Phtlosopht. Introductory Paper. By "Wiliiam

Brockie. Svo. pp. 26, sewed. 1872. 6<?.
Brown. — The Deevishes ; or, Obiental SpiEiitrALisM. By John P.

Brown, Sec. and Dragoman of Legation of U.S.A. Constantinople. With

twenty-four Illustrations. Svo. cloth, pp. viii. and 415. 14«.
Biimell. — The Obdijstances of Mahtj. See " Triibner's Oriental Series."

page 6.
Callaway. — The Eelisiotjs System oe the Amazulh. See page 51.
Chalmers. — The Oeigiw op the Chtnese; an Attempt to Trace the

connection of the Chinese with Western Nations in their Religion, Superstitions
Arts, Language, and Traditions. By John Chaxmebs, A.M. Foolscap Svo,
cloth, pp. 78. bs.

Chatterji. — The Bhagatab GIta ; oe The Loeb's Lay. — "With Com-
mentary and Notes, as well as references to the Christian Scriptures. Translated
from the Sanskrit for the benefit of those in search of Spiritual Light. By
MoHiNi M. Chatterji, M.A. Eoyal 8vo. pp. is. and 283, cloth. 1887. 10s. 6rf.

Clarke. — Ten Geeat Eeligions : an Essay in Comparative Theology.
By James Freeman Clarke. Svo. cloth, pp. x. and 528. 1S71. 10». dd.

Clarke. — Ten Gkeat Eeiigions. Part II. A Comparison of All
Religions. By J. F. Clarke. Demy 8vo., pp. xiviii.-414, cloth. 1883. 10s. 6rf.

Clarke. — Serpent anb Stva "Woeship, and Mythology in Central
America, Africa and Asia. By Hyde Clarke, Esq. Svo. sewed. Is.

Conway. — The Saceeb Anthology. A Book of Ethnical Scriptures.
Collected and edited by M. D. Conwat. 5th edition. Demy Svo. cloth,
pp. xvi. and 480. 1876. 12s.

Coomara Swamy. — The DathIvansa ; or, the History of the Tooth-

Eelic of Gotama Buddha. Pali Text, and English Translation, with Notes.
By Sir M. CoomXra Svf AMY, Mndeli^. Demy Svo. pp. 174, cloth. 1874. 10s. 6(f.
Translation only, with Notes, pp. 100. 6s.

Coomara Swamy. — Suita NipAta; or, the Dialogues and Discourses

of Gotama Buddha. Translated from the Pali, with Introduction and Notes.
By Sir M. Coomara Swamy. Cr. Svo. cloth, pp. xxxvi. and 160. 1874. 6s.
Coran. — Exteacts feom the Coean in the Oeiginai, with English
Rendering. Compiled by Sir William Muir, KCS.!., LL.D., Author of
the "Life of Mahomet." Second Edition. Crown Svo. pp. 72, cloth. 1886.
2s. M. ^^

Cowell. — The Saeva Daesana Samgeaha; See "Triibner's Oriental
Series," p. 5.

Cunningham.— The Bhiisa Topes ; or, Buddhist Monuments of Central
India : comprising a brief Historical Sketch of the Rise, Progress, and Decline
of Buddhism ; with an Account of the Opening and Examination of the various
Groups of Topes around Bhiisa. By Brev.-Major A. Cunningham. Illustrated.
Svo. cloth, 33 Plates, pp. xxxvi. 370. 1854. £1 2s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59 Ludgaie Sill, London, E.G. 43

Da Cunha. — Mbmoie oir ihe Hisiobt op the Tooth-Eelic op CEYLOif ;

with an Essay on the Life and System of Gautama Buddha. By J. Geesow
DA Ctjnha. 8to. cloth, pp.xiv.and 70 With 4 photographs and cuts. Is. 6rf.

Davids. — Bubbhisi Bieth Stoeies. See " Triibner's Oriental Series,"
page 4.

Davies.-^HiNBTj Philosophy. See " Trubner's Oriental Series," page 5.

Ddwsou. — DiCTioifAET OP HiifDu Mttholost, etc. See " Trubner's
Oriental Series," page 3.

Dickson. — The PaTiMOKKHA, being the Buddhist Office of the Con-
fession of Priests. The Pali Text, with a Translation, and Notes, by J. F.
Dickson, M.A. 8vo. sd., pp. 69. 2s.

Edkins. — Chinese Buddhism. See "Trubner's Oriental Series,"'
page 4'.

Edkins.— Kemgion m China, See " Trubner's Oriental Series," p. 6.

Eitel. — Handbook poe the Student op Chinese Buddhism:. By the
Rev. E. J. EiTEL, L. M. S. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. viii. and 224. 1870. 18».

Eitel. — Buddhism: its Historical, Theoretical, and Popular Aspects.
In Three Lectures. By Rev. E. J. Eitel, M.A. Ph.D. Third Revised
Edition. Demy 8vo. pp. x. — 146, limp cloth. 1885. 6s.

Examination (Candid) of Theism. — By Physicus. Post 8vo. cloth, pp.

xviii. and 198. 1878. 7s. 6A

Faber. — A Systbmaticai Digest of the Docteinbs op ConpucittSj
according to the Analects, Great Learning, and Doctrine of the Mean.
with an Introduction on the Authorities upon Confucius and Confucianism.
By Ernst FabeS, Rhenish Missionary. Translated from the German by P.
G. von Mollendorff. 8vo. sewed,pp. viii. and 131. 1875. 12«. 6d.

Faber. — Inteoduction to the Science op Chinese Eeiigion. A Critique
of Max Miiller and other Authors. By the Rev. E. Faeer, Rhenish Mission-
ary in Canton. Crown 8vo. stitched in wrapper, pp. xii. and 154. 1880. 7s. 6<?.

iFaber. — The Mind op Mencius. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," p. 5.

Giles. — Eecoed op the. Buddhist Kingdoms. Translated from the
Chinese by H. A. Giles, of H.M. Consular Service. 8vo. sewed, pp.
X.-129. 5s.

Gough. — The Philosophy op the Upanishads. See " Triibner's
Oriental Series," p. 5.

Gubernatis. — Zoological Mythology; or, the Legends of Animals.

By Anqelo de GuEERjf atis. Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Literature
in the Instituto di Studii Superior! e di Perfezionameuto at Florence, etc. In
2 vols. 8vo. pp. xxvi. and 432, vii. and 442. 28s.

Gnlshan I Raz : The Mystic Eose G-aeden op Sa'd ud din Mahmttd

Shabistari. The Persian Text, with an.English Translation and Notes, chiefly
V from the Commentary of Muhammed Bin Tahya Lahiji. By E. H. Whinpield,

M.A., late of H.M.B.C.S. 4to. cloth, pp. xvi. 94 and 60. 1880. IDs. 6<?.
Gulshan I Baz ; The Dialogue op the. Crown 8vo. pp. iv.-64,

cloth, 1887, 3s.
Hardy. — Cheistianity and Buddhism Compaeed. By the late Eet.

R. SSENOE Hardy, Hon. Member Royal Asiatic Society. 8vo. sd. pp. 138. 6s.
Haug.— The Paesis. See " Trubner's Oriental Series," p. 3.

Digitized by Microsoft®

44 Linguistic Publications of TrUbner 8f Co.

Haug. — The Aitaekta Beahmanam of the Eie Veda : containing the
Earliest Speculations of the Brahmans on the meaning of the Sacrifieial Prayers
and on the Origin, Performance, and Sense of the Rites of the Vedic Religion.
Sanskrit Text Edited, Translated, and Explained by Martin Hacg, Ph.D.
Superintendent of Sanskrit Studies in the Poona College, etc. 2 Vols. Crown
8to. pp. 312, and 544, cloth. 1863. £2 2s.

Hawken. — Upa-Sastea : Comments, Linguistic and Doctrinal, on

Sacred and Mythic Literature. By J. D. Hawken. 8vo. cloth, f p.viii. -288.

7s. 6d.

Hershon. — Taimubic Miscellant. See " Triibner's Oriental Series,"
page i.

Hodgson. — Essays eeiatiwg to Indian SrBracis. See " Triibner's

Oriental Series," p. 4.

Inman. — Ancient Pagan aitd Modeen Cheistiait Symbolism: Exposed
AND Explained. By Thomas Inman, M.D. Second Edition. With Illustra-
tions. Demy Svo. cloth, pp. xl. and 148. 1874. 7a. 6d.

Johnson. — Oeeental Eeligions and thei Relation to TJniversal Beli-
gion. By Samuel Johnson. I. India. 2 Volumes, post 8yo. pp. 408 and
402, cloth. 21s. II. Persia. Demy 8vo. pp. xliv.-784, cloth. 1885. I85.

Journal of the Ceylon Branch of the Boyal Asiatic Society. — For

Papers on Buddhism contained in it, see page 15.

Kistner. — Bitbbha and his Docteines. A Bibliographical Essay. By
Otto Kistner. Imperial 8vo., pp. iv. and 32, sewed. 2*. 6d.

Koran. — Arabic text. Lithographed in Oudh. Poolscap Svo. pp.

502, sewed. Lucknow, a.h. 1295 (1877). 9«.
Koran. — See also under " Goran."

Lane.— The Koeajt. See "Triibner's Oriental Series," p. 3.
liG^^G. — Confucianism nr Relation to Cheistianity. See page 62.

Xegge. — The Life and Teachings op Confucius. With Explanatory
Notes. By James Lbgge, D.D. Sixth Edition. Crown Svo. cloth, pp. vi.
and 338. 1887. 10s. &d.

legge. — The Life and "Woeks of Menctus. With Essays and Notes.

By James Legge. Crown Svo. cloth, pp. 402. 1875. 12s.

Legge.— The She-King; or. The Book of Ancient Poetry. Trans-
lated in English Verse, with Essays and Notes. By James Legge, D.D.,
LL.D., etc., etc. Pp. vi. and 432, cloth. 1876. 12s.

legge. — CnnrasE Classics. See page 62.

leigh. — The Religion of the Woeld. By H. Stone Leigh. 12mo.

pp. xii. 66, cloth. 1869. 2s. M.

M'Clatchie.— Confucian Cosmogony. A Translation (with the

Chinese Text opposite) of Section 49 (Treatise on Cosmogony) of the " Com-
plete Works " of the Philosopher Choo-Foo-Tze. With Explanatory Notes by
the Rev. Th. M'Ciatchie, M.A. SmalUto. pp. xviii. and 162. 1874. 12s. 6d.
Mitra.— Buddha Gaya, the Hermitage of Sakya Muni. By Rajen-
DE.ALALA MiTKA, LL.D., CLE. 4to. cloth, pp. xvi. and 258, with 51 Plates.
1878. £3.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Sill, London, KG. 45

Uuliamiued. — The Life op Muhammed. Eased on Muhammed Ibn

Ishak. By Abd ElMaliklbn Hisham. Edited by Dr. Febdinahd WiisTEN-

FELD. The Arabic Text. 8vo. pp. 1026, sewed. 21*. Introduction, Notes,

and Index in G-erman. 8to. pp. Ixxii. and 266, sewed. 7s. 6rf.

Tlie text baaed on the Manuscripts of tie Berlin, Leipsic, Gotha and Leyden Libraries, has

been carefully revised by the learned editor, and printed with the utmost exactness.

Muir. — TpATrsr.ATToiTs PEOM THE Sanskeit. See " Triibner's Oriental

Series," p. 3.
Muir. — OmGiNAi Sanskeit Texts. — See page 102.
Muir.^ExiBACis eeom the Cokajst. See Coraii, page 42.
UiUler. — The Sacked Htmns of the Beahmins, as preserved to us

in the oldest collection of religious poetry, the Rig-Veda-Sanhita, translated and
explained. By F. Mix MiiLLER, M.A., Oxford. Volume I. Hymns to the
MarutB or the Storm Gods. 8to. pp. clii. and 264. 1869. 12«. 6i!;.

Muller. — The Htmsts of the Era Yeda in the Samhita akto Pada
TuxTS. Reprinted from the Editio Princepa by F. Max Muller, M.A.
Second Edition. With the two texts on pairaUel pages. 2 toIs., 8to. pp.
800-828, stitched in wrapper. 1877. £1 12«.

STilller. — Iiecttjee on Bttdbhist Nihilism:. By F. Max MiIllee,
M.A. Delivered before the Association of German Philologists at Kiel, 28th
September, 1869. (Translated from the German.) Sewed. 1869. Is.

Newman. — Hebbbw Theism. By F. "W". Newman. Eoyal 8vo. stiff

wrappers,, pp. vifi. and 172. 1874. 4s. 6d.

Piry. — Le Saint Edit, Etude de Litteeatuee Chinoise. Preparge
par A. Thbophile Piry, du Service des Douanes Maritimes de Chine. 4to.
pp. XX. and 320, cloth. 1879. 21«.

Friaulx. — QuiESTioNEs Mosaic.^; or, the first part of the Book of

Genesis compared with the remains of ancient religions. By Osmond de
Beadvoir Priahlx. Sto. pp. viii. and 548, cloth. 12s.

Eedhouse.— The Mesneti. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," p. 4.

Rig-Veda Sanhita. — A Collection of Ancient HiNDtr Htmns. Con-
Btitutins; the First to the Eighth Ashtaka, or Boots of the Eig-veda ; the oldest
aufliDrity for the religious and social institutions of the Hindus. Translated
from the Original Sanskrit by the late H. H. 'Wiison, M.A. '2nd Ed., with
a Postscript by Dr. F. Hall. 8vo. cloth. Vol. I. pp. lii. and 348. 21s.
Vol. II. pp. XXX. and 346. 1854. 21s. Vol. III. pp. xxiv. and 525. 1857.
21s. Vol. IV. Edited by E. B.CowELL, M.A. pp.214. 1866. 14s.
A few copies of Vols. II. and III. still left. [ Vols. V. and VI. in the Press.

Rig-Veda Sanhita. — See MiIllee.

Rockhill, — Life of the Buddha. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," p. 6,

Sacred Books (The) of the East. Translated by various Oriental
Scholars, and Edited by F. Max Miiller. All 8vo. cloth. 1879-1888.

First Series,

Vol. I. The Upanishads. Translated by F. Max Mijller. Part I. The Khan-
dogya-Upanishad ; the Tali^Takara-Upanishad ; the Aitareya-Aranyaka ; the
Eaushitaki-Br&bmana-Upanishad and the V§.gasansyi-Samhita-Upanishad.
IDs. 6d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

46 Linguistic Publications of Triibner §• Co.

Vol. II. The Sacred Laws of the Aryas, as taught in the Schools of Apastamba,

Gautama, V^sishtha, and Baudhayana. Translated by Georg Biihler. Part I.

Apastamba and Grautama. 10s. 6d.
Vol. III. The Sacred Books of China. The Texts of Confucianism. Translated

by James Legge. Part I. The ShO. King. The Religious Portions of the Shih

King. The HsiSo King. 12s. 6d.
Vol. IV. The Zend-Avesta. Part I. The Vendtdad. Translated by James

Darmesteter. 10s. 6d.
Vol. V. Pahlavi Texts. Part I. The Bundahis, Bahman Tast, and Shayast-la

Shayast. Translated by E. W. West. 12«. 6d.
Vol. VI. The Qur'an. Part I. Translated by E. H. Palmer. 10s. Bd.
Vol. VII. The Institutes of Vishnu. Translated by Julius Jolly. 10s. 6d.
Vol. VIII. The Bhagavadgita with other extracts from the Mahabharata.

Translated by Kashinath Trunbak Telang. 10s. 6d.
Vol. IX. The Qur'an. Part II. Translated by E. H. Palmer. 10s. 6d.
Vol. X. The Suttanipata, etc. Translated by V. FausboU. 10s. 6d.
Vol. XI. The Mahaparinibbana Sutta ; the Tevigga Sutta ; the Mahasudaasana

Sutta; the Dhamma-Kakkappayattana Sutta. Translated by T. W. Rhys

Davids. 10s. 6d.

Vol. XII. The Satapatha-Brahmana. Translated by Prof. Eggeline. VoL I.
12s. 6d. oo. o

Vol. XIII. The Patimokkha. Translated by T. W. Ehys Davids. The Maha-
vagga. Part I. Translated by Dr. H. Oldenberg. 10s. Gd.

Vol. XIV. The Sacred Laws of the Aryas, as taught in the Schools of Vasishtha
and Baudhayana. Translated by Prof. Georg Biihler. 10s. 6d.

Vol. XV. The TJpanishads. Part II. Translated by F. MaxMiiller. 10s. 6d.

Vol. XVI. The T! King. Translated by James Legge. 10s. 6d.

Vol. XVII. The Mahavagga. Part II. Translated by T. W. Ehvs Davids, and
Dr. H. Oldenberg. 10s. 6d.

Vol. XVIII. The Dadistan-t Dintk and Mainy6-i Khard. Pahlavi Texts. Part

II. Translated by E. "W. "West. 12s. 6d.
Vol. XIX. The Fo-sho-hing-tsan-king. Translated by Samuel Beal. 10s. 6d.
Vol. XX. The Tayu-Purana. Translated by Prof. Bhandarkar, of Elphinstone

College, Bombay. 10s. 6d.

Vol. XXI. The Saddharma-pundarJka. Translated by Prof. Kern. 12s. 6d.
Vol. XXII. The Akaranga-Sutra. Translated by Prof. Jacobi. 10s. 6d.
Vol. XXIII. The Zend-Avesta. Part II. The Sirozahs, Yasts, and Nyayis.

Translated by J. Darmesteter. 10s. 6d.
Vol. XXIV. Pahlavi Texts. Part III. Dtna-t Main6g-i Khirad, ^'ikaud-

gumanik, and Sad Dar. Translated by E. W. West. 10s. 6d.

Second Series,

Vol. XXV. Mann. Translated by G. Biihler. 21s.

Vol. XXVI. The /Satapatha-Brahmana. Part II. Translated by J. Eggeling.

Vols. XXVII. and XXVIII. The Sacred Books of China. The Texts of Con-
fuoianism. Translated by J. Legge. Parts III. and IV. The LUi or Col-
lection of Treatises on the Rule of Propriety, or Ceremonial Usages. 12s, Gd each

Vols. XXIX. and XXX The G»ihya-sutras. Rules of Vedic Domestic Cere^

TTii /vTvvT ''y ,^«™,="'° Oldenberg. Part I. (Vol. XXIX.) 12s. 6d.
Part II. (Vol. XXX.) [In the JPress.]

Digitized by Microsoft®

• 57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E. C. 47

Vol. XXXI. The Zend-Avesta. Part III. The Tasua, Visparad, AMnagan,
G^hs, and Miscellaneous Fragments. . Translated by L. H. Mills. 12s. 6d.

In the Fresa,
Vol. XXXII. Vedic Hymns. Translated by P. Max Miiller.
Vol. XXXIII. ^drada, and some Minor Law-books. Translated by Julius Jolly.
Vol. XXXIV. The Ved§,nta-Sfl.tras, with .Sankara's Commentary. Translated
by G. Thibaut.

The Second Series will consist of Twenty-four Velumes in all.

Schlagintweit. — Buddhism isr Tibet. Illustrated by Literary Docu-
ments and Objects of Religious Worship. With an Account of the Buddhist
Systems preceding it in India. By Emil Schlaqintweit, LL.D. With a
Folio Atlas of 20 Plates, and 20 Tables of Native Prints in the Text. Royal
8vo., pp. xxiv. and 404. £2 2s.

Sell. — The Faith of Islam. By the Eev. E. Seli, FeUow of the
University of Madras. Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. xiv. and 270. 1880. 6*. &d.

Sell. — Ien-i-Tajwid ; or, Art of Eeading the Quran. By the Eev.
E. Sell, B.D. 8vo., pp. 48, wrappers. 1882. 2s. 6<?.

Sherring. — The Histdoo Pilbeims. By the Eev. M. A. Sheeeing,

Fcap. Svo. cloth, pp. vi. and 125. 5s.
Singh.. — Sakhee Book; or, the Description of Gooroo Gobind Singh's
Religion and Doctrines, translated from Gooroo Mukhi into Hindi, and after-
wards into English. By Sirdar Attar Singh, Chief of Bhadour. With the
Author's photograph. 8vo. pp. xviii. and 205. Benares, 1873. 15».

'Sinuett. — The Occuit Woeld. By A. P. Sinjstett, President of the
Simla Eclectic TheosopMcal Society. Fourth Edition. Fcap. 8vo., pp. xiv. and
140, cloth. 1884. 3s. Sd.

Syed Ahmad. — A Seetes or Essays on the Life of Mohammed, and

Subjects subsidiary thereto. By Syed Ahmad Khan Bahadqb, C.S.I. 8vo.
pp. 532, with 4 Genealogical Tables, 2 Maps, and Coloured Plate. £1 10s.

Tiele. — Outlines of the Histoet of Eeligion. See " Triibner's
Oriental Series," page 6.

Tiele. — History of Egyptian Eeligion. See " Triibner's Oriental Series,"
page 5.

Vishnu-Purana (The) ; a System of Hindu Mythology and Tradition

Translated from the Sanskrit, with Notes derived chiefly from other Pur&nas.
By the late H. H. Wilson, M.A., Boden Prof, of Sanskrit in the University
of Oxford, etc. Edited by Fitzedward Hall. 6 vols. 8vo. cloth. Vol. I. pp,
cxl. and200; Vol. II. pp. 343; Vol. III., pp. 348; Vol IV. pp.346; Vol.
V. Part I. pp. 392. 10s. dd. each. Vol. V., Part 2, Index, compiled by F. HaU.
pp. 268. 12s.

Wake. — The EvoLUTioif of Moealitt. A History of the Develop-
ment of Moral Culture. By C. S. Wake. Two vols. Svo. pp. 522 and
■ 486, cloth. 1878. 21s.

Wherry.— Commentary on the Quran. See page 5,

WHson. — Essays and Lectuees chiefly on the Eeligioh- op the
Hindus. By the late H. H. Wilson, M.A., F.R.S., etc. Collected and
. edited by Dr. Reinhold Host. 2 vols. pp. 414 and 422, cloth. 21s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

48 Linguistic PuhUcations of Triibner 8f Co,

COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.

POLYGLOTS.

Beames. — Outliites of Indian PHiLOLoaT. "With a Map, showing the
Distribution of the Indian Languages. By John Beames. Second enlarged and
revised edition. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. viii. and 96. 1868. 5s.

Beames. — A Compabaiite Geammas oi' the Mobeen Aetan Languages

OF India (to wit), Hindi, Panjabi, Sindhi, Gujarati, Marathi, Uriya, and
Bengali. By John Beames, Bengal C.S., M.E.A.S., &c. 8to. cloth. Vol.
I. On Sounds, pp. xvi. and 360. 1872. 16s. Vol. II. The Noun and the
Pronoun, pp. xii. and 348. 1875. 16s. Vol III. The Verb. pp. xii. and
316. 1879. 16s.
Bellows. — English Ottiline Vocabttlaet, for the use of Students of the
Chinese, Japanese, and other Languages. Arranged by John Bellows. With
Notes on the writing of Chinese with Roman Letters, by Professor Summebs,
King's College, London. Crown 8to., pp. 6 and 368, cloth. 1867. 6».

Bellows. — OtriLiNE Diciionaet,I'oethe tse oe Missionaeies, Explorers,
and Students of Language. ByF. Max Mullee, M.A., Oxford. With Introduc-
tion on the proper use of the English Alphabet in transcribing Foreign
Languages. Vocabulary compiled by J. Bellows. Crown 8vo. pp. 400,
limp morocco. 1867. 7s. 6d.

Caldwell. — A Compaeatite Geammae oe the Deavidian, oe Sottth-

Indian Family of Langcages. By the Eev. R. Caldwell, LL.D.
Second, enlarged. Edition. Demy 8to. pp. 806, cloth. 1875. 28s.

Calligaris. — Lb Compagnon de Totjs, ou Dictionnaiee Poltglotie.

ParleColonel LouisCalligahis, Grand Officier, etc. (French — Latin — Italian —
Spanish — Portuguese — German — English — Modern Greek — Arabic — Turkish.)
2 vols. 4to., pp. 1157 and 716. Turin. £4 4s.
Campbell. — Specimens oe the Languages oe India, including Tribes
of Bengal, the Central Provinces, and the Eastern Frontier. By Sir G.
Campbell, M. P. Folio, paper, pp. 308. 1874. £1 lit. 6d.

Clarke. — IIeseaeches in Peb-histoeic and Peoto-histoeic Compaea-
TivE Philology, Mythology, and Archaeology. See page 66.

Cnst. — ^Langttages of the East Indies. See page 3.

Cust. — Languages of Afeica. See page 6.

Edkins. — China's Place in Philology. An Attempt to show that the
Languages of Europe and Asia have a Common Origin. By the Rev. Joseph
Edkins. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. xxiii. and 403. 10s. 6d.

mils. — Eteuscan Numeeals. By E. Ellis, B.D. 8vo. pp. 52. 2s. 6d.

Ellis. — The Asiatic Affinities of the Old Italians. By Eobeet

Ellis, B.D., Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge, and author of " Ancient

Routes between Italy and Gaul." Crown 8vo. pp. iv. 1S6, cloth. 1870. 53.
Ellis. — On Numerals, as Signs of Primeval Unity among Mankind.

By Robert Ellis, B.D., Late Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge.

Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. viii. and 94. 3s. 6d.

Ellis. SOUECES OF THE EtEUSCAN AND BaSCIUE LANGUAGES. By EoBEET

Ellis, B.D., late Fellow of St. John's College, Cambridge, Demy 8vo. pp.
viiii.-166. 1886. 7s. 6d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

.57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E. C. 49

Ellis. — Peeuvia Sctthica. The Quichua Language of Peru: its
derivation from Central Asia with the American languages in general, and with
the Turanian and Iberian languages of the Old "World, including the Basque,
the Lycian, and the Pre-Aryan language of Etruria. By Robeut Ellis, B.D.
8to. cloth, pp. xii. and 219. 1876. 6s.

Geiger.-^CoSiEiBTjTiONs xo the Histoex of ihb Dkvelopment op the
HigMAN Eaoe. Lectures and Dissertations. By Lazakus Geioer. Translated

■ from the Second German Edition by David Ashek, Ph.D. Post 8vo. cloth,
pp. X. and 156. 1880. 6s.

Grey. — Handbook op Apeican, Atjstealian, and Polynesian Phi-
lology, as represented in the Library of His Excellency Sir George Grey,
K.C.B., Her Majesty's High Commissioner of the Cape Colony. Classed,
Annotated, and Edited by Sir George Grey and Dr. H. I. Blebk.

Vol. I. Part 1.— South Africa. 8to. pp. 18S. 20s.

Vol.1. Part 2.— Africa (i^orth of the Tropic of Capricorn). 8vo. pp. 70. 4i.

Vol. T. Part 3. — Madagascar. 8vo. pp. 24. 2j.

Vol. II. Part 1. — Australia. 8to. pp. iv. and 44. 35.

Vol. II. Part 2. — Pajjuan Languages of the Loyalty Islands and New Helirides, compris-
ing those of the Islands of Nengone, Lifu, Aneitum, Tana, and
others. 8vo. p. 12. \a.

Vol. II. Part 3.— Fiji Islands and Eotuma (with Supplement to Part 11., Papuan Lan-
guages, and Part I., Australia). 8vo. UD. 34. 2s.

Vol. II. Part 4. — New Zealand, the Chatham Islands, and Auckland Islands. 8vo. pp.
76. 7s.

Vol.11.- V^vti {continuation). — Polynesia and Borneo. 8vo. pp. 77-154. 7s.

Vol. III. Part 1.— Manuscripts and Incunables. 8vo. pp. viii. and 24. 2s.

Vol. IV. Part 1.— Early Printed Books. England. 8vo. pp. vi. and 266. 12s.

Oubernatis, — Zoological Mythology; or, the Legends of Animals.

By Anoelo BE Gubeknatis, Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Literature
in the Instituto di Studii Superiori e di Perfezionamento at Florence, etc. In
2 vols. 8vo. pp. xxxvi. and 432, vii. and 442. 28s.

Hoernle. — A Compaeative Geammae of the Gattdian Langtase, with
Special Reference to the Eastern Hindi. With Language Map and Table of
Alphabets. By A. F.E. Hoernle. Demy 8vo. pp. 474. 1880. 18s.

Eilgour. — The Hebeew oe Ibeeian Eace, including the Pelasgians,
the Fhenicians, the Jews, the British, and others. By Henry Kilgour. 8vo.
siswed, pp. 76. 1872. 2s. 6d.

March. — A Compaeative Geammae of the Anglo-Saxon Language ;
in which its fqrms are illustrated by those of the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin,
Gothic, Old Saxon, Old Friesic, Old Norse, and Old Higli-German. By
Francis A. March, LL.D. Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. xi. and 253. 1877. 10s.

Notley. — A Compaeative Geammae op the Feench, Italian, Spanish,
and PoRTUQUEaE LANGUAGES. By Edwin A. Notlet. Crown oblong 8vo.
cloth, pp. XV. and 396. 7s. 6d.

Oppert. — On the Classification of Languages. A Contribution to Com-
parative Philology. By Dr. G. Oppert. 8vo. paper, pp. vi. and 146. 1879. 7s.6rf.

Oriental Congress. — Eeport of the Proceedings of the Second Interna-
tional Congress of Orientalists held in London, 1874. Eoy. 8vo. paper, pp. 76. 6«.

Oriental Congress — Teansactions of the Second Session op the
International Congress op Orientalists, held in London in September,
1874. Edited by Egbert E. Douglas, Honorary Secretary. Demy 8vo.
cloth, pp. viii. and 456. c^feed by Microsoft® .

50 Linguistic Publications of Trilbner 8f Co.,

Pezzi. — Aetaw Philology, according to the most recent Eesearches
(Glottologia Aria Recentissima), Remarks Historical and Critical. By
DoMENico Pezzi, Membro della Facolta de Filosofia e lettere della R.
Universit. di Torino. Translated by E. S. Roberts, M.A., Fellow and Tutor
of Gonviile and Caius College. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. xvi. and 199. 6s.

Sayce. — An Assyrian Grammar for Comparative Purposes. By A. H.
Sayce, M.A. 12mo. clotli, pp. xvi. and 188. 1872. Is. 6d.

Sayce. — The Peiitciples oi' Compaeatite Phllolost. By A. H.
Sayce, Fellow and Tutor of Queen's College, Oxford. Second Edition. Cr.
8vo. cl., pp. xxxii. and 416. 10s. 6d.

ScMeiclier. — Compendium of the Compaeatiye Geammae op the Indo-
European, Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin Languages. By August
Schleicher. Translated from the German bv H. Bendall, B.A., Chr.
Coll. Camb. 8to. cloth, Part I. Grammar. ' pp. 184. 1874. 7*. 6d.
Part II. Morphology, pp. viii. and 104. 1877. 6«.

Trubner's Collection of Simplified Grammars of the principal Asiatic
AND European Languages. Edited by Eeinhold Host, LL.D., Ph.D.
Crown 8to. cloth, uniformly bound.

I. — Hindustani, Persian, and Arabic. By the late E. H. Palmer, M.A.
Pp. 112. 5s.
II. — Hungarian. By I. Singer, of Buda-Pesth. Pp. vi. and 88. 4s. 6d.
III.— Basque. By "W. Van Eys. Pp. xii. and 52. 3s. 6d.
IV. —Malagasy. By G. "W. Parker. Pp. 66. 5s.
v.— Modem Greek. By E. M. Geldart, M.A. Pp. 68. 2s. 6d.
VI. — Roumanian. By M. Torceanu. Pp. viii. and 72. 5s.
VII. — Tibetan. By H. A. Jaschke. Pp. -piii. and 104. 5s.
VIII. — Danish. By E. C. Otte. Pp. viii. and 66. 2s. 6d.

IX. — Turkish. By J. W. Redhouse. Pp. xii. and 204. \0s. 6d.
X.— Swedish. By E. C. Otte. Pp. xii. and 70. 2s. 6d.
XI.— Polish. By W. E. MorfiU, M.A. Pp. viii. and 64. 3s. 6d.
XII.— Pali. By E. Miiller, Ph.D. Pp. xvi. and 144. 7s. Gd.
XIII.— Sanskrit. By H. Edgren. Pp. xii.-178. 10s. 6d.
XIV. — Gramraaire Albanaise. Par P. "W. Pp. x. and 170. 7s. 6rf.

XV. — Japanese. By B. H. Chamberlain. Pp. viii. and 108. 5s.
XVI.— Serbian. By W. R. MorfiU, M.A. Pp. viii. and 72. 4s. 6^:
XVII. — Cuneiform. By G. Bertin. Pp. viii-118. 6s.
{Others in Freparation.)

Triihner's Catalogue of Dictionaries and Grammars of the Principal

Languages and Dialects of the World. Considerably enlarged and revised, -with
an Alphabetical Index. A Guide for Students and Booksellers. Second Edition
8vo. pp. viii. and 170, cloth. 1882. 5s. '

*,• The first edition, consisting of 64 pp., contained 1,100 titles; tbe new edition consists of
170 pp., and contains 3,000 titles.

Trnmpp.— Geammab of the Pasto, or Language of the Afghans, com-
pared with the Iranian and North-Indian Idioms. By Dr. Ernest Trumpp
8vo. sewed, pp. xvi. and 412. 21s.

Weber.— Indian Liteeatuee. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," p. 3.
Wedgwood.— On the Oeioin op Langstjage. By Hensleigh Wedgwood

late Fellow of Christ's College, Cambridge. Fcap. 8vo. pp. 172, cloth. 3». 6rf!

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, Ludgate Sill, London, E.G. 61

WMtney. — Lah-gtjage and its Sxudt, with, especial reference to the
Indo-European Family of Languages. Seven Lectures by W. D. "Whitney,
Professor of Sanskrit, Yale College. Edited with Introduction, Notes, Grimm's
Law with Illustration, Index, etc., by the Eev. E. Mokris, M.A., LL.D.
Second Edition. Cr. 8vo. cl., pp. xxii. and 318. 1881. 5s.

Whitney. — Lakguase and the Study as Language : Twelve Lectures
on the Principles of Linguistic Science. By W. D. 'Whitnet. Fourth Edition,
augmented by an Analysis. Crown Svo. cloth, pp. xii. and 504. 1884. 10s. 6<?,

Whitney. — Oeiental and Linguistic Studies. By "W. D. "Whitnet,

Cr. 8vo. cl. 1874. Pp. x. and 418. 12s.
First Series. The Veda ; the Avesta ; the Science of Language.
Second Series. — The East and West — Religion and Mythology — Orthography and

Phonology — Hindvi Astronomy. Pp. 446. 12s.

GRAMMARS, DICTIONARIES, TEXTS,
AJS'D TRAIfSLATIONS.

AFRICAN LANGUAGES.

Bentley. — ^Dictionaet and Geammar of the Kongo Language, as
Spoken at San Salvador, the Ancient Capital of the Old Kongo Empire, West
Africa. Compiled by the Eev. W. Holman Bentley, Missionary of the
Baptist Missionary Society on the Kongo. With an Introduction by E. N.
Gust, Hon. Secretary of the Eoyal Asiatic Society. Demy 8yo. pp. xxiv. and,
718, with Table of Concords, cloth. 1888. £1 Is.

Bleak. — A Compasative Gteammab of South Afeican Languages. By

W. H. I. Bleek, Ph.D. Volume I. I. Phonology. II. The Concord.
Section 1. The Noun. Svo. pp. xxxvi. and 322, cloth. 1869. £i is.

Bleek, — A Beief Account of Bushman Folk Lobe and other Texts.

By W. H. I. Bleek, Ph.D., etc., etc. Folio sd., pp. 21. 1875. 2s. 6rf.
Bleek. — Ebtnaed the Fox in South Africa; or, Hottentot Fables.
Translated from the Original Manuscript in Sir George Grey.'s Library.
By Dr. W. H. I. Bleek, Librarian to the Grey Library, Cape Town,. Cape
of Good Hope. Post. Svo., pp. xxxi. and 94, cloth. 1864. 3s. 6d.

Callaway. — Izinganekwane, !N"ensum:ansumane, Nezindaba, Zabantu

(Nursery Tales, Traditions, and Histories of the Zulus). In their own words,
with a Translation into English, and Notes. By the Rev. H. Callaway, M.D.

Callaway. — The Keligious System of the Amazulu.

Part I. — Unkulunkulu ;- or, the Tradition of Creation as existing among the

Amazulu and other Tribes of South Africa, in their own words, with a translation

into English, and Notes. By the Rev. Canon Callaway, M.D. Svo. pp. 128,

sewed. 1868. 4s.
Part II. — Amatongo; or. Ancestor Worship, as existing among the Amazulu, in

their own words, with a translation into English, and Notes. By the Rev.

Canon Callaway, M.D. 1869. Svo. pp. 127, sewed. 1869. 4s.
Part III. — IzinyangaZokubula ; or. Divination, as existing among the Amazulu, in

their own words. With a Translation into English, and Notes. By the Eev.

Canon Callaway, M.D. Svo. pp. 150, sewed. 1870. 4s.
Part IV.— Abatakati, or Medical Magic and Witchcraft. Svo. pp. 40, sewed. Is. 6d.
Digitized by Microsoft®

52 Linguistic Publications of Triibner 8f Co.

Christaller. — A Dictiottaet, English, Tshi, (Asaute), Akea ; Tshi

(Chwee), comprising as dialects Ak4n (Asant^, Ak^m, Akaape'm, etc.) and
Fknti; Akra (Accra), connected with Adangme j Gold Coast, West Africa.
Enyiresi, Twi ae' Nkrait I Enlisi, Otsiii_ ke Ga

nsem - asekyere - nhoma. | wiemoi - aSisitsomij- wolo.

By the Rev. J. G. Cheistallbk, Rev. C. W. Lochbs, Rev. J. Zimmeemann.
16mo. 7s. 6d.

Christaller. — A Geammak of the Asante and Fante LANstrAGE, called

Tshi (Chwee, Twi) : based on the Akuapem Dialect, with reference to the
other (Akan and Fante) Dialects. By Rev. J. G. Christaller. 8vo. pp.
xxiv. and 203. 1875. 10s. 6d.

Christaller, — Dictionaet ob the Asante and Fante Language, called

Tshi (Chwee, Twi). With a Grammatical Introduction and Appendices on the

Geography of the Gold Coast, and other Subjects. By Eev. J. G. Chkibtaller.

Demy Svo. pp. xxviii. and 672, cloth. 1882. £1 5s.
Cust. — Sketch of the Modbkn Languages of Aeeica. See " Triibner's

Oriental Series," page 6.
Dohne. — The Fotje Gospels in Zulu. By the Eev. J. L. Dohne,

Missionary to the American Board C.F.M. Svo. pp. 208, cloth. 1866. 5s.
Dohne. — A Ztjltj-Kapie Dictionaet, etymologically explained, with

copious Illustrations and examples, preceded by an introduction on the Zulu-

Kafir Language. By the Rev. J. L. Dohne. Royal Svo. pp. xlii. and 418,

sewed. Cape" Town, 1857. 21s.

Grey. — Handbook or Afeican, Axtsiealian, and Poltnesian Phi-
lology. See page 49.

Grout. — The Isizultt : a Grammar of the Zulu Language ; accompanied
with an Historical Introduction, also with an Appendix. By Rev. Lewis Groitt,
Svo. pp. lii. and 432, cloth. 21».

Hahn. — Tsuni-JIGoam. See "Triibner's Oriental Series," page 5.

Kolhe. — A Language Study Based on Bantu; or, An Inquiry into
the Laws of Boot-Formation, the Original Plural, the Sexual Dual, and th&
Principles of Word-Comparison; with Tables Illustrating the Primitive Pro-
nominal System restored m the African Bantu Family of Speech. By the Eev.
F. W. KoLBE, of the London Missionary Society, formerly of the Rhenish
Herero Mission, Author of " An English-Herero Dictionary." Post Svo. pp.
viii. and 97, with Four Tables, cloth. 1888. 6s.

Erapf. — Dictionaet of the Suahhj Language. CompUed by the
Rev. Dr. L. Krapp, Missionary C.M.S. in East Africa. With an Outline of
Suahili Grammar. Eoyal Svo. pp. xl.-434, cloth. 1882. 30s.

Steere. — Shoet Specimens op the "Vocabularies of Thkee TJn-

PLBLISHED African Languages (Gindo, Zaramo, and Angazidja). Collected
by Edward Steere, LL.D. 12mo. pp. 20. 6rf.

Steere. — Collections foe a Handbook of the Ntamtvezi Language,
as spoken at Unyanyemhe. By E. Steere, LL.D. Fcap. pp. 100, cloth. Is. 6(f.

Tindall, — A Geammae and Vocabulakt of the Nam aqua- Hotieniox
Language. By Henry Tindall, Wesleyan Missionary. 8vo. pp. 124, sewed. 6s.

Zulu Izaga; That is, Proverbs, or Out-of-the-'Way Sayiags of the
Zulus. Collected, Translated, and interpreted by a Zulu Missionary. Crown
Svo. pp. iv. and 32, sewed. 2s. Gd.

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G. 53

ALBANIAJS^.

Grammaire Albanaise.— Par P. "W. Crown 8vo. pp viii. 170. clotli
1887. 7». 6d.

AMERICAN LANGUAGES.

Aboriginal American Literature, Library of. Edited by D. G.
Brinton, M.D. 8to. cloth. 1. The Chronicles of the Mavas. pp. 280.
£1 Is. (Or if with Set; 12s.) 2. The Iroquois Book of Kites. Edited by
H. Hale. jjp. 222. 12«. 3. The Comedy-Ballet of Gueguence. pp. 146. 10«.

, 4. A Migration Legend of the Creek Indians. By A. S. Gatschet. pp. 262.
12s. 5. The Lenape and their Legends. By D. G. Brihton, M.D. 8vo. pp.
262. lis. 6. The Annals of the Cakchiquels. The Text, with a Translation,
Notes and Introduction, by D. 6. Bbinton, M.D. pp. 240. 12s. 7. Ancient
Nahuatl Poetry. Text and Translation by D. G. Brinton, M.D. pp. 182. 12*.

Byiugton. — Gkammae op the Choctaw Language. By the E,ev. Ctbus

Byington. Edited from the Original MSS. in Library of the American
Philosophical Society, by D. G. Brinton, M.D. Cr. 8vo. sewed, pp. 66. 7s. 6d.

Dllis. — PERnTTA ScTiHicA. See page 49.

Howse. — A Gbammab of the Ceeb Langttage. "With, which is com-
bined an analysis of the Chippeway Dialect. By Joseph Howse, E«q.,
F.R.6.S. 8vo. pp. XX. and 324, cloth. 7s. 6d.

Markham. — OLLAiraA: A Dkama in the Qthchua Language. Text,

Translation, and Introduction, By Clements R. Mahkham, F.R.G.S. Crown
8vo., pp. 128, cloth. 1871. Is.Gd.

]|[arkliain. — A Memoib op the Lady Ana de Osobio,, Countess of

Chinohon, and Vice-Queen of Peru, a.d. 1629-39. With a Plea for the correct
spelling of the Chinchona Genus. By C. E. Markham, C.B., Member of the
Imperial Academy Naturae Curiosorum, with the Cognomen of Chinchon.
Small 4to. pp. xii. and 100. With two Coloured Plates, Map and Illustrations.
Handsomely bound. 1874. 28«.

Hatthews. — Ethnology and Phuology op the Hidatsa Indians.
By Washington Matthews, Assistant Surgeon, TT.S. Army. 8to. cloth.
£1 lis. 6d.
Contents :~Ethnography, Philology, Grammar, Dictionary, and English-Hidatsa "Vocabulary.

HodaL — Los Vincitlos de Ollanta y CTrsi-'KcirYLi.OE. Deama en

QuiCHUA. Obra Compilada y Espurgada con la Version Castellana al Frente
de su Testo per el Dr. Jose Fernandez Nodal, Abogado de los Tribunales
de Justicia de la Reptiblica del Perlj. Bajo los Anspicios de la Redentora
Sociedad de Fil4ntropos para Mejoror la Suerte de los Aborijenes Peruanos.
Roy. 8vo. bds. pp. 70. 1874, 1s.6d.

Ifodal. — Elementos db GEAitiiicA Quichua 6 Idioma db ros Tncas.

Bajo los Anspicios de la Redentora, Sociedad de Fil&ntropos para mejorar la
suerte de los Aborijenes Peruanos. Por el Dr. Jose Fernandez Nodal,
Abogado de los Tribunales de Justicia de la Eepdblica del PerH. Royal 8vo.
cloth, pp. xvi. and 441. Appendix, pp. 9. £1 Is.

Allanta: A Deama in the Quichtja Language. See under Makkham

and under Nodal.

Digitized by Microsoft®

54 Linguistic Publications of Truhner 8f Co.,

Fimentel. — Cttadeo besceiptivo t compaeatito de las LEi^GtrAS
iNDiGENAS DE MEXICO, Tratado de Filologia Mexicana. Par Francisco
PiMENTEL. 2 Edicion unica eompleta. 3 Tolumes 8vo. Mexico, 1875.
£2 2s.

Thomas. — The Theoet and Practice op Ceeole Gbammae. By J. J-
Thomas. Portof Spain (Trinidad), 1869. 1 vol. 8vo. bds.pp. viii.and 135. 12s.

ANGLO-SAXON.

Harrison and Baskervill. — A Handt Bictionaet oe Anglo-Saxon
Poetry. Based on Groschopp's Grein. Edited, Revised, and Corrected, with
Grammatical Appendix, List of Irregular Verbs, and Brief Etymological
Features. By J. A. Harrison, Prof, of English and Modern Languages in
Washington and Lee University, Virginia ; and W. Baskertili., Ph.D. Lips.,
Prof, of English Language and Literature in Vanderbilt University, Nashville^
Ten. Square 8vo. pp. 318, cloth. 1886. 12s.

March. — A Compaeative Geammae oe the Anglo-Saxon Language ;

in which its forms are illustrated by those of the Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, Gothic,
Old Saxon, Old Friesic, Old Norse, and Old High-German. By Fbancis A.
March, LL.D. Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. xi. and 253. 1877. 10s.

March. — luTEODtroTioN to Anglo-Saxon. An Anglo-Saxon Eeader.
"With Philological Notes, a Brief Grammar, and a Vocabulary. By F. A.
March, 1,L.D. 8vo. pp. viii. and 166, cloth. 1870. 7s. 6ii.

Bask. — A Geammae oe the Anglo-Saxon Tongue. Prom the Danish
of Erasmus Rask, Professor of Literary History in, and Librarian to, the
University of Copenhagen, etc. By B. Thorpe. Third edition, corrected
and improved, with Plate. Post 8vo. pp. vi. and 192, cloth. 1879. 5s. 6d.

Wright. — ^Anglo-Saxon anb Old-English Vocabolaetes. Seepage 79.

ARABIC.

Ahlwardt. — The DivIns of the Six Ancient Aeabic Poets, Ennabiga,
'Antara, Tarafa, Zuhair, 'Algama, and Imraolgais ; chiefly according to the
MSS. of Paris, Gotha, and Leyden, and the collection of their Fragments : with
a complete list of the various readings of the Text. Edited by W. Ahlwardt,
8vo. pp. XXX. 340, sewed. 1870. 12s.

Alif Lallat wa Lailat. — The Aeabian Nights. 4 vols. 4to. pp. 495,

493,442,434. Cairo, A.H. 1279 (1862). £3 3s.

This celebrated Edition of the Arabian Nights is now, for the first time, offered at a price
which makes it accessible to Scholars of limited means.

Athar-ul-Adhar — Teaces op Centueies; or, Geographical and Historical

Arabic Dictionary, by Selim Khhri and Selim Sh-hade. Geographical
Parts I. to v.. Historical Parts I. and II. 4to. pp. 980 and 384. Price
7s. 6d. each part. [7« course of publication.

Badger. — An English-Aeabic Lexicon, in which the equivalents for
English words and Idiomatic Sentences are rendered into literary and colloquial
Arabic. By G. P. Badger, D.C.L. 4to. cloth, pp. xii. and 1248. 1880. £4.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G. 56

Butrus-al-Bustany.— i_J,l*;;Jl i^b i_J^ An Arabic Eneylopsedia

of Universal Knowledge, by Butrus-al-Bu8Tany, the celebrated compiler
of Mohit ul MohJt (Lu^il ^?■s:'•), »"^ ^^'"^ ^1 Mohtt (k-js^l JkS).
This work will be completed in from 12 to 15 Vols., of which Vols. I. to VII.
are ready, Vol. I. contains letter 1 to <__»! ; Vol. II. <_>! to jl ; Vol. III.
J\ to ^ Vol. IV. ^to ^\ Vol. V. b to ^_jj Vol. VI V to js^. Vol-

VII. 7*- to (♦li. Vol. VIII. (♦'^ to JJ. IXjjto^-. Small folio, cloth,
pp. 800 each. £1 lis. 6d. per Vol.

Carletti. — Methode TnliOKico-PRAiiauE de LAwenE Aeabe. Par P.
V. Carletti. 4to. pp. 318, wrapper. 10«.

CottOU. — Akabic Peimee. Consisting of 180 Short Sentences contain-
ing 30 Primary "Words prepared according to the Vocal System of Studying
Language. By General Sib A. Coiton, K.C.S.I. Cr. 8vo. cloth, pp. 38. 2».

Hassoun. — The Diwan oe Hatim Tai, an Old Arabic Poet of the
Sixth Century of the Christian Era. Edited by R. Hassoun. "With Illustra-
tions. 4to. pp. 43. is. 6d.

Jami, MuUa. — Saiaman U Absal. An Allegorical Romance ; being
one of the Seven Poems entitled the Haft Aurang of Mulla JamT, now first
edited from the Collation of Eight Manuscripts in the Library of the India
House, and in private collections, with various readings, by Fobbes
Faloonek, M.A., M.K.A.S. 4to. cloth, pp. 92. 1860. 7.?. 6d.

Koran (The). Arabic text, lithographed in Oudh, a.h. 1284 (1867).

16mo. pp. 942. 6s.

Koran. — Exteacis eeom the Coean in the Oeiginal, with English
Ebndbeinb. Compiled by Sir William Muie, K.C.S.I., LL.D., Author of
the "Life of Mahomet." Second Edition. Crown 8vo. pp. 72, cloth. 1885.
2s. 6cl.

Koran. — See Wherry, page 5.

Ko-ran (Selections from the). — See " Trubner's Oriental Series," p. 3.

Leitner. — ^Inieodttciion to a Philosophical Geammae oe Aeabic.

Being an Attempt to Discover a Few Simple Principles in Arabic Grammar.
By G. W. Leitner. Svo. sewed, pp. 62. Lahore. 4s.

Morley. — A Dbsceiptite Catalogtoe of the Histoeicai Manttsceipis

in the Arabic and Persian Languages preserved in the Library of the Eoyal
Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland. By William H. Morley,
M.R.A.S. Svo. pp. viii. and 160, sewed. London, 1854. 2s. Qd.

Muhammed. — The Liee oe Mtthammed. Based on Muhammed Ibn
Ishak. By Ahd El Malik Ibn Hisham. Edited by Dr. Ferdinand WiisTEN-
FELD. The Arabic Text. Svo. pp. 1026, sewed. Price 21s. Introduction,
Notes, and Index in German. Svo. pp. Ixxii. and 266, sewed. 7s. &d. Each
part sold separately.
The text based on the Manuscripts of the Berlin, Leipsic, Gotha and Leyden Libraries, has

been carefully revised by the learned editor, and printed -with the utmost exactness.

Newman. — A Handbook oe Modeen Aeabic, consisting of a Practical

Grammar, with numerous Examples, Dialogues, and Newspaper Extracts, in a
European Type. By F. W. Newman, Emeritus Professor of University
College, London. Post Svo. pp. xx. and 192, cloth. 1866. 6s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

56 Linguistic Publications of Truhner (^ Co.,

Newman. — A DicTioisrAET of Modeen Aeabic. — 1. Anglo-Arabic

Dictionary. 2. Anglo-Arabic Vocabulary. 3. Arabo-English Dictionary. By

F. W. Newman, Emeritus Professor of University College, London. In 2

vols, crown 8vo., pp. xvi. and 376—464, cloth. £1 Is.
Palmer. — The Song of the Eeed; and other Pieces. By E. H.

Palmek, M.A., Cambridge. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. 208. 1876. 5a.
Among the Contents will be found translations from Hafiz, from Omer el Klieiy4m, and
from other Persian as well as Arabic poets.

Palmer. — HnsrutrsTAin:, PEEsiAif, and Aeabic Geammae Simpxhted.
By E. H. Palmer. M.A., Cambridge. Second Edition. Crown 8To. pp.
viii.-104, cloth. 1885. 5«.

Rogers. — Notice on the Dinaes op the Abbasside Dynasty. By
Edward Thomas Eogebs, late H.M. Consul, Cairo. 8vo. pp. 44, with a
Map and four Autotype Plates. 5s.

Schemeil. — El Mubtakee; or, Eirst Born. (In Arabic, printed at
Beyrout). Containing Five Comedies, called Comedies of Fiction, on Hopes
and Judgments, in Twenty-six Poems of 1092 Verses, showing the Seven Sts^es
of Life, from man's conception unto his death and burial. By Emin Ibbahiu
Schemeil. In one volume, 4to. pp. 166, sewed. 1870. 5s.

Syed Ahmad. — Life op Mohammed. See Mubammed.
Wherry. — Commentary on the Quran. See page 5.

ASSAMESE.

Bronson. — A Dictionaey in Assamese and English. Compiled by

M Bbonson, American Baptist Missionary. 8vo. calf, pp. viii. and 609. £2 2s.

%* Catalogue of Assamese Books to he had of Messrs. Triibner % Co., Fost free for
one penny stamp.

ASSYRIAN (Cuneiform, Accad, Babylonian).
Bertin. — Abeidged Geammaes op the Languages op the Cuneipoem

Inscriptions. By G. Beetin, M.R.A.S. I. A Sumero-Akkadian Grammar.

II. An Assyro-Babylonian Grammar. III. A Yannic Grammar. IV. A Medic

Grammar. V. An Old Persian Grammar. Crown 8vo. pp. viii.-118, cloth.
1888. 5s.

Budge. — AssTEiAN Texts, Selected and Arranged, with Philological
Notes. By E. A. Budge, B.A., Assyiian Exhibitioner, Christ's College,
Cambridge. Crown 4to. cloth, pp. viii. and 44. 1880. 7s. &d.

Budge. — The Histoey op Esaehaddon. See " Triibner's Oriental
Series," p. 4.

Catalogue (A) of leading Books on Egypt and Egyptology, and on
Assyria and Assyriology, to be had at the affixed prices, of TrUbner and Go.
pp. 40. 1880. Is.

Clarke. — Eeseaeches in Phe-histoeic and Peoto-histoeic Compaea-
TivE Philology, Mythology, and ARCH.aE0L0GY, in connexion with the
Origin of Culture in America and the Accad or Sumerian Families. By Hyde
Clarke, Demy 8vo. sewed, pp. xi. and 74. 1876. 2s. 6rf.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London E. C. :57

Cooper. — An Arcliaic Dictionary, Biographical, Historical and Mytho-
logical ; from the Egyptian and Etruscan Monuments, and Papyri. By W. E.
.Cooper. London, 1876. 8vo. olotli. 15«.

Hincks. — Specimen Chapters of as Assthian Grammae. By the
late EeT. E. Hincks, D.D., Hon. M.E.A.S. 8vo., sewed, pp. 44. Is.

Leuormant (F.) — Chaldean Magic; its Origin and Development.
Translated from the French. With considerable Additions by the Author.
London, 1877. 8to. pp. 440. 12s.

Luzzatto. — Geammae of tee Biblical Chalbaio Language and the
Talmud Babylonioal Idioms. By S. D. Luzzatto. Translated from the
Italian by J. S. GrOLDAMMER. Cr. 8vo. cl., pp. 122. 7s. 6cl.

Bawlinson. — Notes on the Eaely Histoey of Babylonia. By

Colonel Eawlinsok-, C.B. 8vo. sd., pp. 48. Is.
Rawlinson. — A Commentary on the Cuneifoem Insceiptions of

Babylonia and Assyria, including Readings of the Inscription on the Nimrud
Obelisk, and Brief Notice of the Ancient Kings of Nineveh and Babylon,
by Major H. C. Rawlin.son. 8vo. pp. 84, sewed. London, 1850. 2.?. 6d.

Bawlinson. — Insceiption op Tiglath Pileser I., Eing op Assybia,
B.C. 1150, as translated by Sir H.Eawlinson, Fox Talbot, Esq., Dr. Hincks.
and Dr. Oppert. Published by the Eoyal Asiatic Society. 8vo. sd., pp. 74. 2s.

Rawlinson. — Otttiines op Assyrian History, from the Inscriptions of

NineTeh. By Lieut. Col. Kawlinsqn, C.B. , followed by some Eemarks by
A. H. Layakd, Esq., D.C.L. 8vp., pp. xliv., sewed. London, 1 8S2. Is.

Becords of the Past : being English Translations of the Assyrian and
the Egyptian Monuments. Published under the sanction of the Society of
Biblical Archeology. Edited by S. Birch. Vols. 1 to 12. 1874 to 1879.
£1 Us. 6d. or 3s. ed. each vol.

Eenan. — Ajs Essay on the Age and ANTiatriTY op the Book op

Nabathjean Agriculture. To which is added an Inaugural Lecture on the
Position of the Shemitic Nations in the History of Civilization. By M. Ernest
Eenan, Membredel'Iijistitut. Crown 8vo., pp.xvi. and 148, cloth.^ 3s. 6d.

tSayce. — An Assyrian Geammae poe Comparative Purposes. By
A. H. Sayce, M.A. 12mo. cloth, pp. xvi. and 188. 1872. 7s. 6d.

Sayce. — An Elementary Geammae and Reading Book of the Assyrian
Language, in the Cuneiform Character : containing the most complete Syllabary
yet extant, and which will serve also as a Vocabulary of both Accafian and
Assyrian. Loudon, 187S. 4to. cloth. 9s.

Sayce. — Lectuees upon the Assyrian Language and Syllabary.
London,. 1877. Large 8vo. 9s. 6d.

Sayce. — Babylonian Litbeaturb. Lectures. London, 1877. 8vo. 4s.

Smith. — The Assyeian Eponym Canon ; containing Translations of the
Documents of the Comparative Chronology of the Assyrian and Jewish King-
doms, from the Death of Solomon to Nebuchadnezzar. By E. Smith. London,
1876. 8vo. 9s. ,

AUSTRALIAN LANGUAGES.

^rey. — Handbook op Afeican, Australian, and Polynesian Phi-
lology. Bee page 49.

Digitized by Microsoft®

58 Linguistic Puhlications of Triibner 8f Co.,

BASQUE.

Ellis. — SouECES OP THE Bascitje and Etettscan Lajstgitages. See p. 48.

Van Eys. — Otjtiines op BAsauE Geammae. By "W. J. Yan Ets.
Crown 8to. pp. sii. and 52, cloth. , 1883. 3». 6(?.

BENGALI.

Catalogue of Bengali Boohs, sold hy Messrs. Triibner % Co., post free for penny stamp.

Browne. — A BIngIli Peimee, in Eoman Character. By J. F. Beowne,

B.C.S. Crown 8vo. pp. 32, clotK 1881. 2s,
Charitabali (The) ; oe, Insteuctive Biogeapht by Istaeachandea

ViDTASAGAEA. With a Vocabulary of all the "Words occurring in the Text, by

J. F. Blumhardt, Bengali Lecturer University College, London ; and Teacher

of Bengali Cambridge TJniversity. 12mo. pp. 120-iv.-48, cloth. 1884. 5s.
Mitter. — Bengali and English Diciionaet for the Use of Schools.

Eeyised and improved. 8vo. cloth. Calcutta, 1860. Is. 6d.
Sykes. — English and Bengali Diciionaet for the Use of Schools.

Revised by Gopee Kissen Mittek. 8vo. cloth. Calcutta, 1874. 7s. 6d.
Yates. — A Bengali Geammae. By the late Eev. "W. Tates, D.D.

Reprinted, with improvements, from his Introduction to the Bengali Language.

Edited by I. Wenger. Fcap. 8vo. bds, pp. iv. and 160. Calcutta, 1864. 4».

BIHARI.

Catalogue of Bihari Books, sold by Messrs. Triibner f Co., post free for penny stamp.

Grlerson. — Seyen Geammaes op the Dialects and Sttb-Diaiects of
the Bih&ri Language Spoken in the Province of Bihti,r, in the Eastern Portion
of the N. W. Provinces, and in the Northern Portion of the Central Provinces.
Compiled under orders of the Government of Bengal. By George E. GRiEBSoif,
B.C.S., Joint Magistrate of Patna. Part 1. Introduotory ; 2. Bhojpdri ;
3. Magadhi ; 4. Maithil-Bhojpuri ; 5. South Maitbili ; 6. South Maithil-
Magadhi ; 7. Not yet Published. Fcap. 4to. cloth. Price 2s. 6d. each.

Hoernle and Grierson. — Compabative Diciionaet op the Bihaei

Language. Compiled by A. F. R. Hoernle, of the Bengal Educational Service,
and G. A. Grierson, of Her Majesty's Bengal Civil Service. (Published
under the Patronage of the Government of Bengal.) Part I. From A to
Ag'mani. 4to. pp. 106, wrapper. 1885. 5«.

BRAHOE (Beahui).

Bellew. — Feom the Indus to the Tigeis. A Narrative ; together with
Synoptical Grammar and Vocabulary of the Brahoe language. See p. 19.

Duka. — An Essay on the Beahui Geammae. By Dr. T. Duka.
Demy 8vo. pp. 78, paper. 1887. 3«. 6d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Sill, London, E. G. 59

BURMESE.
Hough's Gen-esal OrrTLiNES op Geogeapht (in Burmese). Ee^written

and enlarged by Eev. Jas. A. Haswbil. Large 8vo. pp. 368. Eangoon,

1874. 9s.
Judson. — A DiCTiONAET, English and Burmese, Burmese and English.

■ By A. Judson. 2 vols. 8vo. pp. iv. and 968, and viii. and 786. 25s. each.
Judson. — A Geammae oe the Bukmesb Langttage. 8vo. pp. 52,

boards. Bangoon, 1883. 3s.
Sloan. — A Practical Method with the Burmese Language. By W.

H. Sloan. Second Edition. Large 8vo. pp. 232. Rangoon, 1887. I2s. &d.
We-than-da-ya, The Stoet op, a Buddhist Legend. Sketched from

the Burmese Version of the Pali Text. By L. Allan Gobs, Inspector of

Schools, Burma. With five Illustrations by a native artist. 4to. pp. x. — 80,

paper. 1886. 6s.

CHINESE.

Acheson. — An Index to De. Wiixiams's "Syllabic Dictionaex oi' the
Chinese Language." Arranged according to Sir Thomas "Wade's System of
Orthography. Eoyal 8vo. pp. viii. and 124. Half bound. Hongkong. 1879. 18».

Bald'win. — A Manttal oe the Foochow Dialect. By Rev. C. C.

Baldwin, of the American Board Mission. 8vo. pp. viii.-256. 18s.

Balfour. — Taoist Texts. See page 41.

Salfour. — The Divine Classic op Nan-htta. Being the Works of
Chuang-Tsze, Taoist Philosopher. With an Excursus, and copious Annotations
in English and Chinese. Bv H. Balfour, F.R.G.S. Demy 8vo. pp. xxxviii.
and 426, cloth. 1881. lis".

Balfour. — Waips and Steats peom the Fae East ; being a Series of
Disconnected Essays on Matters relating to China. By F. H. Balfour. 8vo.
pp. 224, cloth. 1876. 10s. M.

Balfour. — Leaves feom mx Chinese Sckap Book. See page 6.

Ball. — The Cantonese-made-east Yocabulaet. A small Dictionary
in English and Cantonese, containing only Words and Phrases used in the
Spoken Language, with the Classifiers Indicated for each Noun, and Definitions
of the Different Shades of Meaning ; as well as Notes on the Different Uses of
some of the Words where Ambiguity might Otherwise Arise. By J. Dyeb
Ball, M.E.A.S., etc., of H.M.C.S., Hong Kong. Eoyal 8vo. pp. 6—27,
wrappers. 6s.

Ball. — Easy Sentences in the Cantonese Dialect, with a Vo-
cabulary. Being the Lessons in "Cantonese-made-easy" and " The Cantonese-
made-easy Vocabulary." By J. Dyer Ball, M.E.A.S., etc., of H.M.C.S.,
Hong Kong. Eoyal 8vo. pp. 74, paper. 7s. Qd.

Ball. — An English-Cantonese Pocket Vocabttlaey. Containing
Common Words and Phrases, Printed without the Chinese Characters, or Tonic
Marks, the Sounds of the Chinese Words being Eepresented by an English
Spelling as far as Practicable. By J. Dyer Ball, M.E.A.S., etc., Author of
" Cantonese-made-easy." Crown 8vo. pp. 8—24, cloth. 4s.

Beal. — The Buddhist TbipitakA, as it is known in China and Japan.
A Catalogue and Compendious Eeport. By Samuel Beal, B.A. Folio, sewed,
. pp. 117. 7s. 6rf.

Digitized by Microsoft®

60 Linguistic Publications of Trubner 8f Co.

Beal. — The Dhammapada. See "Triibner's Oriental Series," page 3.

Beal. — Buddhist Literature. See pages 6, 41 and 42.

Bretschneider.— See page 27.

Chalmers. — The ORiem op the Chistese; an Attempt to Trace the
connection of the Chinese with Western Nations, in their Religion, Superstitions,
Arts, Language, and Traditions. By John Chalmeks, A.M. Foolscap 8vo.
cloth, pp. 78. 5s.

Chalmers. — A Concise Khang-hsi Chutese Diciionaet. By the Eev.
J. Chalmers, LL.D., Canton. Three Vols. Royal 8to. bound in Chinese
style, pp. 1000. £1 IDs.

Chalmers. — The STKircnmE of Chiitese Chabactees, trifDEE 300

Primary Forms ; after the Shwoh-wan, 100 A.D., and the Phonetic Shwoh-wan
1833. By John Chalmehs, M.A., LL.D. 8 vo. pp. x- 199, with a plate, cloth.
1882. 12«. &d.

China Review; oe, Notes and Qtteeies on the Pae East. Pub-
lished bi-monthly. Edited by E. J. Eitel. 4to. Subscription, £\ 10s.
per volume.

Dennys. — A Handbook of the Canton Veenactjiak of the Chini:se

Language. Being a Series of Introductory Lessons, for Domestic and
Business Purposes. By N. B. Dennys, M.R.A.S., Ph.D. 8vo. cloth, pp. 4,
195. and 31. £1 10s.

Dennys. — The Foie-Loee of China, and its Affinities with that of
the Aryan and Semitic Races. By N. B. Dennvs, Ph.D., author of " A Hand-
book of the Canton Vernacular," etc. Svo. cloth, pp. 168. 10s. &d.

Douglas. — Chinese-English Dictionaet of the Veenactoae oe Spoken
Language of Amoy, with the principal variations of the Chang-Chew and
Chin-Chew Dialects. By the Rev. Carstairs Douglas, M.A., LL.D., Glasg.
High quarto, cloth, double columns, pp. 632. 1873. £3 3s.

Douglas. — Chinese Language and Liteeatuee. Two Lectures de-
livered at the Royal Institution, by R. K. Douglas, of the British Museum,
and Prof, of Chinese at King's College. Or. Svo. pp. 118, cl. 1875. 5s.

Douglas. — The Life of Jenghiz Khan. Translated from the Chinese,
with an Introduction, by R. K. Douglas, of the British Museum. Crown Svo.
pp. xxxvi. -106, cloth. 1877. 5s.

Edkius. — A Geammae of CoLLoatriAi Chinese, as exhibited in the
Shanghai Dialect. By J. Edkins, B.A. Second edition, corrected. Svo.
half-calf, pp. viii. and 225. Shanghai, 1868. 21s.

Hdkins. — A Vocabttlaet of the Shanghai Dialect. By J. Edkins.

8vo. half-calf, pp. vi. and 151. Shanghai, 1869. 2Is.

Edkins . — Keligion in China. A Brief Account of the Three EeKgions
of the Chinese. By Joseph Edkins, D.D. Post Svo. cloth. 7s. 6d.

Edkins. — A Gkammae of the Chinese Colloquial Language, com-
monly called the Mandarin Dialect. By Joseph Edkins. Second edition.
8to. half-calf, pp. viii. and 279. Shanghai, 1864. £1 10s.

EdkiuB. — Inteoduction to the Study of the Chinese Chaeactees.
By J. Edkins, D.D. , Peking, China. Roy. Svo. pp. 310, paper boards. 18s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.C.. 61

Edkins. — China's Place in Philology. An attempt to show that the

Languages of Europe and Asia have a common origin. By the Rev. Joseph;
Edkins. Crown 8vo , pp. xxiii. — 403, cloth. 10s. 6a!.

Edkins. —Chinese Buddhism:. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," p. 4.

Edkins. — Phogeessive Lessons in the Chinese Spoken Langttage,
with lists of Ooramon Words and Phrases, and an Appendix containing the Laws
of Tones in the Pekin Dialect. Fourth Edition, 8vo. Shanghai, 1881. 12s.

Edkins. — The Etolitiion op the Chinese Language, as exemplifying
the origin and growth of Human Speech. By Joseph Edkins, D.D. Author.
of " Religion in China;" "Chinese Buddhism;" etc. Reprinted from the
Journal of the Peking Oriental Society. 1887. 8vo. pp. xvi. — 96. 3s. M.

Eitel. — Chinese Dictionaet in the Cantonese Dialect. By Eenest
John Eitel, Ph.D. Tubing. I. to IV. 8vo. sewed, 12s. M. eaoli.

Eitel. — Handbook foe the Student op Chinese Buddhism. By the Rev.
E. J. Eitel, of the London Missionary Society. Cr. Bvo. pp. viii., 224:, cl. 18s.

Eitel. — Feng-Shui : or, The Eudiments of B'atural Science in China.
By Rev. E. J. Eitel, M.A., Ph.D. Demy 8vo. sewed, pp. vi. and 84. 6s.

Faber. — A systematical Digest oe the Dooteines of Confucius,
according to the Analects, Great Learning, and Doctrine of the Mean, with an
Introduction on the Authorities upon Confucius and Confucianism.- By Ernst
Fabeb, Rhenish Missionary. Translated from the German by P. G. you
MoUendorff, 8vo. sewed, pp. viii. and 131. 1873. Via. &d.

Faber. — Inteoduciion to the Science of Chinese Eeligion. A Critique
of Max Miiller and other Authors. By E. Fabek. 8vo. paper, pp. xii. and 164.
Hong Kong, 1880. 7s. M.

Faber.^^MiND of Mencius. See "Triibner's Oriental Series," p. 5.

Ferguson. — Chinese Eeseaeches. First Part : Chinese Chronology

and Cycles. By T. Ferguson. Cr. 8vo. pp. vii. and 274, sd. 1880. 10s. OaT.

Giles. — A DicTioNAEY OF Colloquial Idioms in the Mandabin Dialect.

By Heubert A. Giles. 4to. pp. 65. jgl 8s.
G-iles. — The San Tzu Ching ; or. Three Character Classic ; and the
Ch'Jen Tsu Wen ; or. Thousand Character Essay. Metrically Translated by
Herbert A. GileSs 12mo. pp. 28. 2s. dd.

Giles. — Synoptical Studies in Chinese Chaeactee. By Heebeet A,

Giles. 8vo. pp. 118. 15s.
GUes. — Chinese Sketches. By Heebeet A. Giles, of H.B.M.'s

China Consular Service. 8vo. cl., pp. 204. 10s. 6d.

Giles. — A Gloss-aex op Eefeeence on Subjects connected with the

Far East. By H A.Giles, of H.M. China Consular Service. 8vo. sewed,

pp. T.-i83. 7s. 6«?.
Giles. — Chinese without a Teachee. Being a Collection of Easy and

Useful Sentences in the Mandarin Dialect. With a yocabulary. By Herbert

A. Giles. 12mo. pp. 60. 6s.
Hemisz. — A Guide to Conteesation in the English and Chinese

Languages, for the use of Americans and Chinese in California and elsewhere.
By Stanislas Hernisz. Square 8vo. pp. 27-t, sewed. 10s. 6rf.
The Chinese characters contained in this work are from the ooUeotions of Chinese groups-
engraved on steel, and cast into moveable types, by Mr. Marcellin Legrand, engraver of the
Imperial Printing Office at Paris. They are used by most of the missions to Chma.
Digitized by Microsoft®

62 Linguistic Publications of Tricbner ^ Co.,

Eidd. — Catalogue of the Chinese Library oe the Kotal Asiatic
Society. By the Rev. S. Kidd. 8vo. pp. 58, sewed. Is.

Ewong. — EwoNff's Ebucational Series. By Kwong Ki Chut, late
Member of the Chinese Educational Commission in the tTnited States, &o. In
English and Chinese. All Post 8to. cloth. First Reading Book. Illustrated
■with Cuts. pp. 162. 1885. 4s. First Conversation Book. pp. xxxii. and
248. 10s. Second Conversation Book. pp. xvi. and 406. 12s. Manual of
Correspondence and Social Usages, pp. xxvi. and 276. 12s.

Legge. — The Chinese Classics. With, a Translation, Critical and
Exegetical Notes, Prolegomena, and Copious Indexes. By James Legge,
D.D., of the London Missionary Society. 7 vols. Eoyal 8vo. cloth.
Vol. I. Confucian Analects, the Great Learning, and the Doctrine of the Mean,
pp. 526. £2 2s. Vol. II. Works of Mencius. pp. 634. £7. 1». Vol. III.
Part I. First Part of the Shoo-King, or the Books of Tang, the Books of
Yu, the Books of Hea, the Books of Shang, and the Prolegomena, pp. viii.
and 280. £2 2s. Vol. III. Part II. Fifth Part of the Shoo-King, or the Books
of Chow, and the Indexes, pp. 281— 736. £2 25. Vol. IV. Part I. First Part
of the She-King, or the Lessons from the States ; and the Prolegomena, pp.
182-244. £2 2s. Vol. IV. Part II. The 2nd, 3rd and 4th Parts of the She-
King, or the Minor Odes of the Kingdom, the Greater Odes of the Kingdom,
the Sacrificial Odes and Praise-Songs, and the Indexes, pp. 540. £2 2s.
Vol. V. Part I. Dukes Yin, Hwan, Chwang, Min, He, Wan, Seuen, and
Ch'ing ; and the Prolegomena, pp. xii., 148 and 410. £2 2s. Vol. V. Part
II. Dukes Seang, Ch'aon, Ting, and Gal, with Tso's Appendix, and the
Indexes, pp. 526. £2 2s.

Legge. — The Chinese Classics. Translated into English. "With
Preliminary Essays and Explanatory Notes. By James Leqge, D.D., LL.D.
Crown 8vo. cloth. Vol. 1. The Life and Teachings of Confucius, pp. vi. and
338. 10s. 6rf. Vol. II. The Life and Works of Mencius. pp. 412. 12s.
Vol. III. The She King, or The Book of Poetry, pp. viii. and 432. 12.!.

Legge. — Inaugural Lecture on the Constituting oe a Chinese Chaxe
in the University of Oxford, 1876, by Rev. James Legge, M.A., LL.D.,
Professor of Chinese at Oxford. 8vo. pp. 28, sewed. 6o!.

Legge. — Confucianism in Eelation to Cheistianitt. A Paper
Kead before the Missionary Conference in Shanghai, on May 11, 1877. By
Rev. James Legge, D.D., LL.D. 8vo. sewed, pp. 12. 1877. Is. 6d.

Legge. — A Letter to Professor Max Mtjllee, chiefly on the Trans-
lation into English of the Chinese Terms Ti and Shang TX. By J. Legge,
Professor of Chinese, Oxford. Crown 8vo. sewed, pp. 30. 1880. Is.

Leland. — Fusang ; or, the Discovery of America by Chinese Buddhist
Priests in the Fifth Century. By Charles G. Leland. Or. 8vo. cloth
pp. xix. and 212. 1875. 7s. 6d. '

Leland. — Pidgin-English Sing-Song; or Songs and Stories in the
China-English Dialect. With a Vocabulary. By Charles G. Lelaud. Crown
8vo. pp. viii. and 140, cloth. 1876. 5s.

Lobscheid.- English and Chinese Dictionary, with the Punti and

Mandarin Pronunciation. By the Rev. W. Lobscheid, Knight of Francis
Joseph, etc. Folio, pp. viii. and 2016. In Four Parts. £B 8s.

Lobscheid. — Chinese and English Dictionary, Arranged according to

the Radicals. By the Rev. W. Lobscheid, Knight of Francis Joseph,
etc. Imp. 8vo. double columns, pp. 600, bound. £2 8s,

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G. 63

U'ClatcMe. — CoNruciAif CosMoeoirr. A Translation (with the Chinese
Text opposite) of section 49 (Treatise on Cosmogony) of the " Complete "Works"
of the Philosopher Choo-Foo-Tze, with Explanatory Notes. By the Eev.
Thomas M'Clatchib, M.A. Small 4to. pp. xviii. and 162. 1874. £1 Is.

Uacgowan. — A Mand-al oe the Amot Colioquiai;. By Eev. J.
Maogq-wan, of the London Missionary Society. Second Edition. 8to. half-,
bound, pp. 206. Amoy, 1880. £1 \Qs.

Macgowan. — English ajstb Chinese Diction abt of the Amot Dialect.
By Eev. J. Maogo-wan, London Missionary Society. Small 4to. half-boimd,
pp. 620. Amoy, 1883. £3 3s.

Maclay and Baldwin. — An Alphabetic Dictionaut op the Chinesb
Language in the Foochow Dialect. By Kev. E. S. Maolat, D.D., of the
Methodist Episcopal Mission, and Rev. C. C. Baldwin, A.M., of the American
Board of Mission. 8vo. half-bound, pp. U32. Foochow, 1871. £44*.

Mayers. — The Anglo-Chinese Calendae Manual. A Handbook of

Reference for the Determination of Chinese Dates during the period from
1860 to 1879. With Comparative Tables of Annual and Mensual Designations,
etc. Compiled by "W. F. Masers, Chinese Secretary, H.B.M.'s Legation,
Peking. 2nd Edition. Sewed, pp. 28. 7s. Gd.

Mayers. — The Chinese Goveenment. A Manual of Chinese Titles,
Categorically arranged, and Explained with an Appendix. By W. F. Matees,
Chinese Secretary to H.B.M.'s Legation at Peking. Second Edition,
with additions by G. M. H. Playfair, H.B.M. Vice-Consul, Shanghai. 8vo.
cloth, pp. lxiy-168. 1886. 16s.

Medhurst. — Chinese Dialogues, Questions, and Eamtliab Sentences,

literally translated into English, with a view to promote commercial intercourse
and assist beginners in the Language. By the late W. H. Medhurst, D.D.
A new and enlarged Edition. 8vo. pp. 226. 18s.

Mollendorff. — Manual op Chinese BiBLiOGEAPsr, being a List of

Works and Essays relating to China. By P. G. and O. P. von Mollendobff,
Interpreters to H.I.G.M.'s Consulates at Shanghai and Tientsin. 8vo. pp. viii.
and 378. £1 10s.

Morrison. — A Dictionaet op the Chinese Language. By the Eev.

R. Morrison, D.D. Two vols. Vol. I. pp. x. and 762; Vol. IL pp.828,
cloth. Shanghae, 1865. £6 6s.

Peking Gazette. — Translation of the Peking Gazette for 1872 to 1885,

Svo. cloth. 10s. %d. each.
Piry. — Le Saint Edit, Etude de Litterature Chinoise. Preparee par
A. Theophile Piry, du Service des Douanes Maritimes de Chine. Chinese
Text with French Translation. 4to. cloth, pp. xx. and 320. 21s.

Playfair. — Cities ai^d Towns op China. 25«. See page 37.

E,oss. — A Mandaein Peimee. Being Easy Lessons for Beginners,
Transliterated according to the European mode of using Roman Letters. By
Rev. John EosS, Newchang. Svo. wrapper, pp. 122. 7s. 6d.

Rudy. — The Chinese Mandaein Language, after Ollendorif's New-
Method of Learning Languages. By Chables Eudy. In 3 Volumes.
Vol. I. Grammar. 8vo. pp. 248. £1 Is.

Scarborough. — A Collection of Chinese Peoteebs. Translated and
Arranged by "William Scakborocgh, "Wesleyan Missionary, Hankow, With
an Introduction, Notes, and Copious Index, Cr. Svo. pp. xliv. and 278. 10s.6rf.
Digitized by Microsoft®

64 Linguistic Pullications of Triibner & Co.

Stent. — A CHUfEsE and English Vocabtjiabt in the Pekotesbl
Dialect. By G. E. Stent. Second Edition, 8yo. pp. xii.-720, half bound.
1877. £2.

Stent. — A Chinese ajtd English Pocket Dictionaet. By Gr. E.
Stent. 16mo. pp. 250. 1874. 15«.

Vaughan. — The Mannefs and Customs of the Chinese of the Straits
Settlements. By J. D. Vaughan. Koyal 8vo. boards. Singapore, 1879. 7s. 6^^

Vissering. — On Chinese CtmEENCT. Coin and Paper Money. "With,
a Facsimile of a Bant Note. By W. Vissering. Eoval 8vo. cloth, pp. xv. and
219. Leiden, 1877. 18s.

Williams. — A Syllabic Dictionakt op the Chinese Language,
arranged according to the "Wn-Fang Yuen Yin, with the pronunciation of the
Characters as heard in Peking, Canton, Amoy, and Shanghai. By S. Wells
WiLLLiMS. 4to. cloth, pp. Ixxxiv. and 1252. 1874. £5 5s.

Wylie. — Notes on Chinese Litebatuee ; with introductory Remarks
on the Progressive Advancement of the Art ; and a list of translations from the
Chinese, into various European Languages. By A. Wylie, Agent of the
British and Foreign Bible Society in China. 4to. pp. 296, cloth. Price,j81 16s.

COREAN.

Koss. — A CoEBAN Peimee. Being Lessons in Corean on all Ordinary
Subjects. Transliterated on the principles of the Mandarin Primer by the
same author. By the Eev. John Boss, Newchang. Demy Svo. stitched,
pp. 90. 10s.

DANISH.

Otte. — How TO LBAEN Dano-Noewegian'. a Manual for Students of
Dano-Norwegian, and especially for Travellers in Scandinavia. Based upon
the OUendorffian System of teaching languages, and adapted for Self-Instruction.
By E. C. Otte. Second Edition. Crown Svo. pp. xx.-338, cloth. 1884.
7s. 6<?. (Key to the Exercises, pp. 84, cloth, price 3s.)

Otte. — Simplified Geammae op the Danish Langitage. By E. C.
Otte. Crown Svo. pp. viii.-66, cloth. 1884. 2s. %d.

EGYPTIAN (Coptic, Hieroglyphics).

Birch. — Egyptian Texts: I. Text, Transliteration and Translation
— II. Text and Transliteration.— III. Text dissected for analysb. — IV. Deter-
minatives, etc. By S. Birch. London, 1877. Large 8vo. 12s.

Catalogue (C) of leading Books on Egypt and Egyptology on Assyria
and Assyriology. To be had at the affixed prices of Triibner and Co. 8vo., pp
40. 1880. Is.

Chabas. — Les Pasieues en Egypte. — Memoire Publie par I'Academie
Koyale des Sciences ^ Amsterdam. By F. Chabas. 4to. sewed, pp. 56.
Amsterdam, 1868. 6s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 69, Ludgate Kill, London, B.C. 65

Clarke. — Memoie on the Compaeatite Gteammae of Egyptian, Coptic,

AND Ude. By Htde Clakke, Cor. Member American Oriental Society ; Mem.
German Oriental Society, etc. , etc. Demy 8vo. sd., pp. 32. 2s.

Egyptologie.— (Forms also the Second Yolume of the First Bulletin of
the Congres ProTincial des Orientalistes Fran9aiB.) 8vo. sewed, pp. 604, with
Eight Plates. Saint-Etiene, 1880. %a. M.

Lieblein. — Ebchebches site la Cheonologie Egyptienne d'apr^s les
listes Gtenealogiques. By J. Lieblein. Eoy. 8vo. sewed, pp. 147, with Nine
Plates. Christiana, 1873. 7s. Qd.

Mariette-Bey. — The Monuments of Uppee Egypt ; a translation of
the " Itin^raire de la Haute Egypte" of Augusts Mariette-Bey. Translated
by Alpbonse Makiette. Crown 8to. pp. xvi. and 262, cloth. 1877. 7s. 6(?.

Records of the Past, being English Translations op the Assyrian
AND THE Egyptian Monuments. Published under the Sanction of the Society of
Biblical Archceology. Ebited by Dr. S. Birch.

Vols. I. to XII., 1874-79. 3s. 6<«. each. (Vols. I., III., V., VII., IX., XI., contain
Assyrian Texts.)

Renoiif. — EiEMENTAEY Geammae of the Ancieat Egyptian Language,
in the Hieroglyphic Type. By Le Page Eenouf. 4to., cloth. 1875. 12s.

ENGLISH (Eaely and Modern English and Dialbctsj.

Ballad Society (The). — Subscription — Small paper, one guinea, and
large paper, three guineas, per annum. List of publications
on application.

Barnes. — Gtlossaey op the Doeset Diaiect, with a Grammar of its
Word Shapening and Wording. By W. Barnes, B.D. Demy 8vo. pp. viii. —
126, sewed. 1886. 6s.

Boke of Nurture (The). By John Russbli,, about 1460-1470 Anno

Domini. The Boke of Keruynge. By Wynkyn de Worde, Anno Domini
1513. The Boke of Nurture. By Hugh Rhodes, Anno Domini 1577. Edited
from the Originals in the British Museum Library, by Frederick J. Furni-
TALL, M.A., Trinity Hall, Cambridge, Member of Council of the Philological
and Early English Text Societies. 4to. half-morocco, gilt top, pp. zix. and 146,
28, xxviil. and 56. 1867. \l. \ls. 6d.

Burue. — Sheopshieb Folk-Loee; A Sheaf of Gleanings. Edited by
C. S. Burne from the Collections of G. F. Jackson. Demy 8to. pp xvi.— 664,
cloth. 1886. 25s.

Charnock. — Veeba Nominalia ; or Words derived from Proper Names.
By Richard Stephen Charnock, Ph.Dr., F.S.A., etc. Svo.pp. 326, cloth. 14s.

Charnock. — Ludtjs Pateontmicits ; or, the Etymology of Curious Sur-
names. By Richard Stephen Charnock, Ph.D., F.S.A., F.R.G.S. Crown
8vo., pp. 182, cloth. 7s. 6d.

Charnock. — A Giossaey oe the Essex Diaiect. By E. S. Chaenock,

8vo. cloth, pp. X. and 64. 1880. 3s. 6d.
Chaucer Society (The). — Subscription, two guineas per annum.

Ziit of PuUicatiom on <^0^g)%y Microsoft®

66 Linguistic Publications of Triibner & Co.,

Eger and Grime ; an Early Englisli Eomance. Edited from Bishop

Percy's Folio Manuscript, about 1650 a.d. By J. W. Hales, M.A., and
F. J. FuKNivALL, M.A., of Trinity Hall, Cambridge. 4to., pp. 64 (only
100 copies printed), bound in the Boxburghe style. 10s. 6d.

Early English Text Society's Publications. Subscription, one guinea

per annum. All demy 8vo. in wrappers.

1. Eakly English Alliterative Poems. In the West-Midland

Dialect of the Fourteenth Century. Edited by R. Mohris, Esq., from an
unique Cottonian MS. 16s.

2. Aethttr (about 1440 a.d.). Edited by F. J. Fuenitall, Esq.,

from the Marquis of Bath's unique MS. is.

3. Ane Compendious and Breue Tractate coNCEENTifG te Officb

and Dewtie OF Kyngis, etc. By William Lauder. (1566 a.d.) Edited
by F. Hall, Esq., D.O.L. is.

4. Sib Gawatne and the Green Knight (about 1320-30 a.d.).

Edited by R. Mokkis, Esq., from an unique Cottonian MS. 10s.
6. Oe the Orthogeaphie and Conghtjitie oe the Beitan Tongue ;
a treates, noe shorter than necessarie, for the Scfaooles, be Alexandek Hume.
Edited for the first time from the unique MS. in the British Museum (about
1617 A.D.), by Henry B. Wheatlet, Esq. is.

6. Lancelot of the Laik. Edited from the unique MS. in the Cam-

bridge University Library (ab. 1500), by the Rev. Walter W. Skeat,
M.A. 8s.

7. The Stort oe Genesis and Exodus, an Early English Song, of

about 1250 a.d. Edited for the first time from the unique MS. in the Library
of Corpus Christi College, Cambridge, by R. Morris, Esq. 8s.

8 MoRTE Arthurb ; the Alliterative Version. Edited from Robert
Thornton's unique MS. (about 1440 a.d.) at Lincoln, by the Rev. George
Perrv, M.A. , Prebendary of Lincoln. 7s.

9. Animadversions ttpfon the Annotacions and Corrections or
SOME Imperfections of Impressiones op Chaucer's Woekes, reprinted
in 1598; by Francis Thvnne. Edited from the unique MS. in the
Bridgewater Library. By G. H. Kingsley, Esq., M.D., and F. J. Furnivall,
Esq., M.A. 10s.

10. Merlin, or the Eaelt History of King Arthur. Edited for the

first time from the unique MS. in the Cambridge University Library (about
1450 A.D.), by Henry B. Wheatley, Esq. Part I. 2s. &d.

11. The Monaeche, and other Poems of Sir David Lyndesay. Edited

from the first edition by Johne Skott, in 1552, by Fitzedwaro Hall,
Esq., D.C.L. Part I. 3s.

12. The "Weight's Chaste "Wife, a Merry Tale, by Adam of Cobsam

(about 1462 A.D.), from the unique Lambeth MS. 306. Edited for the first
time by F. J. Furnivall, Esq., M.A. Is.

13. Seinte Marhbkete, J^e Meiden aitt Maette. Three Texts of ab.

1200,1310, 1330 A.D. First edited in 1862, by the Rev. Oswald Cockayne,
M.A., and now re-issued. 2s.

14. Ktng Horn, witli fragments of Eloriz and Blauncheflur, and the

Assumption of the Blessed Virgin. Edited from the MSS. in the Library of
the University of Cambridge and the British Museum, by the Rev. J. Rawson
LUMBY. 3s. Sd.

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, LudgaU Sill, London, E.G. 67

15. PouTiCAi, Relioiotjs, aot) Love Poems, from the Lambeth MS.

No. 306, and other sources. Edited by F. J. FubniyalI/, Esq., M.A,
7s. Sd.

1 6. A Teetice in English breuely drawe out of ]? book of Quintis

essencijs in Latyn, J) Hermys f prophete and king of Egipt after Jj flood
of Noe, fader of Philosophris, hadde by reuelacionn of an aungil of God to him
eente. Edited from the Sloane MS. 73, by F. J. FnnNivALL, Esq., M.A. la.

17. Paballel Exieacts from 29 Manuscripts of Piees Plowman, with

Comments, and a Proposal for the Society's Three- text edition of this Poem.
By the Rey. W. Skeat, M.A. Is.

18. Hali Meidenhbad, about 1200 a.d. Edited for the first time from

the MS. (with a translation) by the Rev. Oswald Cockayne, M.A. Is.

19. The Monaechb, and other Poems of Sir David Lyndesay. Part II.,

the Complaynt of the King's Fapingo, and other minor Poems. Edited from
the First Edition by F. Hall, Esq., D.C.L. Ss. 6rf.

20. Some Teeatises by Kichaed Eollb de Hampolb. Edited from

Robert of Thornton's MS. (ab. 1440 a.d.), by Rev. Geoeqe G, Pekry,
M.A. Is.

21. Meelin, oe the Eaelt Histoey oi King Aetitoe. Part II. Edited

by Henky B. Wheatlby, Esq. 4s.

22. The Eomans of Paetbnat, oe Ltjsignen. Edited for the first time

from the unique MS. in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge, by the
Rev. W. W. Seeat. M.A. 6s.

23. Dan Michel's Ayenbiie oe Inwtt, or Kemorse of Conscience, in

the Kentish dialect, 134'0 a.d. Edited from the unique MS, in the British
Museum, by Richaeo Mokris, Esq. 10s. 6d.

24. Hymns oe the Viegin anb Cheist ; The Paeliament oe Deths,

and Other Religious Poems. Edited from the Lambeth MS. 853, by F. J.
FCENIVALL, M.A. 3s.

25. The Siacions oe Eome, and the Pilgrim's Sea- Voyage and Sea-

Sickness, with Clene Maydenhod. Edited from the Vernon and Porkington
MSS., etc., by F. J. Fdenitall, Esq., M.A. Is.

26. Eeligiotts Pieces in Peose and Veese. Containing Dan Jon

Gaytrigg's Sermon ; The Abbaye of S. Spirit ; Sayne Jon, and other pieces
in the Northern Dialect. Edited from Robert of Thorntone's MS. (ab. 1460
A.D.), by the Rev. G. Perry, M.A. 2s.

27. Manipttlits Vocabuioeum : a Ehyming Dictionary of the English

language, by Petek Levins (1570). Edited, with an Alphabetical Index
by Henky B. Wheatley. 12s.

28. The Vision of "William conceening Piees Plowman, together with

Vita de Dowel, Dobet et Dobest. 1362 a.d., by William Langlamd. The
earliest or Vernon Text ; Text A. Edited from the Vernon MS., with full
Collations, by Rev. W. W. Seeat, M.A. 7s.

29. Old English Homilies and Homiletic Teeatises. (Sawles Warde

and the Wohunge of TJre Lauerd : TJreisuns of Ure Louerd and of lire Lefdi,
etc.) of the Twelfth and Thirteenth Centuries. Edited from MSS. in the Bnt-
ieh Miiseum, Lambeth, and Bodleian Libraries ; with Introduction, Transla-
tion, and Notes, by Eichabd Morris. First Series, Part I. 7«.
Digitized by Microsoft®

68 Linguistic Publications of Trubner & Co.,

30. PiEES, THE Ploughman's Cbebe (about 1394). Edited from the

MSS. by the Hev. W. W. Skeat, M.A. 2s.

31. Insiettctions EOE Paeish Peiesis. By Johk Mtec. Edited from

Cotton MS. Claudius A. II., by Edward Peacock, Esq., F.S.A., etc., etc. is.

32. Eaelt English Meals and Mannees ; John Sussell's Boke of

Nuture, Vynkyn de Worde's Boke of Keruynge, The Boke of Curtasye, E.
Waste's Booke of Demeanor, Seager's Schoole of Vertue, The Babees Book,
Aristotle's A B C, Urbanitatis, Stars Puer ad Mensam, The Lytille Childrenes
Lytil Boke, For to serve a Lord, Old Symon, The Birched School-Boy, etc.
With some Forewords on Education in Early England. Edited by F. J.
FuKNivALL, M.A., Trin. Hall, Cambridge, 15s.

33. Thd Book op the Knight be la Totte Landet, 1372. A Father's

Book for his Daughters, Edited from the Harleian MS. 1764, by Thomas
Wright Esq., M.A., and Mr. William Rossiter. Sa.

34. Old English Hojulies and Homilbtic Teeatisbs. (Sawles "Warde,

and the Wohuuge of Ure Lauerd : Ureisuns of Ure Louerd and of Ure Lefdi,
etc.) of the Twelfth and Thirteenth Centuries. Edited from MSS. in the
British Museum, Lambeth, and Bodleian Libraries ; with Introduction, Trans-
lation, and Notes, by Eiohard Morris. Mrst Series. Part 2. 8s.

35. SiE Dattd Lthtoesat's Woeks. Paet 3. The Historie of ana

Nobil and Wailzeand Sqvyer, William Mbldkum, umqThyle Laird of
Cleische and Bynnis, compylit be Sir Dauid Ltndesat of the Mont alias
Lyoun King of Armes. With the Testament of the said Williame Mel-
drum, Squyer, compylit alswa be Sir Dauid Lyndesay, etc. Edited by F.
Hall, D.C.L. 2s.

36. Meelin, oe the Eaely Hjstoet op King AjaTHUn. A Prose

Eomance (about 1450-1460 a.d.), edited from the unique MS. in the
University Library, Cambridge, by Henry B. Wheatley. With an Essay
on Arthurian Localities, by J. S. Stuart Glennie, Esq. Partlll. 1869. I2«.

37. SiE Dattd Ltndesat's "Woeks. Part IV. Ane Satyre of the

thrie estaits, in commendation of vertew and vitvperation of vyce. Maid
be Sir David Lindesay, of the Mont, alias Lyon King of Armes. At
Edinbvrgh. Printed be Eobert Charteris, 1602. Cvm privUegio regis.
Edited by F. Hall, Esq., D.C.L. 4s.

38. The "Vision op "William conceentng Piees the Plowman,

together with Vita de Dowel, Debet, et Dobest, Secundum Wit et Resoun,
by William Langland (1377 a.d.). The " Crowley" Text; or Text B.
Edited from MS. Laud Misc. 681, collated with MS. Rawl. Poet. 38, MS.
B. 15. 17. in the Library of Trinity College, Cambridge, MS. Dd. 1. 17. in
the Cambridge University Library, the MS. in Oriel College, Oxford, MS.
Bodley 814, etc. By the Rev. Walter W. Skeat, M.A., late Fellow of
Christ's College, Cambridge. IDs. 6d.

39. The "Gest Htsioeiale" op the Destetjciion op Teot. An

Alliterative Romance, translated from Guido De Colonna's "Hystoria
Troiana." Now first edited from the unique MS. in the Hunterian Museum,
University of Glasgow, by the Eev. Geo. A. Panton and David Donaldson.
Part I. 10s. 6d.

40. English Gilds. The Original Ordinances of more than One

Hundred Early English Gilds : Together with the olde usages of the cite of
Wynchestre; The Ordinances of Worcester; The Office of the Mayor of
Bristol; and the Customary of the Manor of Tettenhall- Regis. From

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, Ludgate Sill, London, B.C. 69

Original MSS. of the Fourteenth and Fifteenth Centuries. Edited with
Notes by the late Toulmin Smith, Esq., P.R.S. of Northern Antiquaries
(Copenhagen). With an Introduction and Glossary, etc., by his daughter,
Lucy Toulmin Smith. And a Preliminary Essay, in Five Parts, On the
History and Development of Gilds, by Lujo Brentano, Doctor Juris
TJtriusque et Philosophise. 21s.

41. The Mistoe Poems of Whliam Laudee, Playwright, Poet, and
Minister of the Word of God (mainly on the State of Scotland in and about
1568 A.D., that year of Famine and Plague). Edited from the Unique
Originals belonging to S. Christie-Miller, Esq., of Britwell, by F. J.
FuRNiVALL, M.A., Trin. Hall, Camb. Ss.

42., Beknaedus db Cuea eei Pamtjliaeis, with some Early Scotch
Prophecies, etc. From a MS., KK 1. 5, in the Cambridge University
Library. Edited by J. Rawson Lumby, M,A., late Fellovr of Magdalen
College, Cambridge. 2s.

43. Raiis Eavis-g, and other Moral and Religious Pieces, in Prose and

Verse. Edited from the Cambridge University Library MS. KK 1. S, by J.
Eawson Lumby, M.A., late Fellow of Magdalen College, Cambridge. 3«.

44. Joseph oe Aeimathie : otherwise called the Eomance of the

Seint Graal, or Holy Grail: an alliterative poem, written about a.d. 1350,
and now first printed from the unique copy in the Vernon MS. at Oxford.
With an appendix, containing "The Lyfe of Joseph of Armathy," reprinted
from the black-letter copy of Wynkyn de Worde ; " De sancto Joseph ab
Arimathia," first printed by Pynson, a.d. 1516 ; and "The Lyfe of Joseph of
Ariniathia," first printed by Pynson, a.d. 1520. Edited, with Notes and
Glossarial Indices, by the Rev. Walter W. Skeat, M.A. 5s.

45. Kis-G Alfeed'sWest-Saxom-Veesion oe Geegoet's Pastoeal Caee.

With an English translation, the Latin Text, Notes, and an Introduction
Edited by Henry Sweet, Esq., of Balliol College, Oxford. Parti. 10s.

46. Legends of the Holt Rood ; Symbols of the Passion and Ceoss-

PoEMS. In Old English of the Eleventh, Fourteenth, and Fifteenth Cen-
turies. Edited from MSS. in the British IMuseum and Bodleian Libraries;
with Introduction, Translations, and Glossarial Index. By Richard
Morris, LL.D. 10s.

47. SiE Datid Ltkdesat's Woeks. Paet V. The Minor Poems of

Lyndesay. Edited by J. A. H. Murray, Esq. 3s.

48. The Times' Whistle : or, A ITewe Daunce of Seven Satires, and

other Poems : Compiled by R. C, Gent. Now first Edited from MS. Y. 8. 3.
in the Library of Canterbury Cathedral; with Introduction, Notes, and
Glossary, by J. M. Cowper. 6s.

49. Aif Old English Miscellany, containing a Bestiary, Kentish

Sermons, Proverbs of Alfred, Religious Poems of the 13th century. Edited
from the MSS. by the Eev. K. IVl orris, LL.D. 10s.

50. EiNG Alfeed's "West-Saxon Veesion of Geesoet's Pastoeal Caee.

Edited from 2 MSS., with an English translation. By Henry Sweet, Esq.,
Balliol College, Oxford. Part JI. lOs.

51. pB Lifla.de oe Si. Jitliana, from two old English Manuscripts of

1230 A.D. With renderings into Modern English, by the Rev. O. Cockayne
and Edmund Brook. Edited by the Rev. O. Cockayne, M.A. Price 2s,

52. Palladitjs on Husbondeie, from the unique "MS., ab. 1420 a.d.,

ed. Rev. B. Lodge. Part I. 1 Os.

Digitized by Microsoft®

70 Linguistic Puhlications of Trubner & Co.,

63. Old Engiish Homilies, Series II., from the unique ISth-oentury
MS. ia Trinity Coll. Cambridge, with a photolithograph ; three Hymns to
the Virgin and God, from a unique 13tli-century MS. at Oxford, a photo-
lithograph of the music to two of them, and transcriptions of it in modern
notation by Dr. Rimbault, and A. J. Ellis, Esq., F.R.S. ; the whole
edited by the Eev. Richard Morkis, LL.D. 8«,

54. The Vision oe Piees PLO-vracAir, Text C (completing the three

versions of this great poem), with an Autotype ; and two unique alliterative
Poems : Richard the Redeles (by William, the author of the Vision') ; and
The Crowned King ; edited by the Rev. W. W. Skeat, M.A. 18«.

55. Geneetdes, a Romance, edited from the unique MS., ah. 1440 a.d.,

in Trin. CoU. Cambridge, by W. Aldis Wright, Esq., M.A., Trin. Coll.
Cambr. Part I. 3s.

66. The Gest Htsioriale op the Destetjciion oe Teoy, translated
from Guido de Colonna, in alliterative verse ; edited from ihe unique MS. in
the Hunterian Museum, Glasgow, by D. Donaldson, Esq., and the late Eev.
G. A. Panton. Part II. 10s. 6d.

57. The Eaelt English Version oe the " Cuesoe Hundi," in four

Texts, from MS. Cotton, Vesp. A. iii. in the British Museum ; Fairfax MS.
14. in the Bodleian ; the Gbttingen MS. Theol. 107 ; MS. R. 3, 8, in Trinity
College, Cambridge. Edited by the Eev. E. Morris, LL.D. Part I. with
two photo-lithographic facsimiles by Cooke and Fotheringham. 10s. 6d.

58. The Blickling Homilies, edited from the Marquis of Lothian's

Anglo-Saxon MS. of 971 a.d., by the Rev. E. Morris, LL.D. ("With a
Photolithograph). Parti. 8s.

59. The Eaelt English Version oe ihe " Cuesoe Mtjndi ; " in four

Texts, from MS. Cotton Vesp. A. iii. in the British Museum ; Fairfax MS.
14. in the Bodleian; the Gottingen MS. Theol. 107 ; MS. E. 3, 8, in Trinity
College, Cambridge. Edited by the Rev. E. Morris, LL.D. Part II. 15s.

60. Meditactitns on the Soper oe our Loede (perhaps hy Kobeet

OF Brtjnne). Edited from the MSS. by J. M. Cowpeb, Esq. 2s. 6d.

61. The Romance and Prophecies oe Thomas oe Eeceldoune, printed

from Five MSS. Edited by Dr. James A. H. Murray. 10s. Gd.

62. The Eault English Version of the "Cursoe Mundi," in Four
Texts. Edited by the Rev. E. Morris, M.A.", LL.D. Part III. 15s.

63. The Blickling Homilies. Edited from the Marquis of Lothian's

Anglo-Saxon MS. of 971 A.D., by the Rev. R. Morris, LL.D. Part II. 4s.

64. Feanois Thtnne's Emblemes and Epigrams, a.d. 1600, from the-
Earl of EUesmere's unique MS. Edited by F. J. Ftjrnivall, M .A. 4s.

65. Be Domes D.s:ge (Bede's De Die Judicii) and other short Anglo-
Saxon Pieces. Ed. from the uniqueMS. by the Eev. J. Eawson Lumby, B.D. 2s

66. The Eaelt English Version op the "CtORSOR Mxtndi," in Four
Texts. Edited by Rev. R. Morris, M.A., LL.D. Part IV. 10s.

67. Notes on Piees Plowman. By the Rev. W. W. Skeat, M.A.

Part L 21s.

68. The Early English Version of the "Cuesoe Mundi," in Four-

Texts. Edited by Rev. R. Morris, M.A., LL.D. Part V. 25s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 69, Ludgate Hill, London, E.C. 71

69. Adam Davy's Five Deeams about Ed-waed II. The Life of

Saint Alexius. Solomon's Book of Wisdom. St. Jerome's 15 Tokens
before Doomsday. The Lamentation of Souls. Edited from the Land MS.
622, in the Bodleian Library, by F. J. Furnivall, M.A. 5s.

70. Geneetdes, a Eomance. Edited by "W. Axdis Weight, M.A.

Part II. 4«.

71. The Lay Folk's Mass-Book, 4 Texts. Edited by Rev. Canon

Simmons. 259.

72. Pailadius on Hfsbondeie, englisM (ab. 1420 a.d.). Part II. Edited

by S. J. Hekrtage, B.A. 5s.

73. The Biickuns Homilies, 971 a.d. Edited by Eev. Dr. E. Moeeis.

Part III. 8«.

74. English "Woeks oe 'Wtclie, Mtberto unprinted. Edited by F. D.

Matthew. 20».

75. Catholicon AjfeniciTM:, an early English. Dictionary, from Lord

Monson's MS., a.d. 1483. Edited with. Introduction and Notes by S. J.
Hekktaqe, B.A. ; and with a Preface by H. B. Wheatley. 20s.

76. Aelebic's Mbteical Lives of Sahtis, in MS. Cott. Jul. E. 7.

Edited by Eev. Prof. Skeat, M.A. Part I. 10s.

77. Beowtjlf. The unique MS. Autotyped and Transliterated.

Edited by Professor Zupitza, Ph.D. 2os.

78. The Fifty Eaeliest English Wills in the Court of Probate,

1387-1439. Edited by F. J. Ftjknivail, M.A. Is.

79. King Alfeed's Oeoshjs feom Loed Tollemache's 9th Cenhtey
MS. Part I. Edited by H. Sweet, M.A. 13s.

Mxtra Volume. Facsimile of the Epinal Glossary, 8th Century, edited by H.
Sweet. 16s.

80. The Anglo-Saxon Life of St. Katheeine and its Latin Oeigdtal.
Edited by Dr. Einenkel. 12«.

81. PiEES Plowman. Notes, Glossary, etc., Part IV., Section II.,
completing the Work. Edited by Eev. Prof. Skeat, M.A. 18s.

82. Aelfeio's Mbteical Lives of Saints, MS. Cott. Jul. E. 7. ed.
Eev. Prof. Skeat, M.A., LL.D. Part II. 12s.

83. The Oldest English Texts. Charters, etc., ed. H. Sweet, M.A. 20«.

84. Additional Analogs io "The Weight's Chaste Wife." No. 12.
By W. A. Clouston. Is.

85. The Theee Kings of Cologne. 2 English Texts and 1 Latin,
ed. Dr. C. Horstmann. 17s.

86. Peose Lives of Women Saints, ab, 1610 a.d., from the unique
MS., by Dr. C. Hobstmann. 12s.

Extra Series. Subscriptions — Small paper, one guinea ; large paper
two guineas, per annum.

1. The Eomance of William of Paleenb (otherwise known as the
Romance of William and the Werwolf). Translated from the French at the
command of Sir Humphrey de Bohun, about a.d. 1350, to which is added a
fragment of the Alliterative Eomance of Alisaunder, translated from the

Digitized by Microsoft®

72 Linguistic Publications of Ti~ilhner & Co.,

Latin by tlie same author, about a.d. 1340 ; the former re-edited from the
unique MS. in the Library of King's College, Cambridge, the latter now
first edited from the unique MS. in the Bodleian Library, Oxford. By the
Rev. Waltee W. Skeat, M.A. 8vo. sewed, pp. xliv. and 328. 13i.

2. On Eaelt English Pronunciation, with, especial reference to

Shakspere and Chaucer ; containing an investigation of the Correspondence
of Writing with Speech in England, from the Anglo-Saxon period to the
present day, preceded by a systematic Notation of all Spoken Sounds by
means of the ordinary Printing Types; including a re-arrangement of Prof,
F. J. Child's Memoirs on the Language of Chaucer and Gower, and reprints
of the rare Tracts by Salesbury on English, 1547, and Welsh, 1567, and by
Barcley on French, 152J By Alexander J. Ellis, F.R.S. Part L On
the Pronunciation of the xivth, xvith, xviith, andxviiith centuries. 8vo.
sewed, pp. viii. and 416. IQs.

3. Caxton's Book of CtruTESTE, printed at "Westminster about 1477-8,

A.D., and now reprinted, with two MS. copies of the same treatise, from the
Oriel MS. 79, and the Balliol MS. 354. Edited by Frederick J. Fdbni-
VALL, M.A. 8vo. sewed, pp. xii. and 58. Ss.

4. The Lat of Havelok the Dane; composed in the reign of

Edward I., about A.D. 1280. Formerly edited by Sir F. Madden for the
Roxburghe Club, and now re-edited from the unique MS. Laud Misc. 108, in
the Bodleian Library, Oxford, by the Rev. Walter W. Skeat, M.A. 8vo.
sewed, pp. Iv. and 160. 10«.

5. Chattcer's Teanslation of Boethitts's " De Consolatione

Philosophie." Edited from the Additional MS. 10,340 in the British
Museum. Collated with the Cambridge Univ. Libr. MS. li. 3. 21. By
Richard Morris. 8vo. I2s.

6. The Eomance of the Chevelere Assignb. Ee-edited from the

unique manuscript in the British Museum, with a Preface, Notes, and
Glossarial Index, by Henry H. Gibes, Esq., M.A. 8vo. sewed, pp.
■ xviii. and 38. 3s.

7. On Eaelt English PEONtTNCiAiioN, -n-ith especial reference to

Shakspere and Chaucer. By Alexander J. Ellis, F.R.S., etc., etc.
Part II. On the Pronunciation of the xiii th and previous centuries, of
Anglo-Saxon, Icelandic, Old Norse and Gothic, with Chronological Tables of
the Value of Letters and Expression of Sounds in English Writing. 10s.

8. Queenb Elizabethes Achabemt, by Sir Humphrey Gllbeet.

A Booke of Precedence, The Ordering of a Funerall, etc. Varying Versions
of the Good Wife, The Wise Man, etc., Maxims, Lydgate's Order of Fools,
A Poem on Heraldry, Occleve on Lords' Men, etc.. Edited by F. J.
FuRNivjiLL, M.A., Trin. Hall, Camb. With Essays on Early Italian and
German Books of Courtesy, by W. M. Rossetti, Esq., and E. Oswald
Esq. 8vo. 13s.

9. The Fraternitte of Yacabondes, by John Atvbelet (licensed

in 1560-1, imprinted then, and in 1565), from the edition of 1575 in the
Bodleian Library. A Caueat or Warening for Commen Cursetors vulgarely
called Vagabones, by Thomas Harman, EsaniERE. From the 3rd edition of
1567, belonging to Henry Huth, Esq., collated with the 2nd edition of 1567,
in the Bodleian Library, Oxford, and with the reprint of the 4th edition of
1573. A Sermon in Praise of Thieves and Thievery, by Parson Haben or
Hyberdyne, from the Lausdowne MS. 98, and Cotton Vesp. A. 25. Those

Digitized by Microsoft®

' 67 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, JS.C. 73

parts of the Groundworke of Conny-catching (ed. 1592), that differ from
Sarman's Oaueat. Edited by Edwakd Viies & F. J. Fdknivall. 8vo.
7s. 6d.

10. The EraST Boke of the Inteoduction of Knowledse, made by

Andrew Borde, of Physycke Doctor. A Compendyous Eegyment op a
Dyetary op Helth made in Mountpyllier, compiled by Andrewe Boorde,
of Physycke Doctor. Barnes in the Defence of the Berde : a treatyse
made, answerynge the treatyse of Doctor Borde upon Berdes. Edited, with
a life of Andrew Boorde, and large extracts from his Breuyary, by F. J
FuRNivALL, M.A., Trinity Hall, Camb. 8vo. 18s.

11. The Bextce ; or, the Book of the most excellent aad noble Prince,

Robert de Broyss, King of Soots : compiled by Master John Barbour, Arch-
deacon of Aberdeen, a.d. 1375. 'Edited from MS. G 23 in the Library of St.
John's College, Cambridge, written a.d. 1487 ;, collated with the MS. in the
Advocates' Library at Edinburgh, written a.d. 1489, and with Hart's
Edition, printed a.d. 1616 ; with a Preface, Notes, and Glossarial Index, by
the Rev. Walter W. Skeat, M.A. Part I 8vo. 12s.

12. England in the Reign of King Henet the Eighth. A

Dialogue between Cardinal Pole and Thomas Lupset, Lecturer in Rhetoric
at Oxford. By Thomas Starkey, Chaplain to the King. Edited, with
Preface, Notes, and Glossary, by J. M. Cowper. And with an Introduction,
containing the Life and Letters of Thomas Starkey, by the Rev. J. S. Brewer,
M.A. Part II. 12s.

13. A SuppiicACTON POE THE Beggaes. Written about the year 1529,

by Simon Fish. Now re-edited by Frederick J. Fdrnivall. With a
Supplycacion to our moste Soueraigne Lorde Kynge Henry the Eyght
(1544 A.D.), A Supplication of the Poore Commons (1546 a.d.). The Decaye
of England by the great multitude of Shepe (I5S0-3 a.d.). Edited by J,
Meadows Co'wpeb. 6s.

14. On Eablt English Peonitnciation, with especial reference to

Shakspere and Chaucer. By A. J. Ellis, F.E.S., F.S.A. Part III.
Illustrations of the Pronunciation of the xivth and xvith Centuries. Chaucer,
Gower, WyclifFe, Spenser, Shakspere, Salesbury, Barcley, Hart, BuUokar,
Gill. Pronouncing Vocabulary. 10«.

15. EoBEBT Ceowlbt's Thiett-one Epigeams, Voyce of the Last

Trumpet, Way to Wealth, etc., 1550-1 a.d. Edited by J. M. Cowper, Esq.
12s.

16. A Teeatise on the Asteolabb; addressed to his son Lowys, by

Geoffrey Chaucer, a.d. 1391. Edited from the earliest MSS. by the Kev.
Walter W. Skeat, M.A., late Fellow of Christ's College, Cambridge. 10s.

17. The Complatni op Scoilande, 1549, a.d., with an Appendix of

four Contemporary English Tracts. Edited by J. A. H. Murray, Esq.
Part I. IDs.

18. The Complatnt op Scotiande, etc. Part II. 8«.

19. OuEE Ladyes Mteouee, a.d. 1530, edited by the Eev. J. H.

Bldnt, M.A., with four full-page photolithographic facsimiles by Cooke and
Fotheringham. 24s.

20. Lonelich's Histoey op the Holt Geail (ab. 1450 a.d.), translated

from the French Prose of Sires Eobiers de Borron. Ke-edifed fron the
Unique MS. in Corpus Christi College, Cambridge, by F. J. Furnivall, Esq.
M.A. Parti. 8s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

74 Linguistic Publications of Trubner & Co.,

21. Baebohe's Bhuce. Edited from the MSS. and the earliest

printed edition by the Rev. W. W. Skeat, M.A. Part II. 4s.

22. Henet Brinklow's CoMPiiAnsri or Eodeetck Moes, somtyme-

a gray Fryre, unto the Parliament Howse of Ingland his naturall Country^
for the Redresse of certen wiclced Latres, euel Customs, and cruel Decreys-
(ab. 1542) ; and The Lamentacion of a Cheistian Against the Citie
OF London, made by Roderigo Mors, a.d. 1545. Edited by J, M. Cowper,
Esq. 9s.

23. On Eaelt English Peonthstciaiion, with especial reference tO'

Shakspere and Chaucer. By A. J. Ellis, Esq., F.R.S. Part IV. 10s.

24. Loneitch's Hisioet of the Holt Geail (ab. 1450 a.d.), translated

from the French Prose of Sibes Robiers de Bobron. Re-edited from the
Unique MS. in Corpus Christi College, Cambridge, by F. J. Fdrnivall,.
Esq., M.A. Part II. 10s.

25. The Eomance op Gut of Waewicb:. Edited from the Cambridgfr

University MS. by Prof. J. Zupitza, Ph.D. Part I. 20«.

26. The Romance oe Gttt op "Waewice:. Edited from the Cambridge

University MS. by Prof J. Zupitza, Ph.D. (The 2nd or 15th century version).
Part II. 14s.

27. The English Woeks of John Fishee, Bishop of Eochester (died

1535). Edited by Professor J. E. B. Mator, M.A. Part I., the Text. 16s.

28. Lonelich's Histoet of the Holt Geail. Edited by F. J.

FuBNivALL, M.A. Part III. 10s.

29. BAEBOim's Bettce Edited from the MSS. and the earliest Printed

Edition, by the Rev. W.'W. Skeat, M.A. Part III. 21s.

30. Lonelich's Histoe? op the Holt Geail. Edited by F. J.

FuRNivALL, Esq., M.A. Part IV. ISs.

31. Alexandee AND DiNDiMiTS. Translated from the Latin about

A.D. 1340-50. Re-edited by the Rev. W. W. Skeat, M.A. 6s.

32. Siaeket's" England in HJENETYin.'s Time." Part L Starkey's-

Life and Letters. Edited by S. J. Herrtage, B.A. 8s.

33. Gesta Eomanoeitm : the Early English Yersions. Edited from

the MSS. and Black-letter Editions, by S. J. Heeetage, B.A. 15s.

34. Chaelemagne Eomances : No. I. Sir Ferumbras. Edited from.

the unique Ashmole MS. by S. J. Heeetage, B.A. 15s.

35. Chaelemagne Eomances : II. The Sege off Malayne, Sir Otuell,.

etc. Edited by S. J. Heeetage, B.A. 12s.

36. Chaelemagne Eomances: III. Lyf of Charles the Grete, Pt. 1.

Edited by S. J. Heeetage, B.A. 16s.

37. Chaelemagne Eomances : IV. Lyf of Charles the Grete, Pt. 2.

Edited by S. J. Heeetage, B.A. 15s.

38. Chaelemagne Eomances : Y. The So-wdone of Babylone. Edited

by Dr. Hausknecht. 15s.

39. Chablemagne Eomances : YI. The Taill of Eauf Colyear, Eoland^

Otuel, etc. Edited by Sydney J. Heeetage, B.A. 15s.

40. Chaelemagne Eomances: YII. Houn of Burdeux. By Lord

Berners. Edited by S. L. Lee, B.A. Part I. 16s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, Ludgate Hill, Lpndon, E.G. 75

41. Chabiemasne Eomances: VIII. Huon of Burdeux. By Lord
Behnees. Edited by S. L. Lee, B.A. Part II. ISs.

42. Gtjt op Waewick. Two Texts (Auehinleck MS. and Cain'a
MS.). Edited by Prof. Zupitza. Part I. 15s.

43. ChaklemagneEomances: IX. HuonofBurdeux, byLordBBUNBES.
Edited by S. L. Lee, B.A. Part III. 15«.

44. Chaelemagne Eomances : X. The Four Sons of Aymon. Edited
Misa 0. Eiohardson. Part I. 15a.

45. CHAEiEMAGifE EoMAjfCES : XI. The Four Sons of Aymon. Edited
by 0. Eiohardson. Part II. 20s.

46. SiE Bevis of Hamptoit, from the Auehinleck and other MSS.
Edited by Prof. E. Kolbinq. Part I. 10s.

47. The "Waes oe Alexandeb. Edited by Prof. Skeat, Litt.D.,
LL.D. 20s.

48. SiE Bevis oe Hamton, ed. Prof. E. Xolbdtg. Part II. 10«.

49. Gut of "Wakwick, 2 texts (Auehinleck and Cains MSS.). Part 2.
Edited by Prof. J. Zupitza. 15«.

50.. Chabiemagne Eqmances : Huon of Burdeux. By Lord Beenees.
Edited by S. L. Lee, B.A. Part IV. 5s.

English Dialect Society's Publications. Subscription, 1873 to 1876,

lOs. &d. per annum ; 1877 and following years, 20». per annum. All demy 8vo,
ia wrappers.

1. Series B. Part 1. Eeprinted Grlossariee, I. -VII. Containing a
Glossary of North of England Words, by J. H. ; Glossaries, by Mr.
Marshall ; and a West-Riding Glossary, by Dr. Willan. 7s. 60!.

2. Series A. Bibliographical. A List of Books illustrating English
Dialects. Part I. Containing a General List of Dictionaries, etc. ; and a
List of Books relating to some of the Counties of England. 4s. 6d.

3. Series C. Original Glossaries. Part I. Containing a Glossary
of Swaledale Words. By Captain Harland. 4s.

4. Series D. The History of English Sounds. By H. Sweet, Esq.
4s. U.

6, Series B. Part II. Eeprinted Glossaries. VIII.-XIV. Con-
taining seven Provincial English Glossaries, from various sources. 7«.

6. Series B. Part III. Eeprinted Glossaries. XV.-XVII. Bay's
Collection of English Words not generally used, from the edition of 1691 ;
together with Thoresby's Letter to Ray, 1703. Re-arranged and newly edited
by Rev. Walter W. Sebat. 85.

6*. Subscribers to the English Dialect Society for 1874 also receive
a copy of ' A Dictionary of the Sussex Dialect.' By the Eev. W. D.
Parish.

7. Series D. Part II. The Dialect of West Somerset. By F. T.

. iELWORTHY, Esq. 3s. 6d.

8. Series A. Part II. A List of Books Eelating to some of th&
Counties of England. Part II. 6s.

9. Series C. A Glossary of "Words used in the Neighbourhood of
Whitby. By F. E. Robinson. Part L A— P. 7s. 6^.

Digitized by Microsoft®

76 Linguistic Publications, of Triibner & Co.,

10. Series C. A Glossary of the Dialect of Lancashire. By J. H.
Nodal and G. Milnek. Part I. A — E. 3». 6d.

11. On the Survival of Early English "Words in our Present Dialects.
By Dr. E. Morris. 6d.

12. Series C. Original Glossaries. Part III. Containing Pive
Original Provincial English Glossaries. Is.

13. Series C. A Glossary of "Words used in the Neighbourhood of
Whitby. By F. K. Kobinson. Part II. P— Z. 6« 6<?.

14. A Glossary of Mid-Torkshire Words, with a Grammar. By C.
Clotjgh Eoeinson. 9s.

15. A Glossaet op "Woeds used in the "Wapentakes of Manley and

Corringham, Lincolnshire. By Edward Peacock, F.S.A. 9«. 6d.

16. A Glossary of Holderaess Words. By E. Eoss, E. Steab, and
T. HoLDERNESs. With a Map of the District. 7s. 6d.

17. On the Dialects of Eleven Southern and South- Western Counties,
Tvith a new Classification of the English Dialects. By Prince Louis LnciEN
Bonaparte. With Two Maps. Is.

18. Bibliographical List. Part III. completing the Work, and
containing a List of Books on Scottish Dialects, Anglo -Irish Dialect, Cant
and Slang, and Americanisms, with additions to the English List and Index.
Edited by J. H. Nodal, is. 6d.

19. An Outline of the Grammar of West Somerset. By E. T.
Elwobthy, Esa. 5s.

20. A Glossary of Cumberland Words and Phrases. By WrLUAit

DicKmsoN, F.L?S. 6s.

21. Tusser's Five Hundred Pointes of Good Hushandrie. Edited
with Introduction, Notes and Glossary, by W. Paine and Sidney J.
Herrtage, B.A. 12s. 6d.

22. A Dictionary of English Plant IN'ames. By James BanTEif,
F.L.S., and Robert Holland. Part I. (A to F). 8s. 6d.

23. Eive Eeprinted Glossaries, including WUtsbire, East Anglian,

Suffolk, and East Yorkshire Words, and Words from Bishop Kennett's
Parochial Antiquities. Edited by the Rev. Professor Skeat, M.A. 7s,

24. Supplement to the Cumberland Glossary (No. 20). By W.
Dickinson, F.L.S. Is.

25. Specimens of English Dialects. Eiist Volume. I. Devonshire ;
Exmoor Scolding and Courtship. Edited, with Notes and Glossary, by F. T.
Elwortht. fl. Westmoreland: Wm. de Worfat's Bran New Wark.
Edited by Rev. Prof. Skeat. 8s. 6d.

26. A Dictionary of English Plant Names. By J. Bkitten and E.
Holland. Part II. (G to 0). 1880. 8s. 6d.

27. Glossary of Words in use in Cornwall. I. West Cornwall. By
Miss M. A. Courtney. II. East Cornwall. By Thomas Q. Couch. With
Map. 6s.

28. Glossary of Words and Phrases in use in Antrim and Down. By
William Hugh Patterson, M.E.I.A. 7s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G. 77

29. An Early English Hymn to the Virgin. By F. J. FnENrvAXL,

M.A., and A. J. Ellis, F.E.S. &d.

30. Old Country and Farming, "Words. Gleaned from Agricultural

Books. By James Britten, F.L.S. 10«. Qd.

31. The Dialect of Leicestershire. By the Eev. A. B. Etans, D.D.,

and Sebastian Eyans, LL.D. 10s. &d.

32. Five Original Glossaries. Isle of "Wight, Oxfordshire, Cumber-

land, North Linoolnshire and Radnorshire. By Tarious Authors. 7«. 6<?.

33. George Eliot's "Use of Dialect. By W. E. A. Axok. (Forming

Wo. 4 of " Miscellanies.") 6d.

34. Turner's Names of Herbes, a.d. 1548. Edited (with Index and

Indentification of Names) by James Britten, E.L.S. 6«. &d.

35. Glossary of the Lancashire Dialect. By J. H. Nodai and Geo.
MiLNBB. Part II. (P to Z). 6s.

36. "West "Worcester "Words. By Mas. Chambesiain. 4s. Qd.

37. Fitzherbert's Book of Husbandry, a.d. 1534. Edited with Intro-
duction, Notes, and Glossarial Index. By the Eev. Professor Skeat. 8s. &d.

38. Devonshire Plant Names. By the Eev. Hildebic Fetestd. 5«.

39. A Glossary of the Dialect of Aldmondbury and Huddersfleld. By
the Eev. A. Easher, M.A., and the Eev. Thos. Lees, M.A. 8s. Qd.

40. Hampshihe "Woeds anb Pheases. Compiled and Edited by the
Eev. Sir William H. Cope, Bart. 6s.

41. Nathaitiel Ballet's English Dialect Woeds oe the 18th Centuet.
Edited by W. E. A. Axon. 9s.

41.* The Teeattse op Ftsshinge with an Angle. By JniiAif a Baenes.
An earlier form (circa 1450) edited with Glossary by Thomas Satchell, and
by him presented to the subscribers for 1883.

42. Upton- ON- Seveen "Woeds and Pheases. By the Eev. Canon
Lavtson. 2s. 6rf.

43. Anglo-Feench Vowel Sounds. A "Word List Illustrating their
Correspondence with Modern English. By Miss B. M. Skeat. 4s.

44. GiossAET OF Cheshiee Woeds. By E. Holland. Parti. (A-F.) Is.

45. English Plant Names. Part III. completing the work. 10«.

46. Glossaet oe Cheshire Woeds. By Eobeet Holland. Part 2.
(G-Z), completing the vocabulary. 9s.

47. BiED Names. By the Eev. Chaeles Swainson. 12«.

48. FoTJE DLitECT Woeds — Clem, Lake, Oss, Nesh. By Thomas
Hallam. 4s.

49. Eepoet on Dialectal Woek. From May '85 to May '86. By
A. J. Ellis, F.E.S. (Miscellanies, No. 5). 2s.

50. Glossaet oe West Sombesei Woeds. By F. T. Elwoetht. 20«.

51. Cheshiee Glossaet. By. E. Holland. Part III. completing

the work. 6s.

52. S.W. LzNCOLNSHiEE Glossaet (Wapentake of Graffoe). By the
Eev. E. E. Cole. 7s. 6rf.

Digitized by Microsoft®

78 Linguistic Publications of Triibner & Co.,

53. The Folk Speech OF South Cheshzee. By Thomas Dablingtow. 15«.

54. A DiciiojfAET OF the Kentish Dialect. By the Eev. W. D.
Parish and the Rev. W. Frank Shaw. 10«.

55. Second Eepoet on Dialectal Wokk. Prom May '86 to May '87.
By A. J. Ei.LJa, F.R.S. (Miscellanies, No. 6). 2«.

Freeman. — On Speech Foemation as the Basis foe Teue Spelling.

By H. Fbeeman. Crown 8vo. pp. Tiii.-88, cloth. 3s. Sd.
Furnivall. — Education in Eaelt England. Some Notes used, as
Forewords to a Collection of Treatises on " Manners and Meals in the Olden
Time," for the Early English Text Society. By F. J. Fdrnivali,, M.A.
8vo. sewed, pp. 74. Is.

Garlanda. — The Foetunes op "Woeds. Letters to a Lady. By
Fedekioo Gahlanda, Ph.D. Crown Svo. pp. vi.-226, cloth. 1888. 5*.

Garlanda. — The Philosophy of "Woeds. A Popular Introduction to
the Science of Language. By Fedekioo Garlanda, Ph.D. Crown 8to. pp.
Ti.-294, cloth. 1888. 5s.

Gould. — Good English ; or, Popular Errors in Language. By E. S.
GoTJLD. Revised Edition. Crown 8to. cloth, pp. xii. and 214. 1880. 6s.

Hall. — On English Adjectives in -Able, witli Special Eeference to
Rbliable. By Fitzedwaed Hall, C.E., M.A., Hon. D.C.L. Oxon. Crown
Svo. cloth, pp. viii. and 238. 1877. 7s. 6d.

Hall. — MoDEEN English. By Fitzedwaed Hall, M.A., Hon. D.C.L.,
Oxon. Cr. 8vo. cloth, pp. xvi. and 394. 1873. 10s. 6d.

Jackson. — Sheopshiee Woed-Book ; A Glossary of Archaic and Pro-
vincial Words, etc., used in the County. By Geosqina F. Jackson. 8vo. pp.
xcvi. and 524. 1881. 31s. 6d.

Manipiilus Vocabulorum. — A Ehyming Dictionary of the English.
Language. By Peter Levins (1570) Edited, with an Alphabetical Index, by
Henry B. Wheatley. 8vo. pp. xvi. and 370, cloth. 14s.

Manning. — An iNauniY into the Chaeactek and Oeigin of the

Possessive Augment In English and in Cognate Dialects. By the late
James Manning, (J.A.S., Recorder of Oxford. Svo.pp. iv. and 90. 2s.

Percy. — Bishop Peecy's Folio Mantjsceipts — Ballads and Eomances.

Edited hy John "W. Hales, M.A., Fellow and late Assistant Tutor of Christ's
College, Cambridge ; and Frederick J. Furnivall, M.A., of Trinity Hall, Cam-
bridge; assisted by Professor Child, of Harvard University, Cambridge, U.S.A.,
W. Chappell, Esq., etc. In 3 volumes. Vol. I., pp. 610 ; Vol. 2, pp. 681. ;
Vol. 3, pp. 640. Demy 8vo. half-bound, £4 4s. Extra demy 8vo. half-bound,
on Whatman's ribbed paper, £6 6s. Extra royal 8vo., paper covers, on What-
man's best ribbed paper, £10 10s. Large 4to., paper covers, on Whatman's
best ribbed paper, £12.

Philological Society. Transactions of the, contains several valuable
Papers on Early English. For contents see page 21.

Shakespeare-Notes. — By F. A. Leo. Demy 8vo. pp. viii. and 120,

cloth. 1885. 6s.
Stratmann.— A Dictionaet of the Old English Language. CompUed
from the writings of the xiiith, xivth, and xvth centuries. By Francis
Henry Stratmann. 3rd Edition. 4to. with Supplement. In wrapper. £1 16«.

Digitized by Microsoft®

.67 and 59, Ludgate Sill, London, E.C. 79

Stratmann.— An Old En&lish Pobm oi' the Owl and the Nightingaue
Edited by Francis Hbnhy Stkatmann. 8vo. cloth, pp. 60. 3«.

Turner. — The English Language. A Concise History of the English
LangTiage, with a. Glossary showing the Derivation and Pronunciation of the
English Words. By E. Tuknee. In German and English on opposite pages.
18mo. sewed, pp. viii. and 80. 1884. Is. 6rf.

Wedgwood. — A Dictionaex op English Ettmologt. By Hensleigh

Wedgwood. Third revised Edition. With an Introduction on the Formation
of Language. Imperial 8to., double column, pp. Ixxii. and 746. 21s.

Wright. — Feudal Manuals op English HisToaT. A Series of
Popular Sketches of our National History, compiled at different periods, from
the Thirteenth Century to the Fifteenth, for the use of the Feudal Gentry and
Nobility. (In Old French). Now first edited from the Original Manuscripts. By
Thomas Weight, Esq., M.A. Small 4to. cloth, pp. jLxiv. and 184. 1872. 15«.

Wright. — Anglo-Saxon and Old-English Yocabulaeibs, Illustrating
the Condition and Manners of our Forefathers, as well as the History of the
Forms of Elementary Education, and of the Languages Spoken In this Island
from the Tenth Century to the Fifteenth. Edited by Thomas Wbight, Esq.,
M.A., F.S.A., etc. Second Edition, edited and collated, by Riohakd Wulceeb.
2 vols. 8vo. pp. XI.-408, and iv.-486, cloth. 1884. 28«.

Wright. — Celt, Koman, and Saxon. See page 41.

FRISIAN.

Cummins. — A Geamhae op the Old Eeiesic Language. By A. H.
Cummins, A.M. Second Edition, with Eeading Book, Glossary, etc. Crown
8vo. cloth, pp. xvi. and 130. 1887. 6s.

Oera Linda Book, from a Manuscript of the Thirteenth Century,
with the permission of the Proprietor, C. Over de Linden, of the Holder.
The Original Frisian Text, as verified by Dr. J. 0. Ottema; accompanied
by an English Version of JDr. Ottema's Dutch Translation, by William E.
Sandbach. &V0. cl. pp. xivii. and 223. 5s.

GAUDIAN" (See under " Hoeenle," page 42.)

OLD GERMAN.

Kroeger. — The Minnesingbe op Gteemant. By A. E. Keoegee. 12mo.

cloth, pp. vi. and 284. 7s.
CoHTENTs.— Chapter I. The Miiiheeinger and the Minnesong.— II. The Minnelay. — ^III. The
.Divine Minnesong. — IV. Walther von der Vogelweide.^V. Ulrich von Lichtenstein. — VI. The
Metrical Romances of the Minnesinger and Gottfried von Strassburg's ' ' Tristan and Isolde.*'

GIPSY.
Leland. — The English Gipsies and thbib Language. By Chaeles

G. Leland. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. 276. 7s. 6<?.

leland. — The Gypsies. — By C. G. Leland. Crown 8vo. pp. 372,
cloth. 1882. IDs. &d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

80 Linguistic Publications of Triibner 8f Co.

Faspati. — finiDES sue les Tchingtttanes (GryrsiEs) oir Bohemiens db
L'Empiee Ottoman. Par Alexandre G. Paspati, M.D. Large 8vo. sewed,
pp. xii. and 652. Constantinople, 1871. 28s.

GOTHIC.

Skeat. — A Mobso-Gothic Giossaet, with an Introduction, an Outline
ef Moeso-Gothic Grammar, and a. List of Anglo-Saxon and Modem English
"Words etymologically connected with Moeso-Gothic. By the Eev. "W. W.
Skeat. Small 4to. cloth, pp. xxiv.and 342. 1868. 9«.

GEEEK (Modern and Classic).

Bizyenos. — ATGIAE2 AYPAI Poems. By M. Biztenos. With Frontis-
piece Etched by Prof. A. Legros.^ Eoyal 8to. pp. Tiii.-312. Printed on
hand-made paper, and richly bound. 1884. £1 11*. 6d.

Buttmann. — A Geammae of the Netv Testament Gkeee. By A.
BuTTMANN. Authorized translation by Prof J. H. Thayer, with numerous
additions and corrections by the author. Demy 8to. cloth, pp. xx. and 474.
187 . lis.

Byrne. — OEiMifr or the Geebk, Latin and Gothic B,oots. By James

Btenb, M.A. Demy 8vo. pp. viii. and 360, cloth. 1887. 18».
Contopoulos. — A Lexicon oe MoDEBif Gbeek-English and English

Modern Greek. By N. Contopoulos. In 2 vols. Svo. cloth. Part I.

Modern Greek-English, pp. 460. Part II. English-Modern Greek, pp. 582.

£\ Is.
Contopoulos. — Handbook op Geeek and English Dialogues asd Coe-

RESPONDENCE. Fcap. 8vo. cloth, pp. 238. 1879. 2s. %d.
Edmonds. — Geeek Lays, Idylls, Legends, etc. A Selection from

Eecent and Contemporary Poets. Translated by E. M. Edmonds. "With

Introduction and Notes. Crown 8to. pp. xiv. and 264, cloth. 1885. 6». 6d.

Gaster. — Ilchestee Lectuees on Geeeko-Slavonic LrrEEAnrEE, and

its Eelation to the Folk-lore of Europe during the Middle Ages. "With two
Appendices and Plates. Jiv M. Gastek, Ph.D. Crown 8vo. pp. x. and 230,
cloth. 1887. Is. 6d.
Geldart. — A GmmE lo Modeen Geebk. By E. M. Geldaet. Post

8vo. cloth, pp. xii. and 274. 1883. 7s. M. Key, cloth, pp. 28. 2s. 6rf.

Oeldart. — Simplified Geammae of Modern Geeek. By E. M.

Geldart, M.A. Crown Svo. pp. 68, cloth. 1883. 2s. 6(f.
Lascarides. — A Compeehensive Pheaseological English-Ancient and

Modern Greek Lexicon. Founded upon a manuscript of G. P. Lascarides,

Esq., and Compiled by L. Myriantheds, Ph. D. In 2 vols, foolscap Svo. pp.

xii. and 1,338, cloth. 1SS2. £1 10s.

Murdoch. — A Note on Indo-Etjeopean Phonology. With Especial
Eeference to the True Pronunciation of Ancient Greek. By D. B. Murdoch,
L.E.C.P., etc. Demy Svo. pp. 40, wrapper. 1887. Is. &d.

Newman. — Comments on the Text of ^schylus. By F. W. Ne"wman.
Demy Svo. pp. xii. and 144, cloth. 1884. 5s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 69, Ludgate Hill, London, E. C. 81

Sophocles, —Romaic or MoBBRif Greek Grammar. By E. A. Sophocles.

8to. pp. xxviii. and 196. 10s. Qd.

Sophocles. — Greek Lexicon op the Roman and Byzantine Periods
(From B.C. 146 to a.b. 1100). By E. A. Sophocles. Super-royal 8to. pp.
XYi.-1188, half-bound, cloth sides. 52s. 6d.

GTJJAEATI.

Catalogue of Chijamti Books sold by Messrs. Triibner and Oo. post free for penny stamp.

UinocheheTJi. — Pahlati, Gwarati and English Dictionary. By
Jamaspji Dastur Minoohehebji Jamasp Asana. 8to. Vol. I., pp. olxii.
and 1 to 168. Vol. II., pp. xxxii and pp. 169 to 440. 1877 and 1879. Cloth.
14s. each. (To be completed iti 5 vols.)

Shapuiji Edaljf. — A Grammar op the GujARiTf LANaiTAeB. By

ShXpukjJ EDALjf. Cloth, pp. 127. 10s. 6d.
Shapurji Edalji. — A Dictionary, Gujahati and Enslish. By SnAPnurf

EDALjf. Second Edition. Crown 8to. cloth, pp. xxiy. and 874. 21«.

GURMUKHI (Punjabi).

Adi Qranth (The) ; or, The Holt Scriptures op the Sikhs, trans-
lated from the original Gurmuki, with Introductory Essays, by Dr. Eenest
Tkumpp, Munich. Eoy. 8to. pp. 866, cloth. £2 12s. Qd.

Siagh.— Sakhee Book ; or, The Description of Gooroo Gobind Singh's
Beligion and Doctrines, translated from Gooroo Mukhi into Hindi, and after-
wards into English. By Sikdar Attar Singh, Chief of Bhadour. With the
author's photograph. Sto. pp. xviii. and 205. 15s.

HAWAIIAlSr.
Andrews, — A Dictionary op the Hawaiian Language, to -which is

appended an English-Hawaiian Vocabulary, and a Chronological Table of
Remarkable Events. By Loerin Andrews. Bvo. pp. 560, cloth. £l \\s.6d.

HEBREW.

Bickell. — Outlines op Hebrew Ghammae. By Gustatus Bickell,
D.D. Revised by the Author; Annotated by the Translator, Samuel Ives
CuKTiss, junior, Ph.D. With a Lithographic Table of Semitic Characters by
Dr. J. EuTiNG. Cr. 8vo. sd., pp. xiv. and 140. 1877. 3s. &d.

Collins. — A Grammar and Lexicon op the Hebrew Language, entitled
Sefer Hassoham. By Rabbi Moseh Ben Titshak, of England. Edited from
a MS. in the Bodleian Library of Oxford, and collated with a MS. in the
Imperial Library of St. Petersburg, with Additions and Corrections. By G.
W. Collins, M.A., Corpus Christi College, Camb., Hon. Hebrew Lecturer,
Keble College, Oxford. Part I. 4to. pp. 112, wrapper. 1884. Is. 6d.

Gesenius. — Hebrew and English Lexicon op the Old Testament,

including the Biblical Chaldee, from the Latin. By Edward RoBIN^oN.
Fifth Edition. 8vo. elo^/^eWb/Rl^cMf 8ft®*l ^■^'-

82 Linguistic Publications of Triibner & Co.

Gesenius. — Hebeew Geammak. Translated from the Seventeenth

Edition. By Dr. T. J. Conant. Witli Grammatical Exercises, and a
Chrestomathy by the Translator. 8vo. cloth, pp. xvi.-364. £1.

Hebrew Literature Society (Publications of the).

First Series.
Vol. I. Miscellany of Hebrew Literature. Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. viii. and

228. 10».
Vol. II. The Commentary of Ibn Ezra on Isaiah. Edited from MSS., and

Translated with Notes, Introductions, and Indexes, by M. Fbiedi^ndeb,

Ph.D. Vol. I. Translation of the Commentary. Demy 8to. cloth,

pp. xxviii. and 332. 10s. 6d.
Vol. III. The Commentary of Ibn Ezra. Vol. II. The Anglican Version of

the Book of the Prophet Isaiah amended according to the Commentary of

Ibn Ezra. Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. 112. 4s. 6d,

Second Series.

Vol. I. Miscellany of Hebrew Literature. Vol. II. Edited by the Rey. A.

LowY. Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. vi. and 276. 10s. 6il.
Vol. II. The Commentary of Ibn Ezra. Vol. III. Demy Bvo. cloth,
pp. 172. 7s.
Vol. III. Ibn Ezra Literature. Vol. IV. Essays on the Writings of Abraham
Ibn Ezra. By M. Fkiedlander, Ph.D. Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. x. — 252
and 78. 12s. 6d.

Third Series.

Vols. I. -III. The Guide of the Perplexed of Maimonides. Translated from the
original text and annotated by M. Friedlander, Ph.D. Demy 8vo. pp. Ixxx.
—370, and x.— 226, and xxviii. — 328, cloth. £1 lis. 6d.

Hershon. — Taimuiic Miscellaitt. See " Triibner's Oriental Series,"

(4.

Jastrow. — A Diciionaet of the Taegtjmim, the TALmro Babii and
Terushalmi, and the Midrashic Literature. Compiled by M. Jastrow, Ph.D.
Demy 4to. boards. Part I. pp. 100. 5s. Part II. pp. 96. 5s.

Laud. — The Peincipies op Hebbew Geammae. By J. P. N. Land,
Professor of Logic and Metaphysio in the University of Leyden. Translated
from the Dutch by Eeqinald Lane Poole, Balliol College, Oxford. Part I.
Sounds. Part II. "Words. Crown 8vo. pp. xx. and 220, cloth. 7s. 6d.

Mathews. — Abeaham ben Ezea's Unedited Commentaet on the Can-
ticles, the Hebrew Text after two MS., with English Translation by H. J.
Mathews, B.A., Exeter College, Oxford. 8vo. cl. limp, pp. x., 34, 24. 2s. 6d.

ITutt. — Two Teeatises on Veebs containing Feeble and Dottblb
Letters by E. Jehuda Hayug of Fez, translated into Hebrew from the original
Arabic by R. Moses Gikatilia, of Cordova; with the Treatise on Punctuation
by the same Author, translated byAbeu Ezra. Edited from Bodleian M SS.
with an English Translation by J. W. Nhtt, M.A. Demy 8vo. sewed, pp. 312.
1870. 7s. 6d.

Semitic (Songs of the). In English Terse. By Q. E. "W. Cr. 8vo.

cloth, pp. 140. 5s.

Weber. — System der altsynagogalen Palastiaischen Theologie. By
Dr. Febd. Weber. 8vo. sewed. Leipzig, 1880. 7s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, B.C. 83

HINDI.

Catalogm of Hindi Boohs sold by Messrs. Triibner and Co. post free for penny stamp.

Ballantyue. — Elements of HiNDf and Bsaj BhXkX Gtbammae. By the
late James R. Ballanttnb, LL.D. Second edition, revised and corrected.
Crown 8vo., pp. 38, cloth. 1868. 5s.

Sate. — A DiCTioNAET of the Hindee Lanstjaob. Compiled by J.

D. Bate. 8vo. cloth, pp. 806. £2 12s. 6d.
Beames. — Notes on the Bhojphei Dialect of Hikbi, spoken in

Western Behar. By John Beames, Esq., B.C.S., Magistrate of Chumparun,

8vo. pp. 26, sewed. 1868. Is. M.

Browne. — A Hindi Peijiee. In Roman Character. By J. P.

BuowNE, B.O.S. Crown 8vo. pp. 36, cloth. 1882. 2s. %d.
Hoernle. — Hindi Grammar. See page 49.

Kellogg. — A Geammae op the Hindi Language, in -which are treated
the Standard Hindi, Br^', and the Eastern' Hind! of the Eamayan of Tulsi
Das ; also the Colloquial Dialects of Marwar, Kumaon, Avadh, Baghelkhand,
Bhojpur, etc., with Copious Philological Notes. By the Eev. S. H. Kellogg,
M.A. Eoyal 8vo. cloth, pp. 400. 2ls.

Dlahabliarata. Translated into Hindi for Madan Mohun Bhaii, by
Kbishnachandbadharmadhikarin of Benares. (Containing all but the
Harivansi.) 3 vols. 8vo. cloth, pp. 574, 810, and 1106. £2 2s.

Mathuraprasada Misra. — A Teilinqual Diciionaet, being a Compre-
hensive Lexicon in English, TJrdd, and Hindi, eiihibiting the Syllabication, Pro-
nunciation, and Etymology of English Words, with their Explanation in English,
and in Urdii and Hindi in the Roman Character. By Mathurapeasad A Misra,
Second Master, Queen's College, Benares. 8vo. cloth, pp. xv. and 1330.
Benares, 1865. £1 Ids.

HINDUSTANI.

Catalogue of Sindualani Books sold by Messrs. Triibner and Co. post free for penny

stamp.

Ballantyue. — Hindustani Selections in the ITaskhi and Devanagari

Character. With a Vocabulary of the Words. Prepared for the use of the
Scottish Naval and Military Academy, by James R. Ballanttne. Royal 8vo.
cloth, pp. 74. 3s. 6rf.
Craven. — The Popular Dictionary in English and Hindustani and
Hindustani and English, with a Number of Useful Tables. By the Rev. T.
Craven, M.A. Fcap. 8vo. pp. 214, cloth. 1882. 3s. 6d.

Dowson. — A Geammae of the Urdu or Hindustani Language. By
J. DowsoN. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. pp. xvi. and 264, cloth. 1887. lOs.Gd.

J)owson. — A Hindustani Exeecise Book. Containing a Series of
Passages and Extracts adapted for Translation into Hindustani. By John
DowsoN, M.R.A.S. Crown 8vo. pp. 100, limp cloth. 2s. 6d.

Hastwick. — Khiead Afeoz (The Illuminator of the Understanding).
By Maulavi Hafizu'd-din. A New Edition of Hindustani Text, carefully revised,
with Notes, Critical and Explanatory. By Edward B. Eastwick, P.R.S.,
Imperial 8vo. cloth, pp. gjVj^and^ |l,V,.,Rf^i=^e. 1867. 18s.

84 Linguistic Publications of Triibner & Co.

Fallon. — A. New Hih-dttstani-English Dictionaet. With Illustra-
tions from Hindustani Literature and Folk-lore. By S. "W. Fallon, Ph.D.
Halle. Roy. 8to. cloth, pp. xxviii. and 1216 and X. Benares, 1879. £SlOs.

Fallon. — Engiish-Hinddstaeti Dictionaet. "With niustrations from
English Literature and Colloquial English Translated into Hindustani. By S.
W. Fallon. Roy. 8vo. pp. iv.-674, sewed. £1 10s.

Fallon. — A HufDtrsTANi-ENGLisH Law and Commeeciai, DrcrioirAET.

By S. W. Fallon. 8vo. cloth, pp. ii. and 284'. Benares, 1879. 12s. 6d.
Ikhwanu-s Safa; or, Beothees op Ptjeiit. Describing the Contention

between Men and Beasts as to the Superiority of the Human Race. Translated

from the Hindustani by Professor J. DowsoN, Staff College, Sandhurst.

Crown 8vo. pp. viii. and 156, cloth. 7s.
Ehirad-Afroz (The Illuminator of the Understanding). By Mania vi

Haflzu'd-din. A new edition of the Hind1ist&.ni Text, carefully revised, with

Notes, Critical and Explanatory. By E. B. Eastwick, M.P., F.R.S. 8vo.

cloth, pp. xiv. and 32 1 . 1 8s.

Lutaifi Hindee (The) ; or, HDrnoosTAifBE Jest-Book, containing a

Choice Collection of Humorous Stories in the Arabic and Roman Characters ;
to which is added a Hindoostanee Poem by Meer Moohummud TuaUBE.
2nd edition, revised by 'W. C. Smyth. 8vo. pp. xvi. and 160. 184!0. 10s. 6d. ;
reduced to 5s.

Mathuraprasada Misra. — A Teilingtal Dictionaet, being a compre-
hensive Lexicon in English, Urdfi, and Hindi. See under fiindi, page 83-

Palmer. — Hinditstani Geammae. See page 56.

HUNGARIAN.

Singer. — Simplified Geammae oe the Hungaeiajst Langttage. By
I. Singer, of Buda-Pesth. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. vi. and 88. 1884. 4s. 6d.

ICELANDIC.

Anderson. — Noese Mythology, or the Eeligion of our Forefathers.
Containing all the Myths of the Eddas carefully systematized and interpreted,,
■with an tntroduction. Vocabulary and Index. By R. B. Anderson, Prof, of
Scandinavian Languages in the University of "Wisconsin. Crown 8vo. cloth.
Chicago, 1879. 12s. 6d.

Anderson and Bjarnason. — YiKDrG Tales of the Noeth. The Sagas
of Thorstein, Viking's Son, and Fridthjof the Bold. Translated from the
Icelandic by R. B. Anderson, M.A., and J. Bjarnason. Also, Tegner's Frid-
thjof 's Saga. Translated into English by G. .Stephens. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp.
xviii. and 370. Chicago, 1877. 10s.

Cleasby. — An Icelandic-English Dictionaet. Based on the MS.
Collections of the late Richard Cleasby. Enlarged and completed by G.
ViGFtjseoN. "With an Introduction, and Life of Richard Cleasby, by G. "Webbe
Dasent, D.C.L. 4to. £3 7s.

Cleasby. — Appendix to an Icelandic -English Diction art. Set

Skeat.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E. 0. 85

Edda Saemundar Hinns Froda — The Edda of Saemund the Learned.

From the Old Norse or Icelandic. By Benjamin Thokpe. Part II. with Index
of Persons and Places. 12mo. pp. viii. and 172', doth. 1S66. is.

Publications of the Icelandic Literary Society of Copenhagen. For

Numbers 1 to Si, see " Record," No. Ill, p. 14.

55. SkIrnee TIdindi. Hins Islenzka Bokmentaf^lage, 1878. 8vo.
pp. 176. Kaupmannahofn, 1878. Price 5s.

56. Um Sidbotina k Islanbi eptir porkel Bjarnason, prest a Eeyni-
ToUaim. Utgefid af Hinu Islenzka Bokmentafelagi, 8vo. pp. 177. Reyk-
javik, 1878. Price 7». 6d.

57. BiSKTjpA SoGTTH, gefnar ut af Hinu fslenzka Bokmentafelagi.
Annat Bindi III. 1878. 8to. pp. 509 to 804. Kaupmannahofn. Price 10s.

58. Sktckslttk oa Keikningab, Hins Islenzka B6kmentaf^lags, 1877 to
1878. 8to. pp. 28. Kaupmannahofn, 1878. Price 2s.

69. Fkjexxib fea Islajtdi, 1877, eptir V. Briem. 8vo. pp. 50.
Beykjavik, 1878. Price 2s. &d.

60. - ALjjfNGissiADuE HiNN FoENi ViD Oxara, med TJppdrattum eptir
Sigurd Gudmuudsson. 8vo. pp. 66, with Map. Kaupmannahofn, 1878. Price
6s.

Skeat. — A List or English "Woeds, the Etymology of which is illus-
trated by Comparison with Icelandic. Prepared in the form of an Appendix to
Cleasby and Vigfasson's Icelandic-Dnglish Dictionary. By the Rev. Walter
W. Skeat, M.A., English Lecturer and late Fellow of Christ's College, Cam-
bridge; and M.A. of Exeter College, Oxford; one of the Vice-Presidents of
the Cambridge Philological Society ; and Member of the Council of the Philo-
logical Society of London. 1876. Demy 4to. sewed. 2s.

Tegner. — Feibthjoj's Saga, A Noese Eomab-ce. By Esaias TegnSe,
Bishop of Wexio. Translated from the Swedish by Thomas A. E. Holoomb
and Martha A. Lyon Holcome. Crown 8vo. pp. viii. -214, cloth. 1883.
6s. 6d.

Thorhelson, Pall. — Dictionn-aiee IsiAisrDAis-FEAiircAis. "Vol. I. Part
I. 8vo. pp. 32. To be completed in about 50 parts. Price Is. each.

JAPANESE.
Aston. — A Geammae oe the Japanese "Weitten Langttage. By "W. Q-.

AsTON, M.A., Assistant Japanese Secretary, H.B.M.'s Legation, Yedo, Japan.
Second edition. Enlarged and Improved. Royal. 8vo. pp. 306, 28s.

Aston. — A Shoet Geammae op the Japanese Spoken Language. By
W. G. AsTON, M.A., H. B. M.'s Legation, Yedo, Japan. Third edition.
12mo. cloth, pp. 96. I2s.

Black. — Young Japan, Yokohama and Yebo. A Narrative of the
Settlement and the City, Irom the Signing of the Treaties in 1858 to the close
of the Tear 1879. With a Glance at the Progress of Japan during a period of
Twenty-one Tears. By J. E. Biack. Two Vols., demy 8vo. pp. xviii. and 418 ;
xiv. and 522, cloth. 1881. £2 2s.

(Chamberlain. — A Romanised Japanese Readee. Consisting of

Japanese Anecdotes, Maxims, etc., in Easy Written Style ; with English

Translation and Notes. By B. H. Chamberlain, Professor of Japanese and

Philology in the Imperial University of Tokyo. 12mo. pp. xlii.— 346, cloth.

1886. 6s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

86 Linguistic Publications of Triibner & Co.

Chamberlain. — SiMPinrED Japanese Geammae. See page 50.

Chamberlain. — Classical Poetet of the Japanese. See page 4.

Sickins. — The Old Bamboo-Hbwee's Stoet (Taketori no Okina
no Monogatari). The Earliest of the Japanese Romances, written in the
Tenth Century. Translated, with Observations and Notes, by F. Victor
DioKiNS. With Three Chromo- Lithographic Illustrations taken from
Japanese Makimonos, to which is added the Original Text in Boman, with
Grammar, Analytical Notes and Vocabulary. 8vo. cl., pp. 118. 1888. 7s. 6d^

Hepburn. — A Japanese and English Dictionaet. With an English
and Japanese Index. By J. C. Hepburn, M.D., LL.D.^ Second edition.
Imperial 8to. cloth, pp. xxxii., 632 and 201. 18$.

Hepburn. — A Japanese-English and English-Japanese Dictionaet.

By J. C. Hepburn, M.D., LL.D. Third Edition, demy 8vo. pp. xxxiv.— 964,

half-morocco. 1887. £1 10s.
Hepburn. — A Japanese-English and English-Japanese Dictionaet.

By J. C. Hepburn, M.D., LL.D. Abridged by the Author. Second Edition,

Revised and Enlarged. 16mo. cloth, pp. viii. and 1033. 1887. 14s.

Hoffinann, J. J. — A Japaitese Geammae. Second Edition. Large

8vo. cloth, pp. viii. and 368, with two plates. £1 Is.
Hofimann. — Shopping Dialogites, in Japanese, Dutch, and English.

By Professor J. Hoffmann. Oblong Svo. pp. xiii. and 44, sewed. 6s.
Hoffmann (Prof. Dr. J. J.) — Japanese-English Dictionaet. — Pub-
lished by order of the Dutch Government. Elaborated and Edited by Dr. L.

Serrurier. Vols. 1 and 2. Royal 8vo. Brill, 1881. 12s. 6<l.
Imbrie. — Handbook op English- Japanese Ettmologt. By "W.

Imbrie. Svo. pp. xxiv. and 208, cloth. Tokiy5, 1880. £1 Is.
Metchnikoff. — L'Empire Japonais, texte et dessins, par L. Metch-

NiKOPP. 4to. pp. viii. and 694. Illustrated vrith maps, coloured plates and

woodcuts, cloth. 1881. £1 10s.

Pfoundes. — Eir So Mmi Bttkiteo. See page 37.

Satow. — An English Japanese Dictionaet oe the Spoken Language.
By Ernest Mason Satow, Japanese Secretary to H.M. Legation at Yedo, and
Ishibashi Masarata, of the Imperial Japanese Foreign Office. Second
edition. Imp. 32mo., pp. xyi. and 416, cloth. 12s. 6d.

Siiyematz. — Genji Monogataeu. The most celebrated of the Classical
Japanese Romances. Translated by K. Suyematz. Crown Svo. pp. xvi. and
264, cloth. 1882. 7s. 6d.

KABAIL.

Newman. — Kabaii Vocabitlaet. Supplemented by Aid of a 'New
Source. By F. W. Newman, Emeritus Professor of University College,
London. Crown Svo , pp. 124, cloth. 1888. 6s.

KANARESE.

Garrett. — A Manual English and Eanaeese Dictionart, containing
about Twenty-three Thousand Words. By J. Garrett. Svo. pp. 908, cloth.
Bangalore, 1872. 18s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, Ludgate Sill, London, E.C, 87

KAYATHI.

Grierson. — A Handbook to the Katathi Chaeactee. By G. -A.
Gbiekson, B.C.S., late Subdivisional Officer, Madhubani, Darbhanga. With
Thirty Plates in Facsimile, with Translations. 4to. cloth, pp. vi. and 4.
Calcutta, 1881. 18s.

KELTIC (Cornish, Gaelic, Welsh, Ikish).

Bottrell. — Traditions and Heaethside Siobies op "West Coenwail.
By William BoTTRELL. With Illustrations by Mr. Joseph Blight. Crown
8to. cloth. Second Series, pp. iv. and 300. 6*. Third Series, pp. fiii. and
200, cloth. 1880. 6s.

Evans. — Dictionaet of the "Welsh Langitaoe. By the Eev. D.
Silvan Eyans, B.D., Eector of Llanwrin, N. Wales. Part I, A— AWYS.
Eoyal 8vo. pp. 420, paper. 1887. 10s. ed.

iUiys. — LECiimES on Welsh Philology. By John Ehts, M.A.,
Professor of Celtic at Oxford. Second revised and enlarged edition. Crown
8to. cloth, pp. xiv. and 468. 1879. 15s.

Spurrell. — A Gkammae op the "Welsh Langttage. By "William

Spurrell. 3rd Edition. Fcap. cloth, pp. viii.-206. 1870. Ss.

Spurrell. — A "Welsh Dictionaet. English-"Welsh and "Welsh-English,
With Preliminary Observations on the Elementary Sounds of the English
Language, a copious Vocabulary of the Boots of English Words, a list of
Scripture Proper Names and English Synonyms and Explanations. By
William Spurrell. Third Edition. Fcap. cloth, pp. xxv. and 732. 8s. 6<?.

Stokes. — Goidelica — Old and Early-Middle Irish Glosses : Prose and
Verse. Edited by Whitley Stokes. Second edition. Medium 8vo. cloth,
pp. 192. 1872. 18s.

Stokes. — ToGAiL Teoi ; The Destruction of Troy. Transcribed from
the fascimile of the Book of Leinater, and Translated, -with a Glossarial Index of
the Rare Words, by W. Stokes. 8vo. pp. xv.-188, boards. 1882. 18s. A
limiteil edition only, privately printed, Calcutta.

Stokes. — The Beeton Glosses at Oeleans. By "W. Sioees. 8vo.
pp, X.-78, boards. 1880. 10s. 6d. A limited edition only, privately printed,
Calcutta.

Stokes. — Theee Middle-Ieish Homilies on the Lives of Saints Patrick,
Brigit, and Columba. By W. Stokeb. 8vo. pp. xii.-140, boards. 1877.
10s. 6d. A limited edition only privately printed, Calcutta.

Stokes. — Beunahs Meeiasek. The Life of Saint Meriasek, Bishop
and Confessor. A Cornish Drama. Edited, with a Translation and Notes, by
Whitley SiOKES. MediumSvo. cloth, pp. xvi.-280, and Facsimile. 1872. 15s.

Stokes, — The Old-Ieish Glosses at "Wijezbueg and Caelsetthe.
Edited, with a Translation and Glossarial Index, by Whitley Stokes, D.C.L.,
Part I. The Glosses and Translation. Demy 8vo. pp. viii. and 342, paper.
10s. 6d.

Wright's Celt, Eoman, and Saxon. See page 41.

Digitized by Microsoft®

88 Linguistic Publications of Trubner & Co.,

KONKANI.
Maflfei. — A Konkani Geammae. By Angelus F. X. Mateei. 8vo.

pp. xiv. and 438, cloth. Mangalore, 1882. 18s.

Maffei. — Aif Engxish-Konkani and Konkabti-Engush DicnoifAET.
8vo. pp. xii. and 546 ; xii. and 158. Two parts in one. Half bound. £1 10s.

LIBYAN.
Newman. — LreTAir Vocabtjlaey. An Essay towards Eeproducing the
Ancient Nuraidian Language, out of Four Modern Languages. By F. W.
Newman, Emeritus Professor of University College, London. Crown 8yo. pp.
Ti. and 204. cloth. 1882. 10s. 6d.

MAHRATTA (Marathi).

Catalogue of Marathi Books sold by Messrs. Trubner Sf Co. post free for penny stamp.

.ffisop's Fables.— Originally Translated into Marathi by Sadashiya
Kashinath Chhatre. Revised from the 1st ed. 8vo. cloth. Bomhay, 1877. 5s. 6A

Ballantyue. — A Geammae oe the Mahhatta Language. Eor the

use of the East India College at Haileybury. By JiMES K. Ballantyne, of
the Scottish Naval aad Military Academy. 4to. cloth, pp. 56. 5s.

Bellairs. — A Geammae op the Maeathi Language. By H. S. K.

Bellaies, M.A., and Laxman Y. Ashkedkar, B.A. 12nio. cloth, pp. 90. 5s.
Molesworth. — A Dictionaet, Maeathi and English. Compiled by
J. T. Molesworth, assisted by Geokge and Thomas Candy. Second Edition,
revised and enlarged. By J. T. Molesworth. Royal 4to. pp. xxx and 922,
boards. Bombay, 1857. £2 2s.

Molesworth. — A Compendium of Moleswoeth's Maeathi aub Engiish
Dictionary. By Baba Padmanji. Second Edition. Eevised- and Enlarged.
Demy 8vo. pp. xx. and 624, cloth. 15s.

Navalkar. — The Student's Maeathi Geammae. By G. E. Nataikae.

New Edition. 8vo. cloth, pp. xvi. and 342. Bomhay, 1879. ISs.
Tukarama. — A Complete Collection of the Poems of Tukarama
(the Poet of the MahirSshtra). In Marathi. Edited by Vishnu Parashu-
BAM Shastri Pandit, under the supervision of Sankar Pandurang Pandit,M.A.
With a complete Index to the Poems and a Glossary of difficult "Words. To
which is prefixed a Life of the Poet In English, by Jan&rdan SakhEir&m G&dgil.
2 vols, in large 8vo. cloth, pp. xxxii. and 742, and pp. 728, 18 and 72. Bombay
1873. £1 Is. each vol.

MALAGASY.

Catalogue of Malagasy Books sold by Messrs. Trubner f Co. post free for penny stamp,

Parker. — A Concise Grammae of the Malagasy Language. By G.

W. Parker. Crown 8vo. pp. 66, with an Appendix, cloth. 1883. 5s.
Van der Tuuk. — Outlines of a Geammar of the Malagasy Language

By H. N, VAN DER TouK. 8vo., pp. 28, sewed. Is.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Mill, London, E.G. 89

MALAY.

Catahguei of Malay Booh soldty Missrs. Triiiner ^ Co. post fret for penny stamp,

Dennys. — A Hanbbook op Maiax CoLLoauiAL, as spoken in Singapore,
Being a Series of Introductory Lessons for Domestic and Business F^irposes.
By K. B. Dennys, Ph.D., F.R.G.S., M.E.A.8., etc.. Author of "The
Folklore of China," etc. 8vo. pp. 204, cloth. 1878. £l Is.

Maxwell. — A Manttai. op the Maxat Lahgtjase. "With, an Intro-
ductory Sketch of the Sanskrit Element in Malay. By W. E. Maxwell,
Assistant Eesident, Perak, Malay Peninsula. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. vUi.-
ISi. 1882. Is. 6rf.

Miscellaneous Papers relating to Indo-China and the Indian
Archipelago. See page 7.

Swetteuham. — Vocabuiaet op the Enslish: AifD Malay LAwairAeES.
"With Notes. £jrE,A. Swettenham. 2 Vols. Vol. I. English-Malay Vo-
cabulary and Dialogues. Vol. II. Malay-English Vocabulary. Small Svo.
boards. Singapore, 1881. £\.

The Traveller's Malay Pronouncing Handbook, for the Use of
Travellers and Xew-comers to Singapore. 32mo. pp. 2S1, boards. Singapore,
1886. 5s.

Van der Tnuk. — Shoet Accoitnt op the Malay Mantjsceipts BELonGnsro
totheRoyal Asiatic Society. By H. N. vAn derTuuk. 8vo.pp.S2. 2s. 6d,

MALATALIM.
Oundert. — A Malayalam and English DiciioifAEY. By Eev. H.

GuNDERT, D. Ph. Royal 8vo. pp. viii. and 1116. ^£2 10*.

MAOEI.

©rey. — Maoei Mementos : being a Series of Addresses presented by
the Native People to His Excellency Sir George Grey,.K.C.B., F.R.S. With
Introductory Remarks and Explanatory Notes ; to which is added a small Collec-
tion of Laments, etc. By Ch. Olives B. Davis. Svo. pp. iv. and 228, cloth. 12«.

Williams. — Elest Lessons in the Maoei Language. "With a Short
Vocabulary. By W. L. Williams, B.A. Fcap. Svo. pp. 98, cloth. 5«.

PALI.

D'Alwis. — A Dbsceiptive Catalogite of Sanskrit, Pali, and Sinhalese
Literary Works of Ceylon. By James D'Alwis, M.R.A.S., etc.. Vol. I. (all
published), pp. xxxii. and 244. 1870. 8«. Gd.

Seal. — Dhammapaba. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," page 3.

Sigandet. — Gaitdama. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," page 4.

Buddhist Birth Stories. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," page 4.

Biihler. — Teeee New Edicts op Asoka. By Gr. BiiHLEE. 16mo.

sewed, with Two Facsimiles. 2s. &d.
Childers. — A Pali-English Dictionaey, with Sanskrit Equivalents,

and numerous Quotations, Extracts, and References. Compiled by the late Prof.

R. C. Chilberb, late of the Ceylon C. S. Imperial 8vo., double columns, pp.

xxii. and 622, cloth. 1875. jE3 3s. The first Pali Dictionary ever published.
Digitized by Microsoft®

90 Linguistic Publications of Triibner & Co.,

Childers. — The MAHipAEiNiBBisAsiriTA of the Sutia-Pitaka. The

Pali Text. Edited by the late Professor E. C. Childebs. 8to. cloth, pp.
72. 5s.

Childers.— On Sandhi m Pali. By the late Prof. E. C. Chtldees.

8vo. sewed, pp. 22. Is.

Coomara Swamy. — Stjtta NipXta ; or, the Dialogues and Discourses
of Gotama Buddha. Translated from the Pali, with Introduction and Notes.
By Sir M. Coomaka Swamy. Cr. 8vo. cloth, pp. xxxvi. and 160. 1874. 6s.

Coomara Swamy. — The DathAvajstsa ; or, the History of the Tooth-
Eelio of Gotama Buddha. The Pali Text and its Translation into English,
with Notes. By Sir M. Coomaba Swamy, Mudelilir. Demy Svo. cloth, pp.
174. 1874. 10s. 6d. English Translation only, with Notes. Pp. 100, cloth. 6s.

Davids. — See Buddhist Bieth Stoeies, "Trijhner's Oriental Series,"

!4.

Davids. — SisiEi, the Lion Eock, neae Pulastipitba, and the 39th

Chapteb of the Mahavamsa. By T. W. Rhys Davids. Svo. pp. 30. Is. dd.

Dickson. — The Patimokkha, heing the Buddhist Office of the Con-
fession of Priests. The Pali Text, with a Translation, and Notes, hy J. F.
DiOKSorr. 8vo. sd., pp. 69. 2s.

Fansboll. — JItaea. See under JItaba.

Fausboll. — The Dasaraiha-Jataka, being the Buddhist Story of King
E&ma. The original PS-li Text, with a Translation and Notes by V. Fausboll.
Svo. sewed, pp. iv. and 48. 2s. 6d.

Fausboll. — PivE JItakas, containing a Fairy Tale, a Comical Story,
and Three Fables. In the original Pili Text, accompanied with a Translation
and Notes. By V. Fausboll. 8vo. sewed, pp. viii. and 72. 6s.

Fausboll. — Ten Jatakas. The Original Pali Text, with a Translation
and Notes. By V. Fausboll. Svo. sewed, pp. xiii. and 128. 7s. 6rf.

Fryer. — Yuttodata. (Exposition of Metre.) By Sanghaeaxkhita
Thera. a Pali Text, Edited, with Translation and Notes, by Major G. E.
Fkyer. Svo. pp. 44. 2s. 6rf.

Haas. — Catalogue op Sanskkit and Pali Books in the Libbaet of
the British Museum. By Dr. Ernst Haas. Printed by Permission of the
Trustees of the British Museum. 4to. cloth, pp. 200. £1 Is.

Jataka (The) ; together with its Commentary. Being Tales of the
Anterior Birth of Gotama Buddha. For the first time Edited in the original
Pali by V. Fausboll. Demy Svo. cloth. Vol. I. pp. 512. 1877. 28s.
Vol. II., pp. 452. 1879. 28s. Vol. III. pp. Yiii.-544. 1883. 28s. Vol.
IV. pp. X.-450. 1887. 28s. For Translation see under "Buddhist Birth
Stories," page 4.

The *' Jataka " is a collection of legends in Pali, relating the history of Buddha's trans-
miration before he tvrb born as Gotama. The great antiquity of this work is authenticated
by its forming part of the sacred canon of the Southern Buddhists, which was finally settled at
the last Council in 246 b.c. The collection has long been known as a storehouse of ancient
fables, and as the most original attainable source to which almost the whole of this kind of
literature, from the Panchatantra and Pilpay's fables down to the nursery stories of the present
day, is traceable ; and it has been considered desirable, in the interest of Buddhistic studies as
Well as for more general literary purposes, that an edition and translation of the complete
work should be prepared. The present publication is intended to supply this want.— Athenceum.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Sill, London, E,C, 91

Mahawansa (The) — The Maha-wansa. Prom the Thirty- Seventh
Chapter. Eevised and edited, under orders of the Ceylon Government, hy
H, SuMANGALA, and Don Anduis db Suva Batuwantudawa. Vol. I. Pali
Text in Sinhalese oharactei^ pp. xxxii. and 436. Vol. II. Sinhalese Transla-
tion, pp. Hi. and 378 half-bound. Colombo, 1877. £2 'is.

Kasou. — The Pali Text op Kachchatano's Ghammae, with Ebtgiish;
Annotations. By Francis Mason, D.D. I. The Text Aphorisms, 1 to 673.
II. The English Annotations, including the various Readings of six independent
Burmese Manuscripts, the Singalese Text on Verbs, and the Cambodian Text
on Syntax. To which -is added a Concordance of the Aphorisms. In Two
Parts. , 8vo. sewed, pp. 208, 75, and 28. Toongoo, 1871. £1118.6*

Minayeff. — Geammaiee Palie. Esqnisse d'une Phon^tique et d'une
Morphologie de la Langue Palie. Traduite du Eusse par St. GuyBrd. By
J. MiNAyEPE. 8vo. pp. 128. Paris, 1874. 8s.

Miiller. — Simplified Geammae op the Pali Lanoitage. By E. MUllee,
Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. xvi. and 144. 1884. Is. &d.

Senart. — EaccAtaka et la Liiteeattjeb Geammaticale du Pali.
Jre Partie. Grammaire Palie de KaccSyana, Sutras et Commentaire, publics
aveo une traduction et des notes par E. Senakt. 8vo. pp. 338. Paris, 1871.
Ua.

PAZAND.
Maino-i-Ehard (The Book of the). — The Pazand and Sanskrit

Texts (in Roman characters) as arranged by Neriosengh Dhaval, in the
fifteenth century. With an English translation, a Glossary of the Pazand
texts, containing the Sanskrit, Rosian, and Pahlavi equivalents, a sketch of*
Pazand Grammar, and an Introduction. By E. W. West. 8vo. sewed, pp.
484. 1871. Us.

PEGUAN.
Haswell. — Geammaiical Notes and Vocabtjlaet op the PEGUAif

Lanquaqe. To which are added a few pages of Phrases, etc. By Rev. J. M.
Haswell. 8vo. pp. xvi. and 160. 15s.

PEHLEWI.
Sinkard (The). — The Original Pehlwi Text, the same transliterated

in Zend Characters. Translations of the Text in the Gujrati and English^
Languages; a Commentary and Glossary of Select Terms. By Peshotun
Dtistoor Behramjee Sunjana. Vols. I. and II. Svo. cloth. £2 2s.

Hang. — An Old Pahlati-Pazand Giossaet. Ed., with Alphabetical
Index, by Destuk Hoshanoji Jamaspji Asa, High Priest of the Parsis in
Malwa. Rev. and Enl., with Intro. Essay on the Pahlavi Language, by M. Haug,
Ph.D. Pub. by order of Gov. of Bombay. 8vo. pp. xvi. a52,268,sd. 1870. 28s.

Haug. — A Lecidee on an Oei&inal Speech op Zoeoastbe (Yasna 45),
with remarks on his age. By Martin Haug, Ph.D. Svo. pp. 28, sewed..
Bombay, 1865. 2s.

Haug.^THE Paesis. See "Triibner's Oriental Series," page 3.
Digitized by Microsoft®

92 Linguistic PuMcations of Triibner& Co.,

Haug.— An- Old Zand-Pahlavi Giossaet. Edited in the Original

Characters, with a Transliteration in Roman Letters, an English Translation,
and an Alphabetical Index. By Desttir Hoshengji Jamaspji, High-priest of
the Parsis in Malwa, India. Rev. with Notes and Intro, by Martin Hatjo,
Ph.D. Publ. by order of Gov. of Bombay. 8vo. sewed, pp. Ivi. and 1'32. 15s.
Haug. — The Book op Aeda Yieab. The Pahlavi text prepared by
Destur Hoshangji Jamaspji Asa. Revised and collated with further MSS., with
an English translation and Introduction, and an Appendix containing the Texts
and Translations of the Gosht-i Fryano and Hadokht Nask. By Martot
Hacg, Ph.D., Professor of Sanskrit and Comparative Philology at the Uni-
versity of Munich. Assisted by E. W. West, Ph.D. Published by order of
the Bombay Government. 8vo. sewei, pp. Ixxx., v., and 316. £\ 5s.

Minocheherji. — Pahlavi, Gtjjaeati and English Dictionaet. By
Jamaspji Dastur Minochehji, Jamasp Asana. 8vo. Vol. I. pp. clxii.
and 1 to 168, and Vol. II. pp. xxxii. and pp. 169 to 440. 1877 and 1879.
Cloth. 14s. each. (To be completed in 5 vols.)

Sunjana. — A Geammae op the Pahlvi Language, with Quotations

and Examples from Original Works and a Glossary of Words bearing affinity
with the Semitic Languages. By Peshotxjn Dustooe Behramjeb Sunjana,
Principal of Sir Jamsetjee Jejeeboy Zurthosi Madressa. 8vo. cl., pp. 18-457.
25s.

Thomas. — Eaelt Sassanian Insceiptions, Seals and Coins, illustrating

the Early History of the Sassanian Dynasty, containing Proclamations of Arde-
shir Babek, Sapor I., and his Successors. With a Critical Examination and
Explanation of the Celebrated Inscription in the HSji&bad Cave, demonstrating
that Sapor, the Conqueror of Valerian, was a Professing Christian. By Edwabd
Thomas, F.R.S. Illustrated. 8vo. cloth, pp. 148. 7s. &d.
Thomas. — Comments on Recent Pehlvi DECiPHESMEfrTS. "With an
Incidental Sketch of the Derivation of Aryan Alphabets, and Contributions to
the Early History and Geography of Tabaristto. Illustrated by Coins. By
Edward Thomas, F.R.S. 8vo. pp. 56, and 2 plates, cloth, sewed. 3s. 6<f.

West. — Glossaet and Index op the Pahlati Texts op the Booz op
Arda Viraf, The Tale of Gosht-I Fryano, The Hadokht Nask, and to some
extracts from the Din-Kard and Nirangistan ; prepared from Destur Hoshangji
Asa's Glossary to the Arda Viraf Kamak, and from the Original Texts, mm
Notes on Pahlavi Grammar. By E. W. West, Ph.D. Revised by Martin
Haug, Ph.D. Published by order of the Government of Bombay. 8vo. sewed,
pp. viii. and 352. 25s.

PENNSYLVANIA DUTCH.
Haldeman. — Pennsylvania Dutch : a Dialect of South Germany
with an Infusion of English. By S. S. Haldeman, A.M., Professor of Com-
parative Philology in the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia. 8vo. pp.
viii. and 70, cloth. 1872. is. Gd.

PERSIAN.
Ballantyne. — Peinciples op Peesian CAXiGEArHT, illustrated by

Lithographic Plates of the TA" LIK characters, the one usually employed in
writing the Persian and the Hindustani. Second edition. Prepared for the
use of the Scottish Naval and Military Academy, by Jamks R. Ballanttne.
4to. cloth, pp. 14, 6 plates. 2s. Sd.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 69, Ludyate Hill, Londan, E. C. 95

Blocimann. — The Prosody of the Pebsians, according to Saifl, Jami,

and other Writers. By H. Blochmann, M.A., Assistant Professor, Calcutta
Madrasah. 8to. sewed, pp. 166. 10*. &d.

Blocluuaim. — A Tbbatise on the Rttba'i entitled Eisalah i Taranah.

By Agha Ahmad 'All With an Introduction and Explanatory Notes, by H.

Blochmann, M.A. 8vo. sewed, pp. 11 and 17. 2s. 6d.
Bloclimann. — The Peesian Metees by Saipi, and a Treatise on Persian

£h;me by J ami. Edited in Persian, by H. Blochmann, M.A. 8to. scarce,

pp. 62. 3s. 6(i.
Eastwick. — The Gttlisiajs'. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," page 4.

Finn. — Peesiajst poe Teavellees. By A. Finh-, H.B.M. Consul at
Resht. Parti. Rudiments of Grammar. Part II. English-Persian Vocabulary.
Oblong SiJmo, pp. xxii.— 232, cloth. 1884. 6s.

Grifiitli. — TtrsxTP astb Zuiaikha. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," p. 5.

Gulshan-i-Raz. — The Diaiootje op the Gtoshan-i-Raz ; or, Mystical
Garden of Eoses of Mahmoud Shabistari. With Selections from the
Eubiayat of Omar Khayam. Crown 8vo. pp. Ti.-64, cloth. 1888. 3s.

H&fiz of Shi'raz. — Selections peom his Poems. Translated from the
Persian by Herman Bicknell. With Preface by A. S. Bicknell. Demy
4to. , pp. XX. and 384, printed on fine stout plate-paper, with appropriate
Oriental Bordering in gold and colour, and Illustrations by J. E. Hbreeet,
E.A. £2 2s,

Haggard and le Strange. — The Vazie op Lankiteait. A Persian
Play. A Text-Book of Modern Colloquial Persian^ for the use of European
Travellers, Residents in Persia, and Students in India. Edited, with a Gram-
matical Introduction, a Translation, copious Notes, and a Vocabulary giving the
Pronunciation of all the words. By W. H. Haggaed and Gut Lb Steange.
Crown 8vo. pp. xl.-176 and 66 (Persian Text), cloth. 1882. 10s. &d.

Mirkhond. — The Histoet op the AtIbeks op Sxeia and Peesia.
By MuHAMMED Ben KhawendshXh Ben Mahmhh, commonly called
MfEKHOND. Now first Edited from the Collation of Sixteen MSS., by
W. H. MoELEY, Barrister-at-law, M.E.A.S. To which is added a Series
of Facsimiles of the Coins struck by the Atibeks, arranged and described
by W. S. W. Vaux, M.A., M.K.A.S. Roy. 8vo. cloth, 7 Plates, pp. 118.
1848. 7s. 6rf.

Morley. — A Descriptive Catalogue of the Historical Manuscripts in
the Arabic and Persian Languages preserved in the Library of the Royal Asiatic
Society of Great Britain and Ireland. By William H. Morley, M.R.A.S.
8vo. pp. viii. and 160, ■sewed. London, 1854. 2s. %d.

Palmer. — The Song op the Reed. See page 56.

Palmer. — A Concise Pehsian-English Dictionaet By E. H.
Palmee, M.A., Professor of Arabic in the University of Cambridge. Second
Edition. Royal 16mo. pp. viii. and 364, cloth. 1883. 10s. 6d.

Palmer. — A Concise English-Peesian Dictionaey. Together with
a Simplified Grammar of the Persian Language. By the late E. H.
Palmek, M.A., Lord Almoner's Reader and Professor of Arabic, Cambridge.
Completed and Edited from tlie MS. left imperfect at his death. By G. Lb
Steange. Royal 16mo. pp. xii. and 546, cloth. 1883. 10s. Gd.

Palmer. — Simplipied Peesian G-eammae. See page 56.
Bedhouse. — The Mesnevi. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," page 4.
Digitized by Microsoft®

94 Linguistic Publications of Truhner & Co.,

BieU. CATALOGtTE OF THE PbKSIAN Ma NTJSCEIPTS IS THE BeITISH!

Museum. By Chakles Rieu, Ph.D., Keeper of the Oriental MSS. 4to. cloth.
Vol. I. pp. 432. 1879. 25s. Vol. II. J 88 1. 25s. Vol. III. 1883. 25».

Whinfleld. — GruisHAir-i-EAz ; The Mystic Eose Garden of Sa'd ud
din Mahmud Shabistani. The Persian Text, with an English Translation and
Notes, chiefly from the Commentary of Muhammed Bin Yahya Lahiji. By
E. H. Whinpield, M.A., late of H.M.B.C.S. 4to. pp. xvi., 94, 60, cloth.
1880. ]0«. 6cl

Whinfleld. — QTrAiEAirrs of Omae KhattXm. See page 5.

PIDOm-ENGLISH.

Lelaud. — Pidgin-English Sin^g-Sonq ; or Songs and Stories in the
China-English Dialect. With a Vocabulary. By Chaeles G. Leland. Fcap.
8vo. cl., pp. Tiii. and 140. 1876. 5s.

POLISH.

Baranowski. — Anslo-Polish Lexicost. By J. J. Baeanowski,
formerly Under-Secretary to the Bank of Poland, in Warsaw. Fcap. 8vo. pp.
Tiii. and 492, cloth. 1883. 12s.

Baranowski. — Slownik Polsko-Akgiblski. (Polish-English Lexicon.)
By J. J. Baranowski. Fcap. Sto. pp. iT.-402, cloth. 1884. 12s.

MorfiU. — A Simplified Gbammae of the Polish Language. By
W. E. MoBFiLL, M.A. Crown 8vo. pp. viii. — 64, cloth. 1884. 3s. 6<?.

PEAKRIT.

Cowell. — A shoet Introduction to the Oedinaet Peakeit of the
Sanskrit Dramas. With a List of Common Irregular Prakrit Words. By
Prof. E. B. CowELL. Cr. 8vo. limp cloth, pp. 40. 1875. 3s. 6d.

Cowell. — Peakeiia-Peakasa ; or, The Prakrit Grammar of Vararuchi,
with the Commentary (Manorama) of Bhamaha ; the first complete Edition of the
Original Text, with various Readings from a collation of Six MSS. in the Bod-
leian Library, etc., with Notes, English Translation, and Index of Prakrit Words,
an Easy Introduction to Prakrit Grammar. By E. B. Coweli,, Professor of
Sanskrit at Cambridge. New Edition, with New Preface, etc. Second Issue.
8yo. cloth, pp. xxxi. and 204. 1868. 14s.

PUKSHTO (Pakkhto, Pashto).
Bellew.^A Geammae of the Pukshto oe Ptjkshto Language, on a

New and Improved System. Combining Brevity with Utility, and Illustrated by
Exercises and Dialogues. By H. W. Bellew, Assistant Surgeon, Bengal Army.
Super-royal 8vo.,pp. xii. and 156. cloth. 21s.

Bellew. — A Dictionaet of the Pukkhto, oe Pukshto Language, on a

New and Improved System. With a reversed Part, or English and Pukkhto,
By H. W. Bellew, Assistant Surgeon, Bengal Army. Super-roval Svo.
pp. xii. and 3S6, cloth. 42s. ■> r j

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G. 95

Flowden. — Teanslatioit of the KAiiD-i-AEanANi, the Text Book for
the Patkhto Examination, with. Notes, Historical, Geographical, Grammatical,
and Explanatory. By Trevou Chichele Plowden, Captain H.M. Bengal
Infantry, and Assistant Commissioner, Panjab. Small 4to. cloth, pp. xx. and
395 and ix. With Map. Lahore, UTS. £2 10».

Thorburn. — BANNtj ; or, Our Afghan Frontier. By 8. 8. Thoebubk-,
I.C.S., Settlement Officer of the Banntl District. 8to. cloth, pp. x. and 480.
1876. 18s.
pp. 171 to 230 ! Popular Stories, Ballads and Riddles, and pp. 231 to 413 !
Pashto Proverbs Translated into English, pp. 414 to 473 : Pashto Proverbs
in Pashto.

Trampp. — Pasto Geammae. See page 50.

ROUMANIAN.

Torceanu. — SmPLrpiED Geammae op the Eottmaitian LitfGnrAQE. By
E. ToKCBANTj. Crown 8vo. pp. viii.-72, cloth. 1883. 5s.

RUSSIAN.

Freeth. — A Condeis-seb B,TjssrAN Geammae for the Use of Staff Officers
and others. By P. Feeeth, B. A., late Classical Scholar of Emmanuel College,
Cambridge. Crown 8to. pp. iv.-76, cloth. 1886. 3s. 6rf.

Lermontoff. — The Demoit. By Michael Leemontofp. Translated
from the Russian by A. Condie Stephen. Crown 8vo. pp. 88, cloth. 1881. 2s. &d.

Siola. — A Geadtjated lirrssiAir Eeadee, with a Vocabulary of all the
Eussian Words contained in it. By H. Riola, Crown 8to. pp. viii. and 314.
1879. 10s. 6d.'

Biola. — How TO Leaen Ettssiaw. A Manual for Students of Eussian,
based upon the OUendorfian system of teaching languages, and adapted for
self instruction. By Henry Riola, Teacher of the Russian Language. With
a Preface by W. R. S. Ralston, M. A. Second Edition. Crown 8vo. cloth,
pp. 576. 1884. 12s.

Key to the above. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. 126. 1878. 5s.

Thompson. — Diaxogues, Eussian and English. Compiled by A. E.

Thompson. Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. iv.-132. 1882. 5s.
Wilson. — ^EirssiAN Lteics in English Veese. By the Eev. C. T.

Wilson, M.A., late Chaplain, Bombay. Crown 8vo. pp. xvi. and 244, cloth.

1887. 6s.

SAMARITAN.
Nntt. — A Sketch of Samaeitan Hisioet, Dogma, and Liieeatuee.

Published as an Introduction to "Fragments of a Samaritan Targum." By
J. W. NuTT, M.A. Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. viii. and 172. 1874. as.
Nutt. — Feagments of a Samaeitan Taegitm. Edited from a Bodleian
MS. With an Introduction, containing a Sketch of Samaritan History,
Dogma, and Literature. By J. W. Nutt, M.A. Demy 8vo. cloth, pp. viii.,
172, and 84. With Plate. 1874. 15s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

96 Linguistic Publications of Truhner 8[ Co.

SAMOAN.
Pratt. — A Geammab and Diction aet of the Samoan Language. By

Rev. George Pratt, Forty Years a Missionary of the London Missionary
Society in Samoa. Second Edition. Edited by Rev. S.J. Whitmee, F.E.G.S.
Crown 8vo. cloth, pp. viii. and 380, 1878. 18«.

SANSKRIT.

Aitareya Brahmanam of the Big Veda. 2 toIs. See under Haug.

D'Alwis. — A Descetptite CATAioauB OF Sanskeii, Pali, and Sinhalese
LiTBKAKY WoEKS OF Ceylon. By James D'Alwis, M.R.A.S., Advocate of
the Supreme Court, &c., &c. In Three Volumes. Vol. I., pp. xxxii. and 244,
sewed. 1870. 8s. Gd.

Apastambiya Dharma Sutram. — Aphobisms of the Saceed Laws of

THE Hindus, by Apastamba. Edited, with a Translation and Notes, by G.
Biihler. By order of the Government of Bombay. 2 parts. 8vo. cloth,
1868-71. £1 is. 6d.

Arnold. — The Sono Celestial; or, Bhagavad-Glta (from the Maha-
bharata). Being a Discourse between Arjuna, Prince of India^ and the Supreme
Being under the form of Krishna. Translated from the Sanskrit Text by Sir E.
Arnold, M.A., K.C.I.E., etc. Second edition. Crown 8vo. pp. 192, cloth.
1885. 5s.

Arnold. — The Secret op Death : being a Version, in a Popular and
Novel Form, of the Katha TTpanisbad, from the Sanslrit, with some Collected
Poems. By Sir E. Arnold, M.A., K.C.I.E. Third Edition. Crown 8vo. pp.
430, cloth. 1885. 7*. U.

Arnold. — Lioht of Asia. See page 41.

Arnold. — Indian Poetey. See "Triibner's Oriental Series," page 4.

Arnold. — The Iliad and Odyssey of India. By Sir Edwin Aenold,

M. A., K.C.I.E., etc. Fcap. 8vo. sd., pp. 24. 1«.
Apte. — The Student's Guide to Sanseeit Composition. Being a

Treatise on Sanskrit Syntax for the use of School and Colleges. 8vo. boards.

Poona, 1881. 6s.

Apte. — The Student's English-Sanskeit Dictionaet. Boy. 8vo. pp.
xii. and 626, cloth. Poona, 1884. 16s.

Atharva Veda Pratigakhya. — See under Whitney.

Auctores Sanscrit!. Vol. I. The Jaiminlya-Nyaya-Maia-Vistara.

Edited for the Sanskrit Text Society under the supervision of Theodok
GoLDSTuoKER. Parts I. to VII., pp. 582, large 4to. sewed. 10s. each part.
Complete in one vol., cloth, £3 13s. 6rf. Vol. II. The Institutes of Gautama.
Edited with an Index of Words, byA. F. Stenzler, Ph.D., Professor of
Oriental Languages in the University of Breslau. 8vo. clotb, pp. iv. 78.
1876. is. 6d. Vol. III. Vai tana Sutra. The Ritual of the Atharva Veda.
Edited with Critical Notes and Indices, by Dr. Richard Garbf. 8vo.
sewed, pp. 119. 1878. 6«. Vols. IV. and V. Vardhamana's Ganaratnama-
hodadhi, with the Author's Commentary. Edited, with Critical Notes and
Indices, by J. Egqling, Ph.D. 8vo. wrapper. Part I., pp. xii. and 240. 1879.
6j. Part II., pp. 240. 1881. 6s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Bill, London, E. C. 97

Avery. — Contbibittionsto iheHistoki: opVeeb-Infleciionin Sajjskeix.

By J. Avery. 8vo. paper, pp. 106. is.
Ballantyne. — Saitkhta Aphoeisms op Kapha. See page 6.
Ballantyne. — First Lessons in Sanskeit G-kammae ; together with an

Introduction to the Hitopadesa. Fourth edition. By James R. Ballantyne,
LL.D., Librarian of the India Office. 8vo. pp. viil. and 110, cloth. 1884. 3s. 6d.

Benfey. — A Peactical Geammae of the Sanskeit Langtja6e, for the

use of Early Students. By Theodor Benfey, Professor of Sanskrit in the
University of Gottingen. Second, revised and enlarged, edition. Royal 8vo.
pp. viii. and 296, cloth. lOs. 6d.

Benfey. — Vedica und Veewanbtes. By Theob. Beneet. Crown 8.vo.

paper, pp. 178. Strasshurg, 1877. 7s. %d.
Benfey. — Vedica und Lingbistica. — By Th. Beneet. Crown 8vo.

pp. 254. lOs. U.
BibUotheca Indica. — A Collection of Oriental "Works published by

the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Old Series. Pasc. 1 to 235. New Series.
Fasc. 1 to 408. (Special List of Contents to be had on application.) Each
Faso. in 8vo., 2s. ; in 4to., 4«.

Bibliotheca Sanskrita. — See TfiiJBNEE.

Bombay Sanskrit Series. Edited under the superintendence of G.
BiiHLER, Ph. D., Professor of Oriental Languages, Elphinstone College, and
F. KiELHOEN, Ph. D., Superintendent of Sanskrit Studies, Deccan College.
1868-84.

1. Panchaiantea IV. AND v. Edited, with Notes, by G. Buhlee,

Ph. D. Pp. 84, 16. 3».

2. IflsojfBHATTA's ParxbhXshendbsekhaea. Edited and explained

by F. KiELHORN, Ph. D. Part I., the Sanskrit Text and Various Readings,
pp. 116. 48.

3. Panchaiantea II. AND HI. Edited, with ITotes, by G. BUhlee, Ph. D.

Pp. 86, 14, 2. 3s.

4. Panchatantra i. Edited, with Notes, by F. Kielhoen, Ph.D.

Pp. 114, 53. 3s. 6<?.

5. KIlidIsa's RAeHBTAMsA. With the Commentary of Mallinatha.

Edited, with Notes, by Shankar P. Pandit, M. A. Part I. Cantos I, -VI. 4s.

6. KIlidIsa's MiiAViKiGNiMiTEA. Edited, with Notes, by Shankae

P. Pandit, M.A. 45. Qd.

7. NXgojibeatta's PaeibhIshendtt^ekhaea Edited and explained

by F. KiELHORN, Ph.D. Part II. Translation and Notes. (ParibhSshSs,
i.-xxxvii.) pp. 184. 4s.

8. Kalidasa's Baghbvamsa. "With the Commentary of Mallinatha.

Edited, with Notes, by Shankar P. Pandit, M.A. Part II. Cantos VII.-
XI I L 4s.

9. NAGOjfBHATTA's PaeibhXshendbsbkhara. Edited and explained

by F. KiELHOitN. Part II Translation and Notes. (Paribhashis xxxviii.-
Ixix.) 4s.

10. Dandin's Dasakttmaeachaeita. Edited with critical and explana-
tory Notes by G. Buhler. Part I. 3s.

11. Bhaeteihaei's Nitisataka and Vaieagyasataka, with Extracts

from Two Sanskrit Commentaries. Edited, with Notes, by Kasinath T.
Telang. 4s. (>d.

12. Nagojibhatta's ParibhAshendbsbkhaea. Edited and explained

by F. KiELHORN. Part II. Translation and Notes. (Paribhash^s Ixx.-
cxxii 1 4s Digitized by Microsoft®

- 7

98 Linguistic Publications of Triibner 8f Co.,

13. Kaxibasa's EAGHUvAMsi, with the Commentary of Mallinatha.

Edited, with Notes, by Shankar P. Pavdit. Part III. Cantos XIV.-
XIX. is.

14. ViKEAMANKADEVACHAEiTA. Edited, witli an Introduction, by G.

BuHLER. 3s.

15. BHAVABHtwi's Malati-Madhava. "With the Commentary of
Jagaddhara, edited by Ramkrishna Gopal Bhandarkae. 14s.

16. The Vikeamoevasitam. A Drama in Pive Acts. By KaiidIsa.
Edited witli English Notes by Shankar P. Pandit, M.A. pp. xii. and 129
(Sanskrit Text) and 148 (Notes). 1879. 6s.

17. Hemachbea's DEsiNAirAi.1, with a Glossary by Dr. Pisohei
and Dr. BiiHLER. Part I. 10s.

18 — 22 and 26. Pata:ijjali's Vtakaeanamahabhaskta. By Dr.
KiBLHORisr. Part I— IV. Vol. I. II. Part II. Each part 5s.

23. The Vasishthadhaemasasteam. Aphorisms on the Sacred Law
of the Aryas, as taught in School of Vasishtha. Edited by Rev. A. A. Fdhrek.
8vo. sewed. 1883. 2». 6d.

24. Xadambaei. Edited by Petee Peteeson. 8vo. sewed. 1883. 15*.

25. KiETiEATTMiTDi. Sei Somesvaeabeta, and edited by Abaji Vishnu
Kathatati. 8to. sewed. 1883. 3s. 6d.

27. Mtjbeaeakshasa. By Visakhabatta. "With the Commentary of
Dhundhiraj. Edited with critical and explanatory notes by K. T. Telang. 8vo.
sewed. 1884. 6s.

28, 29, and 30. Patanjali's Vtakaeanamahabhashta. By Dr.
KiBLHOKN. Vol III., Parts I., II., and III. Each Part 5s.

31. Vaiiabhabeva's Stibhashitavali. Edited by Dr. P. Pbteeson
and Pandit Dukgar Pra.sad. 12». 6rf.

32. LAtrelKSHi Bhaseae's SAEKA-KAininiBi. Edited by Prof. M. N.

DVITEDI. Is. 6(1.

33. HrtoPABESA BT Naeatana. Edited by Prof. P. Peterson. 4s. 6d.

Borooah. — A Companion to the Sanskeit-Eeabins Dnbeegeabbates
of the Calcatta University, being a few notes on the Sanskrit Texts selected
for examination, and their Commentaries. By Anundokam Borooah. 8vo.
pp. 64. 35. 6d.

Borooah. — A Pbagtical Engiish-Sanskeit Dictionaet. By Anun-

DORAM Borooah, B.A., B.C.S., of the Middle Temple, Barrister-at-Law.
Vol. I. A to Falseness, pp. xx.-580-lO. Vol. II. Falsification to Oyster, pp.
581 to 1060. With a Supplementary Treatise on Higher Sanskrit Grammar or
Gender and Syntax, with copious illustrations from standard Sanskrit Authors
and Kefereuces to Latin and Greek Grammars, pp. vi. and 296. 1879. Vol. III.
XI lis. 6d. each.

Borooah. — Bhatabhitti anb his Place in Sanskbit Lixeeaidee. By

Anundoram Borooah. 8to. sewed, pp. 70. 5«.

Brhat-Sanhita (The). — See under Kern.

Brown. — Sanskeit Peosobt anb Nitmeeical Symbols Explained. By

Charles Philip Brown, Author of the Telugu Dictionaiy, Grammar, etc., Pro-
fessor of Telugu in the University of London. Demy 8vo. pp. 64, cloth. 3s. 6d.
Bumell. — EiKTANTEAVTAKAEANA. A Pratigakhya of the Samaveda.
Edited, with an Introduction, Translation of the Sutras, and Indexes, by
A. C. BcKNELL, Ph.D. Vol. I. Post 8vo. boards, pp. Iviii. and 84. 10s. 6rf.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 69, Ludgate Bill, London, E.G. 99

Burnell. — A Classified Iitoex to the Sanskrit MS8. in the Palace at
Tanjore. Prepared for the Madras Government. By A. C. Bubneli, Ph.D.
In 4to. Part I. pp. iv. and 80, stitched, stiff wrapper. Yedio and Technical
Literature. Part 11. pp. iv. and 80. Philosophy and Law. 1879. Part IIL
Drama, Epics, Puranas and Tantras, Indices, 1880. 10s. each part.

Buruell. — Catalogue oe a CoLLBciioif op Sajiskeit Manttscbipts. By
A. U. BoRNEiii, M.R.A.S., Madras Civil Service. Part 1. Vedie Manuscripts.
Fcap. 8vo. pp. e*, sewed. ] 870. 2s.

Buraell. — Datada9A9loki. Ten Sloeas' in Sanskeit, with English

Translation. By A. C. Burnell. 8vo. pp. 11. 2s.

Buruell. — On the Ainbra School as Sanskbit Geammaeians. Their

Place in the Sanskrit and Subordinate Literatures. By A. C. Buknell. 8vo.
pp. 120. 10s. 6d.

Burnell. — The SamatidhInabeahmana (being the Third Brdhmana)

of the Sama Veda. Edited, together with the Commentary of SSyana, an
English Translation, Introduction, and Index of Words, by A. C. Burnell.
Volume I. —Text and Commentary, with Introduction. 8vo. pp. xxxviii. and
1U4. 12s. (id.

Buruell. — The Aeshbtabeahmana (being the fourth Brahmana) or
THE Sama Veda. The Sanskrit Text. Edited, together with Extracts from the
Commentary of Sayana, etc. An Introduction and Index of Words. By A. C.
Burnell, Ph D. 8vo, pp. 51 and 109. Ws. Sd.

Buruell. — The DEVAiaDHTaTABEaHMAWA (being the Fifth Brahmana)
of the Sama Veda. The Sanskrit Text edited, with the Commentary of Sayana,
an Index of Words, etc., by A. C. Burnell, M.R.A.S. 8vo. and Trans.,
pp. 34. 5».

Burnell. — The Jaiminita Text op the Aeshetabeahmana op the

Sama Veda. Edited in Sanskrit by A. C. Burnell, Ph. D. 8vo. sewed, pp.
56. 7s. 6d>

Burnell. — The SahmitopanishadbeIhmana (Being the SeTenth

Brahmana) of the Sama Veda. The Sanskrit Text. With a Commentary, an
Index of Words, etc. Edited by A. C. Burnell, Ph.D. 8vo. stiff boards,
pp. 86. 7s. 6d
Buruell. — The VamqabeIhmaka (being the Eighth Brahmana) of the
S^ma Veda. Edited, together with the Commentary of Sayana, a Preface and
Index of Words, by A. C. Burnell, M.R.A.S., etc. 8vo. sewed, pp. xliii.,
12, and xii., with 2 coloured plates. 10s. 6d.

Buruell. — The Ordinances of Manu. See page 6.

Catalogue op Sanskeii Woeks Feinted in India, offered for

Sale at the afiSxed nett prices by Trubner & Co. 16mo. pp. 52. Is.

Chintamou. — A Commentaet on the Text op the BHAGATAD-GfrA ;

or, the Discourse between Krishna and Arjuna of Divine Matters. A Sanscrit

Philosophical Poem. With a few Introductory Papers. By Hurrychund

Chintamon, Political Agent to H. H. the Guicowar Mulhar Rao Maharajah

of Baroda. Post Svo. cloth, pp. 118. 6s.
Clark. — Meghadttta, the Cloctd Mbssengee. Foem* of Kalidasa.

Translated by the late Eev. Thomas Clark, M.A. Fcap. Svo. pp. 64,

wrapper. 1882 Is.
Colebrooke. — The Life and Miscellaneous Essays of Henry Thomas

Colebrooke. See page 29.

Digitized by Microsoft®

100 Linguistic Publications of Truhner ^ Co.,

Cowell and Eggeling. — Catalogue of Buddhist Sanskeit Manctsceipts

in the Possession of the Royal Asiatic Society (Hodgson Collection). By Pro-
fessors E. B. Cowell and J. Eggeling. 8vo. sd., pp. 56. 2«. 6rf.

Cowell. — Saeva Daesawa Samgeaha. See page 5.

Da Cunha. — The Sahyadei Khanda op the Skaitda Pueam-a ; a

Mythological, Historical and Geographical Account of Western India. First
edition of the Sansljrit Text, with various readings. By J. Gerson da Cukha,
M.R.C.S. and L.M. Eng., L.R.C.P. Edinb., etc. 8to. bds. pp. 680. £\ U.

Davies. — Hindu Phtlosopht. See page 4.

Davies. — Bhagavad Gita. See " Trubner's Oriental Series," page 5.

Dutt. — Kings oe KIshmiea : being a Translation of tbe Sanskrita "Work

Eajataranggini of Kahlana Pandita. By J. Ch. Dutt. 12mo. paper, pp. v. 302,

and xxiii. 4s.
Edgren. — A Compendious Sanskeit Geammae. With a brief Sketch

of Scenic Prakrit. By H. Edgren, Ph.D., Professor of Sanskrit in the
University of Nebraska, U.S.A. Crown 8to. pp. xii. — 178, cloth. 1885. \Qs. &d.

Grantama. — The Institutes oe Gautama. See Auetores Sanscriti.
Goldstucker, — A Dictionaet, Sanskeit and English, extended and
improved from the Second Edition of the Dictionary of Professor H. H. Wilson,
with his sanction and concurrence. Together with a Supplement, Grammatical
Appendices, and an Index, serving as a Sanskrit- Knglish Vocabulary. By
Theodor GolostUcker. Parts I. to VI. 4to. pp. 400. 1856-1863. 6s. each
Goldstucker. — Panini : His Place in Sanskrit Literature. An Inves-
tigation of some Literary and Chronological Questions which may be settled by
a study of his Work. A separate impression of the Preface to the Facsimile of
MS. No. 17 in the Library of Her Majesty's Home Government for India,
which contains a portion of the Manava-Ka.lpa-Sutra, with the Commentary
of Ktjmarila-Swamin. By Theocor GoLDSTiicKBR. Imperial 8vo. pp.
268, cloth. £2 2s.
Gougll. — Philosophy oe the Upanishads. See page 6.
Griffith. — Scenes eeom the Bamatana, Meghaduta, etc. Translated
"by Ralph T. H. Griffith, M.A., Principal of the Benares College. Second
Edition. Crown 8to. pp. xviii., 244, cloth. 6s.
CoNTEHTS. — Preface— Ayodhya — Ravan Doomed — The Birth of Bama — The Heir apparent —
Mantliara's Guile — Dasaratha's Oath — The Step-mother— Mother and Son — The Triumph of
Love— EarewelU— The Hermit's Son— The Trial of Truth— The Forest— The Kape of Sita—
Rama's Despair — The Messenger Cloud — Khumbakarna — The Suppliant Dove — True Glory-
Feed the Poor— The Wise Scholar.

Griffith. — The EImItan of Valmi'ki. Translated into English verse.
By Ralph T. H. Griffith, M.A., Principal of the Benares College. 5 vols.
Demy 8vo. cloth. Vol. 1., pp. xxxii. 440. 1870. Out of print. II., pp.
S04. Out of print. III., pp. ,. and 371. 1872. IV., pp. viii. and 432.
1873. v., pp. 368. 1S7S. Complete Sets £7 7».

Griffith. — KIlidIsa's Bieth of the Wae God. See page 3.

Haas. — Catalogue of Sanskrit and Pali Books in the Library of the
British Museum. By Dr. Ernst Haas. 4to. pp. 200, cloth. 1876. £1 Is.

Haug, — The Aitaeeta Beahmanam of the Big Yeda : containing the
Earliest Speculations of the Brahmans on the meaning of the Sacrificial Prayers,
and on the Origin, Performance, and Sense of the Rites of the Vedic Religion.
Edited, Translated, and Explained by Martin Hauo, Ph.D.. 2 vols. Cr. Svo.
Map of the Sacrificial Compound at the Soma Sacrifice, pp. 312 and 544. £2 2s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G. 101

Hunter. — Catalogue op Sanskkit Mahttscbipts (Uuddhist) Collected
in Nep&l by B. H. Hodgson, late Eesident at the Court of NepS,!. Compiled
from Lists in Calcutta, France, and England. By Sir W. V. Huntek,
KS.S.F., LL.D., &c. 8yo. pp. 28, wrapper. 1880. 2s.

Jacob. — Hindu Pantheism. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," page 4.

Jaiminiya-Nyaya-Mala-Vistara. — See under Auctobes Sansceiti.

Kasika. — A Commentaet on PInini's Geammatical Aphoeisms. By
Pandit JayAditya. Edited by Pandit Bala SAsTRi, Prof. Sansk. Coll.,
Benares. First part, 8vo. pp. 490. Part II. pp. 474. 16«. each part. _

Kern. — The Aetabhatita, with, the Commentary Bhatadlpik^ of

Paramadi9vara, edited by Dr. H. Kern. 4to. pp. xii. and 107. 9s.

Kern. — The BRHAT-SANHiii. ; or, Complete System of I^Tatural

Astrology of Variha-Mihira. Translated from Sanskrit into English by Dr. H .
Keen, Professor of Sanskrit at the TJniversity of Leyden. Part I. 8to. pp. 50,
stitched. Parts 2 and 3pp. 51-154. Part4 pp. 155-210. Part 5 pp. 211-266.
Part 6 pp. 267-330. Price 2s. each part. \^WiU he completed in Nine Parts,

Kielhorn. — A Gkammae op the Sanskeit Language. By F. Kdelhoen,

Ph.D., Superintendent of Sanskrit Studies in Deccan College, Begistered
under Act xxv. of 1867. Demy 8to. pp. xvi. 260. cloth. 1870. 10s. 6d.

Eielhorn. — EiirirANA and Patanjali. Their Eelation to each other

and to Panini. By F. Kielhokn, Ph. D. , Prof, of Orient. Lang. Poona. 8vo.
pp.64. 1876. 3s. 6d.
laghuKaumudi. A Sanskrit Grammar. ByVaradaraja. "With an English
Version, Commentary, and References. By James R. Ballantyne, LL.D.
Third Edition. Svo. pp. xxxiv. and 424, cloth. 1881. £i 6s.

Lanman. — On ISToun-Inflection in the Veda. By E. Lajtmait, Asso-
ciate Prof, of Sanskrit in Johns Hopkins XJniversily. Svo. pp. 276, wrapper.
1880. 10s.

Lanman. — A Sanskeit Ebadee, with Vocabulary and Notes. By C.
E. Lanman, Prof, of Sanskrit in Harvard College. Part I. and II.— Text and
Vocabulary. Imp. Svo. pp. xx.— 294, cloth. 1884. 10s. 6i.

Mahabharata. — Teanslated into Hindi for Mad an Mohun Bhatt, by
Keishnaohandradhaemadhikauin, of Benares. Containing all but the
Harivansa. 3 vols. Svo. cloth, pp. 574, 810, and 1106. £3 3s.

Mahabharata (in Sanskrit), with the Commentary of Nilakantha. In
Eighteen Books : Book I. Adi Parvan, fol. 248. II. Sabh& do. fol. 82.' III. Vana
do. fol. 312. IV. Viitita do. fol. 62. V. Udyoga do. fol. 180. VI. Bhishma do
fol. 189. VII. Drona do. fol. 216. VIII. Kama do fol. 115. IS. Salya do
fol. 42. X. Sauptika do. fol. 19. XI. Strf do. fol. 19. XII. Santi do.: —
a. ESjadharma, fol. 128 ; b. Apadharma, fol. 41 ; c. Mokshadharma, fol. 290.
XIII. Anus&sana Parvan, fol. 207. XIV. Aswamedhika do. fol. 78. XV. Asra-
mav&sika do. fol. 26. XVI. Mausala do. fol.' 7. XVII. Mkh&prasth&nika 'do.
fol. 3. XVIII.. Swargarokana do. fol. 8. Printed with movable types. Oblong
folio. Bombay, 1S63. £12 12s.

Maba-VirarCharita ; or, the Adventures of the Great Hero Eama.

An Indian Drama in Seven Acts. Translated into English Prose from the
Sanskrit of Bhavabhijti. By J. Piokeoed, M.A. Crown Svo. pp 192, cloth
1871. 5s.
Maino-i-Khard (The Book of the).— The Pazand and Sanskrit Texts
(in Eoman characters) as arranged by Neriosengh Dhaval, in the fifteenth
century. With an English translation, a Glossary of the Pazand texts, con-
taining the Sanskrit, Eosian, and Pahlavi equivalents, a sketch of Pazand Gram-
mar, and an Introduction. By E. W. V^est. Svo. sewed, pp. 484. 1871. 16s.
Digitized by Microsoft®

102 Linguistic Publications of Triibner 8f Co.,

Manava-Ealpa-Sutra ; being a portion of this ancient Work on Vaidik

Rites, together with the Commentary of Kumarila-Swamin. A Facsimile of
the MS. No. 17, in the Library of Her Majesty's Home Government for India.
With a Preface by Theodor GoldstUcker. Oblong folio, pp. 268 of letter-
press and 121 leaves of facsimiles. Cloth. £4 is.

Mandlik. — The TIotataxkta Smeiti, Complete in Original, with an
English Translation and Notes. With an Introduction on the Sources of, and
Appendices containing Notes on various Topics of Hindu Law. By V. N.
Mandlik. 2 vols, in one. Roy. 8vo. pp. Text 177, and Transl. pp. Ixsivii. and
532. Bombay, 1880. £3.

Megha-Duta (The). (Cloud-Messenger.) By Kalidasa. Translated
from the Sanskrit into English verse, with Notes and Illustrations. By the
late H. H. Wilson, M. A., R R.S., etc. Vocabulary by F. Johnson, some-
time Professor of Oriental Languages at the College of the Hon. the East India
Company, Haileybury. New Edition. 4to. cloth, pp. xi. and 180. ids. 6d.

Muir. — TEAifsiATioNs from Sanskrit Writers. See page 3.

Muir. — OEi&mAi, Sanskeit Texts, on the History of the People of

India, their Religion and Institutions. Collected, Translated, and Illustrated
by John MuiK, D.C.L., LL.D. Demy 8vo. cloth. Vol. I. Mythical Accounts
of the Origin of Caste. Second Edition, pp. xx. 532. 1868. 21«. II. Trans -
Himalayan-Origin of the Hindus, and their AfBnity with the Western Branches
of the Aryan Race. Second Edition, pp. xxxii. and 512. 1871. 21s. III.
The Vedas : Opinions of their Authors, and of later Indian Writers, on their
Origin, Inspiration, and Authority. Second Edition, pp. xxxii. 312. 1868.
16a. IV. Comparison of the Vedic with the later representations of the
principal Indian Deities. Second Edition, pp. xvi. and 524. 1873. 21s.
V. The Cosmogony, Mythology, Religious Ideas, Life and Manners of the
Indians in the Vedic Age. Third Edition, pp. xvi. 492. 1884. 21s.

Xagananda ; oe the Jot op the Snake-Woeid. A Buddhist Drama
in Five Acts. Translated into English Prose, with Explanatory Notes, from the
Sanskrit of Sri-Harsha-Deva. By Palmer Boyd, B.A., Sanskrit Scholar of
Trinity College, Cambridge. With an Introduction by Professor Co-well.
Crown 8vo., pp. xvi. and 100, cloth. 4s. &d.

Nalopakhyaaam. — Stoet oe Nala ; an Episode of the Maha-Bharata.
The Sanskrit Text, with Vocabulary, Analysis, and Introduction. By Sir
M. Monier-Willlams, K.C.I.E., M.A. The Metrical Translation by the Very
Eev. H. H. Milman, D.D. 8vo. cloth. 15s.

Naradiya Dharma Sastram; oe, the Inshtutes op Naeada. Trans-
lated for the First Time from the unpublished Sanskrit original. By Dr. Julius
Jolly, University, W urzburg. With a Preface, Notes chiefly critical, an Index
of Quotations from Narada in the principal Indian Digests, and a general Index.
Crown 8vo., pp. xxxv. 144, cloth. 10s. 6d.

Oppert. — List of Sanskrit Manuscripts in Private Lihraries of
Southern India. Compiled, Arranged, and Indexed, hy Gustat Oppert,
Ph.D. Vol. I. Royal 8vo. cloth, pp. 620. 1880. 21s.

Oppert. — On the Weapons, Aemt Obganization , and Politicai, Maxtus
of the Ancient Hindus. AVith Special Reference to Gunpowder and Fire Arms.
By G. Oppert. 8vo. sewed, pp. vi. and 162. Madras, 1880. 7s. 6rf.

Patanjali. — The Vtakaeana-Mahabhashta op Patanjali. Edited

by F. KiBLHOEN, Ph.D., Professor of Oriental Languages, Deccan College.
Vol. I., Part I. pp. 200. 8s. 6d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Liidgate Hill, London, E. C. 103

Perry. — A Sanskeit Peimek. Based on the " Leitfaden fiir den
Elementar-Cursus des Sanskrit " of Prof. Georg Biihler, of Vienna. By E.
D. Perry, of Columbia Coll., New York. 8to. pp. xii. and 230, ol. 1886. la. 6d.

Peterson. — The AtrcHiTZALAMKiEA of Kshemenlea ; with a Note
on the Date of Patanjali, and an Inscription from Kotah. By P. Peterson,
Elphinstone Professor of Sanskrit, Bombay. Demy 8vo. pp. 64, sewed. 1885. 2s.

Rdmayan of Valmiki. — 5 vols. See under Geixtixh.

Bam Jasan. — A Sanskeit anb Enolish DiciioNAEr. Being an

Abridgment of Professor Wilson's Dictionary. With an Appendix explaining
the use of Affixes in Sanskrit. By Pandit Ram JasaN, Queen's College,
Benares. Published under the Patronage of the Government, N.W.P, Royal
8vo. cloth, pp. ii. and 707. 28s.

Rig-Veda Sanhita. — A Collection oe Ancient Hindit Hymns.
See page 45.

Rig-Veda-Sanhita : The Saceed Htmns of the Beahmans. Trans-
lated and explained by F. Max MiJLLER, M.A., LL.D. See page 45.

Rig- Veda. — The Hymns of the Eig- Veda in theSamhitaandPada Texts.

By F. Max Muller, M.A., etc. See page 45.

Sabdakalpadruma, the well-known Sanskrit Dictionary of EajXh
Radhakanta Deta. In Bengali characters. 4to. Parts 1 to 40. (In
course of publication.) 3s. M. each part.

Sama-Vidhana-Brahmana. With the Commentary of Sayana. Edited,

with Notes, Translation, and Index, by A. C. Burnell, M.R.A.S. Vol. I,
Text and Commentary. With Introduction. Svo. cloth, pp. xxxviii. and 104.
l<is.U.

Saknntala. — A Sanskeit Deama in Seven Acts. Edited by Sir M.

MoNiER- Williams, Jf.C.I.E., M.A. Second Edition. 8yo. cl. £1 Is.
Sakuntala. — Kaltdasa's OakttntalI. The Bengalf Eecension. With

Critical Notes. Edited by Eichakd Pischel. 8vo. cloth, pp. xi. and 210. 14s. '

Sarva-Sahda-Sambodhini ; ok. The Complete Sanskeit DiciioNAiiY.

In Telugu characters. 4to. cloth, pp. 1078. £2\5s.

Surya-Siddhanta (Translation of the). — See Whitney.

Taittin'ya-Pratigakhya. — See Whitney.

Tarkavachaspati. — Vachaspatya, a Comprehensive Dictionary, in Ten

Parts. Compiled by Taranatha Tarkavachaspati, Professor of Grammar
and Philosophy in the Government Sanskrit College of Calcutta. An Alpha-
betically Arranged Dictionary, with a Grammatical Introduction and Copious
Citations from the Grammarians and Scholiasts, from the Vedas, etc. Parts I
to XIII. 4to. paper. 1873-6. 18s. each Part.

Thibaut. — The St^lvas^jteas. English Translation, with an Intro-
duction. By G. THinADT, Ph.D., Anglo-Sanskrit Professor Benares College.
8to. cloth, pp. 47, with 4 Plates. 5s.

Thibaut. — Conikibitiions to the Explanation of jYOTiSHA-VEDANeA

By G. Thibaut, Ph.D. 8to. pp. 27. Is. &d.

Triibner's Bibliotheca Sanscrita. A Catalogue of Sanskrit Litera-
ture, chiefly printed in Europe. To which is added a Catalogue of Sanskrit
Works printed in India ; and a Catalogue of Pali Books. Constantly for sale
by Triibner & Co. Cr. 8vo. sd., pp. 84. 2s. Gd.

Digitized by Microsoft®

104 Linguistic Publications of Truhner ^ Co.,

Vardliamaiia. — See Auctores Sanscriti, page 96.

Vedarthayatna (The) ; or, an Attempt to Inteipret the Vedas. A
Marathi and English Tranelation of the Eig Veda, with the Original Samhita
and Pada Texts in Sanskrit. Parts I. to XXVIII. 8to. pp. 1—896. Price
3«. 6d. each.

Vishnu-Purana (The).— See page 45, and also " Wilson," page 105.
^eber. — Os the Eamataita. By Dr. Albeecht Webbk, Berlin.

Translated from the German by the Rev. D. C. Boyd, M.A. Reprinted from
" The Indian Antiquary." Fcap. 8to. sewed, pp. 130. 5s.

Weber. — IimiAif Litbeaxube. See page 3.

Whitney. — Athaeva Ybda PEiTigXKHTA ; or, Caunakfyd Caturadhya-
yika (The). Text, Translation, and Notes. By William U. Whitney, Pro-
fessor of Sanskrit in Yale College. 8to. pp. 286, boards. £\ lis. &d.

Whitney. — Stteta-Sibdhanta (Translation of the): A Text-book of
Hindu Astronomy, with Notes and an Appendix, containing additional Notes
and Tables, Calculations of Eclipses, a Stellar Map, and Indexes. By the
Rev. E. Burgess. Edited by W. D. Whitney. 8vo. pp. iv. and 354,
boards. £1 lis. 6d.

Whitney. — TiiiuEfTA-PElTigiKHYA, with its Commentary, the
TribhS-shyaratna : Text, Translation, and Notes. By W. D. Whitney, Prof,
of Sanskrit in Yale College, New Haven. 8vo. pp. 469. 1871. £l 5s.

Whitney. — Index Verbomm to the Published Text of the Athaxva-
Veda. By William Dwight Whitney, Professor in Tale College. (Vol. XII. of
the American Oriental Society). Imp. 8vo. pp. 384, wide margin, wrapper.
1881. £1 5«.

Whitney. — A Sanskeit Geammae, including both the Classical Lan-
guage, and the Older Language, and the Older Dialects, of Veda and Brahmana.
8vo. cloth, pp. [New Edition, in the Fress.

Whitney. — TheEoois, Veeb-Foems, and Petilaet Deeivatites oe the

Sanskrit Language. A Supplement to his Sanskrit Grammar. By William
Dwight Whitney. Demy 8vo. pp. xiv.— 250, cloth. 1885. 7s. &d.

Williams. — A Dictionaet, English and Sanscb.ii. By Sie

MoNiER MoNiER-WiLLiAMS, K.C.I.E., M.A. Published under the Patronage
of the Hon East India Company. 4to. pp. xii. 862, cloth. 1851. £3 3s.

Williams. — A Sanskeii-English Diciionabt, EtymologicaUy and
Philologically arranged, with special reference to Greek, Latin, German, Anglo-
Saxon, English, and other cognate Indo-European Languages. By Sir Monier
MoNiER-WiLLiAMS, K.CI.E., M.A., Boden Professor of Sanskrit. 4to. cloth,
pp. XXV. and 1186. £4 14s. &d.

Williams. — A Peaciic4L Geammae op the Sanskeit Language, ar-
ranged with reference to the Classical Languages of Europe, for the use of
English Students, by Sir Monier Monier- Williams, K.C.I.E., M.A. 1877.
Fourth Edition, Revised. 8vo. cloth. 15s.

Wilson. — Works of the late Horace Hayman Wilson, M.A., F.E.S.,
etc., and Boden Prof, of Sanskrit in the University of Oxford. 12 vols. Demy
Vols. I. and II. Essays and Lectures, chiefly on the Religion of the
Hindus. Collected and Edited by Dr. R. RosT. 2 vols. pp. xiii. and 399,
vi. and 416. 21s. Vols. Ill, IV. and V. Essays Analytical, Critical,

Digitized by Microsoft®

67 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E. C. 105

AND Philological, on Subjects connected with Sanskrit Literature.
Collected and Edited by Dr. R. RosT. 3 vols. pp. 408, 406, and 390. 36«.
Vols. VI., VII., VIII, IX. and X., Part I. Vishntt PueAnA, a System op
Hindu Mythology and Tradition. Vols. I. to V. Translated from the
original Sanskrit, and Illustrated by Notes derived chiefly from other Pnr4n&s.
Edited by F. Hall, M.A., D.C.L., Oxon. pp. cxl. and 200; 344; 344;
346. il. 12s. 6rf. Vol. X., Part 2, containing the Index to, and completing
the Vishnu Puta.n&,, compiled by F. Hall. pp. 268. 12s. Vols. XI. and XII.
Select Specimens OE THE Theatre or the Hindus. Translated from the
Original Sanskrit. 3rd corrected £d. 2 vols. pp. Ixi. and 384 ; and iv. and
418 2)8.

Wilson. — Select Specimens op the Theatke of the Hindus. Trans-
lated from the Original Sanskrit. By the late H. H. Wilson, M.A., F.R.S.
Third corrected edition. 2 vols. 8vo., pp. Ixxi. and 384; iv. and 418, cloth. 21s.

Contents. — Vol. I.— Preface — ^reatise on tlie Dramatic System of the Hindus— Dramas trans-
lated from the Origmal Sanskrit — The Mrichohakati, or the Toy Cart— Vikrama and
TJrvasi, or the Hero and the Nymph— Ilttara EfLma Charitra, or continuation of
the History ofEflma. Vol. II.— Dramas translated from the Original Sanskrit —
Maldti and Mldhava, or the Stolen Marriage— MudrS Rakehasa, or the Signet of
the Minister— BatnAvaH, or the Necklace- Appendix, containing short accounts of
different Dramas.

Wilson. — A, DiCTiONAET in Sanskrit and Enblish. Translated,
amended, and enlarged from an original compilation prepared by learned Natives
for the College of Port William by H. H. "Wilson. The Third Edition edited
by Jagunmohana Tarkalankara and Khettramohana Mookerjee. Published by
Gyanendraohandra Eayaohoudhuri and Brothers. 4to. pp. 1008. Calcutta
1874. £3 3s. ,

Wilson (H. H). — See also Megha Duta, Eig-Veda, and Yishnu-
Yajurveda. — The "White TAjtEVEDA in the Madhtandina Eecen-

siON. "With the Commentary of Mahidhara. Complete in 36 parts. Large
square 8to. pp. 571. £i 10s.

SEEBIAN.

MorfiU. — SmpiiFiED Serbian Geammae. By W. E. Moepjll, M.A.
Crown 8vo. pp. viii. and 72, cloth. 1887. 4s. 6rf. "'

SHAN".

Gushing. — Geammae of the Shan Language. By the Eev. J. N.
CusHiNG. Large Svo. pp. xii. and 60, boards. Eangoon, 1871. 9s.

CusMng.— Elementary Handbook of the Shan Language. By the
Eev. J". N. CuSHuiG, M A. Small 4to. boards, pp. x. and 122. 1880. 12s. 6d.

Gushing.— A Shan and English Dictionary. By J. N. CusHiNff, M.A.
Demy Svo. cloth, pp. xyi. and 600. 1881. £1 Is. 6d.

SINDHI.

Trumpp. — Geammar of the Sindhi Language. Compared with the
Sanskrit, Prakrit, and the Cognate Indian Vernaculars. By Dr. Ernest
Trumpp. Printed by order of Her Majesty's Government for India. Demy
Svo. sewed, pp. xvi, and 590. 15s.

Digitized by Microsoft®

106 Linguistic Publications of Triilner 8f Co.,

SINHALESE.

Aratchy. — Athetha "Wakta DBEPAjrrA, or a Collection of Sinhalese
Proverbs, Maxims, Fables, etc. Translated into English. By A. M. S.
Aeatohy. 8to. pp. iv. and 84, sewed. Colombo, 1881. 2s. 6d.

D'Alwis. — A Desceiptite Cataiogtie of Sanskrit, Pali, and Sinhalese
Literary Works of Ceylon. By James D'Alwis, M.R.A.S. Vol. I. (all pub-
lished) pp. xxxii. and 244, sewed. 1877. 8». 6rf.

Childers. — Notes on the Sinbalesb Language. No. 1. On the
Formation of the Plural of Neuter Nouns. By the late Prof. E. C. Childees.
Demy 8vo. sd., pp. 16. 1873. Is.

Mahawansa (The) — The Mahawah-sa. From the Thirty-Seventh

Chapter. Revised and edited, under orders of the Ceylon Government, by
H. Sumangala, and Don Andris de Silva Batuwantudawa. Vol. I. Pali Text
in Sinhalese Character, pp. xxxii. and 436. — Vol. II. Sinhalese Translation,
pp. lii. and 378, half-bound. Colombo, 1877. £2 2s.
Steele. — Ax Easteen Love-Stoet. Kusa Jatakaya, a Buddhistic
Legend. Bendered, for the first time, into English Verse (with notes) from the
Sinhalese Poem of Alagiyavanna Mohottala, by Thomas Steele, Ceylon
Civil Service. Crown Bvo. cloth, pp. xii. and 260. London, 1871. 6s.

STJAHILI.

Erapf. — DioTiosTAitT op the StrAHXLi Language. By the Eev. Dr. L.
Kkapp. "With Introduction, containing an ontUne of a Suahili Grammar.
The Preface contains a most interesting account of Dr. Krapf's philological
researches respecting the large family of African Languages extending from the
Equator to the Cape of Good Hope, from the year 1843, up to the present time.
Eoyal 8vo. pp. xl.-434, cloth. 1882. 30«.

SWEDISH.

Otte. — SiMPLTPiED Geammae of the Swedish Language. By E. C.
Otie. Crown 8vo. pp. xii.— 70, cloth. 1884. 2s. 6d.

SYRIAC. J

Gottheil. — A Teeatise on Steiac Geammae. By M1e(i) Elia oe Sob^I.
Edited and Translated from the Manuscripts in the Berlin Eoyal Library by
E. J. H. Gottheil. Eoyal 8vo. pp. 174, cloth. 1887. 12s. M.

Kalilah and Dimnah (The Book of). Translated from Arabic into
Syriac. Edited by "W. Wkight, LL.D., Professor of Arabic in the University
of Cambridge. 8vo. pp. lxxxii.-408, cloth. 1884. 21s.

Phillips. — The Docteine of Abdai the Apostle. Now first Edited
in a Complete Form in the Oririnal Syriac, with an English Translation and
Notes. By Geokqe Phillips, D.D., President of Queen's College, Cambridge.
8vo. pp. 122, cloth. 7s. 6d.

Stoddard. — Gsammae op the Modebn Steiac Language, as spoken in
Oroomiah, Persia, and in Koordistan. By Eev. D. T. Stoddaej), Missionary of
the Americaa Board in Persia. Demy 8vo. bds., pp. 190. 10s. 6d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

57 and 59, Ludgate Hill, London, E.G. 107

TAMIL.

Catalogm of Tamil Sooks said by Messrs. Triibner ^ Co. post free for penny stamp.

BescM. — CiATis Httmaktoiium LiTTBRAEtm Sublimioeis Tamttlici Idio-
MATis. Auotore K. P. Constantio Jobepho Beschio, Soc. Jesu, in Madurensi
Eegno Miseionario. Edited by the Rev. K. Ihiepeld, and printed for A.
Burnell, Esq., Tranquebar. 8vo. sewed, pp. 171. 10s. 6^.

Lazarus. — A Tamil Gbammab, Designed for use in Colleges and Schools.
By J. Lazabtjs. 12mo. cloth, pp. viii. and 230. London, 1879. 6«. &d.

TELTJGTJ.

Catalogm of Telugu Boojcs sold by Messrs. Triibner ^ Co. post free for penny stamp.
Arden. — A Peoseessite Geammae op the Telttgt Language, with

Copious Examples and Exercises. In Three Parts. Part I. Introduction. —
On the Alphabet and Orthography. — Outline Grammar, and Model Sentences.
Part II. A Complete Grammar of the Colloquial Dialect. Part 111. On the
Grammatical Dialect used in Books. By A. H. Arden, M.A.., Missionary of
the C. M. S. Masulipatam. 8vo. sewed, pp. xiv. and 380. 18«.

Arden. — ^A Compajstion Telugu Reader to Arden's Progressive Telugu
Grammar. 8vo. cloth, pp. 130. Madras, 1879. 7s. 6d.

Carr.— e-ou^er*? J^-iroLer. A Cohection oe Teltott Peoteebs,
Translated, Illustrated, and Explained ; together with some Sanscrit Proverbs
printed in the DeTanSgari and Telugu Characters. By Captain M. W. Cakk,
Madras Staff Corps. One Vol. and Supplement, roy. 8vo. pp. 488 & 148. 31*. 6d.

TIBETAN.

Csoma de Koros. — A Dictionaey Tibetan and English (only). By
A. CsoMA DE KoKos. 4to. cloth, pp. xxii. and 352. Calcutta, 1834. £2 2«.

Csoma de Koros. — A Geammae of the Tibetan Language. By A.
CsoMA DE KoKbs. 4to. sewed, pp. xii. and 204, and 40. 1834. 25s.

Jaschke. — A TiBEiAU'-EirGi.iSH Diciionaet . With special reference to
the prevailing dialects ; to which is added an English-Tibetan Vocabulary. By
H. A. Jasohke, late Moravian Missionary at Kijelang, British Lahoul. Com-
piled and published under the orders of the Secretary of State for India in
Council. Eoyal 8vo. pp. xxii.-672, cloth. 30s.

Jaschke. — Tibetait Geammae. By H. A. Jaschke. Crown 8vo. pp.

viii. and 104, cloth. 1883. 6s.

Lewin. — A Manual of Tibetan, being a Guide to the Colloquial Speech
of Tibet, in a Series of Progressive Exercises, prepared with the assistance of
Yapa Ugyen Gyatsho, by Major Thomas Hekbekt Lewin. Oblong 4to. cloth,
pp. xi. and 176. 1879. £1 Is.

ScMefner. — Tibetan Tales. See " Triibner's Oriental Series," page 5.

TUEKI. ~
Shaw. — A Sketch oe the Tueki Language. As Spoken in Eastern
Turkistan (K^shghar and Yarkand). By Egbert Baeklay Shaw, F.Il.G.S.,
Political Agent. In Two Parts. With Lists of Names of Birds and Plants
by J. Scully, Surgeon, H.M. Bengal Army. 8vo. sewed, Part I., pp. 130.
1875. 7s. 6d.

Digitized by Microsoft®

108 Linguistic Publications of Truhner 8f Co.

TURKISH.

Arnold. — A Simpie Transliterai Geammae of the Turkish Language.
Compiled from various sources. With Dialogues and Vocabulary. By Sir
Edwin Arnold, M.A., K.C.I.E., etc. Pott 8vo. cloth, pp. 80. 1877. 2». 6d.

Gibb. — Ottoman Poems. Translated into English Verse in their
Original Forms, with Introduction, Biographical Notices, and Notes. Fcap. 4to.
pp. Ivi. and 272. With a plate and i portraits. Cloth. By E. J. W. Gibb.
1882. £1 1».

Gibb. — The SToar of jEwan, a Romance, by AU Aziz Efendi, the
Cretan. Translated from the Turkish, by E. J. W. Gibb. 8to. pp. xii. and
238, cloth. 1884. Is.

Hopkins. — Elementaet Geammae of the Ttjekish Language. With
a few Easy Exercises. By F. L. Hopkins, M.A., Fellow and Tutor of Trinity
Hall, Cambridge. Cr. 8vo. cloth, pp. 48. 1877. Zs.&d.

Eedhonse. — On the History, System, and Varieties of Turkish Poetry,
Illustrated by Selections in the Original, and in English Paraphrase. With a
notice of the Islamic Doctrine of the Immortality of Woman's Soul. By J. W.
Eedhouse. Demy 8to. pp. 64, sewed. 1879. Is. &d. ; cloth, 2s. &d.

Bedhouse. — The Ttjekish Campaignee's Vade-Mectjm of Ottoman

CoLLoauiAL Language ; containing a concise Ottoman Grammar ; a carefully
selected Vocabulary, alphabetically arranged, in two parts, English and Turkish,
and Turkish and English; also a few Familiar Dialogues; the whole in English
characters. By J. W. Redhouse, F.R.A.S. Third Edition. Oblong 32mo.
pp. yiii.-372, limp cloth. 1882. 6s.

Redhouse. — Oitoman-Tuekish Geammae. See page 50.

Kedhouse. — Tfekish and English Lexicon, showing in English the
Significations of the Turkish Terms. By J. W. Eedhouse, M.E.A.S., etc.
Parts I. to III. Imperial 8vo. pp. 960, paper covers. 1885. 27s.

TJMBRIAJSr.

Newman. — The Text of the loTnrrNE Inscriptions, with interlinear
Latin Translation and Notes. By Francis W. Newman, late Professor of
Latin at University College, London. 8vo. pp.xvi. aud54, sewed. 1868. 2s.

TJRIYA.
Browne. — An TJEiri Peimee in Eoman Chabactee. By J. F. Beownb,

B.C.S. Crown 8vo. pp. 32, cloth. 1882. 2s. 6(?.

Maltby. — A Peactical Handbook of the Ueita oe Odiya Language.
By Thomas J. Maltbt, Madras C.S. 8yo. pp. xiii. and 201. 1874. 10s. 6d.

STEPHEN AUSTIN AND SONS, PBINTEKS, HEETFOBD.

Digitized by Microsoft®

Digitized by Microsoft®

Digitized by Microsoft®

Digitized by Microsoft®